This is a modern-English version of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition, "Destructors" to "Diameter": Volume 8, Slice 3, originally written by Various.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
Transcriber's note: |
A few typographical errors have been corrected. They
appear in the text like this, and the
explanation will appear when the mouse pointer is moved over the marked
passage. Sections in Greek will yield a transliteration
when the pointer is moved over them, and words using diacritic characters in the
Latin Extended Additional block, which may not display in some fonts or browsers, will
display an unaccented version. Links to other EB articles: Links to articles residing in other EB volumes will be made available when the respective volumes are introduced online. |
THE ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA
A DICTIONARY OF ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE AND GENERAL INFORMATION
ELEVENTH EDITION
VOLUME VIII slice III
Destructor to Diameter
DESTRUCTOR (continued from volume 8 slice 2 page 108.)
DESTRUCTOR (continued from volume 8 slice 2 page 108.)
... in main flues, &c. (g) The chimney draught must be assisted with forced draught from fans or steam jet to a pressure of 1½ in. to 2 in. under grates by water-gauge. (h) Where a destructor is required to work without risk of nuisance to the neighbouring inhabitants, its efficiency as a refuse destructor plant must be primarily kept in view in designing the works, steam-raising being regarded as a secondary consideration. Boilers should not be placed immediately over a furnace so as to present a large cooling surface, whereby the temperature of the gases is reduced before the organic matter has been thoroughly burned. (i) Where steam-power and a high fuel efficiency are desired a large percentage of CO2 should be sought in the furnaces with as little excess of air as possible, and the flue gases should be utilized in heating the air-supply to the grates, and the feed-water to the boilers. (j) Ample boiler capacity and hot-water storage feed-tanks should be included in the design where steam-power is required.
... in main flues, etc. (g) The chimney draft must be enhanced with forced draft from fans or steam jets to a pressure of 1½ in. to 2 in. under grates measured by a water gauge. (h) When a destructor needs to operate without causing problems for nearby residents, its effectiveness as a refuse destruction plant must be a primary focus in the design of the works, while steam production should be seen as a secondary goal. Boilers shouldn't be installed directly above a furnace to avoid creating a large cooling surface, which would lower the temperature of the gases before the organic material is fully burned. (i) When steam power and high fuel efficiency are desired, a high percentage of CO2 should be aimed for in the furnaces with minimal excess air, and the flue gases should be used to heat the air supply to the grates and the feed water to the boilers. (j) Adequate boiler capacity and hot water storage feed tanks should be part of the design when steam power is needed.
As to the initial cost of the erection of refuse destructors, few trustworthy data can be given. The outlay necessarily depends, Cost. amongst other things, upon the difficulty of preparing the site, upon the nature of the foundations required, the height of the chimney-shaft, the length of the inclined or approach roadway, and the varying prices of labour and materials in different localities. As an example may be mentioned the case of Bristol, where, in 1892, the total cost of constructing a 16-cell Fryer destructor was £11,418, of which £2909 was expended on foundations, and £1689 on the chimney-shaft; the cost of the destructor proper, buildings and approach road was therefore £6820, or about £426 per cell. The cost per ton of burning refuse in destructors depends mainly upon—(a) The price of labour in the locality, and the number of "shifts" or changes of workmen per day; (b) the type of furnace adopted; (c) the nature of the material to be consumed; (d) the interest on and repayment of capital outlay. The cost of burning ton for ton consumed, in high-temperature furnaces, including labour and repairs, is not greater than in slow-combustion destructors. The average cost of burning refuse at twenty-four different towns throughout England, exclusive of interest on the cost of the works, is 1s. 1½d. per ton burned; the minimum cost is 6d. per ton at Bradford, and the maximum cost 2s. 10d. per ton at Battersea. At Shoreditch the cost per ton for the year ending on the 25th of March 1899, including labour, supervision, stores, repairs, &c. (but exclusive of interest on cost of works), was 2s. 6.9d. The quantity of refuse burned per cell per day of 24 hours varies from about 4 tons up to 20 tons. The ordinary low-temperature destructor, with 25 sq. ft. grate area, burns about 20 lb. of refuse per square foot of grate area per hour, or between 5 and 6 tons per cell per 24 hours. The Meldrum destructor furnaces at Rochdale burn as much as 66 lb. per square foot of grate area per hour, and the Beaman and Deas destructor at Llandudno 71.7 lb. per square foot per hour. The amount, however, always depends materially on the care observed in stoking, the nature of the material, the frequency of removal of clinker, and on the question whether the whole of the refuse passed into the furnace is thoroughly cremated.
Regarding the initial cost of building waste disposal units, there isn’t much reliable information available. The expenses depend on several factors, including the difficulty of preparing the site, the type of foundations needed, the height of the chimney, the length of the ramp or access road, and the varying costs of labor and materials in different areas. For example, in Bristol, in 1892, the total cost of constructing a 16-cell Fryer incinerator was £11,418, with £2,909 spent on foundations and £1,689 on the chimney; thus, the cost of the actual incinerator, buildings, and access road was £6,820, or about £426 per cell. The cost per ton of burning waste in incinerators primarily depends on—(a) the local labor price and the number of work shifts per day; (b) the type of furnace used; (c) the nature of the material being burned; (d) the interest on and repayment of the initial investment. The cost of burning waste ton for ton in high-temperature furnaces, including labor and repairs, is not higher than in slow-combustion incinerators. The average cost of burning waste across twenty-four different towns in England, excluding interest on the project costs, is 1s. 1½d. per ton burned; the minimum cost is 6d. per ton in Bradford, while the maximum is 2s. 10d. per ton in Battersea. In Shoreditch, the cost per ton for the year ending March 25, 1899, including labor, supervision, supplies, repairs, etc. (but excluding interest on project costs), was 2s. 6.9d. The amount of waste burned per cell in a 24-hour day varies from about 4 tons to 20 tons. A typical low-temperature incinerator with a 25 sq. ft. grate area burns about 20 lb. of waste per square foot of grate area per hour, translating to between 5 and 6 tons per cell in a 24-hour period. Meanwhile, the Meldrum incinerator at Rochdale can burn as much as 66 lb. per square foot of grate area per hour, and the Beaman and Deas incinerator at Llandudno can burn 71.7 lb. per square foot per hour. However, the amount of waste burned also greatly depends on how carefully it’s stoked, the type of material, how often the clinker is removed, and whether all the waste fed into the furnace is fully incinerated.
The amount of residue in the shape of clinker and fine ash varies from 22 to 37% of the bulk dealt with. From 25 to 30% is a very Residues: usual amount. At Shoreditch, where the refuse consists of about 8% of straw, paper, shavings, &c., the residue contains about 29% clinker, 2.7% fine ash, .5% flue dust, and .6% old tins, making a total residue of 32.8%. As the residuum amounts to from one-fourth to one-third of the total bulk of the refuse dealt with, it is a question of the utmost importance that some profitable, or at least inexpensive, means should be devised for its regular disposal. Among other purposes, it has been used for bottoming for macadamized roads, for the manufacture of concrete, for making paving slabs, for forming suburban footpaths or cinder footwalks, and for the manufacture of mortar. The last is a very general, and in many places profitable, mode of disposal. An entirely new outlet has also arisen for the disposal of good well-vitrified destructor clinker in connexion with the construction of bacteria beds for sewage disposal, and in many districts its value has, by this means, become greatly enhanced.
The amount of leftover material in the form of clinker and fine ash ranges from 22% to 37% of the total volume processed. An amount between 25% and 30% is quite common. At Shoreditch, where the waste includes about 8% straw, paper, shavings, etc., the leftover material contains around 29% clinker, 2.7% fine ash, 0.5% flue dust, and 0.6% old tins, totaling a residue of 32.8%. Since the residue makes up about one-fourth to one-third of the total waste processed, it's extremely important to develop some profitable, or at least affordable, methods for its regular disposal. It has been used for various purposes, including as a base for macadamized roads, in concrete production, for creating paving slabs, for building suburban footpaths or cinder walkways, and for making mortar. The latter is a very common and often profitable disposal method. Additionally, a completely new outlet has emerged for disposing of good well-vitrified destructor clinker in connection with constructing bacteria beds for sewage treatment, and in many areas, its value has significantly increased through this means.
Through defects in the design and management of many of the early destructors complaints of nuisance frequently arose, and these have, to some extent, brought destructor installations into disrepute. Although some of the older furnaces were decided offenders in this respect, that is by no means the case with the modern improved type of high-temperature furnace; and often, were it not for the great prominence in the landscape of a tall chimney-shaft, the existence of a refuse destructor in a neighbourhood would not be generally known to the inhabitants. A modern furnace, properly designed and worked, will give rise to no nuisance, and may be safely erected in the midst of a populous neighbourhood. To ensure the perfect cremation of the refuse and of the gases given off, forced draught is essential. Forced draught. This is supplied either as air draught delivered from a rapidly revolving fan, or as steam blast, as in the Horsfall steam jet or the Meldrum blower. With a forced blast less air is required to obtain complete combustion than by chimney draught. The forced draught grate requires little more than the quantity theoretically necessary, while with chimney draught more than double the theoretical amount of air must be supplied. With forced draught, too, a much higher temperature is attained, and if it is properly worked, little or no cold air will enter the furnaces during stoking operations. As far as possible a balance of pressure in the cells during clinkering should be maintained just sufficient to prevent an inrush of cold air through the flues. The forced draught pressure should not exceed 2 in. water-gauge. The efficiency of the combustion in the furnace is conveniently measured by the "Econometer," which registers continuously and automatically the proportion of CO2 passing away in the waste gases; the higher the percentage of CO2 the more efficient the furnace, provided there is no formation of CO, the presence of which would indicate incomplete combustion. The theoretical maximum of CO2 for refuse burning is about 20%; and, by maintaining an even clean fire, by admitting secondary air over the fire, and by regulating the dampers or the air-pressure in the ash-pit, an amount approximating to this percentage may be attained in a well-designed furnace if properly worked. If the proportion of free oxygen (i.e. excess of air) is large, more air is passed through the furnace than is required for complete combustion, and the heating of this excess is clearly a waste of heat. The position of the econometer in testing should be as near the furnace as possible, as there may be considerable air leakage through the brickwork of the flues.
Due to flaws in the design and management of many early waste incinerators, there were often complaints about nuisance, which has somewhat damaged the reputation of these installations. While some older furnaces were significant offenders in this regard, that isn’t true for the modern, improved high-temperature furnaces. Often, if it weren't for the tall chimney stack, residents wouldn’t even be aware that a waste incinerator was in their neighborhood. A modern furnace, when properly designed and operated, won’t cause any nuisance and can be safely built in a densely populated area. To ensure that waste and the gases produced are completely incinerated, forced air is essential. Forced draft. This is provided either by air drawn in from a rapidly spinning fan or by a steam blast, like in the Horsfall steam jet or the Meldrum blower. With forced air, less air is needed to achieve complete combustion compared to using a chimney draft. The forced air system requires just about the theoretical amount of air, while a chimney system needs more than double that. With forced air, we can reach much higher temperatures, and if managed correctly, very little cold air will enter the furnaces during fueling. It’s important to maintain a balanced pressure in the cells during clinkering, just enough to stop cold air from rushing in through the flues. The forced air pressure shouldn’t go over 2 inches on the water gauge. The efficiency of combustion in the furnace can be conveniently measured by the "Econometer," which continuously and automatically tracks the amount of CO2 in the waste gases; a higher percentage of CO2 means a more efficient furnace, assuming there’s no CO present, since that would indicate incomplete combustion. The theoretical maximum CO2 concentration for burning waste is about 20%. By keeping a consistently clean fire, introducing secondary air over the fire, and adjusting the dampers or air pressure in the ash pit, this percentage can be approached in a well-designed furnace when it’s operated properly. If there’s a significant amount of free oxygen (excess air), it means more air is going through the furnace than needed for complete combustion, and heating that excess is clearly a waste of energy. The econometer should be placed as close to the furnace as possible during testing, as there can be considerable air leakage through the brickwork of the flues.
The air supply to modern furnaces is usually delivered hot, the inlet air being first passed through an air-heater the temperature of which is maintained by the waste gases in the main flue.
The air going into modern furnaces is typically heated first; the incoming air is processed through an air heater, which is kept at the right temperature by the waste gases in the main flue.
The modern high-temperature destructor, to render the refuse and gases perfectly innocuous and harmless, is worked at a temperature Calorific value.varying from 1250° to 2000° F., and the maintenance of such temperatures has very naturally suggested the possibility of utilizing this heat-energy for the production of steam-power. Experience shows that a considerable amount of energy may be derived from steam-raising destructor stations, amply justifying a reasonable increase of expenditure on plant and labour. The actual calorific value of the refuse material necessarily varies, but, as a general average, with suitably designed and properly managed plant, an evaporation of 1 lb. of water per pound of refuse burned is a result which may be readily attained, and affords a basis of calculation which engineers may safely adopt in practice. Many destructor steam-raising plants, however, give considerably higher results, evaporations approaching 2 lb. of water per pound of refuse being often met with under favourable conditions.
The modern high-temperature incinerator, designed to make waste and gases completely safe and harmless, operates at a temperature ranging from 1250° to 2000° F. Maintaining these temperatures has naturally led to the idea of using this heat energy to generate steam power. Experience shows that a significant amount of energy can be produced from steam-generating incineration stations, which justifies a reasonable increase in spending on equipment and labor. The actual heat value of the waste material can vary, but on average, with well-designed and properly managed facilities, achieving an evaporation of 1 lb. of water per pound of waste burned is a realistic goal for engineers. However, many incinerator steam-generating plants produce even better results, with evaporations approaching 2 lb. of water per pound of waste frequently occurring under optimal conditions.
From actual experience it may be accepted, therefore, that the calorific value of unscreened house refuse varies from 1 to 2 lb. of water evaporated per pound of refuse burned, the exact proportion depending upon the quality and condition of the material dealt with. Taking the evaporative power of coal at 10 lb. of water per pound of coal, this gives for domestic house refuse a value of from 1⁄10 to 1⁄5 that of coal; or, with coal at 20s. per ton, refuse has a commercial value of from 2s. to 4s. per ton. In London the quantity of house refuse amounts to about 1¼ million tons per annum, which is equivalent to from 4 cwt. to 5 cwt. per head per annum. If it be burned in furnaces giving an evaporation of 1 lb. of water per pound of refuse, it would yield a total power annually of about 138 million brake horse-power hours, and equivalent cost of coal at 20s. per ton for this amount of power even when calculated upon the very low estimate of 2 lb.[1] of coal per brake horse-power hour, works out at over £123,000. On the same basis, the refuse of a medium-sized town, with, say, a population of 70,000 yielding refuse at the rate of 5 cwt. per head per annum, would afford 112 indicated horse-power per ton burned, and the total indicated horse-power hours per annum would be
Based on actual experience, it's reasonable to say that the calorific value of unscreened household waste ranges from 1 to 2 pounds of water evaporated for each pound of waste burned, with the exact ratio depending on the quality and condition of the material. If we take the evaporative power of coal to be 10 pounds of water per pound of coal, this means that domestic waste has a value between 1⁄10 and 1⁄5 of coal; thus, at a price of 20s. per ton for coal, refuse has a commercial value of between 2s. and 4s. per ton. In London, the amount of household waste is around 1¼ million tons each year, which comes out to about 4 to 5 hundredweight per person per year. If this waste is burned in furnaces that provide an evaporation rate of 1 pound of water per pound of waste, it would generate about 138 million brake horsepower hours annually. The equivalent cost of coal at 20s. per ton for this power, even with the very conservative estimate of 2 lb.[1] of coal for each brake horsepower hour, exceeds £123,000. Similarly, the waste from a medium-sized town with a population of 70,000, producing waste at 5 hundredweight per person per year, would provide 112 indicated horsepower per ton burned, resulting in a total of indicated horsepower hours annually.
70,000 × 5 cwt. | × 112 = 1,960,000 I.H.P. hours annually. |
20 |
If this were applied to the production of electric energy, the electrical horse-power hours would be (with a dynamo efficiency of 90%)
If this were used for generating electric energy, the electrical horsepower hours would be (with a dynamo efficiency of 90%)
1,960,000 × 90 | = 1,764,000 E.H.P. hours per annum; |
100 |
and the watt-hours per annum at the central station would be
and the watt-hours per year at the central station would be
1,764,000 × 746 = 1,315,944,000.
1,764,000 × 746 = 1,315,944,000.
Allowing for a loss of 10% in distribution, this would give 1,184,349,600 watt-hours available in lamps, or with 8-candle-power lamps taking 30 watts of current per lamp, we should have
Allowing for a 10% loss in distribution, this would provide 1,184,349,600 watt-hours available in lamps. With 8-candle-power lamps using 30 watts each, we should have
1,184,349,600 watt-hours | = 39,478,320 8-c.p. lamp-hours per annum; |
30 watts |
that is, | 39,478,320 | 563 8-c.p. lamp hours per annum per head of population. |
70,000 population |
Taking the loss due to the storage which would be necessary at 20% on three-quarters of the total or 15% upon the whole, there would be 478 8-c.p. lamp-hours per annum per head of the population: i.e. if the power developed from the refuse were fully utilized, it would supply electric light at the rate of one 8-c.p. lamp per head of the population for about 11⁄3 hours for every night of the year.
Taking into account the storage loss of 20% on three-quarters of the total or 15% on the whole, there would be 478 8-c.p. lamp-hours per year for each person in the population. This means that if the energy generated from the waste was fully used, it could provide electric light equivalent to one 8-c.p. lamp for each person for about 11⁄3 hours every night of the year.
In actual practice, when the electric energy is for the purposes of lighting only, difficulty has been experienced in fully utilizing the Difficulties.thermal energy from a destructor plant owing to the want of adequate means of storage either of the thermal or of the electric energy. A destructor station usually yields a fairly definite amount of thermal energy uniformly throughout the 24 hours, while the consumption of electric-lighting current is extremely [Page 110] irregular, the maximum demand being about four times the mean demand. The period during which the demand exceeds the mean is comparatively short, and does not exceed about 6 hours out of the 24, while for a portion of the time the demand may not exceed 1⁄ 20th of the maximum. This difficulty, at first regarded as somewhat grave, is substantially minimized by the provision of ample boiler capacity, or by the introduction of feed thermal storage vessels in which hot feed-water may be stored during the hours of light load (say 18 out of the 24), so that at the time of maximum load the boiler may be filled directly from these vessels, which work at the same pressure and temperature as the boiler. Further, the difficulty above mentioned will disappear entirely at stations where there is a fair day load which practically ceases at about the hour when the illuminating load comes on, thus equalizing the demand upon both destructor and electric plant throughout the 24 hours. This arises in cases where current is consumed during the day for motors, fans, lifts, electric tramways, and other like purposes, and, as the employment of electric energy for these services is rapidly becoming general, no difficulty need be anticipated in the successful working of combined destructor and electric plants where these conditions prevail. The more uniform the electrical demand becomes, the more fully may the power from a destructor station be utilized.
In practice, when electric energy is used solely for lighting, there have been challenges in fully using the thermal energy from a waste-to-energy plant due to a lack of adequate storage for either the thermal or electric energy. A waste-to-energy station typically produces a consistent amount of thermal energy over 24 hours, while the electric lighting demand is very irregular, with peak demand being about four times the average demand. The periods when demand exceeds the average are relatively short, lasting about 6 hours in a 24-hour cycle, while at times, the demand may be less than 1/20th of the maximum. This issue, initially seen as significant, can be lessened by having enough boiler capacity or by implementing thermal storage tanks that can hold hot feed water during lighter load hours (about 18 out of 24 hours). At peak load times, the boiler can then be refilled directly from these tanks, which operate at the same pressure and temperature as the boiler. Additionally, this problem will entirely disappear at stations with a consistent daytime load that drops off just before the lighting demand increases, balancing the load on both the waste-to-energy and electric plants over the full 24 hours. This situation occurs in instances where electricity is used during the day for motors, fans, elevators, electric tramways, and similar uses. As the use of electric energy for these purposes becomes more widespread, there should be no concerns about the effective operation of combined waste-to-energy and electric plants under these circumstances. The more consistent the electrical demand is, the better the power output from a waste-to-energy station can be utilized.
In addition to combination with electric-lighting works, refuse destructors are now very commonly installed in conjunction with various other classes of power-using undertakings, including tramways, water-works, sewage-pumping, artificial slab-making and clinker-crushing works and others; and the increasingly large sums which are being yearly expended in combined undertakings of this character is perhaps the strongest evidence of the practical value of such combinations where these several classes of work must be carried on.
In addition to being combined with electric lighting systems, waste incinerators are now frequently installed alongside various other types of power-using operations, including tram systems, water supply, sewage pumping, artificial slab manufacturing, clinker crushing, and more. The growing amounts of money being spent each year on these combined projects is likely the clearest proof of the practical benefits of such integrations where these different types of work need to be done.
For further information on the subject, reference should be made to William H. Maxwell, Removal and Disposal of Town Refuse, with an exhaustive treatment of Refuse Destructor Plants (London, 1899), with a special Supplement embodying later results (London, 1905).
For more information on the topic, check out William H. Maxwell, Removal and Disposal of Town Refuse, with an exhaustive treatment of Refuse Destructor Plants (London, 1899), along with a special Supplement featuring later results (London, 1905).
See also the Proceedings of the Incorporated Association of Municipal and County Engineers, vols. xiii. p. 216, xxii. p. 211, xxiv. p. 214 and xxv. p. 138; also the Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers, vols. cxxii. p. 443, cxxiv. p. 469, cxxxi. p. 413, cxxxviii. p. 508, cxxix. p. 434, cxxx. pp. 213 and 347, cxxiii. pp. 369 and 498, cxxviii. p. 293 and cxxxv. p. 300.
See also the Proceedings of the Incorporated Association of Municipal and County Engineers, vols. xiii. p. 216, xxii. p. 211, xxiv. p. 214 and xxv. p. 138; also the Proceedings of the Institution of Civil Engineers, vols. cxxii. p. 443, cxxiv. p. 469, cxxxi. p. 413, cxxxviii. p. 508, cxxix. p. 434, cxxx. pp. 213 and 347, cxxiii. pp. 369 and 498, cxxviii. p. 293 and cxxxv. p. 300.
DE TABLEY, JOHN BYRNE LEICESTER WARREN, 3rd Baron (1835-1895), English poet, eldest son of George Fleming Leicester (afterwards Warren), 2nd Baron De Tabley, was born on the 26th of April 1835. He was educated at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, where he took his degree in 1856 with second classes in classics and in law and modern history. In the autumn of 1858 he went to Turkey as unpaid attaché to Lord Stratford de Redcliffe, and two years later was called to the bar. He became an officer in the Cheshire Yeomanry, and unsuccessfully contested Mid-Cheshire in 1868 as a Liberal. After his father's second marriage in 1871 he removed to London, where he became a close friend of Tennyson for several years. From 1877 till his succession to the title in 1887 he was lost to his friends, assuming the life of a recluse. It was not till 1892 that he returned to London life, and enjoyed a sort of renaissance of reputation and friendship. During the later years of his life Lord De Tabley made many new friends, besides reopening old associations, and he almost seemed to be gathering around him a small literary company when his health broke, and he died on the 22nd of November 1895 at Ryde, in his sixty-first year. He was buried at Little Peover in Cheshire. Although his reputation will live almost exclusively as that of a poet, De Tabley was a man of many studious tastes. He was at one time an authority on numismatics; he wrote two novels; published A Guide to the Study of Book Plates (1880); and the fruit of his careful researches in botany was printed posthumously in his elaborate Flora of Cheshire (1899). Poetry, however, was his first and last passion, and to that he devoted the best energies of his life. De Tabley's first impulse towards poetry came from his friend George Fortescue, with whom he shared a close companionship during his Oxford days, and whom he lost, as Tennyson lost Hallam, within a few years of their taking their degrees. Fortescue was killed by falling from the mast of Lord Drogheda's yacht in November 1859, and this gloomy event plunged De Tabley into deep depression. Between 1859 and 1862 De Tabley issued four little volumes of pseudonymous verse (by G. F. Preston), in the production of which he had been greatly stimulated by the sympathy of Fortescue. Once more he assumed a pseudonym—his Praeterita (1863) bearing the name of William Lancaster. In the next year he published Eclogues and Monodramas, followed in 1865 by Studies in Verse. These volumes all displayed technical grace and much natural beauty; but it was not till the publication of Philoctetes in 1866 that De Tabley met with any wide recognition. Philoctetes bore the initials "M.A.," which, to the author's dismay, were interpreted as meaning Matthew Arnold. He at once disclosed his identity, and received the congratulations of his friends, among whom were Tennyson, Browning and Gladstone. In 1867 he published Orestes, in 1870 Rehearsals and in 1873 Searching the Net. These last two bore his own name, John Leicester Warren. He was somewhat disappointed by their lukewarm reception, and when in 1876 The Soldier of Fortune, a drama on which he had bestowed much careful labour, proved a complete failure, he retired altogether from the literary arena. It was not until 1893 that he was persuaded to return, and the immediate success in that year of his Poems, Dramatic and Lyrical, encouraged him to publish a second series in 1895, the year of his death. The genuine interest with which these volumes were welcomed did much to lighten the last years of a somewhat sombre and solitary life. His posthumous poems were collected in 1902. The characteristics of De Tabley's poetry are pre-eminently magnificence of style, derived from close study of Milton, sonority, dignity, weight and colour. His passion for detail was both a strength and a weakness: it lent a loving fidelity to his description of natural objects, but it sometimes involved him in a loss of simple effect from over-elaboration of treatment. He was always a student of the classic poets, and drew much of his inspiration directly from them. He was a true and a whole-hearted artist, who, as a brother poet well said, "still climbed the clear cold altitudes of song." His ambition was always for the heights, a region naturally ice-bound at periods, but always a country of clear atmosphere and bright, vivid outlines.
DE TABLEY, JOHN BYRNE LEICESTER WARREN, 3rd Baron (1835-1895), was an English poet and the eldest son of George Fleming Leicester (later Warren), 2nd Baron De Tabley. He was born on April 26, 1835. He studied at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, where he graduated in 1856 with second-class honors in classics, law, and modern history. In the fall of 1858, he traveled to Turkey as an unpaid attaché to Lord Stratford de Redcliffe, and two years later, he was called to the bar. He became an officer in the Cheshire Yeomanry and ran unsuccessfully as a Liberal for Mid-Cheshire in 1868. After his father's second marriage in 1871, he moved to London, where he formed a close friendship with Tennyson for several years. From 1877 until he inherited the title in 1887, he distanced himself from his friends and lived as a recluse. It was not until 1892 that he returned to social life in London, enjoying a resurgence of reputation and friendships. During his later years, Lord De Tabley made many new friends while reconnecting with old ones, and he seemed to be gathering a small literary circle when his health declined, leading to his death on November 22, 1895, in Ryde, at the age of sixty-one. He was buried at Little Peover in Cheshire. Although he is mainly remembered as a poet, De Tabley had various scholarly interests. He was once an expert on coins, wrote two novels, published A Guide to the Study of Book Plates (1880), and had his detailed research in botany published posthumously in Flora of Cheshire (1899). Poetry, however, was his true passion, and he dedicated the best part of his life to it. His initial inspiration for poetry came from his friend George Fortescue, with whom he shared a close bond during their time at Oxford, and who he lost, much like Tennyson lost Hallam, shortly after they graduated. Fortescue died in November 1859 after falling from the mast of Lord Drogheda's yacht, which plunged De Tabley into deep grief. Between 1859 and 1862, De Tabley published four small volumes of verse under the pseudonym G. F. Preston, significantly encouraged by Fortescue's support. He later used another pseudonym—his Praeterita (1863) was published under the name William Lancaster. The following year, he released Eclogues and Monodramas, and in 1865, Studies in Verse. All these works displayed technical elegance and natural beauty; however, it wasn't until the release of Philoctetes in 1866 that De Tabley gained broader recognition. Philoctetes was published under the initials "M.A.," which were mistakenly interpreted as standing for Matthew Arnold. He quickly revealed his identity and received congratulations from friends, including Tennyson, Browning, and Gladstone. In 1867, he published Orestes, followed by Rehearsals in 1870 and Searching the Net in 1873, which were published under his own name, John Leicester Warren. He felt somewhat disappointed by their mediocre reception, and when The Soldier of Fortune, a play he had worked hard on, failed in 1876, he completely withdrew from the literary scene. It wasn't until 1893 that he was convinced to return, and the immediate success of his Poems, Dramatic and Lyrical that year encouraged him to publish a second series in 1895, the year he died. The genuine interest these volumes received helped ease the last years of his somewhat dark and isolated life. His posthumous poems were gathered in 1902. The hallmarks of De Tabley's poetry include a magnificent style influenced by a close study of Milton, as well as sonority, dignity, depth, and richness. His passion for detail was both a strength and a weakness: it gave a loving fidelity to his descriptions of natural elements but sometimes led to a loss of simplicity due to excessive elaboration. He was always a student of classic poets and drew much of his inspiration directly from them. He was a dedicated and passionate artist, who, as a fellow poet aptly noted, "still climbed the clear cold altitudes of song." His aspirations were always towards the heights, a realm that could be frozen at times, yet always offered a clear atmosphere and bright, vivid contours.
See an excellent sketch by E. Gosse in his Critical Kit-Kats (1896).
See an excellent sketch by E. Gosse in his Critical Kit-Kats (1896).
DETAILLE, JEAN BAPTISTE ÉDOUARD (1848- ), French painter, was born in Paris on the 5th of October 1848. After working as a pupil of Meissonier's, he first exhibited, in the Salon of 1867, a picture representing "A Corner of Meissonier's Studio." Military life was from the first a principal attraction to the young painter, and he gained his reputation by depicting the scenes of a soldier's life with every detail truthfully rendered. He exhibited "A Halt" (1868); "Soldiers at rest, during the Manœuvres at the Camp of Saint Maur" (1869); "Engagement between Cossacks and the Imperial Guard, 1814" (1870). The war of 1870-71 furnished him with a series of subjects which gained him repeated successes. Among his more important pictures may be named "The Conquerors" (1872); "The Retreat" (1873); "The Charge of the 9th Regiment of Cuirassiers in the Village of Morsbronn, 6th August 1870" (1874); "The Marching Regiment, Paris, December 1874" (1875); "A Reconnaissance" (1876); "Hail to the Wounded!" (1877); "Bonaparte in Egypt" (1878); the "Inauguration of the New Opera House"—a water-colour; the "Defence of Champigny by Faron's Division" (1879). He also worked with Alphonse de Neuville on the panorama of Rezonville. In 1884 he exhibited at the Salon the "Evening at Rezonville," a panoramic study, and "The Dream" (1888), now in the Luxemburg. Detaille recorded other events in the military history of his country: the "Sortie of the Garrison of Huningue" (now in the Luxemburg), the "Vincendon Brigade," and "Bizerte," reminiscences of the expedition to Tunis. After a visit to Russia, Detaille exhibited "The Cossacks of the Ataman" and "The Hereditary Grand Duke at the Head of the Hussars of the Guard." Other important works are: "Victims to Duty," "The Prince of Wales and the Duke of Connaught" and "Pasteur's Funeral." In his picture of "Châlons, 9th October 1896," exhibited in the Salon, 1898, Detaille painted the emperor and empress of Russia at a review, with M. Félix Faure. Detaille became a member of the French Institute in 1898.
DETAILLE, JEAN BAPTISTE ÉDOUARD (1848- ), French painter, was born in Paris on October 5, 1848. After training as a student of Meissonier, he first exhibited at the Salon in 1867 with a painting titled "A Corner of Meissonier's Studio." From the beginning, military life captivated the young painter, and he built his reputation by accurately portraying scenes from a soldier's life in great detail. He showcased works like "A Halt" (1868); "Soldiers at Rest, During the Maneuvers at the Camp of Saint Maur" (1869); and "Engagement Between Cossacks and the Imperial Guard, 1814" (1870). The war of 1870-71 provided him with a range of subjects that led to multiple successes. His more significant pieces include "The Conquerors" (1872); "The Retreat" (1873); "The Charge of the 9th Regiment of Cuirassiers in the Village of Morsbronn, August 6, 1870" (1874); "The Marching Regiment, Paris, December 1874" (1875); "A Reconnaissance" (1876); "Hail to the Wounded!" (1877); "Bonaparte in Egypt" (1878); "Inauguration of the New Opera House"—a watercolor; and "The Defence of Champigny by Faron's Division" (1879). He also collaborated with Alphonse de Neuville on the panorama of Rezonville. In 1884, he exhibited "Evening at Rezonville," a panoramic study, and "The Dream" (1888), which is now in the Luxembourg. Detaille documented various events in his country's military history: "Sortie of the Garrison of Huningue" (now in the Luxembourg), "Vincendon Brigade," and "Bizerte," which reflect the expedition to Tunis. After a trip to Russia, Detaille showcased "The Cossacks of the Ataman" and "The Hereditary Grand Duke at the Head of the Hussars of the Guard." Other significant works include "Victims to Duty," "The Prince of Wales and the Duke of Connaught," and "Pasteur's Funeral." In his painting "Châlons, October 9, 1896," displayed at the Salon in 1898, Detaille depicted the Emperor and Empress of Russia at a review alongside M. Félix Faure. Detaille became a member of the French Institute in 1898.
See Marius Vachon, Detaille (Paris, 1898); Frédéric Masson, Édouard Detaille and his work (Paris and London, 1891); J. Claretie, Peintres et sculpteurs contemporains (Paris, 1876); G. Goetschy, Les Jeunes peintres militaires (Paris, 1878).
See Marius Vachon, Detaille (Paris, 1898); Frédéric Masson, Édouard Detaille and his work (Paris and London, 1891); J. Claretie, Peintres et sculpteurs contemporains (Paris, 1876); G. Goetschy, Les Jeunes peintres militaires (Paris, 1878).
DETAINER (from detain, Lat. detinere), in law, the act of keeping a person against his will, or the wrongful keeping of a person's goods, or other real or personal property. A writ of detainer was a form for the beginning of a personal action against a person already lodged within the walls of a prison; it was superseded by the Judgment Act 1838.
DETAINER (from detain, Lat. detinere), in law, the act of holding a person against their will or wrongfully keeping someone's belongings or other property. A writ of detainer was a legal document used to start a personal lawsuit against someone already imprisoned; it was replaced by the Judgment Act of 1838.
DETERMINANT, in mathematics, a function which presents itself in the solution of a system of simple equations.
DETERMINANT, in mathematics, a function that appears in the solution of a system of simple equations.
1. Considering the equations
Thinking about the equations
ax | + | by | + | cz | = | d, |
a′x | + | b′y | + | c′z | = | d′, |
a″x | + | b″y | + | c″z | = | d″, |
and proceeding to solve them by the so-called method of cross multiplication, we multiply the equations by factors selected in such a manner that upon adding the results the whole coefficient of y becomes = 0, and the whole coefficient of z becomes = 0; the factors in question are b′c″ - b″c′, b″c - bc″, bc′ - b′c (values which, as at once seen, have the desired property); we thus obtain an equation which contains on the left-hand side only a multiple of x, and on the right-hand side a constant term; the coefficient of x has the value
and then solving them using the method of cross multiplication, we multiply the equations by factors chosen in such a way that when we add the results, the total coefficient of y becomes 0, and the total coefficient of z becomes 0; the factors we’re talking about are b′c″ - b″c′, b″c - bc″, and bc′ - b′c (values that clearly have the desired property); we thus get an equation that has only a multiple of x on the left side, and a constant term on the right side; the coefficient of x has the value
a(b′c″ - b″c′) + a′(b″c - bc″) + a″(bc′ - b′c),
a(b'c" - b"c') + a'(b"c - bc") + a"(bc' - b'c),
and this function, represented in the form
and this function, represented in the form
a, | b, | c | , | ||
a′, | b′, | c′ | |||
a″, | b″, | c″ |
is said to be a determinant; or, the number of elements being 3², it is called a determinant of the third order. It is to be noticed that the resulting equation is
is said to be a determinant; or, with the number of elements being 3², it is called a determinant of the third order. It's important to note that the resulting equation is
a, | b, | c | x = | d, | b, | c | ||||
a′, | b′, | c′ | d′, | b′, | c′ | |||||
a″, | b″, | c″ | d″, | b″, | c″ |
where the expression on the right-hand side is the like function with d, d′, d″ in place of a, a′, a″ respectively, and is of course also a determinant. Moreover, the functions b'c″ - b″c′, b″c - bc″, bc′ - b′c used in the process are themselves the determinants of the second order
where the expression on the right-hand side is the like function with d, d′, d″ instead of a, a′, a″ respectively, and is obviously also a determinant. Additionally, the functions b'c″ - b″c′, b″c - bc″, bc′ - b′c used in the process are themselves the determinants of the second order
b′, | c′ | , | b″, | c″ | , | b, | c | . | ||||||
b″, | c″ | b, | c | b′, | c′ |
We have herein the suggestion of the rule for the derivation of the determinants of the orders 1, 2, 3, 4, &c., each from the preceding one, viz. we have
We have here the suggestion of the rule for deriving the determinants of orders 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., each from the preceding one, namely we have
a | = a, |
a, | b | = a | b′ | - a′ | b | . | ||||||
a′, | b′ |
a, | b, | c | = a | b′, | c′ | + a′ | b″, | c″ | + a″ | b, | c | , | ||||||||
a′, | b′, | c′ | b″, | c″ | b, | c | b′, | c′ | ||||||||||||
a″, | b″, | c″ |
a, | b, | c, | d | = a | b′, | c′, | d′ | - a′ | b″, | c″, | d″ | + a″ | b″′, | c″′, | d″′ | - a′″ | b, | c, | d | , | ||||||||||
a′, | b′, | c′, | d′ | b″, | c″, | d″ | b′″, | c′″, | d′″ | b, | c, | d | b′, | c′, | d′ | |||||||||||||||
a″, | b″, | c″, | d″ | b′″, | c′″, | d′″ | b, | c, | d; | b′, | c′, | d′ | b″, | c″, | d″ | |||||||||||||||
a′″, | b′″, | c′″, | d′″ |
and so on, the terms being all + for a determinant of an odd order, but alternately + and - for a determinant of an even order.
and so on, the terms being all + for a determinant of an odd order, but alternately + and - for a determinant of an even order.
2. It is easy, by induction, to arrive at the general results:—
2. It's easy, through induction, to reach the general conclusions:—
A determinant of the order n is the sum of the 1.2.3...n products which can be formed with n elements out of n² elements arranged in the form of a square, no two of the n elements being in the same line or in the same column, and each such product having the coefficient ± unity.
A determinant of order n is the sum of the products formed by taking n elements from n² elements set up in a square, ensuring that no two of the n elements are in the same row or column, and each of these products has a coefficient of ± one.
The products in question may be obtained by permuting in every possible manner the columns (or the lines) of the determinant, and then taking for the factors the n elements in the dexter diagonal. And we thence derive the rule for the signs, viz. considering the primitive arrangement of the columns as positive, then an arrangement obtained therefrom by a single interchange (inversion, or derangement) of two columns is regarded as negative; and so in general an arrangement is positive or negative according as it is derived from the primitive arrangement by an even or an odd number of interchanges. [This implies the theorem that a given arrangement can be derived from the primitive arrangement only by an odd number, or else only by an even number of interchanges,—a theorem the verification of which may be easily obtained from the theorem (in fact a particular case of the general one), an arrangement can be derived from itself only by an even number of interchanges.] And this being so, each product has the sign belonging to the corresponding arrangement of the columns; in particular, a determinant contains with the sign + the product of the elements in its dexter diagonal. It is to be observed that the rule gives as many positive as negative arrangements, the number of each being = ½ 1.2...n.
The products we’re talking about can be obtained by rearranging the columns (or rows) of the determinant in every possible way and then taking the n elements from the main diagonal as the factors. This leads us to the rule for the signs: if we consider the original arrangement of the columns as positive, then any arrangement that results from swapping (inverting, or mixing up) two columns is considered negative; generally speaking, an arrangement is positive or negative depending on whether it comes from the original arrangement through an even or odd number of swaps. [This suggests the theorem that a particular arrangement can be derived from the original arrangement only by an odd number, or only by an even number of swaps—a theorem that can be easily confirmed by the fact that an arrangement can derive from itself only through an even number of swaps.] Given this, each product has the sign corresponding to the particular arrangement of the columns; specifically, a determinant includes the product of the elements in its main diagonal with a positive sign. It’s important to note that the rule provides an equal number of positive and negative arrangements, with each being equal to ½ 1.2...n.
The rule of signs may be expressed in a different form. Giving to the columns in the primitive arrangement the numbers 1, 2, 3 ... n, to obtain the sign belonging to any other arrangement we take, as often as a lower number succeeds a higher one, the sign -, and, compounding together all these minus signs, obtain the proper sign, + or - as the case may be.
The rule of signs can be stated in a different way. By labeling the columns in the original setup with the numbers 1, 2, 3 ... n, to find the sign for any other arrangement, we note each time a lower number follows a higher one, we use the sign -. By putting all these minus signs together, we determine the correct sign, either + or - depending on the situation.
Thus, for three columns, it appears by either rule that 123, 231, 312 are positive; 213, 321, 132 are negative; and the developed expression of the foregoing determinant of the third order is
Thus, for three columns, it seems by either rule that 123, 231, 312 are positive; 213, 321, 132 are negative; and the developed expression of the above determinant of the third order is
= ab′c″ - ab″c′ + a′b″c - a′bc″ + a″bc′ - a″b′c.
= ab′c″ - ab″c′ + a′b″c - a′bc″ + a″bc′ - a″b′c.
3. It further appears that a determinant is a linear function[1] of the elements of each column thereof, and also a linear function of the elements of each line thereof; moreover, that the determinant retains the same value, only its sign being altered, when any two columns are interchanged, or when any two lines are interchanged; more generally, when the columns are permuted in any manner, or when the lines are permuted in any manner, the determinant retains its original value, with the sign + or - according as the new arrangement (considered as derived from the primitive arrangement) is positive or negative according to the foregoing rule of signs. It at once follows that, if two columns are identical, or if two lines are identical, the value of the determinant is = 0. It may be added, that if the lines are converted into columns, and the columns into lines, in such a way as to leave the dexter diagonal unaltered, the value of the determinant is unaltered; the determinant is in this case said to be transposed.
3. It also seems that a determinant is a linear function of the elements in each column, as well as a linear function of the elements in each row. Additionally, the determinant keeps the same value, with only its sign changing, when any two columns or any two rows are swapped. More generally, when the columns are rearranged in any way, or the rows are rearranged in any way, the determinant maintains its original value, with the sign + or - depending on whether the new arrangement (considered as derived from the original arrangement) is positive or negative according to the earlier rule of signs. It follows directly that if two columns are the same, or if two rows are the same, the value of the determinant is 0. Furthermore, if the rows are transformed into columns and the columns into rows in such a way that the main diagonal remains unchanged, the value of the determinant also remains unchanged; in this case, the determinant is referred to as being transposed.
4. By what precedes it appears that there exists a function of the n² elements, linear as regards the terms of each column (or say, for shortness, linear as to each column), and such that only the sign is altered when any two columns are interchanged; these properties completely determine the function, except as to a common factor which may multiply all the terms. If, to get rid of this arbitrary common factor, we assume that the product of the elements in the dexter diagonal has the coefficient +1, we have a complete definition of the determinant, and it is interesting to show how from these properties, assumed for the definition of the determinant, it at once appears that the determinant is a function serving for the solution of a system of linear equations. Observe that the properties show at once that if any column is = 0 (that is, if the elements in the column are each = 0), then the determinant is = 0; and further, that if any two columns are identical, then the determinant is = 0.
4. From what we've seen, it looks like there's a function of the n² elements that is linear concerning the terms of each column (or, to be brief, linear with respect to each column), and the only change occurs when any two columns are swapped; these characteristics completely define the function, aside from a common factor that could multiply all the terms. To eliminate this arbitrary common factor, if we assume that the product of the elements in the right diagonal has a coefficient of +1, we have a complete definition of the determinant. It's interesting to demonstrate how these properties, which we assume for the definition of the determinant, immediately show that the determinant is a function that helps solve a system of linear equations. Note that these properties make it clear that if any column equals 0 (meaning the elements in that column are all 0), then the determinant equals 0; furthermore, if any two columns are identical, then the determinant equals 0.
5. Reverting to the system of linear equations written down at the beginning of this article, consider the determinant
5. Going back to the system of linear equations mentioned at the start of this article, take a look at the determinant
ax | + | by | + | cz | - | d, | b, | c | ; | ||
a′x | + | b′y | + | c′z | - | d′, | b′, | c′ | |||
a″x | + | b″y | + | c″z | - | d″, | b″, | c″ |
it appears that this is
looks like this is
= x | a, | b, | c | + y | b, | b, | c | + z | c, | b, | c | - | d, | b, | c | ; | ||||||||
a′, | b′, | c′ | b′, | b′, | c′ | c′, | b′, | c′ | d′, | b′, | c′ | |||||||||||||
a″, | b″, | c″ | b″, | b″, | c″ | c″, | b″, | c″ | d″, | b″, | c″ |
viz. the second and third terms each vanishing, it is
viz. the second and third terms both becoming zero, it is
= x | a, | b, | c | - | d, | b, | c | . | ||||
a′, | b′, | c′ | d′, | b′, | c′ | |||||||
a″, | b″, | c″ | d″, | b″, | c″ |
x | a, | b, | c | - | d, | b, | c | = 0; | ||||
a′, | b′, | c′ | d′, | b′, | c′ | |||||||
a″, | b″, | c″ | d″, | b″, | c″ |
which is the result obtained above.
which is the result obtained above.
We might in a similar way find the values of y and z, but there is a more symmetrical process. Join to the original equations the new equation
We can similarly find the values of y and z, but there's a more balanced approach. Add the new equation to the original equations.
αx + βy + γz = δ;
αx + βy + γz = δ;
a like process shows that, the equations being satisfied, we have
a similar process shows that, with the equations being satisfied, we have
α, | β, | γ, | δ | = 0; | ||
a, | b, | c, | d | |||
a′, | b′, | c′, | d′ | |||
a″, | b″, | c″, | d″ |
or, as this may be written,
or, as this could be written,
α, | β, | γ, | - δ | a, | b, | c | = 0; | |||||
a, | b, | c, | d | a′, | b′, | c′ | ||||||
a′, | b′, | c′, | d′ | a″, | b″, | c″ | ||||||
a″, | b″, | c″, | d″ |
which, considering δ as standing herein for its value αx + βy + γz, is a consequence of the original equations only: we have thus an expression for αx + βy + γz, an arbitrary linear function of the unknown quantities x, y, z; and by comparing the coefficients of α, β, γ on the two sides respectively, we have the values of x, y, z; in fact, these quantities, each multiplied by
which, considering δ as standing here for its value αx + βy + γz, is a result of the original equations only: we thus have an expression for αx + βy + γz, an arbitrary linear function of the unknown quantities x, y, z; and by comparing the coefficients of α, β, γ on both sides respectively, we find the values of x, y, z; in fact, these quantities, each multiplied by
a, | b, | c | , | ||
a′, | b′, | c′ | |||
a″, | b″, | c″ |
are in the first instance obtained in the forms
are first obtained in the forms
1 | , | 1 | , | 1 | ; | |||||||||||||||
a, | b, | c, | d | a, | b, | c, | d | a, | b, | c, | d | |||||||||
a′, | b′, | c′, | d′ | a′, | b′, | c′, | d′ | a′, | b′, | c′, | d′ | |||||||||
a″, | b″, | c″, | d″ | a″, | b″, | c″, | d″ | a″, | b″, | c″, | d″ |
but these are
but these are
= | b, | c, | d | , - | c, | d, | a | , | d, | a, | b | , | ||||||
b′, | c′, | d′ | c′, | d′, | a′ | d′, | a′, | b′ | ||||||||||
b″, | c″, | d″ | c″, | d″, | a″ | d″, | a″, | b″ |
or, what is the same thing,
or, which is the same thing,
= | b, | c, | d | , | c, | a, | d | , | a, | b, | d | ||||||
b′, | c′, | d′ | c′, | a′, | d′ | a′, | b′, | d′ | |||||||||
b″, | c″, | d″ | c″, | a″, | d″ | a″, | b″, | d″ |
respectively.
respectively.
6. Multiplication of two Determinants of the same Order.—The theorem is obtained very easily from the last preceding definition of a determinant. It is most simply expressed thus—
6. Multiplication of two Determinants of the same Order.—You can easily derive the theorem from the previous definition of a determinant. It can be simply stated as follows—
(α, α′, α″), | (β, β′, β″), | (γ, γ′, γ″) | |||||||||||||||||||
(a, | b, | c | ) | " | " | " | = | a, | b, | c | . | α, | β, | γ | , | ||||||
(a′, | b′, | c′ | ) | " | " | " | a′, | b′, | c′ | α′, | β′, | γ′ | |||||||||
(a″, | b″, | c″ | ) | " | " | " | a″, | b″, | c″ | α″, | β″, | γ″ |
where the expression on the left side stands for a determinant, the terms of the first line being (a, b, c)(α, α′, α″), that is, aα + bα′ + cα″, (a, b, c)(β, β′, β″), that is, aβ + bβ′ + cβ″, (a, b, c)(γ, γ′, γ″), that is aγ + bγ′ + cγ″; and similarly the terms in the second and third lines are the life functions with (a′, b′, c′) and (a″, b″, c″) respectively.
where the expression on the left side represents a determinant, the terms in the first line are (a, b, c)(α, α′, α″), which means aα + bα′ + cα″, (a, b, c)(β, β′, β″), which means aβ + bβ′ + cβ″, (a, b, c)(γ, γ′, γ″), which means aγ + bγ′ + cγ″; similarly, the terms in the second and third lines are the life functions with (a′, b′, c′) and (a″, b″, c″) respectively.
There is an apparently arbitrary transposition of lines and columns; the result would hold good if on the left-hand side we had written (α, β, γ), (α′, β′, γ′), (α″, β″, γ″), or what is the same thing, if on the right-hand side we had transposed the second determinant; and either of these changes would, it might be thought, increase the elegance of the form, but, for a reason which need not be explained,[2] the form actually adopted is the preferable one.
There seems to be a random rearrangement of rows and columns; the outcome would still hold if we had written (α, β, γ), (α′, β′, γ′), (α″, β″, γ″) on the left side or if we had swapped the second determinant on the right side. Either of these adjustments might seem like they would enhance the elegance of the structure, but for a reason that doesn’t need to be explained,[2] the form we actually chose is the better one.
To indicate the method of proof, observe that the determinant on the left-hand side, qua linear function of its columns, may be broken up into a sum of (3³ =) 27 determinants, each of which is either of some such form as
To show how the proof works, note that the determinant on the left side, as a linear function of its columns, can be split into a sum of (3³ =) 27 determinants, each of which can be in forms like
= αβγ′ | a, | a, | b | , | ||
a′, | a′, | b′ | ||||
a″, | a″, | b″ |
where the term αβγ' is not a term of the αβγ-determinant, and its coefficient (as a determinant with two identical columns) vanishes; or else it is of a form such as
where the term αβγ' isn't part of the αβγ-determinant, and its coefficient (since it’s a determinant with two identical columns) equals zero; or it takes a form like
= αβ′γ″ | a, | b, | c | , | ||
a′, | b′, | c′ | ||||
a″, | b″, | c″ |
that is, every term which does not vanish contains as a factor the abc-determinant last written down; the sum of all other factors ± αβ′γ″ is the αβγ-determinant of the formula; and the final result then is, that the determinant on the left-hand side is equal to the product on the right-hand side of the formula.
that is, every term that doesn't disappear includes the abc-determinant that was just written down as a factor; the sum of all other factors ± αβ′γ″ represents the αβγ-determinant of the formula; and the final outcome is that the determinant on the left side equals the product on the right side of the formula.
7. Decomposition of a Determinant into complementary Determinants.—Consider, for simplicity, a determinant of the fifth order, 5 = 2 + 3, and let the top two lines be
7. Decomposition of a Determinant into complementary Determinants.—Consider, for simplicity, a determinant of the fifth order, 5 = 2 + 3, and let the top two lines be
a, | b, | c, | d, | e |
a′, | b′, | c′, | d′, | e′ |
then, if we consider how these elements enter into the determinant, it is at once seen that they enter only through the determinants of the second order
then, if we think about how these elements are included in the determinant, it’s clear that they are included only through the determinants of the second order
a, | b | , | ||
a′, | b′ |
&c., which can be formed by selecting any two columns at pleasure. Moreover, representing the remaining three lines by
&c., which can be made by choosing any two columns as desired. Additionally, showing the other three lines by
a″, | b″, | c″, | d″, | e″ |
a″′, | b″′, | c″′, | d″′, | e″′ |
a″″, | b″″, | c″″, | d″″, | e″″ |
it is further seen that the factor which multiplies the determinant formed with any two columns of the first set is the determinant of the third order formed with the complementary three columns of the second set; and it thus appears that the determinant of the fifth order is a sum of all the products of the form
it is further seen that the factor that multiplies the determinant formed with any two columns of the first set is the determinant of the third order formed with the complementary three columns of the second set; and it thus appears that the determinant of the fifth order is a sum of all the products of the form
a, | b | c″, | d″, | e″ | , | |||||
a′, | b″ | c″′, | d″′, | e″′ | ||||||
c″″, | d″″, | e″″ |
the sign ± being in each case such that the sign of the term ± ab′c″d′″e″″ obtained from the diagonal elements of the component determinants may be the actual sign of this term in the determinant of the fifth order; for the product written down the sign is obviously +.
the sign ± is such that the sign of the term ± ab′c″d′″e″″ obtained from the diagonal elements of the component determinants may be the actual sign of this term in the determinant of the fifth order; for the product written down, the sign is clearly +.
Observe that for a determinant of the n-th order, taking the decomposition to be 1 + (n - 1), we fall back upon the equations given at the commencement, in order to show the genesis of a determinant.
Note that for a determinant of the n-th order, if we take the decomposition to be 1 + (n - 1), we refer back to the equations given at the beginning to demonstrate the origin of a determinant.
8. Any determinant | a, | b | formed out of the elements of the original determinant, by selecting the | ||
a′, | b′ |
lines and columns at pleasure, is termed a minor of the original determinant; and when the number of lines and columns, or order of the determinant, is n-1, then such determinant is called a first minor; the number of the first minors is = n², the first minors, in fact, corresponding to the several elements of the determinant—that is, the coefficient therein of any term whatever is the corresponding first minor. The first minors, each divided by the determinant itself, form a system of elements inverse to the elements of the determinant.
Lines and columns that you can choose freely are called a minor of the original determinant. When the number of lines and columns, or the order of the determinant, is n-1, that determinant is referred to as a first minor. The total number of first minors is n², and each first minor corresponds to the different elements of the determinant. Specifically, the coefficient of any term in the determinant is the corresponding first minor. The first minors, when each is divided by the determinant itself, create a set of elements inverse to the elements of the determinant.
A determinant is symmetrical when every two elements symmetrically situated in regard to the dexter diagonal are equal to each other; if they are equal and opposite (that is, if the sum of the two elements be = 0), this relation not extending to the diagonal elements themselves, which remain arbitrary, then the determinant is skew; but if the relation does extend to the diagonal terms (that is, if these are each = 0), then the determinant is skew symmetrical; thus the determinants
A determinant is symmetrical when every pair of elements that are positioned symmetrically with respect to the right diagonal are equal to each other; if they are equal in size but opposite in sign (meaning the sum of the two elements equals 0), and this relationship does not apply to the diagonal elements themselves, which can take any value, then the determinant is skew; however, if this relationship does apply to the diagonal elements (meaning each of these equals 0), then the determinant is skew symmetrical; thus the determinants
a, | h, | g | ; | a, | ν, | -μ | ; | 0, | ν, | -μ | ||||||
h, | b, | f | -ν, | b, | λ | -ν, | 0, | λ | ||||||||
g, | f, | c | μ, | -λ, | c | μ, | -λ, | 0 |
are respectively symmetrical, skew and skew symmetrical: [Page 113] The theory admits of very extensive algebraic developments, and applications in algebraical geometry and other parts of mathematics. For further developments of the theory of determinants see Algebraic Forms.
are respectively symmetrical, skew, and skew symmetrical: [Page 113] The theory allows for extensive algebraic developments and applications in algebraic geometry and other areas of mathematics. For more developments of the theory of determinants, see Algebraic Forms.
9. History.—These functions were originally known as "resultants," a name applied to them by Pierre Simon Laplace, but now replaced by the title "determinants," a name first applied to certain forms of them by Carl Friedrich Gauss. The germ of the theory of determinants is to be found in the writings of Gottfried Wilhelm Leibnitz (1693), who incidentally discovered certain properties when reducing the eliminant of a system of linear equations. Gabriel Cramer, in a note to his Analyse des lignes courbes algébriques (1750), gave the rule which establishes the sign of a product as plus or minus according as the number of displacements from the typical form has been even or odd. Determinants were also employed by Étienne Bezout in 1764, but the first connected account of these functions was published in 1772 by Charles Auguste Vandermonde. Laplace developed a theorem of Vandermonde for the expansion of a determinant, and in 1773 Joseph Louis Lagrange, in his memoir on Pyramids, used determinants of the third order, and proved that the square of a determinant was also a determinant. Although he obtained results now identified with determinants, Lagrange did not discuss these functions systematically. In 1801 Gauss published his Disquisitiones arithmeticae, which, although written in an obscure form, gave a new impetus to investigations on this and kindred subjects. To Gauss is due the establishment of the important theorem, that the product of two determinants both of the second and third orders is a determinant. The formulation of the general theory is due to Augustin Louis Cauchy, whose work was the forerunner of the brilliant discoveries made in the following decades by Hoëné-Wronski and J. Binet in France, Carl Gustav Jacobi in Germany, and James Joseph Sylvester and Arthur Cayley in England. Jacobi's researches were published in Crelle's Journal (1826-1841). In these papers the subject was recast and enriched by new and important theorems, through which the name of Jacobi is indissolubly associated with this branch of science. The far-reaching discoveries of Sylvester and Cayley rank as one of the most important developments of pure mathematics. Numerous new fields were opened up, and have been diligently explored by many mathematicians. Skew-determinants were studied by Cayley; axisymmetric-determinants by Jacobi, V. A. Lebesque, Sylvester and O. Hesse, and centro-symmetric determinants by W. R. F. Scott and G. Zehfuss. Continuants have been discussed by Sylvester; alternants by Cauchy, Jacobi, N. Trudi, H. Nagelbach and G. Garbieri; circulants by E. Catalan, W. Spottiswoode and J. W. L. Glaisher, and Wronskians by E. B. Christoffel and G. Frobenius. Determinants composed of binomial coefficients have been studied by V. von Zeipel; the expression of definite integrals as determinants by A. Tissot and A. Enneper, and the expression of continued fractions as determinants by Jacobi, V. Nachreiner, S. Günther and E. Fürstenau. (See T. Muir, Theory of Determinants, 1906).
9. History.—These functions were originally called "resultants," a term coined by Pierre Simon Laplace, but it has now been replaced by "determinants," a term first used by Carl Friedrich Gauss for certain forms of them. The basics of the determinant theory can be found in the writings of Gottfried Wilhelm Leibnitz (1693), who accidentally discovered certain properties while working on the eliminant of a system of linear equations. Gabriel Cramer, in a note to his Analyse des lignes courbes algébriques (1750), provided the rule that determines whether a product is plus or minus depending on whether the number of changes from the typical form is even or odd. Determinants were also used by Étienne Bézout in 1764, but the first complete account of these functions was published in 1772 by Charles Auguste Vandermonde. Laplace expanded on a theorem of Vandermonde regarding the expansion of a determinant, and in 1773, Joseph Louis Lagrange, in his memoir on Pyramids, used third-order determinants and proved that the square of a determinant is also a determinant. Although he achieved results now associated with determinants, Lagrange did not systematically discuss these functions. In 1801, Gauss published his Disquisitiones arithmeticae, which, despite its obscure form, renewed interest in this and related subjects. Gauss established the important theorem that the product of two determinants, both of the second and third orders, is a determinant. The formulation of the general theory is credited to Augustin Louis Cauchy, whose work paved the way for significant discoveries in the following decades by Hoëné-Wronski and J. Binet in France, Carl Gustav Jacobi in Germany, and James Joseph Sylvester and Arthur Cayley in England. Jacobi's research was published in Crelle's Journal (1826-1841). In these papers, the subject was redefined and enriched with new and important theorems, making Jacobi's name forever linked to this field of study. The groundbreaking discoveries of Sylvester and Cayley are considered one of the most crucial developments in pure mathematics. Many new areas were opened and diligently explored by various mathematicians. Cayley studied skew-determinants; Jacobi, V. A. Lebesgue, Sylvester, and O. Hesse focused on axisymmetric determinants, while W. R. F. Scott and G. Zehfuss examined centro-symmetric determinants. Sylvester discussed continuants; alternants were examined by Cauchy, Jacobi, N. Trudi, H. Nagelbach, and G. Garbieri; circulants were studied by E. Catalan, W. Spottiswoode, and J. W. L. Glaisher; and Wronskians were investigated by E. B. Christoffel and G. Frobenius. V. von Zeipel studied determinants made up of binomial coefficients; A. Tissot and A. Enneper looked at expressing definite integrals as determinants, while Jacobi, V. Nachreiner, S. Günther, and E. Fürstenau explored the expression of continued fractions as determinants. (See T. Muir, Theory of Determinants, 1906).
[1] The expression, a linear function, is here used in its narrowest sense, a linear function without constant term; what is meant is that the determinant is in regard to the elements a, a′, a″, ... of any column or line thereof, a function of the form Aa + A′a′ + A″a″ + ... without any term independent of a, a′, a″ ...
[1] The term "linear function" is used here in its strictest sense, referring to a linear function without a constant term; it means that the determinant concerns the elements a, a′, a″, ... of any column or row, and is a function of the form Aa + A′a′ + A″a″ + ... without any terms that are not dependent on a, a′, a″ ...
DETERMINISM (Lat. determinare, to prescribe or limit), in ethics, the name given to the theory that all moral choice, so called, is the determined or necessary result of psychological and other conditions. It is opposed to the various doctrines of Free-Will, known as voluntarism, libertarianism, indeterminism, and is from the ethical standpoint more or less akin to necessitarianism and fatalism. There are various degrees of determinism. It may be held that every action is causally connected not only externally with the sum of the agent's environment, but also internally with his motives and impulses. In other words, if we could know exactly all these conditions, we should be able to forecast with mathematical certainty the course which the agent would pursue. In this theory the agent cannot be held responsible for his action in any sense. It is the extreme antithesis of Indeterminism or Indifferentism, the doctrine that a man is absolutely free to choose between alternative courses (the liberum arbitrium indifferentiae). Since, however, the evidence of ordinary consciousness almost always goes to prove that the individual, especially in relation to future acts, regards himself as being free within certain limitations to make his own choice of alternatives, many determinists go so far as to admit that there may be in any action which is neither reflex nor determined by external causes solely an element of freedom. This view is corroborated by the phenomenon of remorse, in which the agent feels that he ought to, and could, have chosen a different course of action. These two kinds of determinism are sometimes distinguished as "hard" and "soft" determinism. The controversy between determinism and libertarianism hinges largely on the significance of the word "motive"; indeed in no other philosophical controversy has so much difficulty been caused by purely verbal disputation and ambiguity of expression. How far, and in what sense, can action which is determined by motives be said to be free? For a long time the advocates of free-will, in their eagerness to preserve moral responsibility, went so far as to deny all motives as influencing moral action. Such a contention, however, clearly defeats its own object by reducing all action to chance. On the other hand, the scientific doctrine of evolution has gone far towards obliterating the distinction between external and internal compulsion, e.g. motives, character and the like. In so far as man can be shown to be the product of, and a link in, a long chain of causal development, so far does it become impossible to regard him as self-determined. Even in his motives and his impulses, in his mental attitude towards outward surroundings, in his appetites and aversions, inherited tendency and environment have been found to play a very large part; indeed many thinkers hold that the whole of a man's development, mental as well as physical, is determined by external conditions.
DETERMINISM (Lat. determinare, to prescribe or limit) in ethics refers to the theory that all so-called moral choices are actually the result of necessary psychological and other conditions. This concept is in opposition to various free-will doctrines known as voluntarism, libertarianism, and indeterminism, and is somewhat related to necessitarianism and fatalism from an ethical standpoint. There are different levels of determinism. It can be argued that every action is causally connected not only to the sum of an individual's environment but also to their internal motivations and impulses. In other words, if we could know all these factors precisely, we could predict the agent’s actions with mathematical certainty. According to this theory, the agent cannot be held responsible for their actions in any meaningful way. It stands in stark contrast to indeterminism or indifferentism, the belief that a person has absolute freedom to choose between different options (the liberum arbitrium indifferentiae). However, since common consciousness often shows that individuals, especially concerning future actions, feel free within certain limits to choose among alternatives, many determinists acknowledge that there may be an element of freedom in actions that are neither reflexive nor solely dictated by external causes. This perspective is supported by the experience of remorse, in which the agent feels they should have been able to choose a different course of action. These two forms of determinism are sometimes referred to as "hard" and "soft" determinism. The debate between determinism and libertarianism largely revolves around the meaning of the word "motive." In fact, no other philosophical debate has been so complicated by purely verbal disputes and ambiguous language. To what extent, and in what sense, can actions driven by motives be considered free? For a long time, proponents of free will, eager to maintain moral responsibility, outright denied that motives influence moral actions. However, this argument undermines its own purpose by reducing all actions to mere chance. On the flip side, the scientific theory of evolution has blurred the lines between external and internal compulsion, such as motives and character. As it can be shown that humans are products of, and connected to, an extensive chain of causal development, it becomes increasingly difficult to view them as self-determined. Even in their motivations and impulses, mental attitudes toward their surroundings, and their likes and dislikes, inherited tendencies and environmental factors significantly influence individuals; indeed, many thinkers argue that a person's entire development, both mental and physical, is determined by external conditions.
In the Bible the philosophical-religious problem is nowhere discussed, but Christian ethics as set forth in the New Testament assumes throughout the freedom of the human will. It has been argued by theologians that the doctrine of divine fore-knowledge, coupled with that of the divine origin of all things, necessarily implies that all human action was fore-ordained from the beginning of the world. Such an inference is, however, clearly at variance with the whole doctrine of sin, repentance and the atonement, as also with that of eternal reward and punishment, which postulates a real measure of human responsibility.
In the Bible, the philosophical-religious issue is not addressed directly, but Christian ethics as presented in the New Testament assumes the freedom of human will throughout. Some theologians have argued that the concept of divine foreknowledge, combined with the belief that all things come from God, means that all human actions were predetermined from the beginning of the world. However, this idea clearly conflicts with the entire doctrine of sin, repentance, and atonement, as well as the concepts of eternal reward and punishment, which imply a true level of human responsibility.
For the history of the free-will controversy see the articles, Will, Predestination (for the theological problems), Ethics.
For the history of the free-will debate, check out the articles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ (for the theological issues), Ethics.
DETINUE (O. Fr. detenue, from detenir, to hold back), in law, an action whereby one who has an absolute or a special property in goods seeks to recover from another who is in actual possession and refuses to redeliver them. If the plaintiff succeeds in an action of detinue, the judgment is that he recover the chattel or, if it cannot be had, its value, which is assessed by the judge and jury, and also certain damages for detaining the same. An order for the restitution of the specific goods may be enforced by a special writ of execution, called a writ of delivery. (See Contract; Trover.)
DETINUE (O. Fr. detenue, from detenir, to hold back) is a legal action where someone who has full or special ownership of goods tries to recover them from another person who has them and isn’t returning them. If the plaintiff wins a detinue case, the judgment is that they get the item back or, if that’s not possible, its value, which is determined by the judge and jury, along with some compensation for the detention. An order to return the specific goods can be enforced with a special execution order known as a writ of delivery. (See __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.)
DETMOLD, a town of Germany, capital of the principality of Lippe-Detmold, beautifully situated on the east slope of the Teutoburger Wald, 25 m. S. of Minden, on the Herford-Altenbeken line of the Prussian state railways. Pop. (1905) 13,164. The residential château of the princes of Lippe-Detmold (1550), in the Renaissance style, is an imposing building, lying with its pretty gardens nearly in the centre of the town; whilst at the entrance to the large park on the south is the New Palace (1708-1718), enlarged in 1850, used as the dower-house. Detmold possesses a natural history museum, theatre, high school, library, the house in which the poet Ferdinand Freiligrath (1810-1876) was born, and that in which the dramatist Christian Dietrich Grabbe (1801-1836), also a native, died. The leading industries are linen-weaving, tanning, brewing, horse-dealing and the quarrying of marble and gypsum. About 3 m. to the south-west of the town is the Grotenburg, with Ernst von Bandel's colossal statue of Hermann or Arminius, the leader of the Cherusci. Detmold (Thiatmelli) was in 783 the scene of a conflict between the Saxons and the troops of Charlemagne.
DETMOLD, a town in Germany, is the capital of the principality of Lippe-Detmold. It's beautifully located on the eastern slope of the Teutoburger Wald, 25 miles south of Minden, along the Herford-Altenbeken line of the Prussian state railways. The population in 1905 was 13,164. The residential château of the princes of Lippe-Detmold (1550), designed in the Renaissance style, is an impressive building surrounded by lovely gardens near the town center. At the entrance to the large park to the south is the New Palace (1708-1718), which was expanded in 1850 and serves as the dower house. Detmold has a natural history museum a theater, a high school, a library, the house where the poet Ferdinand Freiligrath (1810-1876) was born, and the house where the dramatist Christian Dietrich Grabbe (1801-1836), also a local, died. The main industries include linen weaving, tanning, brewing, horse trading, and the quarrying of marble and gypsum. About 3 miles to the southwest of the town is Grotenburg, featuring Ernst von Bandel's massive statue of Hermann or Arminius, the leader of the Cherusci. Detmold (Thiatmelli) was the site of a battle in 783 between the Saxons and Charlemagne's troops.
DETROIT, the largest city of Michigan, U.S.A., and the county-seat of Wayne county, on the Detroit river opposite Windsor, Canada, about 4 m. W. from the outlet of Lake St Clair and 18 m. above Lake Erie. Pop. (1880) 116,340; (1890) 205,876; (1900) 285,704, of whom 96,503 were foreign-born and 4111 were negroes; (1910 census) 465,766. Of the foreign-born in 1900, 32,027 were Germans and 10,703 were German Poles, 25,403 were English Canadians and 3541 French Canadians, 6347 were English and 6412 were Irish. Detroit is served by the Michigan Central, the Lake Shore & Michigan Southern, the Wabash, the Grand Trunk, the Père Marquette, the Detroit & Toledo Shore Line, the Detroit, Toledo & Ironton and the Canadian Pacific railways. Two belt lines, one 2 m. to 3 m., and [Page 114] the other 6 m. from the centre of the city, connect the factory districts with the main railway lines. Trains are ferried across the river to Windsor, and steamboats make daily trips to Cleveland, Wyandotte, Mount Clemens, Port Huron, to less important places between, and to several Canadian ports. Detroit is also the S. terminus for several lines to more remote lake ports, and electric lines extend from here to Port Huron, Flint, Pontiac, Jackson, Toledo and Grand Rapids.
DETROIT, the largest city in Michigan, U.S.A., and the county seat of Wayne County, is located on the Detroit River directly across from Windsor, Canada, about 4 miles west from the outlet of Lake St. Clair and 18 miles above Lake Erie. The population was 116,340 in 1880; 205,876 in 1890; and 285,704 in 1900, of which 96,503 were foreign-born and 4,111 were Black; the 1910 census recorded a population of 465,766. Of the foreign-born individuals in 1900, there were 32,027 Germans, 10,703 German Poles, 25,403 English Canadians, 3,541 French Canadians, 6,347 English, and 6,412 Irish. Detroit is served by the Michigan Central, the Lake Shore & Michigan Southern, the Wabash, the Grand Trunk, the Père Marquette, the Detroit & Toledo Shore Line, the Detroit, Toledo & Ironton, and the Canadian Pacific railways. Two belt lines connect the factory districts with the main railway lines, one located 2 to 3 miles from the center of the city and the other 6 miles out. Trains are ferried across the river to Windsor, and steamboats operate daily trips to Cleveland, Wyandotte, Mount Clemens, Port Huron, as well as to several smaller places in between and various Canadian ports. Detroit is also the southern terminal for several lines leading to more distant lake ports, and electric lines extend from here to Port Huron, Flint, Pontiac, Jackson, Toledo, and Grand Rapids.
The city extended in 1907 over about 41 sq. m., an increase from 29 sq. m. in 1900 and 36 sq. m. in 1905. Its area in proportion to its population is much greater than that of most of the larger cities of the United States. Baltimore, for example, had in 1904 nearly 70% more inhabitants (estimated), while its area at that time was a little less and in 1907 was nearly one-quarter less than that of Detroit. The ground within the city limits as well as that for several miles farther back is quite level, but rises gradually from the river bank, which is only a few feet in height. The Detroit river, along which the city extends for about 10 m., is here ½ m. wide and 30 ft. to 40 ft. deep; its current is quite rapid; its water, a beautiful clear blue; at its mouth it has a width of about 10 m., and in the river there are a number of islands, which during the summer are popular resorts. The city has a 3 m. frontage on the river Rouge, an estuary of the Detroit, with a 16 ft. channel. Before the fire by which the city was destroyed in 1805, the streets were only 12 ft. wide and were unpaved and extremely dirty. But when the rebuilding began, several avenues from 100 ft. to 200 ft. wide were—through the influence of Augustus B. Woodward (c. 1775-1827), one of the territorial judges at the time and an admirer of the plan of the city of Washington—made to radiate from two central points. From a half circle called the Grand Circus there radiate avenues 120 ft. and 200 ft. wide. About ¼ m. toward the river from this was established another focal point called the Campus Martius, 600 ft. long and 400 ft. wide, at which commence radiating or cross streets 80 ft. and 100 ft. wide. Running north from the river through the Campus Martius and the Grand Circus is Woodward Avenue, 120 ft. wide, dividing the present city, as it did the old town, into nearly equal parts. Parallel with the river is Jefferson Avenue, also 120 ft. wide. The first of these avenues is the principal retail street along its lower portion, and is a residence avenue for 4 m. beyond this. Jefferson is the principal wholesale street at the lower end, and a fine residence avenue E. of this. Many of the other residence streets are 80 ft. wide. The setting of shade trees was early encouraged, and large elms and maples abound. The intersections of the diagonal streets left a number of small, triangular parks, which, as well as the larger ones, are well shaded. The streets are paved mostly with asphalt and brick, though cedar and stone have been much used, and kreodone block to some extent. In few, if any, other American cities of equal size are the streets and avenues kept so clean. The Grand Boulevard, 150 ft. to 200 ft. in width and 12 m. in length, has been constructed around the city except along the river front. A very large proportion of the inhabitants of Detroit own their homes: there are no large congested tenement-house districts; and many streets in various parts of the city are faced with rows of low and humble cottages often having a garden plot in front.
The city expanded in 1907 to about 41 square miles, up from 29 square miles in 1900 and 36 square miles in 1905. Its area compared to its population is much larger than that of most major cities in the United States. For instance, Baltimore had nearly 70% more residents in 1904, yet its area was slightly less, and in 1907 it was nearly a quarter smaller than Detroit’s. The land within the city limits and several miles beyond is fairly level, gradually rising from the river bank, which is only a few feet high. The Detroit River, along which the city stretches for about 10 miles, is half a mile wide and 30 to 40 feet deep; its current is quite fast, and its water is a lovely clear blue. At its mouth, the river is about 10 miles wide, and it features several islands that are popular summer getaways. The city has a 3-mile stretch along the River Rouge, an inlet of the Detroit, with a 16-foot channel. Before the fire that destroyed the city in 1805, the streets were only 12 feet wide, unpaved, and extremely dirty. However, when rebuilding began, several avenues between 100 and 200 feet wide were made to radiate from two central points, influenced by Augustus B. Woodward (circa 1775-1827), one of the territorial judges at the time who admired the layout of Washington, D.C. From a semi-circle known as the Grand Circus radiate avenues 120 feet and 200 feet wide. About a quarter-mile towards the river from this is another focal point called Campus Martius, measuring 600 feet long and 400 feet wide, from which radiating or cross streets 80 feet and 100 feet wide begin. Running north from the river through Campus Martius and Grand Circus is Woodward Avenue, 120 feet wide, which divides the current city much like it did the old town. Parallel to the river is Jefferson Avenue, also 120 feet wide. Woodward Avenue serves as the main retail street in its lower section, and it becomes a residential avenue for 4 miles beyond that. Jefferson Avenue is the main wholesale street at the lower end, along with being a nice residential avenue to the east of it. Many of the other residential streets are 80 feet wide. The planting of shade trees was encouraged early on, resulting in abundant large elms and maples. The intersections of the diagonal streets created several small, triangular parks, which, along with larger ones, are well shaded. Most streets are paved with asphalt and brick, though cedar and stone have also been widely used, as well as some kreodone blocks. In few, if any, other American cities of similar size are the streets and avenues kept as clean. The Grand Boulevard, ranging from 150 to 200 feet in width and 12 miles in length, has been built around the city, except along the riverfront. A significant portion of Detroit's residents own their homes; there are no large, congested tenement districts; and many streets throughout the city are lined with rows of modest cottages, often featuring a small garden in front.
Of the public buildings the city hall (erected 1868-1871), overlooking the Campus Martius, is in Renaissance style, in three storeys; the flagstaff from the top of the tower reaches a height of 200 ft. On the four corners above the first section of the tower are four figures, each 14 ft. in height, to represent Justice, Industry, Art and Commerce, and on the same level with these is a clock weighing 7670 lb—one of the largest in the world. In front of the building stands the Soldiers' and Sailors' monument, 60 ft. high, designed by Randolph Rogers (1825-1892) and unveiled in 1872. At each of the four corners in each of three sections rising one above the other are bronze eagles and figures representing the United States Infantry, Marine, Cavalry and Artillery, also Victory, Union, Emancipation and History; the figure by which the monument is surmounted was designed to symbolize Michigan. A larger and more massive and stately building than the city hall is the county court house, facing Cadillac Square, with a lofty tower surmounted by a gilded dome. The Federal building is a massive granite structure, finely decorated in the interior. Among the churches of greatest architectural beauty are the First Congregational, with a fine Byzantine interior, St John's Episcopal, the Woodward Avenue Baptist and the First Presbyterian, all on Woodward Avenue, and St. Anne's and Sacred Heart of Mary, both Roman Catholic. The municipal museum of art, in Jefferson Avenue, contains some unusually interesting Egyptian and Japanese collections, the Scripps' collection of old masters, other valuable paintings, and a small library; free lectures on art are given here through the winter. The public library had 228,500 volumes in 1908, including one of the best collections of state and town histories in the country. A large private collection, owned by C. M. Burton and relating principally to the history of Detroit, is also open to the public. The city is not rich in outdoor works of art. The principal ones are the Merrill fountain and the soldiers' monument on the Campus Martius, and a statue of Mayor Pingree in West Grand Circus Park.
Of the public buildings, the city hall (built from 1868 to 1871), overlooking the Campus Martius, is designed in Renaissance style and has three stories. The flagpole atop the tower reaches a height of 200 feet. At the four corners above the first section of the tower are four figures, each 14 feet tall, representing Justice, Industry, Art, and Commerce. At the same level is a clock weighing 7,670 pounds—one of the largest in the world. In front of the building stands the Soldiers' and Sailors' monument, which is 60 feet high, designed by Randolph Rogers (1825-1892) and unveiled in 1872. Each of the four corners in the three sections rising above one another features bronze eagles and figures representing the United States Infantry, Marine, Cavalry, and Artillery, as well as Victory, Union, Emancipation, and History; the figure at the top of the monument symbolizes Michigan. The county courthouse, which faces Cadillac Square, is larger and more impressive than the city hall, featuring a tall tower topped by a gilded dome. The Federal building is a massive granite structure, beautifully decorated inside. Among the churches renowned for their architectural beauty are the First Congregational, with a stunning Byzantine interior, St. John's Episcopal, the Woodward Avenue Baptist, and the First Presbyterian, all located on Woodward Avenue, as well as St. Anne's and Sacred Heart of Mary, both Roman Catholic. The municipal museum of art on Jefferson Avenue houses some particularly interesting Egyptian and Japanese collections, the Scripps' collection of old masters, other valuable paintings, and a small library; free art lectures are offered here throughout the winter. The public library had 228,500 volumes in 1908, including one of the best collections of state and town histories in the country. A large private collection owned by C. M. Burton, focusing mainly on the history of Detroit, is also available to the public. The city lacks many outdoor works of art. The main pieces are the Merrill fountain and the soldiers' monument on the Campus Martius, along with a statue of Mayor Pingree in West Grand Circus Park.
The parks of Detroit are numerous and their total area is about 1200 acres. By far the most attractive is Belle Isle, an island in the river at the E. end of the city, purchased in 1879 and having an area of more than 700 acres. The Grand Circus Park of 4½ acres, with its trees, flowers and fountains, affords a pleasant resting place in the busiest quarter of the city. Six miles farther out on Woodward Avenue is Palmer Park of about 140 acres, given to the city in 1894 and named in honour of the donor. Clark Park (28 acres) is in the W. part of the city, and there are various smaller parks. The principal cemeteries are Elmwood (Protestant) and Mount Elliott (Catholic), which lie adjoining in the E. part of the city; Woodmere in the W. and Woodlawn in the N. part of the city.
The parks in Detroit are plentiful, covering around 1,200 acres in total. The most appealing is Belle Isle, an island in the river at the east end of the city, which was purchased in 1879 and spans over 700 acres. Grand Circus Park, a 4.5-acre space filled with trees, flowers, and fountains, offers a nice spot to relax in the busiest part of the city. Six miles further out on Woodward Avenue is Palmer Park, which is about 140 acres and was given to the city in 1894 in honor of its donor. Clark Park, covering 28 acres, is located in the west part of the city, along with several smaller parks. The main cemeteries are Elmwood (for Protestants) and Mount Elliott (for Catholics), both located next to each other in the east part of the city; Woodmere is in the west, while Woodlawn is in the north part of the city.
Charity and Education.—Among the charitable institutions are the general hospitals (Harper, Grace and St Mary's); the Detroit Emergency, the Children's Free and the United States Marine hospitals; St Luke's hospital, church home, and orphanage; the House of Providence (a maternity hospital and infant asylum); the Woman's hospital and foundling's home; the Home for convalescent children, &c. In 1894 the mayor, Hazen Senter Pingree (1842-1901), instituted the practice of preparing, through municipal aid and supervision, large tracts of vacant land in and about the city for the growing of potatoes and other vegetables and then, in conjunction with the board of poor commissioners, assigning it in small lots to families of the unemployed, and furnishing them with seed for planting. This plan served an admirable purpose through three years of industrial depression, and was copied in other cities; it was abandoned when, with the renewal of industrial activity, the necessity for it ceased. The leading penal institution of the city is the Detroit House of Correction, noted for its efficient reformatory work; the inmates are employed ten hours a day, chiefly in making furniture. The house of correction pays the city a profit of $35,000 to $40,000 a year. The educational institutions, in addition to those of the general public school system, include several parochial schools, schools of art and of music, and commercial colleges; Detroit College (Catholic), opened in 1877; the Detroit College of Medicine, opened in 1885; the Michigan College of Medicine and Surgery, opened in 1888; the Detroit College of law, founded in 1891, and a city normal school.
Charity and Education.—Among the charitable institutions are the general hospitals (Harper, Grace, and St. Mary's); the Detroit Emergency, the Children's Free, and the United States Marine hospitals; St. Luke's hospital, church home, and orphanage; the House of Providence (a maternity hospital and infant asylum); the Woman's hospital and foundling home; the Home for Convalescent Children, etc. In 1894, the mayor, Hazen Senter Pingree (1842-1901), started a program to prepare large areas of vacant land in and around the city for growing potatoes and other vegetables with municipal support and oversight. He then worked with the board of poor commissioners to assign these lands in small plots to families without jobs, providing them with seeds for planting. This initiative was greatly beneficial during three years of economic downturn and was replicated in other cities; it ended when industrial activity resumed and the need for it faded. The main penal institution in the city is the Detroit House of Correction, recognized for its effective reform work; inmates work ten hours a day, mainly making furniture. The house of correction generates a profit of $35,000 to $40,000 a year for the city. The educational institutions, besides those in the general public school system, include several parochial schools, art and music schools, and commercial colleges; Detroit College (Catholic), opened in 1877; the Detroit College of Medicine, opened in 1885; the Michigan College of Medicine and Surgery, opened in 1888; the Detroit College of Law, founded in 1891, and a city normal school.
Commerce.—Detroit's location gives to the city's shipping and shipbuilding interests a high importance. All the enormous traffic between the upper and lower lakes passes through the Detroit river. In 1907 the number of vessels recorded was 34,149, with registered tonnage of 53,959,769, carrying 71,226,895 tons of freight, valued at $697,311,302. This includes vessels which delivered part or all of their cargo at Detroit. The largest item in the freights is iron ore on vessels bound down. The next is coal on vessels up bound. Grain and lumber are the next largest items. Detroit is a port of entry, and its foreign commerce, chiefly with Canada, is of growing importance. The city's exports increased from $11,325,807 in 1896 to $37,085,027 in [Page 115] 1909. The imports were $3,153,609 in 1896 and $7,100,659 in 1909.
Commerce.—Detroit's location makes the city's shipping and shipbuilding industries very important. All the massive traffic between the upper and lower lakes flows through the Detroit River. In 1907, there were 34,149 vessels recorded, with a registered tonnage of 53,959,769, carrying 71,226,895 tons of freight valued at $697,311,302. This includes vessels that delivered part or all of their cargo in Detroit. The largest freight item is iron ore on vessels heading down, followed by coal on vessels headed up. Grain and lumber follow as the next largest items. Detroit is a port of entry, and its foreign trade, mainly with Canada, is increasingly significant. The city's exports rose from $11,325,807 in 1896 to $37,085,027 in [Page 115] 1909. Imports were $3,153,609 in 1896 and $7,100,659 in 1909.
As a manufacturing city, Detroit holds high rank. The total number of manufacturing establishments in 1890 was 1746, with a product for the year valued at $77,351,546; in 1900 there were 2847 establishments with a product for the year valued at $100,892,838; or an increase of 30.4% in the decade. In 1900 the establishments under the factory system, omitting the hand trades and neighbourhood industries, numbered 1259 and produced goods valued at $88,365,924; in 1904 establishments under the factory system numbered 1363 and the product had increased 45.7% to $128,761,658. In the district subsequently annexed the product in 1904 was about $12,000,000, making a total of $140,000,000. The output for 1906 was estimated at $180,000,000. The state factory inspectors in 1905 visited 1721 factories having 83,231 employees. In 1906 they inspected 1790 factories with 93,071 employees. Detroit is the leading city in the country in the manufacture of automobiles. In 1904 the value of its product was one-fifth that for the whole country. In 1906 the city had twenty automobile factories, with an output of 11,000 cars, valued at $12,000,000. Detroit is probably the largest manufacturer in the country of freight cars, stoves, pharmaceutical preparations, varnish, soda ash and similar alkaline products. Other important manufactures are ships, paints, foundry and machine shop products, brass goods, furniture, boots and shoes, clothing, matches, cigars, malt liquors and fur goods; and slaughtering and meat packing is an important industry.
As a manufacturing city, Detroit ranks very high. In 1890, there were 1,746 manufacturing establishments, with a total annual output valued at $77,351,546. By 1900, the number of establishments had risen to 2,847, and their annual output was valued at $100,892,838, showing a 30.4% increase over the decade. In 1900, the establishments operating under the factory system, excluding hand trades and neighborhood industries, numbered 1,259 and produced goods valued at $88,365,924. By 1904, factory system establishments increased to 1,363, and the product value jumped 45.7% to $128,761,658. In the district that was later annexed, the product value in 1904 was about $12,000,000, bringing the total to $140,000,000. The output for 1906 was estimated at $180,000,000. In 1905, state factory inspectors visited 1,721 factories employing 83,231 people. In 1906, they inspected 1,790 factories with 93,071 employees. Detroit is the leading city in the country for automobile manufacturing. In 1904, the value of its automobile production was one-fifth of the total for the entire country. By 1906, the city had twenty automobile factories, producing 11,000 cars worth $12,000,000. Detroit is likely the largest manufacturer in the country of freight cars, stoves, pharmaceutical products, varnish, soda ash, and other similar alkaline products. Other significant industries include ships, paints, foundry and machine shop products, brass goods, furniture, boots and shoes, clothing, matches, cigars, malt beverages, and fur products; slaughtering and meat packing is also a major industry.
The Detroit Board of Commerce, organized in 1903, brought into one association the members of three former bodies, making a compact organization with civic as well as commercial aims. The board has brought into active co-operation nearly all the leading business men of the city and many of the professional men. Their united efforts have brought many new industries to the city, have improved industrial conditions, and have exerted a beneficial influence upon the municipal administration. Other business organizations are the Board of Trade, devoted to the grain trade and kindred lines, the Employers' Association, which seeks to maintain satisfactory relations between employer and employed, the Builders' & Traders' Exchange, and the Credit Men's Association.
The Detroit Board of Commerce, formed in 1903, combined members from three previous organizations into a cohesive group with both civic and business goals. The board has successfully engaged nearly all the city's top business leaders and many professionals. Their collaborative efforts have attracted new industries to the city, improved working conditions, and positively influenced local government. Other business groups include the Board of Trade, focused on the grain industry and related sectors, the Employers' Association, which aims to maintain good relationships between employers and employees, the Builders' & Traders' Exchange, and the Credit Men's Association.
Administration.—Although the city received its first charter in 1806, and another in 1815, the real power rested in the hands of the governor and judges of the territory until 1824; the charters of 1824 and 1827 centred the government in a council and made the list of elective officers long; the charter of 1827 was revised in 1857 and again in 1859 and the present charter dates from 1883. Under this charter only three administrative officers are elected,—the mayor, the city clerk and the city treasurer,—elections being biennial. The administration of the city departments is largely in the hands of commissions. There is one commissioner each, appointed by the mayor, for the parks and boulevards, police and public works departments. The four members of the health board are nominated by the governor and confirmed by the state senate. The school board is an independent body, consisting of one elected member from each ward holding office for four years, but the mayor has the veto power over its proceedings as well as those of the common council. In each case a two-thirds vote overrules his veto. The other principal officers and commissions, appointed by the mayor and confirmed by the council, are controller, corporation counsel, board of three assessors, fire commission (four members), public lighting commission (six members), water commission (five members), poor commission (four members), and inspectors of the house of correction (four in number). The members of the public library commission, six in number, are elected by the board of education. Itemized estimates of expenses for the next fiscal year are furnished by the different departments to the controller in February. He transmits them to the common council with his recommendations. The council has four weeks in which to consider them. It may reduce or increase the amounts asked, and may add new items. The budget then goes to the board of estimates, which has a month for its consideration. This body consists of two members elected from each ward and five elected at large. The mayor and heads of departments are advisory members, and may speak but not vote. The members of the board of estimates can hold no other office and they have no appointing power, the intention being to keep them as free as possible from all political motives and influences. They may reduce or cut out any estimates submitted, but cannot increase any or add new ones. No bonds can be issued without the assent of the board of estimates. The budget is apportioned among twelve committees which have almost invariably given close and conscientious examination to the actual needs of the departments. A reduction of $1,000,000 to $1,500,000, without impairing the service, has been a not unusual result of their deliberations. Prudent management under this system has placed the city in the highest rank financially. Its debt limit is 2% on the assessed valuation, and even that low maximum is not often reached. The debt in 1907 was only about $5,500,000, a smaller per capita debt than that of any other city of over 100,000 inhabitants in the country; the assessed valuation was $330,000,000; the city tax, $14.70 on the thousand dollars of assessed valuation. Both the council and the estimators are hampered in their work by legislative interference. Nearly all the large salaries and many of those of the second grade are made mandatory by the legislature, which has also determined many affairs of a purely administrative character.
Administration.—Although the city got its first charter in 1806 and another in 1815, true power was held by the governor and judges of the territory until 1824. The charters from 1824 and 1827 established a council-based government and expanded the number of elected officials. The 1827 charter was updated in 1857 and again in 1859, and the current charter was established in 1883. Under this charter, only three administrative officers are elected—the mayor, the city clerk, and the city treasurer—with elections occurring every two years. Management of the city departments is mainly handled by commissions. The mayor appoints one commissioner each for the parks and boulevards, police, and public works departments. The health board has four members appointed by the governor and confirmed by the state senate. The school board operates independently and includes one elected member from each ward serving a four-year term, though the mayor can veto its actions as well as those of the common council. A two-thirds vote can override his veto in both cases. Other key officers and commissions, who are appointed by the mayor and confirmed by the council, include the controller, corporation counsel, a board of three assessors, a fire commission (four members), a public lighting commission (six members), a water commission (five members), a poor commission (four members), and four inspectors of the house of correction. The public library commission, consisting of six members, is elected by the board of education. Each department submits detailed expense estimates for the next fiscal year to the controller in February. He then sends them to the common council with his recommendations, and the council has four weeks to review them. They can reduce or increase the requested amounts and add new items. The budget is then reviewed by the board of estimates, which has a month for consideration. This board includes two members elected from each ward and five elected at large. The mayor and heads of departments serve as advisory members who can speak but not vote. Board members cannot hold any other office and lack appointing power, ensuring they remain as free as possible from political motivations. They can cut or eliminate any submitted estimates but cannot increase them or add new ones. No bonds can be issued without the approval of the board of estimates. The budget is divided among twelve committees that consistently conduct thorough evaluations of the departments' actual needs. It’s not uncommon for their discussions to result in a reduction of $1,000,000 to $1,500,000 without compromising service. Prudent management under this system has positioned the city financially at a high level. Its debt limit is 2% of the assessed valuation, and even that limit is rarely hit. In 1907, the total debt was around $5,500,000, which is a lower per capita debt than any other city in the country with over 100,000 residents; the assessed valuation was $330,000,000, and the city tax was $14.70 per thousand dollars of assessed valuation. Both the council and the estimators face challenges due to legislative interference. Most high salaries and many second-tier salaries are mandated by the legislature, which has also influenced numerous purely administrative matters.
Detroit has made three experiments with municipal ownership. On account of inadequate and unsatisfactory service by a private company, the city bought the water-works as long ago as 1836. The works have been twice moved and enlargements have been made in advance of the needs of the city. In 1907 there were six engines in the works with a pumping capacity of 152,000,000 gallons daily. The daily average of water used during the preceding year was 61,357,000 gallons. The water is pumped from Lake St Clair and is of exceptional purity. The city began its own public lighting in April 1895, having a large plant on the river near the centre of the city. It lights the streets and public buildings, but makes no provision for commercial business. The lighting is excellent, and the cost is probably less than could be obtained from a private company. The street lighting is done partly from pole and arm lights, but largely from steel towers from 100 ft. to 180 ft. in height, with strong reflected lights at the top. The city also owns two portable asphalt plants, and thus makes a saving in the cost of street repairing and resurfacing. With a view of effecting the reduction of street car fares to three cents, the state legislature in 1899 passed an act for purchasing or leasing the street railways of the city, but the Supreme Court pronounced this act unconstitutional on the ground that, as the constitution prohibited the state from engaging in a work of internal improvement, the state could not empower a municipality to do so. Certain test votes indicated an almost even division on the question of municipal ownership of the railways.
Detroit has tried municipal ownership three times. Due to poor and unsatisfactory service from a private company, the city bought the waterworks back in 1836. The facilities have been relocated twice, and expansions have been made ahead of the city's needs. In 1907, there were six engines in operation with a pumping capacity of 152,000,000 gallons a day. The daily average water usage for the previous year was 61,357,000 gallons. The water is drawn from Lake St. Clair and is exceptionally pure. The city started its own public lighting in April 1895, having a large plant on the river near downtown. It lights the streets and public buildings, but doesn’t cater to commercial businesses. The lighting is excellent and likely cheaper than what could be provided by a private company. Street lighting is done partly with pole and arm lights but mainly from steel towers ranging from 100 to 180 feet high, equipped with powerful reflectors at the top. The city also owns two portable asphalt plants, saving money on street repairs and resurfacing. In an effort to lower streetcar fares to three cents, the state legislature passed a law in 1899 to buy or lease the city’s street railways, but the Supreme Court ruled this law unconstitutional, stating that since the constitution prohibited the state from engaging in internal improvements, it could not allow a municipality to do so. Some test votes showed nearly equal opinions on the matter of municipal ownership of the railways.
History.—Detroit was founded in 1701 by Antoine Laumet de la Mothe Cadillac (c. 1661-1730), who had pointed out the importance of the place as a strategic point for determining the control of the fur trade and the possession of the North-west and had received assistance from the French government soon after Robert Livingston (1654-1725), the secretary of the Board of Indian Commissioners in New York, had urged the English government to establish a fort at the same place. Cadillac arrived on the 24th of July with about 100 followers. They at once built a palisade fort about 200 ft. square S. of what is now Jefferson Avenue and between Griswold and Shelby streets, and named it Fort Pontchartrain in honour of the French colonial minister. Indians at once came to the place in large numbers, but they soon complained of the high price of French goods; there was serious contention between Cadillac and the French Canadian Fur Company, to which a monopoly of the trade had been granted, as well as bitter rivalry between him and the Jesuits. After the several parties had begun to complain to the home government the monopoly of the fur trade was transferred to Cadillac and he was exhorted to cease quarrelling with the [Page 116] Jesuits. Although the inhabitants then increased to 200 or more, dissatisfaction with the paternal rule of the founder increased until 1710, when he was made governor of Louisiana. The year before, the soldiers had been withdrawn; by the second year after there was serious trouble with the Indians, and for several years following the population was greatly reduced and the post threatened with extinction. But in 1722, when the Mississippi country was opened, the population once more increased, and again in 1748, when the settlement of the Ohio Valley began, the governor-general of Canada offered special inducements to Frenchmen to settle at Detroit, with the result that the population was soon more than 1000 and the cultivation of farms in the vicinity was begun. In 1760, however, the place was taken by the British under Colonel Robert Rogers and an English element was introduced into the population which up to this time had been almost exclusively French. Three years later, during the conspiracy of Pontiac, the fort first narrowly escaped capture and then suffered from a siege lasting from the 9th of May until the 12th of October. Under English rule it continued from this time on as a military post with its population usually reduced to less than 500. In 1778 a new fort was built and named Fort Lernault, and during the War of Independence the British sent forth from here several Indian expeditions to ravage the frontiers. With the ratification of the treaty which concluded that war the title to the post passed to the United States in 1783, but the post itself was not surrendered until the 11th of January 1796, in accordance with Jay's Treaty of 1794. It was then named Fort Shelby; but in 1802 it was incorporated as a town and received its present name. In 1805 all except one or two buildings were destroyed by fire. General William Hull (1753-1825), a veteran of the War of American Independence, governor of Michigan territory in 1805-1812, as commander of the north-western army in 1812 occupied the city. Failing to hear immediately of the declaration of war between the United States and Great Britain, he was cut off from his supplies shipped by Lake Erie. He made from Detroit on the 12th of July an awkward and futile advance into Canada, which, if more vigorous, might have resulted in the capture of Malden and the establishment of American troops in Canada, and then retired to his fortifications. On the 16th of August 1812, without any resistance and without consulting his officers, he surrendered the city to General Brock, for reasons of humanity, and afterwards attempted to justify himself by criticism of the War Department in general and in particular of General Henry Dearborn's armistice with Prevost, which had not included in its terms Hull, whom Dearborn had been sent out to reinforce.[1] After Perry's victory on the 14th of September on Lake Erie, Detroit on the 29th of September was again occupied by the forces of the United States. Its growth was rather slow until 1830, but since then its progress has been unimpeded. Detroit was the capital of Michigan from 1805 to 1847.
History.—Detroit was founded in 1701 by Antoine Laumet de la Mothe Cadillac (c. 1661-1730), who recognized the area’s significance as a strategic location for controlling the fur trade and claiming the Northwest. He received support from the French government shortly after Robert Livingston (1654-1725), the secretary of the Board of Indian Commissioners in New York, urged the English government to establish a fort there. Cadillac arrived on July 24 with about 100 followers. They quickly built a palisade fort about 200 feet square south of what is now Jefferson Avenue, between Griswold and Shelby streets, and named it Fort Pontchartrain in honor of the French colonial minister. Indians soon arrived in large numbers but quickly complained about the high prices of French goods. There was major conflict between Cadillac and the French Canadian Fur Company, which had been granted a monopoly on the trade, as well as intense rivalry between him and the Jesuits. After various groups began to lodge complaints with the home government, the fur trade monopoly was transferred to Cadillac, who was urged to stop arguing with the [Page 116] Jesuits. Although the population then grew to over 200, dissatisfaction with Cadillac's paternal leadership increased, leading to his appointment as governor of Louisiana in 1710. The year before, the soldiers had been withdrawn; by the second year, there were serious issues with the Indians, and for several years afterward the population significantly declined, putting the post at risk of disappearing. However, in 1722, after the Mississippi region was opened, the population began to rise again, and again in 1748, when settlement in the Ohio Valley started, the governor-general of Canada offered special incentives for French settlers in Detroit, resulting in the population soon exceeding 1,000 and farming starting in the surrounding areas. In 1760, the British took the area under Colonel Robert Rogers, introducing an English element to a population that had previously been almost entirely French. Three years later, during Pontiac's conspiracy, the fort narrowly avoided capture and then underwent a siege from May 9 to October 12. Under British rule, it remained a military post, with the population often under 500. In 1778, a new fort was constructed and named Fort Lernault, and during the War of Independence, the British launched several Indian expeditions from there against the frontiers. After the ratification of the treaty concluding that war, control of the post was transferred to the United States in 1783, but it wasn't handed over until January 11, 1796, in line with Jay's Treaty of 1794. It was then named Fort Shelby; however, in 1802, it became incorporated as a town and received its current name. In 1805, most buildings were destroyed by a fire. General William Hull (1753-1825), a veteran of the War of American Independence and governor of Michigan territory from 1805 to 1812, commanded the northwestern army in 1812 and occupied the city. After not receiving immediate news of the war declaration between the United States and Great Britain, he was cut off from his supplies shipped via Lake Erie. He made an awkward and ineffective advance into Canada from Detroit on July 12, which, if more assertive, might have captured Malden and established American troops there, then retreated to his fortifications. On August 16, 1812, without resistance and without consulting his officers, he surrendered the city to General Brock, citing humanitarian reasons, and later tried to justify himself by criticizing the War Department in general, particularly General Henry Dearborn's armistice with Prevost, which had not included Hull, whom Dearborn was dispatched to reinforce.[1] After Perry's victory on September 14 on Lake Erie, Detroit was reoccupied by U.S. forces on September 29. Its growth was relatively slow until 1830, but it accelerated afterwards. Detroit served as the capital of Michigan from 1805 to 1847.
Authorities.—Silas Farmer, The History of Detroit and Michigan (Detroit, 1884 and 1889), and "Detroit, the Queen City," in L. P. Powell's Historic Towns of the Western States (New York and London, 1901); D. F. Wilcox, "Municipal Government in Michigan and Ohio," in Columbia University Studies (New York, 1896); C. M. Burton, "Cadillac's Village" or Detroit under Cadillac (Detroit, 1896); Francis Parkman, A Half Century of Conflict (Boston, 1897); and The Conspiracy of Pontiac (Boston, 1898); and the annual Reports of the Detroit Board of Commerce (1904 sqq.).
Authorities.—Silas Farmer, The History of Detroit and Michigan (Detroit, 1884 and 1889), and "Detroit, the Queen City," in L. P. Powell's Historic Towns of the Western States (New York and London, 1901); D. F. Wilcox, "Municipal Government in Michigan and Ohio," in Columbia University Studies (New York, 1896); C. M. Burton, "Cadillac's Village" or Detroit under Cadillac (Detroit, 1896); Francis Parkman, A Half Century of Conflict (Boston, 1897); and The Conspiracy of Pontiac (Boston, 1898); and the annual Reports of the Detroit Board of Commerce (1904 sqq.).
[1] Hull was tried at Albany in 1814 by court martial, General Dearborn presiding, was found guilty of treason, cowardice, neglect of duty and unofficerlike conduct, and was sentenced to be shot; the president remitted the sentence because of Hull's services in the Revolution.
[1] Hull was court-martialed in Albany in 1814, with General Dearborn presiding. He was found guilty of treason, cowardice, neglect of duty, and unofficerlike conduct, and sentenced to be shot. The president commuted the sentence due to Hull's service in the Revolution.
DETTINGEN, a village of Germany in the kingdom of Bavaria, on the Main, and on the Frankfort-on-Main-Aschaffenburg railway, 10 m. N.W. of Aschaffenburg. It is memorable as the scene of a decisive battle on the 27th of June 1743, when the English, Hanoverians and Austrians (the "Pragmatic army"), 42,000 men under the command of George II. of England, routed the numerically superior French forces under the duc de Noailles. It was in memory of this victory that Handel composed his Dettingen Te Deum.
DETTINGEN, a village in Germany's Bavaria region, located on the Main River and along the Frankfort-on-Main-Aschaffenburg railway, 10 miles northwest of Aschaffenburg. It is known for being the site of a crucial battle on June 27, 1743, when the English, Hanoverians, and Austrians (the "Pragmatic army"), consisting of 42,000 troops led by George II of England, defeated the larger French forces commanded by the duc de Noailles. Handel wrote his Dettingen Te Deum to commemorate this victory.
DEUCALION, in Greek legend, son of Prometheus, king of Phthia in Thessaly, husband of Pyrrha, and father of Hellen, the mythical ancestor of the Hellenic race. When Zeus had resolved to destroy all mankind by a flood, Deucalion constructed a boat or ark, in which, after drifting nine days and nights, he landed on Mount Parnassus (according to others, Othrys, Aetna or Athos) with his wife. Having offered sacrifice and inquired how to renew the human race, they were ordered to cast behind them the "bones of the great mother," that is, the stones from the hillside. The stones thrown by Deucalion became men, those thrown by Pyrrha, women.
DEUCALION, in Greek mythology, was the son of Prometheus, the king of Phthia in Thessaly, husband of Pyrrha, and father of Hellen, the legendary ancestor of the Greek people. When Zeus decided to wipe out humanity with a flood, Deucalion built a boat or ark. After drifting for nine days and nights, he and his wife landed on Mount Parnassus (though some say Othrys, Aetna, or Athos). After making a sacrifice and asking how to repopulate the earth, they were instructed to throw behind them the "bones of the great mother," which meant stones from the hillside. The stones thrown by Deucalion turned into men, while the stones thrown by Pyrrha became women.
See Apollodorus i. 7, 2; Ovid, Metam. i. 243-415; Apollonius Rhodius iii. 1085 ff.; H. Usener, Die Sintflutsagen (1899).
See Apollodorus i. 7, 2; Ovid, Metam. i. 243-415; Apollonius Rhodius iii. 1085 ff.; H. Usener, Die Sintflutsagen (1899).
DEUCE (a corruption of the Fr. deux, two), a term applied to the "two" of any suit of cards, or of dice. It is also a term used in tennis when both sides have each scored three points in a game, or five games in a set; to win the game or set two points or games must then be won consecutively. The earliest instances in English of the use of the slang expression "the deuce," in exclamations and the like, date from the middle of the 17th century. The meaning was similar to that of "plague" or "mischief" in such phrases as "plague on you," "mischief take you" and the like. The use of the word as an euphemism for "the devil" is later. According to the New English Dictionary the most probable derivation is from a Low German das daus, i.e. the "deuce" in dice, the lowest and therefore the most unlucky throw. The personification, with a consequent change of gender, to der daus, came later. The word has also been identified with the name of a giant or goblin in Teutonic mythology.
DEUCE (a form of the French deux, meaning two), refers to the "two" in any suit of cards or dice. It’s also a term used in tennis when both players have scored three points in a game, or five games in a set; to win the game or set, a player must win two consecutive points or games. The earliest uses of the slang expression "the deuce" in exclamations and similar contexts date back to the mid-17th century. Its meaning was similar to "plague" or "mischief" in phrases like "plague on you," and "mischief take you." The use of the word as a euphemism for "the devil" came later. According to the New English Dictionary, the most likely origin is from a Low German term das daus, meaning the "deuce" in dice, referring to the lowest and thus the most unlucky roll. The personification, with a subsequent change in gender, to der daus, happened later. The word has also been linked to a giant or goblin in Teutonic mythology.
DEUS, JOÃO DE (1830-1896), the greatest Portuguese poet of his generation, was born at San Bartholomeu de Messines in the province of Algarve on the 8th of March 1830. Matriculating in the faculty of law at the university of Coimbra, he did not proceed to his degree but settled in the city, dedicating himself wholly to the composition of verses, which circulated among professors and undergraduates in manuscript copies. In the volume of his art, as in the conduct of life, he practised a rigorous self-control. He printed nothing previous to 1855, and the first of his poems to appear in a separate form was La Lata, in 1860. In 1862 he left Coimbra for Beja, where he was appointed editor of O Bejense, the chief newspaper in the province of Alemtejo, and four years later he edited the Folha do Sul. As the pungent satirical verses entitled Eleições prove, he was not an ardent politician, and, though he was returned as Liberal deputy for the constituency of Silves in 1869, he acted independently of all political parties and promptly resigned his mandate. The renunciation implied in the act, which cut him off from all advancement, is in accord with nearly all that is known of his lofty character. In the year of his election as deputy, his friend José Antonio Garcia Blanco collected from local journals the series of poems, Flores do campo, which is supplemented by the Ramo de flores (1869). This is João de Deus's masterpiece. Pires de Marmalada (1869) is an improvisation of no great merit. The four theatrical pieces—Amemos o nosso proximo, Ser apresentado, Ensaio de Casamento, and A Viúva inconsolavel—are prose translations from Méry, cleverly done, but not worth the doing. Horacio e Lydia (1872), a translation from Ronsard, is a good example of artifice in manipulating that dangerously monotonous measure, the Portuguese couplet. As an indication of a strong spiritual reaction three prose fragments (1873)—Anna, Mãe de Maria, A Virgem Maria and A Mulher do Levita de Ephrain—translated from Darboy's Femmes de la Bible, are full of significance. The Folhas soltas (1876) is a collection of verse in the manner of Flores do campo, brilliantly effective and exquisitely refined. Within the next few years the writer turned his attention to educational problems, and in his Cartilha maternal (1876) first expressed the conclusions to which his study of Pestalozzi and Fröbel had led him. This patriotic, pedagogical apostolate was a misfortune for Portuguese literature; his educational mission absorbed João de Deus completely, and is responsible for numerous controversial letters, for a translation of Théodore-Henri Barrau's treatise, Des devoirs des enfants envers leurs [Page 117] parents, for a prosodic dictionary and for many other publications of no literary value. A copy of verses in Antonio Vieira's Grinalda de Maria (1877), the Loas á Virgem (1878) and the Proverbios de Salomão are evidence of a complete return to orthodoxy during the poet's last years. By a lamentable error of judgment some worthless pornographic verses entitled Cryptinas have been inserted in the completest edition of João de Deus's poems—Campo de Flores (Lisbon, 1893). He died at Lisbon on the 11th of January 1896, was accorded a public funeral and was buried in the National Pantheon, the Jeronymite church at Belem, where repose the remains of Camoens, Herculano and Garrett. His scattered minor prose writings and correspondence have been posthumously published by Dr Theophilo Braga (Lisbon, 1898).
DEUS, JOÃO DE (1830-1896), the greatest Portuguese poet of his generation, was born in San Bartholomeu de Messines in the Algarve province on March 8, 1830. He enrolled in the law school at the University of Coimbra but did not complete his degree, choosing instead to stay in the city and focus entirely on writing poetry, which circulated among professors and students in handwritten copies. In both his art and personal life, he practiced strict self-discipline. He published nothing before 1855, and his first poem to appear separately was La Lata in 1860. In 1862, he left Coimbra for Beja, where he became the editor of O Bejense, the main newspaper in the Alentejo province, and four years later, he edited Folha do Sul. The sharp satirical poem Eleições shows he was not a passionate politician, and although he was elected as a Liberal deputy for the Silves constituency in 1869, he acted independently of all political parties and quickly resigned his position. This renunciation, which cut him off from any advancement, aligns with what is known of his noble character. In the year he was elected deputy, his friend José Antonio Garcia Blanco compiled local journal poems into the collection Flores do campo, which was followed by Ramo de flores (1869). This is João de Deus's masterpiece. Pires de Marmalada (1869) is an improvisation of little significance. The four plays—Amemos o nosso proximo, Ser apresentado, Ensaio de Casamento, and A Viúva inconsolavel—are prose translations from Méry, skillfully done but not particularly worthwhile. Horacio e Lydia (1872), a translation of Ronsard, is a good example of skillful manipulation of the potentially monotonous Portuguese couplet. Three prose fragments (1873)—Anna, Mãe de Maria, A Virgem Maria and A Mulher do Levita de Ephrain—translated from Darboy's Femmes de la Bible, are rich in meaning. Folhas soltas (1876) is a collection of verses similar to Flores do campo, brilliantly effective and finely crafted. In the following years, the writer focused on educational issues, and in his Cartilha maternal (1876) he first presented the conclusions drawn from his studies of Pestalozzi and Fröbel. This patriotic, educational mission was a setback for Portuguese literature; his commitment to education consumed João de Deus entirely and led to numerous controversial letters, a translation of Théodore-Henri Barrau's work Des devoirs des enfants envers leurs [Page 117] parents, a prosodic dictionary, and many other publications with no literary merit. A set of verses in Antonio Vieira's Grinalda de Maria (1877), Loas á Virgem (1878), and Proverbios de Salomão indicate a complete return to orthodoxy in the poet's later years. Due to a regrettable misjudgment, some worthless vulgar verses titled Cryptinas were included in the most complete edition of João de Deus's poems—Campo de Flores (Lisbon, 1893). He died in Lisbon on January 11, 1896, received a public funeral, and was buried in the National Pantheon, the Jeronymite church in Belem, where the remains of Camoens, Herculano, and Garrett lie. His minor prose writings and correspondence have been published posthumously by Dr. Theophilo Braga (Lisbon, 1898).
Next to Camoens and perhaps Garrett, no Portuguese poet has been more widely read, more profoundly admired than João de Deus; yet no poet in any country has been more indifferent to public opinion and more deliberately careless of personal fame. He is not responsible for any single edition of his poems, which were put together by pious but ill-informed enthusiasts, who ascribed to him verses that he had not written; he kept no copies of his compositions, seldom troubled to write them himself, and was content for the most part to dictate them to others. He has no great intellectual force, no philosophic doctrine, is limited in theme as in outlook, is curiously uncertain in his touch, often marring a fine poem with a slovenly rhyme or with a misplaced accent; and, on the only occasion when he was induced to revise a set of proofs, his alterations were nearly all for the worse. And yet, though he never appealed to the patriotic spirit, though he wrote nothing at all comparable in force or majesty to the restrained splendour of Os Lusiadas, the popular instinct which links his name with that of his great predecessor is eminently just. For Camoens was his model; not the Camoens of the epic, but the Camoens of the lyrics and the sonnets, where the passion of tenderness finds its supreme utterance. Braga has noted five stages of development in João de Deus's artistic life—the imitative, the idyllic, the lyric, the pessimistic and the devout phases. Under each of these divisions is included much that is of extreme interest, especially to contemporaries who have passed through the same succession of emotional experience, and it is highly probable that Caturras and Gaspar, pieces as witty as anything in Bocage but free from Bocage's coarse impiety, will always interest literary students. But it is as the singer of love that João de Deus will delight posterity as he delighted his own generation. The elegiac music of Rachel and of Marina, the melancholy of Adeus and of Remoinho, the tenderness and sincerity of Meu casta lirio, of Lagrima celeste, of Descalça and a score more songs are distinguished by the large, vital simplicity which withstands time. It is precisely in the quality of unstudied simplicity that João de Deus is incomparably strong. The temptations to a display of virtuosity are almost irresistible for a Portuguese poet; he has the tradition of virtuosity in his blood, he has before him the example of all contemporaries, and he has at hand an instrument of wonderful sonority and compass. Yet not once is João de Deus clamorous or rhetorical, not once does he indulge in idle ornament. His prevailing note is that of exquisite sweetness and of reverent purity; yet with all his caressing softness he is never sentimental, and, though he has not the strength for a long fight, emotion has seldom been set to more delicate music. Had he included among his other gifts the gift of selection, had he continued the poetic discipline of his youth instead of dedicating his powers to a task which, well as he performed it, might have been done no less well by a much lesser man, there is scarcely any height to which he might not have risen.
Next to Camoens and maybe Garrett, no Portuguese poet has been more widely read or deeply admired than João de Deus; yet no poet anywhere has been more indifferent to public opinion and more carefree about personal fame. He didn't oversee any edition of his poems, which were compiled by well-meaning but misinformed fans who credited him with verses he hadn’t written; he kept no copies of his work, rarely bothered to write them down himself, and mostly dictated them to others. He lacks great intellectual depth or a philosophical stance, is limited in both themes and perspective, is oddly inconsistent in his execution, often ruining a beautiful poem with a careless rhyme or a misplaced accent; and on the one occasion he was persuaded to revise a set of proofs, his changes were mostly for the worse. Yet, even though he never tapped into patriotic sentiment and wrote nothing that matched the powerful beauty of Os Lusiadas, the popular feeling that links his name with that of his great predecessor is completely valid. For Camoens was his inspiration; not the Camoens of the epic, but the Camoens of the lyrics and sonnets, where the passion of tenderness truly shines. Braga has identified five stages in João de Deus's artistic journey—the imitative, the idyllic, the lyric, the pessimistic, and the devout phases. Each of these categories includes much that is of great interest, particularly for contemporaries who have experienced similar emotions, and it's very likely that Caturras and Gaspar, pieces as witty as anything by Bocage but lacking Bocage's rough irreverence, will always captivate literary scholars. But it's as a love poet that João de Deus will continue to enchant future generations just as he did his own. The elegiac beauty of Rachel and Marina, the sorrow in Adeus and Remoinho, the warmth and honesty of Meu casta lirio, Lagrima celeste, Descalça, and many other songs are marked by a broad, vital simplicity that endures through time. It’s precisely in this quality of effortless simplicity that João de Deus excels. The urge to show off virtuosity is almost irresistible for a Portuguese poet; he has the legacy of virtuosity in his veins, he sees the examples of his contemporaries, and he has access to an instrument with incredible sound and range. Yet not once does João de Deus come off as loud or overly dramatic, nor does he indulge in unnecessary embellishments. His prevailing tone is one of exquisite sweetness and respectful purity; however, with all his gentle softness, he is never sentimental, and though he may not have the stamina for a long struggle, emotion has rarely been captured in more delicate music. If he had included the skill of selection among his other talents, and if he had continued the poetic discipline of his youth instead of focusing his efforts on a task that, while well done, could have been managed just as well by someone less capable, there’s hardly any limit to how high he could have soared.
See also Maxime Formont, Le Mouvement poétique contemporain en Portugal (Lyon, 1892).
See also Maxime Formont, Le Mouvement poétique contemporain en Portugal (Lyon, 1892).
DEUTERONOMY, the name of one of the books of the Old Testament. This book was long the storm-centre of Pentateuchal criticism, orthodox scholars boldly asserting that any who questioned its Mosaic authorship reduced it to the level of a pious fraud. But Biblical facts have at last triumphed over tradition, and the non-Mosaic authorship of Deuteronomy is now a commonplace of criticism. It is still instructive, however, to note the successive phases through which scholarly opinion regarding the composition and date of his book has passed.
DEUTERONOMY, the name of one of the books in the Old Testament. This book has long been the center of debate surrounding the Pentateuch, with traditional scholars confidently claiming that anyone who questioned its authorship by Moses was undermining its integrity. However, factual evidence from the Bible has finally prevailed over tradition, and the idea that Deuteronomy was not written by Moses is now widely accepted in critical circles. It remains useful, though, to observe the different stages of scholarly opinion regarding the composition and date of this book.
In the 17th century the characteristics which so clearly mark off Deuteronomy from the other four books of the Pentateuch were frankly recognized, but the most advanced critics of that age were inclined to pronounce it the earliest and most authentic of the five. In the beginning of the 19th century de Wette startled the religious world by declaring that Deuteronomy, so far from being Mosaic, was not known till the time of Josiah. This theory he founded on 2 Kings xxii.; and ever since, this chapter has been one of the recognized foci of Biblical criticism. The only other single chapter of the Bible which is responsible for having brought about a somewhat similar revolution in critical opinion is Ezek. xliv. From this chapter, some seventy years after de Wette's discovery, Wellhausen with equal acumen inferred that Leviticus was not known to Ezekiel, the priest, and therefore could not have been in existence in his day; for had Leviticus been the recognized Law-book of his nation Ezekiel could not have represented as a degradation the very position which that Law-book described as a special honour conferred on the Levites by Yahweh himself. Hence Leviticus, so far from belonging to an earlier stratum of the Pentateuch than Deuteronomy, as de Wette thought, must belong to a much later stratum, and be at least exilic, if not post-exilic.
In the 17th century, the distinct features that set Deuteronomy apart from the other four books of the Pentateuch were openly acknowledged, but the most progressive critics of that time tended to view it as the earliest and most authentic of the five. At the start of the 19th century, de Wette shocked the religious community by claiming that Deuteronomy, far from being written by Moses, was not known until the time of Josiah. He based this theory on 2 Kings xxii., and since then, this chapter has become one of the key focal points of Biblical criticism. The only other single chapter of the Bible that has led to a somewhat similar shift in critical perspective is Ezek. xliv. From this chapter, about seventy years after de Wette's revelation, Wellhausen, with similar insight, concluded that Leviticus was not known to Ezekiel, the priest, and therefore could not have existed in his time; if Leviticus had been the recognized law of his people, Ezekiel wouldn't have portrayed the very status that the Law described as a special honor given to the Levites by Yahweh as a degradation. Thus, far from belonging to an earlier layer of the Pentateuch than Deuteronomy, as de Wette suggested, Leviticus must belong to a much later layer and be at least exilic, if not post-exilic.
The title "Deuteronomy" is due to a mistranslation by the Septuagint of the clause in chap. xvii. 18, rendered "and he shall write out for himself this Deuteronomy." The Hebrew really means "and he [the king] shall write out for himself a copy of this law," where there is not the slightest suggestion that the author intended to describe "this law" delivered on the plains of Moab as a second code in contradistinction to the first code given on Sinai thirty-eight years earlier. Moreover the phrase "this law" is so ambiguous as to raise a much greater difficulty than that caused by the Greek mistranslation of the Hebrew word for "copy." How much does "this law" include? It was long supposed to mean the whole of our present Deuteronomy; indeed, it is on that supposition that the traditional view of the Mosaic authorship is based. But the context alone can determine the question; and that is often so ambiguous that a sure inference is impossible. We may safely assert, however, that nowhere need "this law" mean the whole book. In fact, it invariably means very much less, and sometimes, as in xxvii. 3, 8, so little that it could all be engraved in large letters on a few plastered stones set up beside an altar.
The title "Deuteronomy" comes from a mistranslation by the Septuagint of the phrase in chap. xvii. 18, translated as "and he shall write out for himself this Deuteronomy." The Hebrew actually means "and he [the king] shall write out for himself a copy of this law," and there’s no indication that the author meant to describe "this law" given on the plains of Moab as a second code in contrast to the first code given on Sinai thirty-eight years earlier. Additionally, the phrase "this law" is so unclear that it creates a bigger problem than the Greek mistranslation of the Hebrew word for "copy." What exactly does "this law" cover? For a long time, it was thought to refer to the entirety of our current Deuteronomy; indeed, this assumption underpins the traditional view of Mosaic authorship. But only the context can really answer that question, and often it’s so ambiguous that a definitive conclusion is impossible. However, we can confidently say that "this law" does not mean the whole book anywhere. In fact, it usually means much less, and sometimes, as in xxvii. 3, 8, it’s so little that it could all be engraved in large letters on a few plastered stones set up beside an altar.
Deuteronomy is not the work of any single writer but the result of a long process of development. The fact that it is legislative as well as hortatory is enough to prove this, for most of the laws it contains are found elsewhere in the Pentateuch, sometimes in less developed, sometimes in more developed forms, a fact which is conclusive proof of prolonged historical development. According to the all-pervading law of evolution, the less complex form must have preceded the more complex. Still, the book does bear the stamp of one master-mind. Its style is as easily recognized as that of Deutero-Isaiah, being as remarkable for its copious diction as for its depths of moral and religious feeling.
Deuteronomy wasn't written by just one person; instead, it came together through a long process of development. The fact that it includes both laws and encouragement is proof of this, as many of the laws it contains can also be found in other parts of the Pentateuch, sometimes in simpler terms and sometimes in more complex ones. This clearly shows that it underwent a long historical evolution. Following the universal law of evolution, the simpler forms must have existed before the more complex ones. Still, the book definitely reflects the influence of a single mastermind. Its style is as recognizable as that of Deutero-Isaiah, notable for its rich vocabulary and deep moral and religious sentiments.
The original Deuteronomy, D, read to King Josiah, cannot have been so large as our present book, for not only could it be read at a single sitting, but it could be easily read twice in one day. On the day it was found, Shaphan first read it himself, and then went to the king and read it aloud to him. But perhaps the most conclusive proof of its brevity is that it was read publicly to the assembled people immediately before they, as well as their king, pledged themselves to obey it; and not a word is said as to the task of reading it aloud, so as to be heard by such a great multitude, being long or difficult.
The original Deuteronomy, D, that was read to King Josiah, couldn’t have been as lengthy as our current version because it could be read in one sitting and even easily read twice in a single day. On the day it was discovered, Shaphan read it to himself first and then went to the king and read it out loud to him. However, perhaps the strongest evidence of its shortness is that it was read publicly to the gathered people right before they and their king committed to obey it; and there’s no mention of it being a lengthy or difficult task to read it aloud for such a large crowd.
The legislative part of D consists of fifteen chapters (xii.-xxvi.), which, however, contain many later insertions. But the impression made upon Josiah by what he heard was far too deep to have been produced by the legislative part alone. The king must have listened to the curses as well as the blessings in chap, xxviii., and [Page 118] no doubt also to the exhortations in chaps. v.-xi. Hence we may conclude that the original book consisted of a central mass of religious, civil and social laws, preceded by a hortatory introduction and followed by an effective peroration. The book read to Josiah must therefore have comprised most of what is found in Deut. v.-xxvi., xxvii. 9, 10 and xxviii. But something like two centuries elapsed before the book reached its present form, for in the closing chapter, as well as elsewhere, e.g. i. 41-43 (where the joining is not so deftly done as usual) and xxxii. 48-52, there are undoubted traces of the Priestly Code, P, which is generally acknowledged to be post-exilic.
The legislative section of D has fifteen chapters (xii.-xxvi.), which include several later additions. However, the impact on Josiah from what he heard was much too significant to be caused by the legislative section alone. The king must have also heard the curses and blessings in chapter xxviii., and likely the exhortations in chapters v.-xi. Therefore, we can conclude that the original book consisted of a core set of religious, civil, and social laws, preceded by an encouraging introduction and followed by a powerful conclusion. The book that Josiah listened to must have included most of what is found in Deut. v.-xxvi., xxvii. 9, 10, and xxviii. However, about two centuries passed before the book reached its current form, as indicated in the final chapter, as well as in other places, like i. 41-43 (where the transitions are not as seamless as usual) and xxxii. 48-52, which show clear signs of the Priestly Code, P, that is generally recognized as post-exilic.
The following is an analysis of the main divisions of the book as we now have it. There are two introductions, the first i.-iv. 44, more historical than hortatory; the second v.-xi., more hortatory than historical. These may at first have been prefixed to separate editions of the legislative portion, but were eventually combined. Then, before D was united to P, five appendices of very various dates and embracing poetry as well as prose, were added so as to give a fuller account of the last days of Moses and thus lead up to the narrative of his death with which the book closes. (1) Chap. xxvii., where the elders of Israel are introduced for the first time as acting along with Moses (xxvii. 1) and then the priests, the Levites (xxvii. 9). Some of the curses refer to laws given not in D but in Lev. xxx., so that the date of this chapter must be later than Leviticus or at any rate than the laws codified in the Law of Holiness (Lev. xvii.-xxvi.). (2) The second appendix, chaps, xxix.-xxxi. 29, xxxii. 45-47, gives us the farewell address of Moses and is certainly later than D. Moses is represented as speaking not with any hope of preventing Israel's apostasy but because he knows that the people will eventually prove apostate (xxxi. 29), a point of view very different from D's. (3) The Song of Moses, chap. xxxii. That this didactic poem must have been written late in the nation's history, and not at its very beginning, is evident from v. 7: "Remember the days of old, Consider the years of many generations." Such words cannot be interpreted so as to fit the lips of Moses. It must have been composed in a time of natural gloom and depression, after Yahweh's anger had been provoked by "a very froward generation," certainly not before the Assyrian Empire had loomed up against the political horizon, aggressive and menacing. Some critics bring the date down even to the time of Jeremiah and Ezekiel. (4) The Blessing of Moses, chap, xxxiii. The first line proves that this poem is not by D, who speaks invariably of Horeb, never of Sinai. The situation depicted is in striking contrast with that of the Song. Everything is bright because of promises fulfilled, and the future bids fair to be brighter still. Bruston maintains with reason that the Blessing, strictly so called, consists only of vv. 6-25, and has been inserted in a Psalm celebrating the goodness of Jehovah to his people on their entrance into Canaan (vv. 1-5, 26-29). The special prominence given to Joseph (Ephraim and Manasseh) in vv. 13-17 has led many critics to assign this poem to the time of the greatest warrior-king of Northern Israel, Jeroboam II. (5) The account of Moses' death, chap. xxxiv. This appendix, containing, as it does, manifest traces of P, proves that even Deuteronomy was not put into its present form until after the exile.
The following is an analysis of the main sections of the book as we have it now. There are two introductions: the first (i.-iv. 44) is more historical than motivational, while the second (v.-xi.) leans more towards motivation than history. Initially, these may have been added to different editions of the legislative part, but they were later combined. Then, before D was joined with P, five appendices of varying dates, including both poetry and prose, were added to provide a fuller account of Moses’ final days, leading up to the narrative of his death, which concludes the book. (1) Chapter 27 introduces the elders of Israel for the first time as they work alongside Moses (27:1), followed by the priests and Levites (27:9). Some of the curses reference laws given not in D, but in Leviticus 30, indicating that the date of this chapter must be later than Leviticus, or at least later than the laws in the Law of Holiness (Lev. 17-26). (2) The second appendix, chapters 29-31:29 and 32:45-47, contains Moses’ farewell address and is certainly later than D. Moses is portrayed as speaking not in hopes of stopping Israel's rebellion, but because he knows the people will eventually betray their faith (31:29), which is a very different perspective from D’s. (3) The Song of Moses, chapter 32, indicates that this teaching poem was written late in the nation's history, not at its very beginning, as evidenced by verse 7: "Remember the days of old, consider the years of many generations." Such expressions cannot logically come from Moses’ mouth. It must have been created during a time of significant despair and turmoil, after Yahweh's anger was stirred by "a very stubborn generation," certainly not before the Assyrian Empire posed a looming threat. Some critics suggest it might date even to the time of Jeremiah and Ezekiel. (4) The Blessing of Moses, chapter 33. The opening line indicates that this poem was not written by D, who always refers to Horeb, never Sinai. The situation described here sharply contrasts with that in the Song. Everything appears bright because of promises fulfilled, and the future seems even brighter. Bruston reasonably argues that the Blessing, strictly speaking, consists only of verses 6-25, and has been included in a Psalm celebrating Jehovah's goodness to His people as they enter Canaan (verses 1-5, 26-29). The emphasis on Joseph (Ephraim and Manasseh) in verses 13-17 has led many critics to associate this poem with the time of Jeroboam II, the greatest warrior king of Northern Israel. (5) The account of Moses’ death, chapter 34. This appendix, which shows clear signs of P, indicates that even Deuteronomy was not finalized until after the exile.
From the many coincidences between D and the Book of the Covenant (Ex. xx.-xxiii.) it is clear that D was acquainted with E, the prophetic narrative of the Northern kingdom; but it is not quite clear whether D knew E as an independent work, or after its combination with J, the somewhat earlier prophetic narrative of the Southern kingdom, the combined form of which is now indicated by the symbol JE. Kittel certainly puts it too strongly when he asserts that D quotes always from E and never from J, for some of the passages alluded to in D may just as readily be ascribed to J as to E, cf. Deut. i. 7 and Gen. xv. 18; Deut. x. 14 and Ex. xxxiv. 1-4. Consequently D must have been written certainly after E and possibly after E was combined with J.
From the many coincidences between D and the Book of the Covenant (Ex. xx.-xxiii.), it's clear that D was familiar with E, the prophetic narrative of the Northern kingdom. However, it's uncertain whether D knew E as an independent work or after it was merged with J, the somewhat earlier prophetic narrative of the Southern kingdom, which is now indicated by the symbol JE. Kittel definitely overstates the case when he claims that D always quotes from E and never from J, because some of the references in D could easily be attributed to J as well as to E, see Deut. i. 7 and Gen. xv. 18; Deut. x. 14 and Ex. xxxiv. 1-4. Therefore, D must have been written after E and possibly after E was combined with J.
In Amos, Hosea and Isaiah there are no traces of D's ideas, whereas in Jeremiah and Ezekiel their influence is everywhere manifest. Hence this school of thought arose between the age of Isaiah and that of Jeremiah; but how long D itself may have been in existence before it was read in 622 to Josiah cannot be determined with certainty. Many argue that D was written immediately before it was found and that, in fact, it was put into the temple for the purpose of being "found." This theory gives some plausibility to the charge that the book is a pious fraud. But the narrative in 2 Kings xxii. warrants no such inference. The more natural explanation is that it was written not in the early years of Josiah's reign, and with the cognizance of the temple priests then in office, but some time during the long reign of Manasseh, probably when his policy was most reactionary and when he favoured the worship of the "host of heaven" and set up altars to strange gods in Jerusalem itself. This explains why the author did not publish his work immediately, but placed it where he hoped it would be safely preserved till opportunity should arise for its publication. One need not suppose that he actually foresaw how favourable that opportunity would prove, and that, as soon as discovered, his work would be promulgated as law by the king and willingly accepted by the people. The author believed that everything he wrote was in full accordance with the mind of Moses, and would contribute to the national weal of Yahweh's covenant people, and therefore he did not scruple to represent Moses as the speaker. It is not to be expected that modern scholars should be able to fix the exact year or even decade in which such a book was written. It is enough to determine with something like probability the century or half-century which best fits its historical data; and these appear to point to the reign of Manasseh.
In Amos, Hosea, and Isaiah, there are no signs of D's ideas, while in Jeremiah and Ezekiel, their influence is clearly evident. This school of thought emerged between the time of Isaiah and Jeremiah; however, we can't say for sure how long D existed before it was read to Josiah in 622. Many believe that D was written right before it was found and that it was purposely placed in the temple to be "discovered." This idea lends some credibility to the claim that the book is a pious fraud. But the story in 2 Kings xxii doesn't support that inference. A more logical explanation is that it was written not during the early years of Josiah's reign with the knowledge of the temple priests at that time, but sometime during the long reign of Manasseh, likely when his policies were most reactionary and he encouraged the worship of the "host of heaven" and erected altars to foreign gods in Jerusalem. This explains why the author didn't publish his work right away, but instead left it where he hoped it would be safely kept until the right moment for publication. One shouldn't assume he could foresee how favorable that moment would be, or that once discovered, his work would immediately become law under the king and be eagerly accepted by the people. The author believed that everything he wrote aligned perfectly with Moses's intentions and would benefit Yahweh's covenant people, so he had no hesitation in presenting Moses as the speaker. It’s unrealistic to expect modern scholars to pinpoint the exact year or even decade when such a book was written. It suffices to identify with some degree of probability the century or half-century that best aligns with its historical context, which seems to indicate the reign of Manasseh.
Between D and P there are no verbal parallels; but in the historical résumés JE is followed closely, whole clauses and even verses being copied practically verbatim. As Dr Driver points out in his careful analysis, there are only three facts in D which are not also found in JE, viz. the number of the spies, the number of souls that went down into Egypt with Jacob, and the ark being made of acacia wood. But even these may have been in J or E originally, and left out when JE was combined with P. Steuernagel divides the legal as well as the hortatory parts of D between two authors, one of whom uses the 2nd person plural when addressing Israel, and the other the 2nd person singular; but as a similar alternation is constantly found in writings universally acknowledged to be by the same author, this clue seems anything but trustworthy, depending as it does on the presence or absence of a single Hebrew letter, and resulting, as it frequently does, in the division of verses which otherwise seem to be from the same pen (cf. xx. 2). The inference as to diversity of authorship is much more conclusive when difference of standpoint can be proved, cf. v. 3, xi. 2 ff. with viii. 2. The first two passages represent Moses as addressing the generation that was alive at Horeb, whereas the last represents him as speaking to those who were about to pass over Jordan a full generation later; and it may well be that the one author may, in the historical and hortatory parts, have preferred the 2nd plural and the other the 2nd singular; without the further inference being justified that every law in which the 2nd singular is used must be assigned to the latter, and every law in which the 2nd plural occurs must be due to the former.
Between D and P, there are no verbal similarities; however, in the historical summaries, JE closely follows, with whole clauses and even verses being copied almost word for word. As Dr. Driver points out in his detailed analysis, there are only three facts in D that aren’t also found in JE: the number of the spies, the number of people who went down into Egypt with Jacob, and the ark being made of acacia wood. But even these might have originally been in J or E and were left out when JE was combined with P. Steuernagel divides the legal and motivational parts of D between two authors, one of whom uses the 2nd person plural when addressing Israel, and the other the 2nd person singular; however, since a similar alternation is often found in writings universally recognized as by the same author, this hint seems unreliable, depending on the presence or absence of a single Hebrew letter, and often resulting in verses that otherwise seem to be written by the same person (cf. xx. 2). The conclusion about different authorship is much more convincing when differences in perspective can be demonstrated, cf. v. 3, xi. 2 ff. with viii. 2. The first two passages show Moses addressing the generation that was present at Horeb, while the last shows him speaking to those who were about to cross the Jordan a full generation later; and it’s possible that one author may have preferred the 2nd plural in the historical and motivational sections, while the other preferred the 2nd singular; without the further assumption being justified that every law using the 2nd singular must be assigned to the latter, and every law using the 2nd plural must be attributed to the former.
The law of the Single Sanctuary, one of D's outstanding characteristics, is, for him, an innovation, but an innovation towards which events had long been tending. 2 Kings xxiii. 9 shows that even the zeal of Josiah could not carry out the instructions laid down in D xviii. 6-8. Josiah's acceptance of D made it the first canonical book of scripture. Thus the religion of Judah became henceforward a religion which enabled its adherents to learn from a book exactly what was required of them. D requires the destruction not only of the high places and the idols, but of the Asheras (wooden posts) and the Mazzebas (stone pillars) often set up beside the altar of Jehovah (xvi. 21). These reforms made too heavy demands upon the people, as was proved by the reaction which set in at Josiah's death. Indeed the country people would look on the destruction of the high places with their Asheras and Mazzebas as sacrilege and would consider Josiah's death in battle as a divine punishment for his [Page 119] sacrilegious deeds. On the other hand, the destruction of Jerusalem and the exile of the people would appear to those who had obeyed D's instructions as a well-merited punishment for national apostasy.
The law of the Single Sanctuary, one of D's standout features, was an innovation for him, but it was an idea that events had been moving towards for a long time. 2 Kings xxiii. 9 shows that even Josiah's strong commitment couldn't fully implement the guidelines outlined in D xviii. 6-8. Josiah's acceptance of D made it the first official book of scripture. From that point on, the religion of Judah allowed its followers to clearly understand what was expected of them through a book. D demanded the destruction not just of the high places and idols, but also of the Asheras (wooden posts) and Mazzebas (stone pillars) often placed next to the altar of Jehovah (xvi. 21). These reforms were too much for the people, as demonstrated by the backlash that occurred after Josiah's death. In fact, rural people viewed the destruction of the high places with their Asheras and Mazzebas as sacrilege and considered Josiah's death in battle to be a divine punishment for his sacrilegious actions. Conversely, the destruction of Jerusalem and the exile of the people would seem to those who followed D's instructions as a deserved punishment for national disloyalty.
Moreover, D regarded religion as of the utmost moment to each individual Israelite; and it is certainly not by accident that the declaration of the individual's duty towards God immediately follows the emphatic intimation to Israel of Yahweh's unity. "Hear, O Israel, Yahweh is our God, Yahweh is one: and thou shalt love Yahweh thy God with all thine heart and with all thy soul and with all thy strength" (vi. 4, 5).
Moreover, D saw religion as extremely important for every individual Israelite; and it’s no coincidence that the statement about each person's duty to God comes right after the strong reminder to Israel about Yahweh's oneness. "Listen, Israel, Yahweh is our God, Yahweh is one: and you shall love Yahweh your God with all your heart and with all your soul and with all your strength" (vi. 4, 5).
In estimating the religious value of Deuteronomy it should never be forgotten that upon this passage the greatest eulogy ever pronounced on any scripture was pronounced by Christ himself, when he said "on these words hang all the law and the prophets," and it is also well to remember that when tempted in the wilderness he repelled each suggestion of the Tempter by a quotation from Deuteronomy.
In assessing the religious significance of Deuteronomy, it should always be remembered that the highest praise ever given to any scripture came from Christ himself when he said, "on these words hang all the law and the prophets." It's also important to note that when he was tempted in the wilderness, he countered each temptation from the Tempter with a quote from Deuteronomy.
Nevertheless even such a writer as D could not escape the influence of the age and atmosphere in which he lived; and despite the spirit of love which breathes so strongly throughout the book, especially for the poor, the widow and the fatherless, the stranger and the homeless Levite (xxiv. 10-22), and the humanity shown towards both beasts and birds (xxii. 1, 4, 6 f., xxv. 4), there are elements in D which go far to explain the intense exclusiveness and the religious intolerance characteristic of Judaism. Should a man's son or friend dear to him as his own soul seek to tempt him from the faith of his fathers, D's pitiless order to that man is "Thou shalt surely kill him; thine hand shall be first upon him to put him to death." From this single instance we see not only how far mankind has travelled along the path of religious toleration since Deuteronomy was written, but also how very far the criticism implied in Christ's method of dealing with what "was said to them of old time" may be legitimately carried.
Nevertheless, even a writer like D couldn't escape the influence of the time and environment he lived in; and despite the spirit of love that runs strongly throughout the book, especially for the poor, the widow, the fatherless, the stranger, and the homeless Levite (xxiv. 10-22), as well as the compassion shown towards both beasts and birds (xxii. 1, 4, 6 f., xxv. 4), there are aspects in D that help explain the intense exclusiveness and the religious intolerance typical of Judaism. If a man's son or a dear friend tries to lead him away from the faith of his ancestors, D's harsh command to that person is, "You shall surely kill him; your hand shall be first upon him to put him to death." From this single example, we can see not only how far humanity has progressed towards religious tolerance since Deuteronomy was written but also how extensively the criticism implied in Christ's way of addressing what "was said to them of old time" can be rightfully applied.
DEUTSCH, IMMANUEL OSCAR MENAHEM (1829-1873), German oriental scholar, was born on the 28th of October 1829, at Neisse in Prussian Silesia, of Jewish extraction. On reaching his sixteenth year he began his studies at the university of Berlin, paying special attention to theology and the Talmud. He also mastered the English language and studied English literature. In 1855 Deutsch was appointed assistant in the library of the British Museum. He worked intensely on the Talmud and contributed no less than 190 papers to Chambers's Encyclopaedia, in addition to essays in Kitto's and Smith's Biblical Dictionaries, and articles in periodicals. In October 1867 his article on "The Talmud," published in the Quarterly Review, made him known. It was translated into French, German, Russian, Swedish, Dutch and Danish. He died at Alexandria on the 12th of May 1873.
DEUTSCH, IMMANUEL OSCAR MENAHEM (1829-1873), a German oriental scholar, was born on October 28, 1829, in Neisse, Prussian Silesia, into a Jewish family. At the age of sixteen, he started his studies at the University of Berlin, focusing on theology and the Talmud. He also became fluent in English and studied English literature. In 1855, Deutsch was appointed as an assistant in the library of the British Museum. He worked diligently on the Talmud and contributed over 190 papers to Chambers's Encyclopaedia, along with essays in Kitto's and Smith's Biblical Dictionaries, and articles in various periodicals. In October 1867, his article on "The Talmud," published in the Quarterly Review, brought him recognition. It was translated into French, German, Russian, Swedish, Dutch, and Danish. He passed away in Alexandria on May 12, 1873.
His Literary Remains, edited by Lady Strangford, were published in 1874, consisting of nineteen papers on such subjects as "The Talmud," "Islam," "Semitic Culture," "Egypt, Ancient and Modern," "Semitic Languages," "The Targums," "The Samaritan Pentateuch," and "Arabic Poetry."
His Literary Remains, edited by Lady Strangford, were published in 1874, consisting of nineteen papers on topics like "The Talmud," "Islam," "Semitic Culture," "Ancient and Modern Egypt," "Semitic Languages," "The Targums," "The Samaritan Pentateuch," and "Arabic Poetry."
DEUTSCHKRONE, a town of Germany, kingdom of Prussia, between the two lakes of Arens and Radau, 15 m. N.W. of Schneidemühl, a railway junction 60 m. north of Posen. Pop. (1905) 7282. It is the seat of the public offices for the district, possesses an Evangelical and a Roman Catholic church, a synagogue, and a gymnasium established in the old Jesuit college, and has manufactures of machinery, woollens, tiles, brandy and beer.
DEUTSCHKRONE, a town in Germany, in the kingdom of Prussia, located between the two lakes of Arens and Radau, 15 miles northwest of Schneidemühl, is a railway junction 60 miles north of Posen. The population (1905) was 7,282. It serves as the administrative center for the district and has an Evangelical church, a Roman Catholic church, a synagogue, and a gymnasium established in the old Jesuit college. The town also has manufacturing industries that produce machinery, woolen goods, tiles, brandy, and beer.
DEUTZ (anc. Divitio), formerly an independent town of Germany, in the Prussian Rhine Province, on the right bank of the Rhine, opposite to Cologne, with which it has been incorporated since 1888. It contains the church of St Heribert, built in the 17th century, cavalry barracks, artillery magazines, and gas, porcelain, machine and carriage factories. It has a handsome railway station on the banks of the Rhine, negotiating the local traffic with Elberfeld and Königswinter. The fortifications of the town form part of the defences of Cologne. To the east is the manufacturing suburb of Kalk.
DEUTZ (previously
The old castle in Deutz was in 1002 made a Benedictine monastery by Heribert, archbishop of Cologne. Permission to fortify the town was in 1230 granted to the citizens by the archbishop of Cologne, between whom and the counts of Berg it was in 1240 divided. It was burnt in 1376, 1445 and 1583; and in 1678, after the peace of Nijmwegen, the fortifications were dismantled; rebuilt in 1816, they were again razed in 1888.
The old castle in Deutz was turned into a Benedictine monastery in 1002 by Heribert, the archbishop of Cologne. In 1230, the archbishop gave the citizens permission to fortify the town. In 1240, the land was divided between the archbishop of Cologne and the counts of Berg. The castle was burned down in 1376, 1445, and 1583; then in 1678, after the peace of Nijmwegen, the fortifications were taken down. They were rebuilt in 1816 but were destroyed again in 1888.
DEUX-SÈVRES, an inland department of western France, formed in 1790 mainly of the three districts of Poitou, Thouarsais, Gâtine and Niortais, added to a small portion of Saintonge and a still smaller portion of Aunis. Area, 2337 sq. m. Pop. (1906) 339,466. It is bounded N. by Maine-et-Loire, E. by Vienne, S.E. by Charente, S. by Charente-Inférieure and W. by Vendée. The department takes its name from two rivers—the Sèvre of Niort which traverses the southern portion, and the Sèvre of Nantes (an affluent of the Loire) which drains the north-west. There are three regions—the Gâtine, occupying the north and centre of the department, the Plaine in the south and the Marais,—distinguished by their geological character and their general physical appearance. The Gâtine, formed of primitive rocks (granite and schists), is the continuation of the "Bocage" of Vendée and Maine-et-Loire. Its surface is irregular and covered with hedges and clumps of wood or forests. The systematic application of lime has much improved the soil, which is naturally poor. The Plaine, resting on oolite limestone, is treeless but fertile. The Marais, a low-lying district in the extreme southwest, consists of alluvial clays which also are extremely productive when properly drained. The highest points, several of which exceed 700 ft., are found in a line of hills which begins in the centre of the department, to the south of Parthenay, and stretches north-west into the neighbouring department of Vendée. It divides the region drained by the Sèvre Nantaise and the Thouet (both affluents of the Loire) in the north from the basins of the Sèvre Niortaise and the Charente in the south. The climate is mild, the annual temperature at Niort being 54° Fahr., and the rainfall nearly 25 in. The winters are colder in the Gâtine, the summers warmer in the Plaine.
DEUX-SÈVRES, an inland department in western France, was established in 1790 primarily from the three districts of Poitou, Thouarsais, Gâtine, and Niortais, along with a small part of Saintonge and an even smaller part of Aunis. Its area is 2,337 sq. m. Population (1906) was 339,466. It is bordered to the north by Maine-et-Loire, to the east by Vienne, to the southeast by Charente, to the south by Charente-Inférieure, and to the west by Vendée. The department gets its name from two rivers—the Sèvre of Niort, which flows through the southern part, and the Sèvre of Nantes (a tributary of the Loire), which drains the northwest. There are three regions: the Gâtine, which occupies the north and center of the department; the Plaine in the south; and the Marais, distinguished by their geological characteristics and overall physical appearance. The Gâtine, made up of primitive rocks (granite and schists), continues the "Bocage" of Vendée and Maine-et-Loire. Its terrain is uneven and covered with hedges and clusters of trees or forests. The regular use of lime has greatly improved the naturally poor soil. The Plaine, resting on oolitic limestone, lacks trees but is fertile. The Marais, a low area in the extreme southwest, consists of alluvial clay, which can be highly productive when properly drained. The highest points, several of which exceed 700 ft., are found in a range of hills that starts in the center of the department, just south of Parthenay, and stretches northwest into the neighboring department of Vendée. This range separates the region drained by the Sèvre Nantaise and the Thouet (both tributaries of the Loire) in the north from the basins of the Sèvre Niortaise and the Charente in the south. The climate is mild, with an annual temperature of 54° F at Niort and about 25 in. of rainfall. Winters are colder in the Gâtine, while summers are warmer in the Plaine.
Three-quarters of the entire area of Deux-Sèvres, which is primarily an agricultural department, consists of arable land. Wheat and oats are the main cereals. Potatoes and mangold-wurzels are the chief root-crops. Niort is a centre for the growing Of vegetables (onions, asparagus, artichokes, &c.) and of angelica. Considerable quantities of beetroot are raised to supply the distilleries of Melle. Colza, hemp, rape and flax are also cultivated. Vineyards are numerous in the neighbourhood of Bressuire in the north, and of Niort and Melle in the south. The department is well known for the Parthenay breed of cattle and the Poitou breed of horses; and the mules reared in the southern arrondissements are much sought after both in France and in Spain. The system of co-operative dairying is practised in some localities. The apple-trees of the Gâtine and the walnut-trees of the Plaine bring a good return. Coal is mined, and the department produces building-stone and lime. A leading industry is the manufacture of textiles (serges, druggets, linen, handkerchiefs, flannels, swan-skins and knitted goods). Tanning and leather-dressing are carried on at Niort and other places, and gloves are made at Niort. Wool and cotton spinning, hat and shoe making, distilling, brewing, flour-milling and oil-refining are also main industries. The department exports cattle and sheep to Paris and Poitiers; also cereals, oils, wines, vegetables and its industrial products.
Three-quarters of the entire area of Deux-Sèvres, which is primarily an agricultural department, is made up of farmland. Wheat and oats are the main grains produced. Potatoes and mangold-wurzels are the primary root crops. Niort serves as a hub for growing vegetables like onions, asparagus, and artichokes, as well as angelica. Significant amounts of beetroot are grown to supply the distilleries in Melle. Colza, hemp, rapeseed, and flax are also farmed. There are many vineyards around Bressuire in the north and Niort and Melle in the south. The department is well-known for the Parthenay breed of cattle and the Poitou breed of horses, and the mules raised in the southern districts are highly sought after in both France and Spain. Some areas practice co-operative dairying. The apple trees in the Gâtine and the walnut trees in the Plaine yield good returns. Coal is mined, and the department produces building stone and lime. A leading industry is textile manufacturing (serges, druggets, linen, handkerchiefs, flannels, swan-skins, and knitted goods). Tanning and leatherworking are conducted in Niort and other locations, and gloves are made in Niort as well. Main industries also include wool and cotton spinning, hat and shoe production, distilling, brewing, flour milling, and oil refining. The department exports cattle and sheep to Paris and Poitiers, along with grains, oils, wines, vegetables, and its industrial products.
The Sèvre Niortaise and its tributary the Mignon furnish 19 m. of navigable waterway. The department is served by the Ouest-État railway. It contains a large proportion of Protestants, especially in the south-east. The four arrondissements are Niort, Bressuire, Melle and Parthenay; the cantons number 31, and the communes 356. Deux-Sèvres is part of the region of the IX. army corps, and of the diocese and the académie (educational circumscription) of Poitiers, where also is its court of appeal.
The Sèvre Niortaise and its tributary, the Mignon, provide 19 miles of navigable waterway. The department is connected by the Ouest-État railway. It has a significant number of Protestants, particularly in the southeast. The four districts are Niort, Bressuire, Melle, and Parthenay; there are 31 cantons and 356 communes. Deux-Sèvres is part of the IX army corps region and falls under the diocese and the academic jurisdiction of Poitiers, which also hosts its court of appeal.
Niort (the capital), Bressuire, Melle, Parthenay, St Maixent, Thouars and Oiron are the principal places in the department. Several other towns contain features of interest. Among these [Page 120] are Airvault, where there is a church of the 12th and 14th centuries which once belonged to the abbey of St Pierre, and an ancient bridge built by the monks; Celles-sur-Belle, where there is an old church rebuilt by Louis XI., and again in the 17th century; and St Jouin-de-Marnes, with a fine Romanesque church with Gothic restoration, which belonged to one of the most ancient abbeys of Gaul.
Niort (the capital), Bressuire, Melle, Parthenay, St Maixent, Thouars, and Oiron are the main towns in the department. Several other towns have interesting features as well. Among these [Page 120] are Airvault, which has a church from the 12th and 14th centuries that used to be part of the abbey of St Pierre, and an old bridge built by the monks; Celles-sur-Belle, where there’s an ancient church that was rebuilt by Louis XI and later in the 17th century; and St Jouin-de-Marnes, known for its beautiful Romanesque church with Gothic restoration, which belonged to one of the oldest abbeys in Gaul.
DEVA (Sanskrit "heavenly"), in Hindu and Buddhist mythology, spirits of the light and air, and minor deities generally beneficent. In Persian mythology, however, the word is used for evil spirits or demons. According to Zoroaster the devas were created by Ahriman.
DEVA (Sanskrit "heavenly"), in Hindu and Buddhist mythology, refers to spirits of the light and air, as well as minor deities that are generally benevolent. In Persian mythology, however, the term is used for evil spirits or demons. According to Zoroaster, the devas were created by Ahriman.
DEVA (mod. Chester), a Roman legionary fortress in Britain on the Dee. It was occupied by Roman troops about A.D. 48 and held probably till the end of the Roman dominion. Its garrison was the Legio XX. Valeria Victrix, with which another legion (II. Adjutrix) was associated for a few years, about A.D. 75-85. It never developed, like many Roman legionary fortresses, into a town, but remained military throughout. Parts of its north and east walls (from Morgan's Mount to Peppergate) and numerous inscriptions remain to indicate its character and area.
DEVA (modern Chester) was a Roman army fortress in Britain located by the Dee River. It was occupied by Roman soldiers around A.D. 48 and likely remained in use until the end of Roman rule. The garrison there was the Legio XX. Valeria Victrix, which was joined by another legion (II. Adjutrix) for a few years, around A.D. 75-85. Unlike many Roman military fortresses that evolved into towns, it stayed strictly a military site. Sections of its north and east walls (from Morgan's Mount to Peppergate) and many inscriptions still exist, showing its historical significance and layout.
See F. J. Haverfield, Catalogue of the Grosvenor Museum, Chester (Chester, 1900), Introduction.
See F. J. Haverfield, Catalogue of the Grosvenor Museum, Chester (Chester, 1900), Introduction.
DEVADATTA, the son of Suklodana, who was younger brother to the father of the Buddha (Mahāvastu, iii. 76). Both he and his brother Ānanda, who were considerably younger than the Buddha, joined the brotherhood in the twentieth year of the Buddha's ministry. Four other cousins of theirs, chiefs of the Sākiya clan, and a barber named Upāli, were admitted to the order at the same time; and at their own request the barber was admitted first, so that as their senior in the order he should take precedence of them (Vinaya Texts, iii. 228). All the others continued loyal disciples, but Devadatta, fifteen years afterwards, having gained over the crown prince of Magadha, Ajātasattu, to his side, made a formal proposition, at the meeting of the order, that the Buddha should retire, and hand over the leadership to him, Devadatta (Vinaya Texts, iii. 238; Jātaka, i. 142). This proposal was rejected, and Devadatta is said in the tradition to have successfully instigated the prince to the execution of his aged father and to have made three abortive attempts to bring about the death of the Buddha (Vinaya Texts, iii. 241-250; Jātaka, vi. 131), shortly afterwards, relying upon the feeling of the people in favour of asceticism, he brought forward four propositions for ascetic rules to be imposed on the order. These being refused, he appealed to the people, started an order of his own, and gained over 500 of the Buddha's community to join in the secession. We hear nothing further about the success or otherwise of the new order, but it may possibly be referred to under the name of the Gotamakas, in the Anguttara (see Dialogues of the Buddha i. 222), for Devadatta's family name was Gotama. But his community was certainly still in existence in the 4th century A.D., for it is especially mentioned by Fa Hien, the Chinese pilgrim (Legge's translation, p. 62). And it possibly lasted till the 7th century, for Hsüan Tsang mentions that in a monastery in Bengal the monks then followed a certain regulation of Devadatta's (T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang, ii. 191). There is no mention in the canon as to how or when Devadatta died; but the commentary on the Jātaka, written in the 5th century A.D., has preserved a tradition that he was swallowed up by the earth near Sāvatthi, when on his way to ask pardon of the Buddha (Jātaka, iv. 158). The spot where this occurred was shown to both the pilgrims just mentioned (Fa Hien, loc. cit. p. 60; and T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang, i. 390). It is a striking example of the way in which such legends grow, that it is only the latest of these authorities, Hsüan Tsang, who says that, though ostensibly approaching the Buddha with a view to reconciliation, Devadatta had concealed poison in his nail with the object of murdering the Buddha.
DEVADATTA, the son of Suklodana, who was the younger brother of the Buddha’s father (Mahāvastu, iii. 76). Both he and his brother Ānanda, who were much younger than the Buddha, joined the brotherhood in the twentieth year of the Buddha's ministry. Four other cousins of theirs, leaders of the Sākiya clan, and a barber named Upāli, were admitted to the order at the same time; and at their own request, the barber was admitted first so that, as their senior in the order, he would take precedence over them (Vinaya Texts, iii. 228). All the others remained loyal disciples, but Devadatta, fifteen years later, having won over the crown prince of Magadha, Ajātasattu, to his side, formally proposed at a meeting of the order that the Buddha should step down and give the leadership to him, Devadatta (Vinaya Texts, iii. 238; Jātaka, i. 142). This proposal was rejected, and according to tradition, Devadatta successfully incited the prince to have his elderly father executed and made three failed attempts to kill the Buddha (Vinaya Texts, iii. 241-250; Jātaka, vi. 131). Soon after, taking advantage of the people's support for asceticism, he proposed four ascetic rules to be imposed on the order. When those were refused, he appealed to the public, started his own order, and attracted over 500 members from the Buddha's community to join him in leaving. We don’t hear anything further about the success of this new order, but it might be referred to as the Gotamakas in the Anguttara (see Dialogues of the Buddha i. 222), since Devadatta's family name was Gotama. However, his community was definitely still around in the 4th century A.D., as noted by Fa Hien, the Chinese pilgrim (Legge's translation, p. 62). It possibly lasted until the 7th century, as Hsüan Tsang mentioned that in a monastery in Bengal, the monks were still following certain regulations of Devadatta's (T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang, ii. 191). There is no record in the canon regarding how or when Devadatta died; but a commentary on the Jātaka, written in the 5th century A.D., preserves a tradition that he was swallowed by the earth near Sāvatthi while on his way to seek forgiveness from the Buddha (Jātaka, iv. 158). The spot where this happened was noted by both of the aforementioned pilgrims (Fa Hien, loc. cit. p. 60; and T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang, i. 390). It's a compelling example of how such legends develop; only the most recent of these authorities, Hsüan Tsang, states that, although he appeared to be approaching the Buddha for reconciliation, Devadatta had hidden poison in his nail with the intent of murdering the Buddha.
Authorities.—Vinaya Texts, translated by Rhys Davids and H. Oldenberg (3 vols., Oxford, 1881-1885); The Jātaka, edited by V. Fausböll (7 vols., London, 1877-1897); T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang (ed. Rhys Davids and Bushell, 2 vols., London, 1904-1905); Fa Hian, translated by J. Legge (Oxford, 1886); Mahāvastu (ed. Tenant, 3 vols., Paris, 1882-1897).
Authorities.—Vinaya Texts, translated by Rhys Davids and H. Oldenberg (3 vols., Oxford, 1881-1885); The Jātaka, edited by V. Fausböll (7 vols., London, 1877-1897); T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang (ed. Rhys Davids and Bushell, 2 vols., London, 1904-1905); Fa Hian, translated by J. Legge (Oxford, 1886); Mahāvastu (ed. Tenant, 3 vols., Paris, 1882-1897).
DEVAPRAYAG (Deoprayag), a village in Tehri State of the United Provinces, India. It is situated at the spot where the rivers Alaknanda and Bhagirathi unite and form the Ganges, and as one of the five sacred confluences in the hills is a great place of pilgrimage for devout Hindus. Devaprayag stands at an elevation of 2265 ft. on the side of a hill which rises above it 800 ft. On a terrace in the upper part of the village is the temple of Raghunath, built of huge uncemented stones, pyramidical in form and capped by a white cupola.
DEVAPRAYAG (Deoprayag) is a village in Tehri State of the United Provinces, India. It's located where the Alaknanda and Bhagirathi rivers meet and form the Ganges, making it one of the five sacred confluences in the hills and an important pilgrimage site for devout Hindus. Devaprayag is at an elevation of 2,265 ft. on the side of a hill that rises 800 ft. above it. In the upper part of the village, there is a temple of Raghunath, constructed with large uncemented stones, pyramid-shaped and topped with a white dome.
DEVENS, CHARLES (1820-1891), American lawyer and jurist, was born in Charlestown, Massachusetts, on the 4th of April 1820. He graduated at Harvard College in 1838, and at the Harvard law school in 1840, and was admitted to the bar in Franklin county, Mass., where he practised from 1841 to 1849. In the year 1848 he was a Whig member of the state senate, and from 1849 to 1853 was United States marshal for Massachusetts, in which capacity he was called upon in 1851 to remand the fugitive slave, Thomas Sims, to slavery. This he felt constrained to do, much against his personal desire; and subsequently he attempted in vain to purchase Sims's freedom, and many years later appointed him to a position in the department of justice at Washington. Devens practised law at Worcester from 1853 until 1861, and throughout the Civil War served in the Federal army, becoming colonel of volunteers in July 1861 and brigadier-general of volunteers in April 1862. At the battle of Ball's Bluff (1861) he was severely wounded; he was again wounded at Fair Oaks (1862) and at Chancellorsville (1863), where he commanded a division. He later distinguished himself at Cold Harbor, and commanded a division in Grant's final campaign in Virginia (1864-65), his troops being the first to occupy Richmond after its fall. Breveted major-general in 1865, he remained in the army for a year as commander of the military district of Charleston, South Carolina. He was a judge of the Massachusetts superior court from 1867 to 1873, and was an associate justice of the supreme court of the state from 1873 to 1877, and again from 1881 to 1891. From 1877 to 1881 he was attorney-general of the United States in the cabinet of President Hayes. He died at Boston, Mass., on the 7th of January 1891.
DEVENS, CHARLES (1820-1891), American lawyer and judge, was born in Charlestown, Massachusetts, on April 4, 1820. He graduated from Harvard College in 1838 and from Harvard Law School in 1840, then was admitted to the bar in Franklin County, Mass., where he practiced from 1841 to 1849. In 1848, he served as a Whig member of the state senate, and from 1849 to 1853, he was the United States marshal for Massachusetts. In this role, he was required in 1851 to return the fugitive slave Thomas Sims to slavery, which he did reluctantly; later, he tried unsuccessfully to buy Sims's freedom and many years later appointed him to a position in the Department of Justice in Washington. Devens practiced law in Worcester from 1853 until 1861, and during the Civil War, he served in the Federal army, becoming a colonel of volunteers in July 1861 and a brigadier general of volunteers in April 1862. He was seriously wounded at the Battle of Ball's Bluff (1861), and he was wounded again at Fair Oaks (1862) and at Chancellorsville (1863), where he commanded a division. He later made a name for himself at Cold Harbor and led a division in Grant's final campaign in Virginia (1864-65), with his troops being the first to enter Richmond after its fall. He was promoted to major general in 1865 and stayed in the army for another year as commander of the military district of Charleston, South Carolina. He served as a judge on the Massachusetts Superior Court from 1867 to 1873, was an associate justice of the state supreme court from 1873 to 1877, and again from 1881 to 1891. From 1877 to 1881, he was the attorney general of the United States in President Hayes's cabinet. He passed away in Boston, Mass., on January 7, 1891.
See his Orations and Addresses, with a memoir by John Codman Ropes (Boston, 1891).
See his Orations and Addresses, with a memoir by John Codman Ropes (Boston, 1891).
DEVENTER, a town in the province of Overysel, Holland, on the right bank of the Ysel, at the confluence of the Schipbeek, and a junction station 10 m. N. of Zutphen by rail. It is also connected by steam tramway S.E. with Brokulo. Pop. (1900) 26,212. Deventer is a neat and prosperous town situated in the midst of prettily wooded environs, and containing many curious old buildings. There are three churches of special interest: the Groote Kerk (St Lebuinus), which dates from 1334, and occupies the site of an older structure of which the 11th-century crypt remains; the Roman Catholic Broederkerk, or Brothers' Church, containing among its relics three ancient gospels said to have been written by St Lebuinus (Lebwin), the English apostle of the Frisians and Westphalians (d. c. 773); and the Bergkerk, dedicated in 1206, which has two late Romanesque towers. The town hall (1693) contains a remarkable painting of the town council by Terburg. In the fine square called the Brink is the old weigh-house, now a school (gymnasium), built in 1528, with a large external staircase (1644). The gymnasium is descended from the Latin school of which the celebrated Alexander Hegius was master in the third quarter of the 15th century, when the young Erasmus was sent to it, and at which Adrian Floreizoon, afterwards Pope Adrian VI., is said to have been a pupil about the same time. Another famous educational institution was the "Athenaeum" or high school, founded in 1630, at which Henri Renery (d. 1639) taught philosophy, while Johann Friedrich Gronov (Gronovius) (1611-1671) taught rhetoric and history in the middle of the same century. The "Athenaeum" disappeared in 1876. In modern times Deventer possessed a famous teacher in Dr Burgersdyk (d. 1900), the Dutch translator of Shakespeare. The town library, also called the library of the [Page 121] Athenaeum, includes many MSS. and incunabula, and a 13th-century copy of Reynard the Fox. The archives of the town are of considerable value. Besides a considerable agricultural trade, Deventer has important iron foundries and carpet factories (the royal manufactory of Smyrna carpets being especially famous); while cotton-printing, rope-making and the weaving of woollens and silks are also carried on. A public official is appointed to supervise the proper making of a form of gingerbread known as "Deventer Koek," which has a reputation throughout Holland. In the church of Bathmen, a village 5 m. E. of Deventer, some 14th-century frescoes were discovered in 1870.
DEVENTER, a town in the province of Overijssel, Holland, located on the right bank of the Ysel River at the meeting point of the Schipbeek, is a junction station 10 miles north of Zutphen by rail. It is also connected by steam tramway southeast to Brokulo. Population (1900) was 26,212. Deventer is a tidy and thriving town set among beautiful wooded surroundings, featuring many interesting old buildings. There are three churches of particular significance: the Groote Kerk (St. Lebuinus), which dates back to 1334 and stands on the site of an earlier church, of which the 11th-century crypt still exists; the Roman Catholic Broederkerk, or Brothers' Church, which contains among its relics three ancient gospels said to have been written by St. Lebuinus (Lebwin), the English missionary to the Frisians and Westphalians (d. c. 773); and the Bergkerk, consecrated in 1206, which boasts two late Romanesque towers. The town hall, built in 1693, features a remarkable painting of the town council by Terburg. In the lovely square known as the Brink is the old weigh-house, now a school (gymnasium), built in 1528 with a large external staircase added in 1644. The gymnasium traces its origins back to the Latin school where the famous Alexander Hegius was headmaster in the latter part of the 15th century, when the young Erasmus attended, and where Adrian Floreizoon, who later became Pope Adrian VI, is said to have been a student around the same time. Another notable educational institution was the "Athenaeum" or high school, founded in 1630, where Henri Renery (d. 1639) taught philosophy, and Johann Friedrich Gronov (Gronovius) (1611-1671) taught rhetoric and history during the mid-century. The "Athenaeum" vanished in 1876. In more recent times, Deventer was home to a renowned teacher, Dr. Burgersdyk (d. 1900), the Dutch translator of Shakespeare. The town library, also known as the library of the [Page 121] Athenaeum, holds many manuscripts and incunabula, including a 13th-century copy of Reynard the Fox. The town's archives are quite valuable. In addition to a significant agricultural trade, Deventer has important iron foundries and carpet factories (the royal manufactory of Smyrna carpets is especially well-known); cotton-printing, rope-making, and the weaving of wool and silk are also important local industries. A public official is appointed to ensure the proper production of a type of gingerbread known as "Deventer Koek," which has a strong reputation throughout Holland. In the church of Bathmen, a village 5 miles east of Deventer, some 14th-century frescoes were discovered in 1870.
In the 14th century Deventer was the centre of the famous religious and educational movement associated with the name of Gerhard Groot (q.v.), who was a native of the town (see Brothers of Common Life.).
In the 14th century, Deventer was the center of the renowned religious and educational movement linked to the name of Gerhard Groot (see Brothers of Common Life), who was from the town.
DE VERE, AUBREY THOMAS (1814-1902), Irish poet and critic, was born at Curragh Chase, Co. Limerick, on the 10th of January 1814, being the third son of Sir Aubrey de Vere Hunt (1788-1846). In 1832 his father dropped the final name by royal licence. Sir Aubrey was himself a poet. Wordsworth called his sonnets the "most perfect of the age." These and his drama, Mary Tudor, were published by his son in 1875 and 1884. Aubrey de Vere was educated at Trinity College, Dublin, and in his twenty-eighth year published The Waldenses, which he followed up in the next year by The Search after Proserpine. Thenceforward he was continually engaged, till his death on the 20th of January 1902, in the production of poetry and criticism. His best-known works are: in verse, The Sisters (1861); The Infant Bridal (1864); Irish Odes (1869); Legends of St Patrick (1872); and Legends of the Saxon Saints (1879); and in prose, Essays chiefly on Poetry (1887); and Essays chiefly Literary and Ethical (1889). He also wrote a picturesque volume of travel-sketches, and two dramas in verse, Alexander the Great (1874); and St Thomas of Canterbury (1876); both of which, though they contain fine passages, suffer from diffuseness and a lack of dramatic spirit. The characteristics of Aubrey de Vere's poetry are "high seriousness" and a fine religious enthusiasm. His research in questions of faith led him to the Roman Church; and in many of his poems, notably in the volume of sonnets called St Peter's Chains (1888), he made rich additions to devotional verse. He was a disciple of Wordsworth, whose calm meditative serenity he often echoed with great felicity; and his affection for Greek poetry, truly felt and understood, gave dignity and weight to his own versions of mythological idylls. But perhaps he will be chiefly remembered for the impulse which he gave to the study of Celtic legend and literature. In this direction he has had many followers, who have sometimes assumed the appearance of pioneers; but after Matthew Arnold's fine lecture on "Celtic Literature," nothing perhaps did more to help the Celtic revival than Aubrey de Vere's tender insight into the Irish character, and his stirring reproductions of the early Irish epic poetry.
DE VERE, AUBREY THOMAS (1814-1902), Irish poet and critic, was born at Curragh Chase, Co. Limerick, on January 10, 1814, as the third son of Sir Aubrey de Vere Hunt (1788-1846). In 1832, his father dropped the final name by royal license. Sir Aubrey was also a poet. Wordsworth referred to his sonnets as the "most perfect of the age." These, along with his play, Mary Tudor, were published by his son in 1875 and 1884. Aubrey de Vere was educated at Trinity College, Dublin, and published The Waldenses when he was twenty-eight. The following year, he released The Search after Proserpine. From then on, he was constantly engaged in producing poetry and criticism until his death on January 20, 1902. His best-known works include: in verse, The Sisters (1861); The Infant Bridal (1864); Irish Odes (1869); Legends of St Patrick (1872); and Legends of the Saxon Saints (1879); and in prose, Essays chiefly on Poetry (1887); and Essays chiefly Literary and Ethical (1889). He also wrote a vivid collection of travel sketches and two dramatic works in verse, Alexander the Great (1874); and St Thomas of Canterbury (1876); both of which, despite containing some beautiful passages, are somewhat diffuse and lack dramatic spirit. The main features of Aubrey de Vere's poetry are "high seriousness" and profound religious enthusiasm. His exploration of faith led him to the Roman Church, and many of his poems, particularly the volume of sonnets called St Peter's Chains (1888), contributed significantly to devotional verse. He was a follower of Wordsworth, often echoing his serene, reflective style with great skill; his deep appreciation for Greek poetry added dignity and substance to his own versions of mythological poems. However, he is perhaps best remembered for encouraging the study of Celtic legend and literature. In this area, he inspired many successors, some of whom took on the role of pioneers; but after Matthew Arnold's insightful lecture on "Celtic Literature," nothing perhaps contributed more to the Celtic revival than Aubrey de Vere's profound understanding of the Irish character and his dynamic renditions of early Irish epic poetry.
A volume of Selections from his poems was edited in 1894 (New York and London) by G. E. Woodberry.
A collection of Selections from his poems was edited in 1894 (New York and London) by G. E. Woodberry.
DEVICE, a scheme, plan, simple mechanical contrivance; also a pattern or design, particularly an heraldic design or emblem, often combined with a motto or legend. "Device" and its doublet "devise" come from the two Old French forms devis and devise of the Latin divisa, things divided, from dividere, to separate, used in the sense of to arrange, set out, apportion. "Devise," as a substantive, is now only used as a legal term for a disposition of property by will, by a modern convention restricted to a disposition of real property, the term "bequest" being used of personalty (see Will). This use is directly due to the Medieval Latin meaning of dividere = testamento disponere. In its verbal form, "devise" is used not only in the legal sense, but also in the sense of to plan, arrange, scheme.
DEVICE, a scheme, plan, or simple mechanical device; it can also refer to a pattern or design, especially a heraldic design or emblem, often combined with a motto or slogan. "Device" and its counterpart "devise" come from the two Old French forms devis and devise of the Latin divisa, meaning things divided, from dividere, to separate, used in the sense of arranging, setting out, or apportioning. "Devise," as a noun, is now only used as a legal term for the distribution of property through a will, conventionally restricted to real property, with "bequest" used for personal property (see Will). This usage comes directly from the Medieval Latin meaning of dividere = testamento disponere. In its verb form, "devise" is used not just in a legal sense, but also to mean to plan, arrange, or scheme.
DEVIL (Gr. διάβολος, "slanderer," from διαβάλλειν, to slander), the generic name for a spirit of evil, especially the supreme spirit of evil, the foe of God and man. The word is used for minor evil spirits in much the same sense as "demon." From the various characteristics associated with this idea, the term has come to be applied by analogy in many different senses. From the idea of evil as degraded, contemptible and doomed to failure, the term is applied to persons in evil plight, or of slight consideration. In English legal phraseology "devil" and "devilling" are used of barristers who act as substitutes for others. Any remuneration which the legal "devil" may receive is purely a matter of private arrangement between them. In the chancery division such remuneration is generally in the proportion of one half of the fee which the client pays; "in the king's bench division remuneration for 'devilling' of briefs or assisting in drafting and opinions is not common" (see Annual Practice, 1907, p. 717). In a similar sense an author may have his materials collected and arranged by a literary hack or "devil." The term "printer's devil" for the errand boy in a printing office probably combines this idea with that of his being black with ink. The common notions of the devil as black, ill-favoured, malicious, destructive and the like, have occasioned the application of the term to certain animals (the Tasmanian devil, the devil-fish, the coot), to mechanical contrivances (for tearing up cloth or separating wool), to pungent, highly seasoned dishes, broiled or fried. In this article we are concerned with the primary sense of the word, as used in mythology and religion.
DEVIL (Gr. devil, "slanderer," from slander, to slander), is a general term for an evil spirit, particularly the highest spirit of evil, the enemy of God and humanity. The word also refers to lesser evil spirits, much like "demon." Due to the various characteristics connected to this concept, the term has been used in many different ways. From the idea of evil as degraded, contemptible, and doomed to fail, the term is applied to people in unfortunate situations or those of little importance. In English legal language, "devil" and "devilling" refer to barristers who stand in for others. Any payment that the legal "devil" may receive is just a matter of private agreement between them. In the chancery division, this payment is usually about half of the fee that the client pays; "in the king's bench division, payment for 'devilling' briefs or helping with drafting and opinions is not common" (see Annual Practice, 1907, p. 717). Similarly, an author might have their materials gathered and organized by a literary assistant or "devil." The term "printer's devil" for the errand boy in a printing shop likely combines this idea with his being covered in ink. The common images of the devil as black, unattractive, malicious, and destructive have led to the term being applied to certain animals (the Tasmanian devil, the devil-fish, the coot), mechanical devices (for tearing fabric or separating wool), and spicy, heavily seasoned foods that are broiled or fried. In this article, we focus on the primary meaning of the word as it's used in mythology and religion.
The primitive philosophy of animism involves the ascription of all phenomena to personal agencies. As phenomena are good or evil, produce pleasure or pain, cause weal or woe, a distinction in the character of these agencies is gradually recognized; the agents of good become gods, those of evil, demons. A tendency towards the simplification and organization of the evil as of the good forces, leads towards belief in outstanding leaders among the forces of evil. When the divine is most completely conceived as unity, the demonic is also so conceived; and over against God stands Satan, or the devil.
The basic philosophy of animism involves attributing all phenomena to personal forces. Because phenomena can be good or evil, create pleasure or pain, and bring about good or bad outcomes, people gradually recognize a distinction in the nature of these forces; the forces of good become gods, while those of evil are seen as demons. There is a tendency to simplify and organize both good and evil forces, leading to the belief in prominent leaders among the forces of evil. When the divine is understood as a complete unity, the demonic is viewed in the same way; and opposed to God is Satan, or the devil.
Although it is in connexion with Hebrew and Christian monotheism that this belief in the devil has been most fully developed, yet there are approaches to the doctrine in other religions. In Babylonian mythology "the old serpent goddess 'the lady Nina' was transformed into the embodiment of all that was hostile to the powers of heaven" (Sayce's Hibbert Lectures, p. 283), and was confounded with the dragon Tiamat, "a terrible monster, reappearing in the Old Testament writings as Rahab and Leviathan, the principle of chaos, the enemy of God and man" (Tennant's The Fall and Original Sin, p. 43), and according to Gunkel (Schöpfung und Chaos, p. 383) "the original of the 'old serpent' of Rev. xii. 9." In Egyptian mythology the serpent Apap with an army of monsters strives daily to arrest the course of the boat of the luminous gods. While the Greek mythology described the Titans as "enchained once for all in their dark dungeons" yet Prometheus' threat remained to disturb the tranquillity of the Olympian Zeus. In the German mythology the army of darkness is led by Hel, the personification of twilight, sunk to the goddess who enchains the dead and terrifies the living, and Loki, originally the god of fire, but afterwards "looked upon as the father of the evil powers, who strips the goddess of earth of her adornments, who robs Thor of his fertilizing hammer, and causes the death of Balder the beneficent sun." In Hindu mythology the Maruts, Indra, Agni and Vishnu wage war with the serpent Ahi to deliver the celestial cows or spouses, the waters held captive in the caverns of the clouds. In the Trimurti, Brahmă (the impersonal) is manifested as Brahmā (the personal creator), Vishnu (the preserver), and Siva (the destroyer). In Siva is perpetuated the belief in the god of Vedic times Rudra, who is represented as "the wild hunter who storms over the earth with his bands, and lays low with arrows the men who displease him" (Chantepie de la Saussaye's Religionsgeschichte, 2nd ed., vol. ii. p. 25). The evil character of Siva is reflected in his wife, who as Kali (the black) is the wild and cruel goddess of destruction and death. The opposition of good and evil is most fully carried out in Zoroastrianism. Opposed to Ormuzd, the author of all good, is Ahriman, the source of all evil; and the opposition runs through the whole universe (D'Alviella's Hibbert Lectures, pp. 158-164).
Although this belief in the devil is most developed in connection with Hebrew and Christian monotheism, there are similar concepts in other religions. In Babylonian mythology, "the old serpent goddess 'the lady Nina' was transformed into the embodiment of all that was hostile to the powers of heaven" (Sayce's Hibbert Lectures, p. 283) and was confused with the dragon Tiamat, "a terrible monster, reappearing in the Old Testament as Rahab and Leviathan, the principle of chaos, the enemy of God and man" (Tennant's The Fall and Original Sin, p. 43). According to Gunkel (Schöpfung und Chaos, p. 383), she is "the original of the 'old serpent' of Rev. xii. 9." In Egyptian mythology, the serpent Apap, along with an army of monsters, tries daily to stop the boat of the shining gods. Greek mythology describes the Titans as "enchained once for all in their dark dungeons," yet Prometheus' threat continues to disrupt the peace of the Olympian Zeus. In German mythology, the army of darkness is led by Hel, the personification of twilight, who has become the goddess that binds the dead and terrifies the living, and Loki, originally the god of fire, later seen as the father of the evil powers, who takes away the earth goddess's ornaments, robs Thor of his life-giving hammer, and causes the death of Balder, the benevolent sun. In Hindu mythology, the Maruts, Indra, Agni, and Vishnu fight against the serpent Ahi to rescue the celestial cows or spouses, the waters trapped in the clouds. In the Trimurti, Brahmā (the impersonal) is manifested as Brahmā (the personal creator), Vishnu (the preserver), and Siva (the destroyer). Siva carries on the belief in the Vedic god Rudra, who is portrayed as "the wild hunter who storms over the earth with his bands and lays low with arrows the men who displease him" (Chantepie de la Saussaye's Religionsgeschichte, 2nd ed., vol. ii. p. 25). The evil nature of Siva is reflected in his wife, who as Kali (the black) is the fierce and deadly goddess of destruction. The conflict between good and evil is most fully expressed in Zoroastrianism, where Ormuzd, the author of all good, is opposed by Ahriman, the source of all evil; this opposition permeates the entire universe (D'Alviella's Hibbert Lectures, pp. 158-164).
The conception of Satan (Heb. שטן, the adversary, Gr. Σατανᾶς, or Σατᾶν, 2 Cor. xii. 7) belongs to the post-exilic period of Hebrew development, and probably shows traces of the [Page 122] influence of Persian on Jewish thought, but it has also its roots in much older beliefs. An "evil spirit" possesses Saul (1 Sam. xvi. 14), but it is "from the Lord." The same agency produces discord between Abimelech and the Shechemites (Judges ix. 23). "A lying spirit in the mouth of all his prophets" as Yahweh's messenger entices Ahab to his doom (1 Kings xxii. 22). Growing human corruption is traced to the fleshy union of angels and women (Gen. vi. 1-4). But generally evil, whether as misfortune or as sin, is assigned to divine causality (1 Sam. xviii. 10; 2 Sam. xxiv. 1; 1 Kings xxii. 20; Isa. vi. 10, lxiii. 17). After the Exile there is a tendency to protect the divine transcendence by the introduction of mediating angelic agency, and to separate all evil from God by ascribing its origin to Satan, the enemy of God and man. In the prophecy of Zechariah (iii. 1-2) he stands as the adversary of Joshua, the high priest, and is rebuked by Yahweh for desiring that Jerusalem should be further punished. In the book of Job he presents himself before the Lord among the sons of God (ii. 1), yet he is represented both as accuser and tempter. He disbelieves in Job's integrity, and desires him to be so tried that he may fall into sin. While, according to 2 Sam. xxiv. 1, God himself tests David in regard to the numbering of the people, according to 1 Chron. xxi. 1 it is Satan who tempts him.
The idea of Satan (Heb. שטן, the adversary, Gr. Σατανᾶς, or Σατανάς, 2 Cor. xii. 7) emerged after the exile in Hebrew culture and likely reflects some Persian influence on Jewish thought, but it also has roots in much older beliefs. An "evil spirit" takes hold of Saul (1 Sam. xvi. 14), but it is "from the Lord." The same force creates conflict between Abimelech and the Shechemites (Judges ix. 23). A "lying spirit in the mouth of all his prophets" serves as Yahweh's messenger to lead Ahab to his downfall (1 Kings xxii. 22). The increase in human wickedness links back to the union of angels and women (Gen. vi. 1-4). Generally, whether it’s misfortune or sin, evil is attributed to divine causality (1 Sam. xviii. 10; 2 Sam. xxiv. 1; 1 Kings xxii. 20; Isa. vi. 10, lxiii. 17). After the Exile, there’s a trend to protect God's transcendence by introducing mediating angelic roles, and to distance all evil from God by tracing its origins back to Satan, the enemy of God and humanity. In the prophecy of Zechariah (iii. 1-2), he appears as the adversary of Joshua, the high priest, and is confronted by Yahweh for wanting to see Jerusalem punished further. In the book of Job, he comes before the Lord among the sons of God (ii. 1), portrayed as both accuser and tempter. He doubts Job's integrity and wishes for him to be tested to the point of sinning. While 2 Sam. xxiv. 1 states that God himself tests David regarding the census of the people, 1 Chron. xxi. 1 attributes the temptation to Satan.
The development of the conception continued in later Judaism, which was probably more strongly influenced by Persian dualism. It is doubtful, however, whether the Asmodeus (q.v.) of the book of Tobit is the same as the Aēshma Daēwa of the Bundahesh. He is the evil spirit who slew the seven husbands of Sara (iii. 8), and the name probably means "Destroyer." In the book of Enoch Satan is represented as the ruler of a rival kingdom of evil, but here are also mentioned Satans, who are distinguished from the fallen angels and who have a threefold function, to tempt, to accuse and to punish. Satan possesses the ungodly (Ecclesiasticus xxi. 27), is identified with the serpent of Gen. iii. (Wisdom ii. 24), and is probably also represented by Asmodeus, to whom lustful qualities are assigned (Tobit vi. 14); Gen. iii. is probably referred to in Psalms of Solomon xvii. 49, "a serpent speaking with the words of transgressors, words of deceit to pervert wisdom." The Book of the Secrets of Enoch not only identifies Satan with the Serpent, but also describes his revolt against God, and expulsion from heaven. In the Jewish Targums Sammael, "the highest angel that stands before God's throne, caused the serpent to seduce the woman"; he coalesces with Satan, and has inferior Satans as his servants. The birth of Cain is ascribed to a union of Satan with Eve. As accuser affecting man's standing before God he is greatly feared.
The idea continued to evolve in later Judaism, which was likely influenced more by Persian dualism. However, it's uncertain if Asmodeus (q.v.) from the book of Tobit is the same as the Aēshma Daēwa from the Bundahesh. He is the evil spirit who killed Sara's seven husbands (iii. 8), and his name probably means "Destroyer." In the book of Enoch, Satan is portrayed as the head of an opposing kingdom of evil, but it also mentions other Satans who are separate from the fallen angels and have three roles: to tempt, to accuse, and to punish. Satan takes over the wicked (Ecclesiasticus xxi. 27), is linked to the serpent in Gen. iii. (Wisdom ii. 24), and is likely also represented by Asmodeus, who is associated with lustful traits (Tobit vi. 14); Gen. iii. is probably referenced in Psalms of Solomon xvii. 49, which mentions "a serpent speaking with the words of transgressors, words of deceit to pervert wisdom." The Book of the Secrets of Enoch not only connects Satan with the Serpent but also describes his rebellion against God and his banishment from heaven. In the Jewish Targums, Sammael, "the highest angel that stands before God's throne, made the serpent seduce the woman"; he merges with Satan, who has lesser Satans as his servants. Cain's birth is attributed to a union between Satan and Eve. As the accuser impacting humanity's relationship with God, he is greatly feared.
This doctrine, stripped of much of its grossness, is reproduced in the New Testament. Satan is the διάβολος (Matt. xiii. 39; John xiii. 2; Eph. iv. 27; Heb. ii. 14; Rev. ii. 10), slanderer or accuser, the πειράζων (Matt. iv. 3; 1 Thess. iii. 5), the tempter, the πονηρός (Matt. v. 37; John xvii. 15; Eph. vi. 16), the evil one, and the ἐχθρός (Matt. xiii. 39), the enemy. He is apparently identified with Beelzebub (or Beelzebul) in Matt. xii. 26, 27. Jesus appears to recognize the existence of demons belonging to a kingdom of evil under the leadership of Satan "the prince of demons" (Matt. xii. 24, 26, 27), whose works in demonic possessions it is his function to destroy (Mark i. 34, iii. 11, vi. 7; Luke x. 17-20). But he himself conquers Satan in resisting his temptations (Matt. iv. 1-11). Simon is warned against him, and Judas yields to him as tempter (Luke xxii. 31; John xiii. 27). Jesus's cures are represented as a triumph over Satan (Luke x. 18). This Jewish doctrine is found in Paul's letters also. Satan rules over a world of evil, supernatural agencies, whose dwelling is in the lower heavens (Eph. vi. 12): hence he is the "prince of the power of the air" (ii. 2). He is the tempter (1 Thess. iii. 5; 1 Cor. vii. 5), the destroyer (x. 10), to whom the offender is to be handed over for bodily destruction (v. 5), identified with the serpent (Rom. xvi. 20; 2 Cor. xi. 3), and probably with Beliar or Belial (vi. 15); and the surrender of man to him brought death into the world (Rom. v. 17). Paul's own "stake in the flesh" is Satan's messenger (2 Cor. xii. 7). According to Hebrews Satan's power over death Jesus destroys by dying (ii. 14). Revelation describes the war in heaven between God with his angels and Satan or the dragon, the "old serpent," the deceiver of the whole world (xii. 9), with his hosts of darkness. After the overthrow of the Beast and the kings of the earth, Satan is imprisoned in the bottomless pit a thousand years (xx. 2). Again loosed to deceive the nations, he is finally cast into the lake of fire and brimstone (xx. 10; cf. Enoch liv. 5, 6; 2 Peter ii. 4). In John's Gospel and Epistles Satan is opposed to Christ. Sinner and murderer from the beginning (1 John iii. 8) and liar by nature (John viii. 44), he enslaves men to sin (viii. 34), causes death (verse 44), rules the present world (xiv. 30), but has no power over Christ or those who are his (xiv. 30, xvi. 11; 1 John v. 18). He will be destroyed by Christ with all his works (John xvi. 33; 1 John iii. 8).
This idea, simplified from its harshness, is reflected in the New Testament. Satan is the devil (Matt. xiii. 39; John xiii. 2; Eph. iv. 27; Heb. ii. 14; Rev. ii. 10), the slanderer or accuser, the πειράζων (Matt. iv. 3; 1 Thess. iii. 5), the tempter, the sly (Matt. v. 37; John xvii. 15; Eph. vi. 16), the evil one, and the enemy (Matt. xiii. 39), the enemy. He is seemingly identified with Beelzebub (or Beelzebul) in Matt. xii. 26, 27. Jesus seems to acknowledge the existence of demons under the rule of Satan, "the prince of demons" (Matt. xii. 24, 26, 27), whose actions in demonic possessions it is his role to overcome (Mark i. 34, iii. 11, vi. 7; Luke x. 17-20). Yet he himself defeats Satan by resisting his temptations (Matt. iv. 1-11). Simon is warned about him, and Judas succumbs to him as the tempter (Luke xxii. 31; John xiii. 27). Jesus's healings are portrayed as victories over Satan (Luke x. 18). This Jewish belief is also present in Paul's letters. Satan governs a world of evil, supernatural beings, who reside in the lower heavens (Eph. vi. 12): thus he is referred to as the "prince of the power of the air" (ii. 2). He is the tempter (1 Thess. iii. 5; 1 Cor. vii. 5), the destroyer (x. 10), to whom the wrongdoer is to be handed over for physical destruction (v. 5), associated with the serpent (Rom. xvi. 20; 2 Cor. xi. 3), and possibly with Beliar or Belial (vi. 15); and humanity's surrender to him introduced death into the world (Rom. v. 17). Paul's own "thorn in the flesh" is a messenger of Satan (2 Cor. xii. 7). According to Hebrews, Jesus nullifies Satan's power over death by dying (ii. 14). Revelation depicts a battle in heaven between God and his angels against Satan, the dragon, the "old serpent," who deceives the entire world (xii. 9), along with his forces of darkness. After defeating the Beast and the leaders of the earth, Satan is locked away in the abyss for a thousand years (xx. 2). Once released to mislead the nations again, he is ultimately thrown into the lake of fire and brimstone (xx. 10; cf. Enoch liv. 5, 6; 2 Peter ii. 4). In John's Gospel and Epistles, Satan stands in opposition to Christ. He is a sinner and murderer from the beginning (1 John iii. 8) and a liar by nature (John viii. 44), enslaving humanity to sin (viii. 34), causing death (verse 44), ruling the current world (xiv. 30), but holds no power over Christ or his followers (xiv. 30, xvi. 11; 1 John v. 18). He will be defeated by Christ along with all his actions (John xvi. 33; 1 John iii. 8).
In the common faith of the Gentile churches after the Apostolic Age "the present dominion of evil demons, or of one evil demon, was just as generally presupposed as man's need of redemption, which was regarded as a result of that dominion. The tenacity of this belief may be explained among other things by the living impression of the polytheism that surrounded the communities on every side. By means of this assumption too, humanity seemed to be unburdened, and the presupposed capacity for redemption could, therefore, be justified in its widest range" (Harnack's History of Dogma, i. p. 181). While Christ's First Advent delivered believers from Satan's bondage, his overthrow would be completed only by the Second Advent. The Gnostics held that "the present world sprang from a fall of man, or from an undertaking hostile to God, and is, therefore, the product of an evil or intermediate being" (p. 257). Some taught that while the future had been assigned by God to Christ, the devil had received the present age (p. 309). The fathers traced all doctrines not held by the Catholic Church to the devil, and the virtues of heretics were regarded as an instance of the devil transforming himself into an angel of light (ii. 91). Irenaeus ascribes Satan's fall to "pride and arrogance and envy of God's creation"; and traces man's deliverance from Satan to Christ's victory in resisting his temptations; but also, guided by certain Pauline passages, represents the death of Christ "as a ransom paid to the 'apostasy' for men who had fallen into captivity" (ii. 290). He does not admit that Satan has any lawful claim on man, or that God practised a deceit on him, as later fathers taught. This theory of the atonement was formulated by Origen. "By his successful temptation the devil acquired a right over men. God offered Christ's soul for that of men. But the devil was duped, as Christ overcame both him and death" (p. 367). It was held by Gregory of Nyssa, Ambrose, who uses the phrase pia fraus, Augustine, Leo I., and Gregory I., who expresses it in its worst form. "The humanity of Christ was the bait; the fish, the devil, snapped at it, and was left hanging on the invisible hook, Christ's divinity" (iii. 307). In Athanasius the relation of the work of Christ to Satan retires into the background, Gregory of Nazianzus and John of Damascus felt scruples about this view. It is expressly repudiated by Anselm and Abelard. Peter the Lombard asserted it, disregarding these objections. Bernard represents man's bondage to Satan "as righteously permitted as a just retribution for sin," he being "the executioner of the divine justice." Another theory of Origen's found less acceptance. The devil, as a being resulting from God's will, cannot always remain a devil. The possibility of his redemption, however, was in the 5th century branded as a heresy. Persian dualism was brought into contact with Christian thought in the doctrine of Mani; and it is permissible to believe that the gloomy views of Augustine regarding man's condition are due in some measure to this influence. Mani taught that Satan with his demons, sprung from the kingdom of darkness, attacked the realm of light, the earth, defeated man sent against him by the God of light, but was overthrown by the God of light, who then delivered the primeval man (iii. 324). "During the middle ages," says Tulloch, "the belief in the devil was absorbing—saints conceived themselves and others to be in constant conflict with him." This superstition, perhaps at its strongest in the 13th to the 15th century, passed into Protestantism. Luther [Page 123] was always conscious of the presence and opposition of Satan. "As I found he was about to begin again," says Luther, "I gathered together my books, and got into bed. Another time in the night I heard him above my cell walking on the cloister, but as I knew it was the devil I paid no attention to him and went to sleep." He held that this world will pass away with its pleasures, as there can be no real improvement in it, for the devil continues in it to ply his daring and seductive devices (vii. 191). I. A. Dorner (Christian Doctrine, iii. p. 93) sums up Protestant doctrine as follows:—"He is brought into relation with natural sinfulness, and the impulse to evil thoughts and deeds is ascribed to him. The dominion of evil over men is also represented as a slavery to Satan, and this as punishment. He has his full power in the extra-Christian world. But his power is broken by Christ, and by his word victory over him is to be won. The power of creating anything is also denied the devil, and only the power of corrupting substances is conceded to him. But it is only at the Last Judgment that his power is wholly annihilated; he is himself delivered up to eternal punishment." This belief in the devil was specially strong in Scotland among both clergy and laity in the 17th century. "The devil was always and literally at hand," says Buckle, "he was haunting them, speaking to them, and tempting them. Go where they would he was there."
In the common faith of the Gentile churches after the Apostolic Age, the idea that there was a current rule by evil demons, or one evil demon, was almost universally accepted, just as was the belief in humanity's need for redemption, which was seen as a result of that rule. The persistence of this belief can be partly explained by the strong impression of polytheism that surrounded these communities. This assumption also seemed to relieve humanity, allowing the belief in the possibility of redemption to be justified in a broad sense (Harnack's History of Dogma, i. p. 181). While Christ's First Coming freed believers from Satan's bondage, his defeat would only be fulfilled with the Second Coming. The Gnostics claimed that "the present world came from a fall of man or from a rebellion against God and is, therefore, the product of an evil or intermediary being" (p. 257). Some taught that while the future was appointed by God to Christ, the devil had control over the current age (p. 309). The Church Fathers attributed all doctrines not accepted by the Catholic Church to the devil, and regarded the virtues of heretics as evidence of the devil disguising himself as an angel of light (ii. 91). Irenaeus linked Satan's fall to "pride and arrogance and envy of God's creation," and connected humanity's release from Satan to Christ's triumph in resisting his temptations; yet he also, following certain Pauline texts, described Christ's death "as a ransom paid to the 'apostasy' for men who had fallen into captivity" (ii. 290). He rejected the idea that Satan had any legitimate claim on humanity or that God had deceived him, a view adopted by later Fathers. Origen formulated this atonement theory. "Through his successful temptation, the devil gained a right over humanity. God offered Christ's soul in exchange for humanity's. But the devil was tricked, as Christ conquered both him and death" (p. 367). This concept was accepted by Gregory of Nyssa, Ambrose, who used the term pia fraus, Augustine, Leo I., and Gregory I., who expressed it in its most extreme form. "The humanity of Christ served as bait; the devil, like a fish, took the bait and got caught on the unseen hook, which was Christ's divinity" (iii. 307). In Athanasius, the relationship between Christ's work and Satan becomes less emphasized, while Gregory of Nazianzus and John of Damascus had reservations about this perspective. Anselm and Abelard explicitly rejected it. Peter the Lombard supported it despite these objections. Bernard viewed humanity's bondage to Satan as "righteously allowed as just retribution for sin," seeing him as "the executor of divine justice." Another theory of Origen's was less accepted. The devil, as a being created by God's will, cannot remain a devil forever. However, in the 5th century, the idea of his potential redemption was declared heretical. Persian dualism interacted with Christian ideas through the doctrine of Mani; it is reasonable to assume that Augustine's bleak views on humanity's condition were partly influenced by this. Mani taught that Satan and his demons, originating from the kingdom of darkness, attacked the domain of light, the earth, defeated man sent by the God of light, but were ultimately overthrown by the God of light, who then saved the primeval man (iii. 324). "During the middle ages," says Tulloch, "the belief in the devil was pervasive—saints believed they and others were in constant struggle against him." This superstition, perhaps at its height in the 13th to the 15th century, carried over into Protestantism. Luther [Page 123] was always aware of Satan's presence and opposition. "As I sensed he was about to attack again," Luther said, "I gathered my books and got into bed. One night, I heard him walking above my cell in the cloister, but knowing it was the devil, I ignored him and went to sleep." He believed that this world would end with its pleasures, as true improvement is impossible while the devil continues to employ his bold and tempting tactics (vii. 191). I. A. Dorner (Christian Doctrine, iii. p. 93) summarizes Protestant belief as follows:—"He is linked with natural sinfulness, and the urge towards evil thoughts and actions is attributed to him. The rule of evil over humanity is portrayed as a slavery to Satan, which is seen as punishment. He holds full power in the non-Christian world. But Christ breaks this power, and through His word, victory over him can be achieved. It is also denied that the devil has the power to create anything, and he is only acknowledged to have the power to corrupt substances. However, it is only at the Last Judgment that his power will be completely destroyed; he himself will be cast into eternal punishment." The belief in the devil was especially strong in Scotland among both clergy and laypeople in the 17th century. "The devil was always and literally present," Buckle states, "he was haunting them, speaking to them, and tempting them. No matter where they went, he was there."
In more recent times a great variety of opinions has been expressed on this subject. J. S. Semler denied the reality of demonic possession, and held that Christ in his language accommodated himself to the views of the sick whom he was seeking to cure. Kant regarded the devil as a personification of the radical evil in man. Daub in his Judas Ishcarioth argued that a finite evil presupposes an absolute evil, and the absolute evil as real must be in a person. Schelling regarded the devil as, not a person, but a real principle, a spirit let loose by the freedom of man. Schleiermacher was an uncompromising opponent of the common belief. "The problem remains to seek evil rather in self than in Satan, Satan only showing the limits of our self-knowledge." Dorner has formulated a theory which explains the development of the conception of Satan in the Holy Scriptures as in correspondence with an evolution in the character of Satan. "Satan appears in Scripture under four leading characters:—first as the tempter of freedom, who desires to bring to decision, secondly as the accuser, who by virtue of the law retorts criminality on man; thirdly as the instrument of the Divine, which brings evil and death upon men; fourthly and lastly he is described, especially in the New Testament, as the enemy of God and man." He supposes "a change in Satan in the course of the history of the divine revelation, in conflict with which he came step by step to be a sworn enemy of God and man, especially in the New Testament times, in which, on the other hand, his power is broken at the root by Christ." He argues that "the world-order, being in process as a moral order, permits breaches everywhere into which Satan can obtain entrance" (pp. 99, 102). H. L. Martensen gives even freer rein to speculation. "The evil principle," he says, "has in itself no personality, but attains a progressively universal personality in its kingdom; it has no individual personality, save only in individual creatures, who in an especial manner make themselves its organs; but among these is one creature in whom the principle is so hypostasized that he has become the centre and head of the kingdom of evil" (Dogmatics, p. 199). A. Ritschl gives no place in his constructive doctrine to the belief in the devil; but recognizes that the mutual action of individual sinners on one another constitutes a kingdom of sin, opposed to the Kingdom of God (A. E. Garvie, The Ritschlian Theology, p. 304). Kaftan affirms that a "doctrine about Satan can as little be established as about angels, as faith can say nothing about it, and nothing is gained by it for the dogmatic explanation of evil. This whole province must be left to the immediate world-view of the pious. The idea of Satan will on account of the Scriptures not disappear from it, and it would be arrogant to wish to set it aside. Only let everyone keep the thought that Satan also stands under the commission of the Almighty God, and that no one must suppose that by leading back his sins to a Satanic temptation he can get rid of his own guilt. To transgress these limits is to assail faith" (Dogmatik, p. 348). In the book entitled Evil and Evolution there is "an attempt to turn the light of modern science on to the ancient mystery of evil." The author contends that the existence of evil is best explained by assuming that God is confronted with Satan, who in the process of evolution interferes with the divine designs, an interference which the instability of such an evolving process makes not incredible. Satan is, however, held to be a creature who has by abuse of his freedom been estranged from, and opposed to his Creator, and who at last will be conquered by moral means. W. M. Alexander in his book on demonic possession maintains that "the confession of Jesus as the Messiah or Son of God is the classical criterion of genuine demonic possession" (p. 150), and argues that, as "the Incarnation indicated the establishment of the kingdom of heaven upon earth," there took place "a counter movement among the powers of darkness," of which "genuine demonic possession was one of the manifestations" (p. 249).
In more recent times, a wide range of opinions has been shared on this topic. J. S. Semler rejected the idea of demonic possession, arguing that Christ used language that matched the beliefs of the sick people he was trying to heal. Kant viewed the devil as a representation of the fundamental evil in humanity. Daub, in his Judas Iscariot, claimed that a limited evil assumes an absolute evil, which must genuinely reside in a person. Schelling saw the devil not as a person but as a real principle, a spirit unleashed by human freedom. Schleiermacher strongly opposed the common belief, stating, "The problem remains to seek evil more in ourselves than in Satan; Satan merely highlights the limits of our self-awareness." Dorner proposed a theory explaining the evolution of the concept of Satan in the Holy Scriptures as evolving alongside the character of Satan. "Satan appears in Scripture under four main roles: first, as the tempter of freedom who seeks to provoke a decision; second, as the accuser, who, by the law's authority, charges humanity with wrongdoing; third, as the instrument of the Divine that brings evil and death upon people; fourth, especially in the New Testament, as the enemy of God and humanity." He suggests "a transformation in Satan throughout the history of divine revelation, gradually becoming a sworn enemy of God and man, particularly in New Testament times when, conversely, Christ fundamentally breaks his power." He states, "the world-order, as it develops as a moral order, opens gaps through which Satan can infiltrate" (pp. 99, 102). H. L. Martensen allows for even more speculation, saying, "The evil principle itself has no personality, but gains a progressively universal personality in its realm; it lacks individual personality, except in certain beings who particularly become its vessels; among these, there is one being in whom this principle is so manifest that he has become the center and leader of the kingdom of evil" (Dogmatics, p. 199). A. Ritschl does not include belief in the devil in his constructive doctrine but acknowledges that the interactions of individual sinners create a kingdom of sin that contrasts with the Kingdom of God (A. E. Garvie, The Ritschlian Theology, p. 304). Kaftan argues that a "doctrine of Satan cannot be established any more than one about angels, as faith can say nothing about it, and nothing is gained in understanding evil from it. This area must be left to the immediate worldview of the faithful. The idea of Satan will not disappear due to the Scriptures, and it would be presumptuous to attempt to dismiss it. Everyone should remember that Satan is still under the authority of Almighty God, and no one should think that by attributing their sins to a Satanic temptation, they can absolve themselves of guilt. Crossing these boundaries undermines faith" (Dogmatik, p. 348). In the book titled Evil and Evolution, there is "an attempt to apply modern science to the ancient mystery of evil." The author argues that the existence of evil is best understood by positing that God confronts Satan, who, during the evolutionary process, disrupts divine intentions, a disruption made plausible by the instability of such a process. However, Satan is seen as a creature who, through the misuse of his freedom, has become estranged from and opposed to his Creator and will ultimately be defeated by moral means. W. M. Alexander's book on demonic possession asserts that "the acknowledgment of Jesus as the Messiah or Son of God is the key sign of genuine demonic possession" (p. 150) and argues that, as "the Incarnation signified the formation of the kingdom of heaven on earth," there was "a counter-response among the forces of darkness," of which "genuine demonic possession was one manifestation" (p. 249).
Interesting as these speculations are, it may be confidently affirmed that belief in Satan is not now generally regarded as an essential article of the Christian faith, nor is it found to be an indispensable element of Christian experience. On the one hand science has so explained many of the processes of outer nature and of the inner life of man as to leave no room for Satanic agency. On the other hand the modern view of the inspiration of the Scriptures does not necessitate the acceptance of the doctrine of the Scriptures on this subject as finally and absolutely authoritative. The teaching of Jesus even in this matter may be accounted for as either an accommodation to the views of those with whom he was dealing, or more probably as a proof of the limitation of knowledge which was a necessary condition of the Incarnation, for it cannot be contended that as revealer of God and redeemer of men it was imperative that he should either correct or confirm men's beliefs in this respect. The possibility of the existence of evil spirits, organized under one leader Satan to tempt man and oppose God, cannot be denied; the sufficiency of the evidence for such evil agency may, however, be doubted; the necessity of any such belief for Christian thought and life cannot, therefore, be affirmed. (See also Demonology; Possession.)
As interesting as these ideas are, it's clear that believing in Satan is not generally seen as a core part of Christian faith today, nor is it considered a necessary aspect of Christian experience. On one hand, science has explained many natural processes and aspects of human life, leaving little space for the influence of Satan. On the other hand, the modern understanding of the inspiration of the Scriptures doesn't require us to accept their teachings on this topic as completely authoritative. Jesus' teachings on this matter can be understood either as a way to connect with the beliefs of the people he interacted with, or more likely, as a sign of the limited knowledge that comes with the Incarnation. It wasn't essential for him, as the revealer of God and savior of humanity, to confirm or correct people's beliefs about this. While we can't deny the possibility of evil spirits organized under a leader like Satan to tempt people and oppose God, we can question the strength of the evidence for such malevolent forces; therefore, we can't assert that this belief is necessary for Christian thought and life. (See also Demonology; Possession.)
DEVIZES, a market town and municipal borough in the Devizes parliamentary division of Wiltshire, England, 86 m. W. by S. of London by the Great Western railway. Pop. (1901) 6532. Its castle was built on a tongue of land flanked by two deep ravines, and behind this the town grew up in a semicircle on a stretch of bare and exposed tableland. Its main streets, in which a few ancient timbered houses are left, radiate from the market place, where stands a Gothic cross, the gift of Lord Sidmouth in 1814. The Kennet and Avon Canal skirts the town on the N., passing over the high ground through a chain of thirty-nine locks. St John's church, one of the most interesting in Wiltshire, is cruciform, with a massive central tower, based upon two round and two pointed arches. It was originally Norman of the 12th century, and the chancel arch and low vaulted chancel, in this style, are very fine. In the interior several ancient monuments of the Suttons and Heathcotes are preserved, besides some beautiful carved stone work, and two rich ceilings of oak over the chapels. St Mary's, a smaller church, is partly Norman, but was rebuilt in the 15th and again in the 19th century. Its lofty clerestoried nave has an elaborately carved timber roof, and the south porch, though repaired in 1612, preserves its Norman mouldings. The woollen industries of Devizes have lost their prosperity; but there is a large grain trade, with engineering works, breweries, and manufactures of silk, snuff, tobacco and agricultural implements. The town is governed by a mayor, six aldermen and eighteen councillors. Area, 906 acres.
DEVIZES, a market town and municipal borough in the Devizes parliamentary division of Wiltshire, England, is located 86 miles west-southwest of London via the Great Western railway. Its population was 6,532 in 1901. The castle was built on a piece of land surrounded by two deep ravines, and behind it, the town expanded in a semicircle across a stretch of bare and exposed tableland. The main streets, where a few old timbered houses still stand, radiate from the market place, which features a Gothic cross, a gift from Lord Sidmouth in 1814. The Kennet and Avon Canal runs along the northern edge of the town, traveling over high ground through a series of thirty-nine locks. St John's church, one of the most notable in Wiltshire, is cruciform, with a large central tower supported by two round and two pointed arches. It was originally built in the Norman style in the 12th century, and the chancel arch and low vaulted chancel in this style are quite impressive. Inside, several ancient monuments of the Suttons and Heathcotes are preserved, along with some beautifully carved stonework and two ornate oak ceilings above the chapels. St Mary's, a smaller church, is partly Norman but was rebuilt in the 15th and again in the 19th century. Its tall clerestoried nave features an intricately carved timber roof, and though the south porch was repaired in 1612, it retains its Norman moldings. The woolen industries of Devizes have declined, but there is a significant grain trade, along with engineering works, breweries, and production of silk, snuff, tobacco, and agricultural tools. The town is managed by a mayor, six aldermen, and eighteen councillors. Area, 906 acres.
Devizes (Divisis, la Devise, De Vies) does not appear in any historical document prior to the reign of Henry I., when the construction of a castle of exceptional magnificence by Roger, bishop of Salisbury, at once constituted the town an important political centre, and led to its speedy development. After the [Page 124] disgrace of Roger in 1139 the castle was seized by the Crown; in the 14th century it formed part of the dowry of the queens of England, and figured prominently in history until its capture and demolition by Cromwell in the Civil War of the 17th century. Devizes became a borough by prescription, and the first charter from Matilda, confirmed by successive later sovereigns, merely grants exemption from certain tolls and the enjoyment of undisturbed peace. Edward III. added a clause conferring on the town the liberties of Marlborough, and Richard II. instituted a coroner. A gild merchant was granted by Edward I., Edward II. and Edward III., and in 1614 was divided into the three companies of drapers, mercers and leathersellers. The present governing charters were issued by James I. and Charles I., the latter being little more than a confirmation of the former, which instituted a common council consisting of a mayor, a town clerk and thirty-six capital burgesses. These charters were surrendered to Charles II., and a new one was conferred by James II., but abandoned three years later in favour of the original grant. Devizes returned two members to parliament from 1295, until deprived of one member by the Representation of the People Act of 1867, and of the other by the Redistribution Act of 1885. The woollen manufacture was the staple industry of the town from the reign of Edward III. until the middle of the 18th century, when complaints as to the decay of trade began to be prevalent. In the reign of Elizabeth the market was held on Monday, and there were two annual fairs at the feasts of the Purification of the Virgin and the Decollation of John the Baptist. The market was transferred to Thursday in the next reign, and the fairs in the 18th century had become seven in number.
Devizes (Divisis, la Devise, De Vies) doesn't show up in any historical documents before the reign of Henry I, when Roger, the bishop of Salisbury, built an impressive castle that quickly made the town a significant political center and spurred its rapid growth. After Roger's disgrace in 1139, the castle was taken over by the Crown; in the 14th century, it was part of the queens of England's dowry and played a key role in history until it was captured and destroyed by Cromwell during the 17th-century Civil War. Devizes became a borough by tradition, and the first charter from Matilda, which was confirmed by later monarchs, simply granted exemption from certain tolls and the right to live in peace. Edward III added a clause giving the town the same rights as Marlborough, and Richard II established a coroner. A merchant guild was granted by Edward I, Edward II, and Edward III, and by 1614, it was divided into three companies: drapers, mercers, and leathersellers. The current governing charters were issued by James I and Charles I, with the latter being mostly a confirmation of the former, which set up a common council made up of a mayor, a town clerk, and thirty-six key burgesses. These charters were surrendered to Charles II, and a new one was given by James II, but it was abandoned three years later in favor of the original grant. Devizes sent two representatives to parliament starting in 1295 until one was lost due to the Representation of the People Act of 1867 and the other due to the Redistribution Act of 1885. The woolen industry was the main trade in the town from the reign of Edward III until the mid-18th century, when complaints about declining trade began to arise. During Elizabeth's reign, the market was held on Mondays, and there were two annual fairs during the feasts of the Purification of the Virgin and the Decollation of John the Baptist. The market moved to Thursdays in the next reign, and by the 18th century, the number of fairs had grown to seven.
See Victoria County History, Wiltshire; History of Devizes (Devizes, 1859).
See Victoria County History, Wiltshire; History of Devizes (Devizes, 1859).
DEVOLUTION, WAR OF (1667-68), the name applied to the war which arose out of Louis XIV.'s claims to certain Spanish territories in right of his wife Maria Theresa, upon whom the ownership was alleged to have "devolved." (See, for the military operations, Dutch Wars.) The war was ended by the treaty of Aix-la-Chapelle in 1668.
DEVOLUTION, WAR OF (1667-68), the name given to the conflict that emerged from Louis XIV's claims to specific Spanish territories based on his wife Maria Theresa's alleged rights to those lands, which were said to have "devolved." (See, for the military operations, Dutch Wars.) The war concluded with the treaty of Aix-la-Chapelle in 1668.
DEVON, EARLS OF. From the family of De Redvers (De Ripuariis; Riviers), who had been earls of Devon from about 1100, this title passed to Hugh de Courtenay (c. 1275-1340), the representative of a prominent family in the county (see Gibbon's "digression" in chap. lxi. of the Decline and Fall, ed. Bury), but was subsequently forfeited by Thomas Courtenay (1432-1462), a Lancastrian who was beheaded after the battle of Towton. It was revived in 1485 in favour of Edward Courtenay (d. 1509), whose son Sir William (d. 1511) married Catherine, daughter of Edward IV. Too great proximity to the throne led to his attainder, but his son Henry (c. 1498-1539) was restored in blood in 1517 as earl of Devon, and in 1525 was created marquess of Exeter; his second wife was a daughter of William Blount, 4th Lord Mountjoy. The title again suffered forfeiture on Henry's execution, but in 1553 it was recreated for his son Edward (1526-1556). At the latter's death it became dormant in the Courtenay family, till in 1831 a claim by a collateral branch was allowed by the House of Lords, and the earldom of Devon was restored to the peerage, still being held by the head of the Courtenays. The earlier earls of Devon were referred to occasionally as earls of Devonshire, but the former variant has prevailed, and the latter is now solely used for the earldom and dukedom held by the Cavendishes (see Devonshire, Earls and Dukes of, and also the article Courtenay).
DEVON, EARLS OF. This title originally belonged to the De Redvers family (De Ripuariis; Riviers), who had been earls of Devon since around 1100. It then passed to Hugh de Courtenay (c. 1275-1340), representing a notable family in the county (see Gibbon's "digression" in chap. lxi. of the Decline and Fall, ed. Bury). However, it was later forfeited by Thomas Courtenay (1432-1462), a Lancastrian who was executed after the battle of Towton. The title was revived in 1485 for Edward Courtenay (d. 1509), whose son Sir William (d. 1511) married Catherine, the daughter of Edward IV. His close ties to the throne led to his attainder, but his son Henry (c. 1498-1539) was restored in blood in 1517 as the earl of Devon, and in 1525 he was made marquess of Exeter; his second wife was a daughter of William Blount, 4th Lord Mountjoy. The title was once again forfeited following Henry's execution, but in 1553 it was recreated for his son Edward (1526-1556). When Edward died, the title became dormant in the Courtenay family until 1831, when a claim by a collateral branch was approved by the House of Lords, restoring the earldom of Devon to the peerage, which is still held by the head of the Courtenays. Earlier earls of Devon were sometimes called earls of Devonshire, but the former name has prevailed, and the latter is now only used for the earldom and dukedom held by the Cavendishes (see Devonshire, Earls and Dukes of, and also the article Courtenay).
DEVONIAN SYSTEM, in geology, the name applied to series of stratified fossiliferous and igneous rocks that were formed during the Devonian period, that is, in the interval of time between the close of the Silurian period and the beginning of the Carboniferous; it includes the marine Devonian and an estuarine Old Red Sandstone series of strata. The name "Devonian" was introduced in 1829 by Sir R. Murchison and A. Sedgwick to describe the older rocks of Cornwall and Devon which W. Lonsdale had shown, from an examination of the fossils, to be intermediate between the Silurian and Carboniferous. The same two workers also carried on further researches upon the same rocks of the European continent, where already several others, F. Roemer, H. E. Beyrich, &c., were endeavouring to elucidate the succession of strata in this portion of the "Transition Series." The labours of these earlier workers, including in addition to those already mentioned, the brothers F. and G. von Sandberger, A. Dumont, J. Gosselet, E. J. A. d'Archiac, E. P. de Verneuil and H. von Dechen, although somewhat modified by later students, formed the foundation upon which the modern classification of the Devonian rocks is based.
DEVONIAN SYSTEM, in geology, refers to a series of layered fossil-rich and volcanic rocks that formed during the Devonian period, which is the time between the end of the Silurian period and the start of the Carboniferous. It includes the marine Devonian and an estuarine Old Red Sandstone series of layers. The term "Devonian" was first used in 1829 by Sir R. Murchison and A. Sedgwick to describe the older rocks of Cornwall and Devon, which W. Lonsdale had identified, through fossil examination, as being between the Silurian and Carboniferous. These two researchers also conducted further studies on the same rocks in Europe, where several others, including F. Roemer and H. E. Beyrich, were trying to clarify the order of the layers in this part of the "Transition Series." The efforts of these early researchers, along with others like the brothers F. and G. von Sandberger, A. Dumont, J. Gosselet, E. J. A. d'Archiac, E. P. de Verneuil, and H. von Dechen, though somewhat revised by later scholars, laid the groundwork for the modern classification of Devonian rocks.

Stratigraphy of the Devonian Facies.
Stratigraphy of Devonian Facies.
Notwithstanding the fact that it was in Devonshire and Cornwall that the Devonian rocks were first distinguished, it is in central Europe that the succession of strata is most clearly made out, and here, too, their geological position was first indicated by the founders of the system, Sedgwick and Murchison.
Despite the fact that it was in Devonshire and Cornwall where the Devonian rocks were first identified, it is in central Europe that the sequence of layers is most clearly defined, and here, too, their geological position was first pointed out by the founders of the system, Sedgwick and Murchison.
Continental Europe.—Devonian rocks occupy a large area in the centre of Europe, extending from the Ardennes through the south of Belgium across Rhenish Prussia to Darmstadt. They are best known from the picturesque gorges which have been cut through them by the Rhine below Bingen and by the Moselle below Treves. They reappear from under younger formations in Brittany, in the Harz and Thuringia, and are exposed in Franconia, Saxony, Silesia, North Moravia and eastern Galicia. The principal subdivisions of the system in the more typical areas are indicated in Table I.
Continental Europe.—Devonian rocks cover a large area in the center of Europe, stretching from the Ardennes through southern Belgium across Rhenish Prussia to Darmstadt. They are most well-known for the beautiful gorges carved by the Rhine below Bingen and by the Moselle below Treves. They reemerge from beneath younger formations in Brittany, the Harz, and Thuringia, and are exposed in Franconia, Saxony, Silesia, North Moravia, and eastern Galicia. The main subdivisions of the system in the more typical areas are shown in Table I.
This threefold subdivision, with a central mass of calcareous strata, is traceable westwards through Belgium (where the Calcaire de Givet represents the Stringocephalus limestone of the Eifel) and eastwards into the Harz. The rocks reappear with local petrographical modifications, but with a remarkable persistence of general palaeontological characters, in Eastern Thuringia, Franconia, Saxony, Silesia, the north of Moravia and East Galicia. Devonian rocks have been detected among the crumpled rocks of the Styrian Alps by means of the evidence of abundant corals, cephalopods, gasteropods, lamellibranchs and other organic remains. Perhaps in other tracts of the Alps, as well as in the Carpathian range, similar shales, limestones and dolomites, though as yet unfossiliferous, but containing ores of silver, lead, mercury, zinc, cobalt and other metals, may be referable to the Devonian system.
This three-part division, with a central mass of limestone layers, extends westward through Belgium (where the Calcaire de Givet represents the Stringocephalus limestone of the Eifel) and eastward into the Harz. The rocks reappear with local variations but maintain a striking consistency in overall fossil characteristics in Eastern Thuringia, Franconia, Saxony, Silesia, northern Moravia, and Eastern Galicia. Devonian rocks have been found among the folded rocks of the Styrian Alps through abundant evidence of corals, cephalopods, gastropods, bivalves, and other organic remains. It’s possible that in other parts of the Alps, as well as in the Carpathian range, similar shales, limestones, and dolomites, although currently lacking fossils, but containing ores of silver, lead, mercury, zinc, cobalt, and other metals, might also belong to the Devonian system.
In the centre of Europe, therefore, the Devonian rocks consist of a vast thickness of dark-grey sandy and shaly rocks, with occasional seams of limestone, and in particular with one thick central calcareous zone. These rocks are characterized in the lower zones by numerous broad-winged spirifers and by peculiar trilobites (Phacops, Homalonotus, &c.) which, though generically like those of the Silurian system, are specifically distinct. The central calcareous zone abounds in corals and crinoids as well as in numerous brachiopods. In the highest bands a profusion of coiled cephalopods (Clymenia) occurs in some of the limestones, while the shales are crowded with a small but characteristic ostracod crustacean (Cypridina). Here and there traces of fishes have been found, more especially in the Eifel, but seldom in such a state of preservation as to warrant their being assigned to any definite place in the zoological scale. Subsequently, however, E. Beyrich has described from Gerolstein in the Eifel an undoubted species of Pterichthys, which, as it cannot be certainly identified with any known form, he names P. Rhenanus. A Coccosteus has been described by F. A. Roemer from the Harz, and still later one has been cited from Bicken near Herborn by V. Koenen; but, as Beyrich points out, there may be some doubt as to whether the latter is not a Pterichthys. A Ctenacanthus, seemingly undistinguishable from the C. Bohemicus of Barrande's Étage G, has also been [Page 125] obtained from the Lower Devonian "Nereitenschichten" of Thuringia. The characteristic Holoptychius nobilissimus has been detected in the Psammite de Condroz, which in Belgium forms a characteristic sandy portion of the Upper Devonian rocks. These are interesting facts, as helping to link the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone types together. But they are as yet too few and unsupported to warrant any large deduction as to the correlations between these types.
In central Europe, the Devonian rocks consist of a vast thickness of dark-grey sandy and shaly rocks, with occasional seams of limestone, including one thick central calcareous zone. In the lower zones, these rocks are marked by numerous broad-winged spirifers and unique trilobites (Phacops, Homalonotus, etc.) that, while generically similar to those from the Silurian system, are specifically different. The central calcareous zone is rich in corals and crinoids, along with many brachiopods. In the upper layers, there’s an abundance of coiled cephalopods (Clymenia) found in some limestone, while the shales are packed with a small but distinctive ostracod crustacean (Cypridina). Occasionally, traces of fish have been found, particularly in the Eifel, but they are rarely well-preserved enough to place them definitively in the zoological hierarchy. However, E. Beyrich has described an unmistakable species of Pterichthys from Gerolstein in the Eifel, which he names P. Rhenanus because it cannot be clearly identified with any known form. F. A. Roemer has described a Coccosteus from the Harz, and more recently, V. Koenen cited one from Bicken near Herborn; but, as Beyrich notes, there may be some uncertainty about whether the latter is actually a Pterichthys. A Ctenacanthus, appearing indistinguishable from Barrande's Étage G C. Bohemicus, has also been [Page 125] obtained from the Lower Devonian "Nereitenschichten" of Thuringia. The notable Holoptychius nobilissimus has been identified in the Psammite de Condroz, which forms a characteristic sandy section of the Upper Devonian rocks in Belgium. These facts are interesting as they help to link the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone types together. However, they are still too few and unsupported to make any significant conclusions about the correlations between these types.
It is in the north-east of Europe that the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone appear to be united into one system, where the limestones and marine organisms of the one are interstratified with the fish-bearing sandstones and shales of the other. In Russia, as was shown in the great work Russia and the Ural Mountains by Murchison, De Verneuil and Keyserling, rocks intermediate between the Upper Silurian and Carboniferous Limestone formations cover an extent of surface larger than the British Islands. This wide development arises not from the thickness but from the undisturbed horizontal character of the strata. Like the Silurian formations described elsewhere, they remain to this day nearly as flat and unaltered as they were originally laid down. Judged by mere vertical depth, they present but a meagre representative of the massive Devonian greywacke and limestone of Germany, or of the Old Red Sandstone of Britain. Yet vast though the area is over which they form the surface rock, it is probably only a small portion of their total extent; for they are found turned up from under the newer formations along the flank of the Ural chain. It would thus seem that they spread continuously across the whole breadth of Russia in Europe. Though almost everywhere undisturbed, they afford evidence of some terrestrial oscillation between the time of their formation and that of the Silurian rocks on which they rest, for they are found gradually to overlap Upper and Lower Silurian formations.
In the northeast of Europe, the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone seem to form a single system, with the limestones and marine life of one layered alongside the fish-bearing sandstones and shales of the other. In Russia, as shown in the significant work Russia and the Ural Mountains by Murchison, De Verneuil, and Keyserling, there are rocks that lie between the Upper Silurian and Carboniferous Limestone formations that cover an area larger than the British Isles. This extensive coverage is due not to thickness but to the undisturbed horizontal nature of the layers. Like the Silurian formations discussed elsewhere, they remain nearly as flat and unaltered as when they were originally laid down. In terms of vertical depth, they seem to offer only a limited representation of the massive Devonian greywacke and limestone found in Germany or the Old Red Sandstone in Britain. However, despite the vast area where they are the surface rock, it is likely just a small part of their overall extent, as they are found rising from beneath the newer formations along the Ural mountain range. It appears that they spread continuously across the entire width of Russia in Europe. Although mostly undisturbed, they provide evidence of some land movement between the time they were formed and the time of the Silurian rocks they rest upon, as they gradually overlap Upper and Lower Silurian formations.
Table I.
Table 1.
Stages. | Ardennes. | Rhineland. |
Brittany and Normandy. |
Bohemia. | Harz. | |
Upper Devonian. |
Famennienc (Clymenia beds). |
Limestone of Etrœungt. Psammites of Condroz (sandy series). Slates of Famenne (shaly series). |
Cypridina slates. Pön sandstone (Sauerland). Crumbly limestone (Kramen- zelkalk) with Clymenia. Neheim slates in Sauerland, and diabases, tuffs, &c., in Dillmulde, &c. |
Slates of Rostellec. |
Cypridina slates. Clymenia limestone and limestone of Altenau. |
|
Frasnien (Intumes- cens beds). |
Slates of Matagne. Limestones, marls and shale of Frasne, and red marble of Flanders. |
Adorf limestone of Waldeck and shales with Goniatites (Eifel and Aix) = Budesheimer shales. Marls, limestone and dolomite with Rhynchonella cuboides (Flinz in part). Iberg limestone of Dillmulde. |
Limestone of Cop- Choux and green slates of Travuliors. |
Iberg limestone and Winterberg lime- stone; also Adorf limestone and shales (Budesheim). |
||
Middle Devonian. |
Givérien (Stringo- cephalus beds). |
Limestone of Givet. |
Stringocephalus limestone, ironstone of Brilon and Lahnmulde. Upper Lenne shales, crinoidal limestone of Eifel, red sandstones of Aix. Tuffs and diabases of Brilon and Lahnmulde. Red conglomerate of Aix. |
Limestones of Chalonnes, Montjean and l'Ecochère. |
H2 (of Barrande) dark plant-bearing shales. H1. |
Stringocephalus shales with Flaser and Knollenkalk. Wissenbach slates. |
Eifélien (Calceola beds). |
Calceola slates and limestones of Couvin. Greywacke with Spirifer cultrijugatus. |
Calceola beds, Wissenbach slates, Lower Lenne beds, Güntroder limestone and clay slate of Lahnmulde, Dillmulde, Wildungen, Griefenstein limestone, Ballersbach limestone. |
Slates of Porsguen, greywacke of Fret. |
G3 Cephalopod limestone. G2 Tentaculite limestone. G3 Knollenkalk and mottled Mnenian limestone. |
Calceola beds. Nereite slates, slates of Wieda and lime- stones of Hasselfeld. |
|
Lower Devonian. | Coblentzien |
Greywacke of Hierges. Shales and conglomer- ate of Burnot with quartzite, of Bierlé and red slates of Vireux, greywacke of Vireux, greywacke of Montigny, sand- stone of Anor. |
Upper Coblentz slates. Red sandstone of Eifel, Coblentz quartzite, lower Coblentz slates. Hunsrück and Siegener greywacke and slates. Taunus quartzite and greywacke. |
Limestones of Erbray, Brulon, Viré and Néhou, greywacke of Faou, sandstone of Gahard. |
F2 of Barrande. White Konjeprus Limestone with Hercynian fauna. |
Haupt quartzite (of Lossen) = Rammelsberg slates, Schallker slates = Kahleberg sandstone. Hercynian slates and limestones. |
Gédinnien |
Slates of St Hubert and and Fooz, slates of Mondrepuits, arkose of Weismes, conglomerate of Fèpin. |
Slates of Gédinne. |
Slates and quartzites of Plougastel. |
The chief interest of the Russian rocks of this age lies in the fact, first signalized by Murchison and his associates, that they unite within themselves the characters of the Devonian and the Old Red Sandstone types. In some districts they consist largely of limestones, in others of red sandstones and marls. In the former they present molluscs and other marine organisms of known Devonian species; in the latter they afford remains of fishes, some of which are specifically identical with those of the Old Red Sandstone of Scotland. The distribution of these two palaeontological types in Russia is traced by Murchison to the lithological characters of the rocks, and consequent original diversities of physical conditions, rather than to differences of age. Indeed cases occur where in the same band of rock Devonian shells and Old Red Sandstone fishes lie commingled. In the belt of the formation which extends southwards from Archangel and the White Sea, the strata consist of sands and marls, and contain only fish remains. Traced through the Baltic provinces, they are found to pass into red and green marls, clays, thin limestones and sandstones, with beds of gypsum. In some of the calcareous bands such fossils occur as Orthis striatula, Spiriferina prisca, Leptaena productoides, Spirifer calcaratus, Spirorbis omphaloides and Orthoceras subfusiforme. In the higher beds Holoptychius and other well-known fishes of the Old Red Sandstone occur. Followed still farther to the south, as far as the watershed between Orel and Voronezh, the Devonian rocks lose their red colour and sandy character, and become thin-bedded yellow limestones, and dolomites with soft green and blue marls. Traces of salt deposits are indicated by occasional saline springs. It is evident [Page 126] that the geographical conditions of the Russian area during the Devonian period must have closely resembled those of the Rhine basin and central England during the Triassic period. The Russian Devonian rocks have been classified in Table II. There is an unquestionable passage of the uppermost Devonian rocks of Russia into the base of the Carboniferous system.
The main interest of the Russian rocks from this period is the fact, first noted by Murchison and his team, that they combine features of both the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone types. In some areas, they are primarily made up of limestones, while in others, they consist of red sandstones and marls. In the limestones, you can find mollusks and other marine organisms from known Devonian species; in the sandstones and marls, there are remains of fish, some of which are specifically identical to those from the Old Red Sandstone in Scotland. Murchison traced the distribution of these two paleontological types in Russia to the rock's lithological characteristics and the resulting original differences in physical conditions, rather than differences in age. In fact, there are instances where Devonian shells and Old Red Sandstone fish are found mixed together in the same rock layer. In the formation that stretches south from Archangel and the White Sea, the layers consist of sands and marls and contain only fish remains. As these rocks extend through the Baltic provinces, they transition into red and green marls, clays, thin limestones, and sandstones, with layers of gypsum. In some of the calcareous layers, fossils like Orthis striatula, Spiriferina prisca, Leptaena productoides, Spirifer calcaratus, Spirorbis omphaloides, and Orthoceras subfusiforme can be found. In the upper layers, Holoptychius and other familiar fish from the Old Red Sandstone appear. Continuing south, up to the watershed between Orel and Voronezh, the Devonian rocks change from their red color and sandy texture to thin-bedded yellow limestones and dolomites, along with soft green and blue marls. Signs of salt deposits are present through occasional saline springs. Clearly, [Page 126] the geographical conditions in the Russian region during the Devonian period must have been quite similar to those of the Rhine basin and central England during the Triassic period. The Russian Devonian rocks have been classified in Table II. There is an evident transition from the uppermost Devonian rocks of Russia into the base of the Carboniferous system.
Table II.
Table 2.
North-West Russia. | Central Russia. | Petchoraland. | Ural Region. | ||
Upper. |
Red sandstone (Old Red). |
Limestones with Spirifer Verneuili and Sp. Archiaci. |
Limestones with Arca oreliana Limestones with Sp. Verneuili and Sp. Archiaci. |
Domanik slates and limestones with Sp. Verneuili. |
Cypridina slates, Clymenia limestones (Famennien). Limestones with Gephyoceras intumescens and Rhynchonella cuboides (Frasnien). |
Middle. |
Dolomites and limestones with Spirifer Anossofi. |
Marl with Spirifer Anossofi and corals. |
Limestones and slates with Sp. Anossofi (Givétien). Limestones and slates with Pentamerus baschkiricus (Eifélien). |
||
Lower sandstone (Old Red). | |||||
Lower. | Absent. |
Limestones and slates of the Yuresan and Ufa rivers, slate and quartzite, marble of Byclaya and of Bogoslovsk, phyllitic schists and quartzite. |
The Lower Devonian of the Harz contains a fauna which is very different from that of the Rhenish region; to this facies the name "Hercynian" has been applied, and the correlation of the strata has been a source of prolonged discussion among continental geologists. A similar fauna appears in Lower Devonian of Bohemia, in Brittany (limestone of Erbray) and in the Urals. The Upper Devonian of the Harz passes up into the Culm.
The Lower Devonian of the Harz has a fauna that's quite different from that of the Rhenish region; this type has been called "Hercynian," and figuring out the relationship of the layers has sparked extensive debate among continental geologists. A similar fauna is found in the Lower Devonian of Bohemia, in Brittany (limestone of Erbray), and in the Urals. The Upper Devonian of the Harz transitions into the Culm.
In the eastern Thuringian Fichtelgebirge the upper division is represented by Clymenia limestone and Cypridina slates with Adorf limestone, diabase and Planschwitzer tuff in the lower part. The middle division has diabases and tuffs at the top with Tentaculite and Nereite shales and limestones below. The upper part of the Lower Devonian, the sandy shale of Steinach, rests unconformably upon Silurian rocks. In the Carnic Alps are coral reef limestones, the equivalents of the Iberg limestone, which attain an enormous thickness; these are underlain by coral limestones with fossils similar to those of the Konjeprus limestone of Bohemia; below these are shales and nodular limestones with goniatites. The Devonian rocks of Poland are sandy in the lower, and more calcareous in the upper parts. They are of interest because while the upper portions agree closely with the Rhenish facies, from the top of the Coblentzien upwards, in the sandy beds near the base Old Red Sandstone fishes (Coccosteus, &c.) are found. In France Devonian rocks are found well developed in Brittany, as indicated in the table, also in Normandy and Maine; in the Boulonnais district only the middle and upper divisions are known. In south France in the neighbourhood of Cabrières, about Montpellier and in the Montagne Noire, all three divisions are found in a highly calcareous condition. Devonian rocks are recognized, though frequently much metamorphosed, on both the northern and southern flanks of the Pyrenees; while on the Spanish peninsula they are extensively developed. In Asturias they are no less than 3280 ft. thick, all three divisions and most of the central European subdivisions are present. In general, the Lower Devonian fossils of Spain bear a marked resemblance to those of Brittany.
In the eastern Thuringian Fichtelgebirge, the upper section consists of Clymenia limestone and Cypridina slates along with Adorf limestone, diabase, and Planschwitzer tuff in the lower section. The middle section includes diabases and tuffs at the top, with Tentaculite and Nereite shales and limestones underneath. The upper part of the Lower Devonian, the sandy shale of Steinach, sits unconformably on Silurian rocks. In the Carnic Alps, there are coral reef limestones, which are equivalent to the Iberg limestone and reach significant thickness; these are underpinned by coral limestones containing fossils similar to those in the Konjeprus limestone of Bohemia. Below these are shales and nodular limestones with goniatites. The Devonian rocks in Poland are sandy in the lower parts and more calcareous in the upper parts. They are noteworthy because while the upper sections closely resemble the Rhenish facies, from the top of the Coblentzien upwards, the sandy layers near the base contain Old Red Sandstone fishes (Coccosteus, etc.). In France, Devonian rocks are well represented in Brittany, as shown in the table, and also in Normandy and Maine; in the Boulonnais region, only the middle and upper sections are known. In southern France, near Cabrières, around Montpellier, and in the Montagne Noire, all three sections are found in a highly calcareous state. Devonian rocks are recognized, though often significantly metamorphosed, on both the northern and southern sides of the Pyrenees; while on the Spanish peninsula, they are extensively developed. In Asturias, they reach a thickness of 3280 ft., with all three sections and most of the central European subdivisions present. Generally, the Lower Devonian fossils in Spain closely resemble those found in Brittany.
Asia.—From the Ural Mountains eastward, Devonian rocks have been traced from point to point right across Asia. In the Altai Mountains they are represented by limestones of Coblentzien age with a fauna possessing Hercynian features. The same features are observed in the Devonian of the Kougnetsk basin, and in Turkestan. Well-developed quartzites with slates and diabases are found south of Yarkand and Khotan. Middle and Upper Devonian strata are widespread in China. Upper Devonian rocks are recorded from Persia, and from the Hindu Kush on the right bank of the Chitral river.
Asia.—From the Ural Mountains moving east, Devonian rocks have been tracked from point to point across Asia. In the Altai Mountains, they are represented by limestones from the Coblentzien age, featuring a fauna with Hercynian characteristics. The same features appear in the Devonian rocks of the Kougnetsk basin and in Turkestan. Well-developed quartzites along with slates and diabases can be found south of Yarkand and Khotan. Middle and Upper Devonian layers are widespread in China. Upper Devonian rocks have been noted in Persia and in the Hindu Kush on the right bank of the Chitral River.
England.—In England the original Devonian rocks are developed in Devon and Cornwall and west Somerset. In north Devonshire these rocks consist of sandstones, grits and slates, while in south Devon there are, in addition, thick beds of massive limestone, and intercalations of lavas and tuffs. The interpretation of the stratigraphy in this region is a difficult matter, partly on account of the absence of good exposures with fossils, and partly through the disturbed condition of the rocks. The system has been subdivided as shown in Table III.
England.—In England, the original Devonian rocks are found in Devon, Cornwall, and western Somerset. In northern Devon, these rocks are made up of sandstones, grits, and slates, while in southern Devon, there are also thick layers of massive limestone, along with interspersed lavas and tuffs. Understanding the stratigraphy in this area is challenging, partly due to the lack of good fossil exposures and partly because the rocks are in a disturbed state. The system has been divided as shown in Table III.
Table III.
Table 3.
North Devon and West Somerset. |
South Devon. | |
Upper. |
Pilton group. Grits, slates and thin limestones. Baggy group. Sandstones and slates. Pickwell Down group. Dark slates and grits. Morte slates (?). |
Ashburton slates. Livaton slates. Red and green Entomis slates (Famennien). Red and grey slates with tuffs. Chudleigh goniatite limestone Petherwyn beds (Frasnien). |
Middle. |
Ilfracombe slates with lenticles of limestone. Combe Martin grits and slates. |
Torquay and Plymouth limestones and Ashprington volcanic series. (Givétien and Eifélien.) Slates and limestones of Hope's Nose. |
Lower. |
Hangman grits and slates. Lynton group, grits and calcareous slates. Foreland grits and slates. |
Looe beds (Cornwall). Meadfoot, Cockington and Warberry series of slates and greywackes. (Coblentzien and Gédinnien.) |
The fossil evidence clearly shows the close agreement of the Rhenish and south Devonshire areas. In north Devonshire the Devonian rocks pass upward without break into the Culm.
The fossil evidence clearly shows that the Rhenish and south Devonshire areas closely match. In north Devonshire, the Devonian rocks transition smoothly into the Culm.
North America.—In North America the Devonian rocks are extensively developed; they have been studied most closely in the New York region, where they are classified according to Table IV.
North America.—In North America, the Devonian rocks are widely found; they have been examined most thoroughly in the New York area, where they are categorized according to Table IV.
The classification below is not capable of application over the states generally and further details are required from many of the regions where Devonian rocks have been recognized, but everywhere the broad threefold division seems to obtain. In Maryland the following arrangement has been adopted—(1) Helderberg = Coeymans; (2) Oriskany; (3) Romney = Erian; (4) Jennings = Genesee and Portage; (5) Hampshire = Catskill in part. In the interior the Helderbergian is missing and the system commences with (1) Oriskany, (2) Onondaga, (3) Hamilton, (4) Portage (and Genesee), (5) Chemung.
The classification below can't be applied to all states generally, and more details are needed from many regions where Devonian rocks have been identified. However, the broad three-part division seems to hold true everywhere. In Maryland, the following arrangement has been used: (1) Helderberg = Coeymans; (2) Oriskany; (3) Romney = Erian; (4) Jennings = Genesee and Portage; (5) Hampshire = Catskill in part. In the interior, the Helderbergian is absent, and the system starts with (1) Oriskany, (2) Onondaga, (3) Hamilton, (4) Portage (and Genesee), (5) Chemung.
The Helderbergian series is mainly confined to the eastern part of the continent; there is a northern development in Maine, and in Canada (Gaspé, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia and Montreal); an Appalachian belt, and a lower Mississippian region. The series as a whole is mainly calcareous (2000 ft. in Gaspé), and thins out towards the west. The fauna has Hercynian affinities. The Oriskany formation consists largely of coarse sandstones; it is thin in New York, but in Maryland and Virginia it is several hundred feet thick. It is more widespread than the underlying Helderbergian. The Lower Devonian appears to be thick in northern Maine and in Gaspé, New Brunswick and Nova Scotia, but neither the palaeontology nor the stratigraphy has been completely worked out.
The Helderbergian series is mostly found in the eastern part of the continent, with a northern presence in Maine and Canada (Gaspé, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, and Montreal); there’s also an Appalachian belt and a lower Mississippian region. Overall, the series is primarily calcareous (2000 ft. in Gaspé) and thins out as you go west. The fauna shows Hercynian connections. The Oriskany formation is mainly made up of coarse sandstones; it's thin in New York, but several hundred feet thick in Maryland and Virginia. It is more widespread than the underlying Helderbergian. The Lower Devonian seems to be thick in northern Maine and in Gaspé, New Brunswick, and Nova Scotia, but neither the paleontology nor the stratigraphy has been fully worked out.
In the Middle Devonian the thin clastic deposits at the base, Esopus and Schoharie grits, have not been differentiated west of the Appalachian region; but the Onondaga limestones are much more extensive. The Erian series is often described as the Hamilton series outside the New York district, where the Marcellus shales are grouped together with the Hamilton shales, and numerous local subdivisions are included, as in Ohio, Kentucky and Tennessee. The rocks are mostly shales or slates, but limestones predominate in the western development. In Pennsylvania the Hamilton series is from 1500 ft. to 5000 ft. thick, but in the more calcareous western extension it is much thinner. The Marcellus shales are bituminous in places.
In the Middle Devonian period, the thin clastic deposits at the bottom, called Esopus and Schoharie grits, haven’t been distinguished west of the Appalachian region, but the Onondaga limestones are quite extensive. The Erian series is often referred to as the Hamilton series outside of New York, where the Marcellus shales are categorized alongside the Hamilton shales, and various local subdivisions are included, as seen in Ohio, Kentucky, and Tennessee. The rocks are mainly shales or slates, though limestones are more common in the western areas. In Pennsylvania, the Hamilton series ranges from 1,500 ft. to 5,000 ft. thick, but it’s much thinner in the more calcareous western part. The Marcellus shales are bituminous in some areas.
The Senecan series is composed of shallow-water deposits; the Tully limestone, a local bed in New York, thins out in places into a layer of pyrites which contains a remarkable dwarfed fauna. The bituminous Genesee shales are thickest in Pennsylvania (300 ft.); 25 ft. on Lake Erie. The shales and sandstones of the Portage formation reach 1000 ft. to 1400 ft. in western New York. In the Chautauquan series the Chemung formation is not always clearly separable from the Portage beds, it is a sandstone and conglomerate formation which reaches its maximum thickness (8000 ft.) in Pennsylvania, but thins rapidly towards the west. In the Catskill region the Upper Devonian has an Old Red facies—red shales and sandstones with a freshwater and brackish fauna.
The Senecan series consists of shallow-water deposits; the Tully limestone, a local formation in New York, sometimes thins into a layer of pyrites that contains a unique dwarfed fauna. The bituminous Genesee shales are thickest in Pennsylvania (300 ft.) and reach 25 ft. on Lake Erie. The shales and sandstones of the Portage formation range from 1000 ft. to 1400 ft. in western New York. In the Chautauquan series, the Chemung formation is not always distinct from the Portage beds; it is a sandstone and conglomerate formation that reaches its maximum thickness (8000 ft.) in Pennsylvania but rapidly decreases in thickness towards the west. In the Catskill region, the Upper Devonian has an Old Red facies—red shales and sandstones featuring a freshwater and brackish fauna.
Table IV.
Table 4.
Groups. | Formations. |
Probable European Equivalent. |
|
Upper. | Chautauquan. |
Chemung beds with Catskill as a local facies. |
Famennien. |
Senecan. |
Portage beds (Naples, Ithaca and Oneonta shales as local facies). Genesee shales. Tully limestone. |
Frasnien. | |
Middle. | Erian. |
Hamilton shale. Marcellus shale. |
Givétien. |
Ulsterian. |
Onondaga (Corniferous) limestone. Schoharie grit. Esopus grit (Caudagalli grit). |
Eifélien. | |
Lower. | Oriskanian. | Oriskany sandstone. | Coblentzien. |
Helderbergian. |
Kingston beds. Becraft limestone. New Scotland beds. Coeymans limestone. |
Gédinnien. |
Although the correlation of the strata has only advanced a short distance, there is no doubt as to the presence of undifferentiated Devonian rocks in many parts of the continent. In the Great Plains this system appears to be absent, but it is represented in Colorado, Utah, Nevada, Wyoming, Montana, California and Arizona; Devonian rocks occur between the Sierras and the Rocky Mountains, in the Arbuckle Mountains of Oklahoma and in Texas. In the western interior limestones predominate; 6000 ft. of limestone are found at Eureka, Nevada, beneath 2000 ft. of shale. On the Pacific coast metamorphism of the rocks is common, and lava-flows and tuffs occur in them.
Although the correlation of the layers has only progressed a little, there's no doubt that undifferentiated Devonian rocks are present in many parts of the continent. In the Great Plains, this system seems to be missing, but it's found in Colorado, Utah, Nevada, Wyoming, Montana, California, and Arizona; Devonian rocks are located between the Sierra Nevada and the Rocky Mountains, in the Arbuckle Mountains of Oklahoma, and in Texas. In the western interior, limestone is the dominant rock type; 6,000 feet of limestone can be found at Eureka, Nevada, under 2,000 feet of shale. On the Pacific coast, rock metamorphism is common, and there are lava flows and tuffs present as well.
In Canada, besides the occurrences previously mentioned in the eastern region, Devonian strata are found in considerable force along the course of the Mackenzie river and the Canadian Rockies, whence they stretch out into Alaska. It is probable, however, that much that is now classed as Devonian in Canada will prove on fossil evidence to be Carboniferous.
In Canada, in addition to the instances noted earlier in the eastern region, Devonian rock layers are prominently present along the Mackenzie River and the Canadian Rockies, extending into Alaska. However, it’s likely that many of the layers currently categorized as Devonian in Canada will be determined to be Carboniferous based on fossil evidence.
South America, Africa, Australia, &c.—In South America the Devonian is well developed; in Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Peru and the Falkland Islands, the palaeontological horizon is about the junction of the Lower and Middle divisions, and the fauna has affinities with the Hamilton shales of North America. Nearly allied to the South American Devonian is that of South Africa, where they are represented by the Bokkeveld beds in the Cape system. In Australia we find Lower Devonian consisting of coarse littoral deposits with volcanic rocks; and a Middle division with coral limestones in Victoria, New South Wales and Queensland; an Upper division has also been observed. In New Zealand the Devonian is well exposed in the Reefton mining field; and it has been suggested that much of the highly metamorphosed rock may belong to this system.
South America, Africa, Australia, etc.—In South America, the Devonian period is well represented; in Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Peru, and the Falkland Islands, the fossil record is primarily found at the junction of the Lower and Middle divisions, and the wildlife resembles that of the Hamilton shales in North America. The South American Devonian is closely related to that of South Africa, where it is found in the Bokkeveld beds within the Cape system. In Australia, the Lower Devonian includes coarse coastal deposits alongside volcanic rocks; the Middle division features coral limestones in Victoria, New South Wales, and Queensland; an Upper division has also been noted. In New Zealand, the Devonian period is prominently displayed in the Reefton mining area; it has been proposed that much of the highly altered rock may belong to this period.
Stratigraphy of the Old Red Sandstone Facies.
Stratigraphy of the Old Red Sandstone Facies.
The Old Red Sandstone of Britain, according to Sir Archibald Geikie, "consists of two subdivisions, the lower of which passes down conformably into the Upper Silurian deposits, the upper shading off in the same manner into the base of the Carboniferous system, while they are separated from each other by an unconformability." The Old Red strata appear to have been deposited in a number of elongated lakes or lagoons, approximately parallel to one another, with a general alignment in a N.E.-S.W. direction. To these areas of deposit Sir A. Geikie has assigned convenient distinctive names.
The Old Red Sandstone of Britain, according to Sir Archibald Geikie, "is made up of two parts, the lower of which gradually transitions into the Upper Silurian deposits, while the upper fades away in a similar way into the base of the Carboniferous system, with an unconformability separating them." The Old Red layers seem to have formed in several long lakes or lagoons, roughly parallel to each other, mostly aligned in a N.E.-S.W. direction. Sir A. Geikie has given these deposit areas specific, convenient names.
In Scotland the two divisions of the system are sharply separated by a pronounced unconformability which is probably indicative of a prolonged interval of erosion. In the central valley between the base of the Highlands and the southern uplands lay "Lake Caledonia." Here the lower division is made up of some 20,000 ft. of shallow-water deposits, reddish-brown, yellow and grey sandstones and conglomerates, with occasional "cornstones," and thin limestones. The grey flagstones with shales are almost confined to Forfarshire, and are known as the "Arbroath flags." Interbedded volcanic rocks, andesites, dacites, diabases, with agglomerates and tuffs constitute an important feature, and attain a thickness of 6000 ft. in the Pentland and Ochil hills. A line of old volcanic vents may be traced in a direction roughly parallel to the trend of the great central valley. On the northern side of the Highlands was "Lake Orcadie," presumably much larger than the foregoing lake, though its boundaries are not determinable. It lay over Moray Firth and the east of Ross and Sutherland, and extended from Caithness to the Orkney Islands and S. Shetlands. It may even have stretched across to Norway, where similar rocks are found in Sognefjord and Dalsfjord, and may have had communications with some parts of northern Russia. Very characteristic of this area are the Caithness flags, dark grey and bituminous, which, with the red sandstones and conglomerates at their base, probably attain a thickness of 16,000 ft. The somewhat peculiar fauna of this series led Murchison to class the flags as Middle Devonian. In the Shetland Islands contemporaneous volcanic rocks have been observed. Over the west of Argyllshire lay "Lake Lorne"; here the volcanic rocks predominate, they are intercalated with shallow-water deposits. A similar set of rocks occupy the Cheviot district.
In Scotland, the two parts of the system are clearly separated by a significant unconformity, likely indicating a long period of erosion. In the central valley between the base of the Highlands and the southern uplands was "Lake Caledonia." Here, the lower division includes about 20,000 feet of shallow-water deposits, consisting of reddish-brown, yellow, and gray sandstones and conglomerates, with occasional "cornstones" and thin layers of limestone. The gray flagstones with shales are mostly found in Forfarshire, where they're known as the "Arbroath flags." Interbedded volcanic rocks, such as andesites, dacites, and diabases, along with agglomerates and tuffs, make up an important feature, reaching a thickness of 6,000 feet in the Pentland and Ochil hills. A line of old volcanic vents can be traced roughly parallel to the direction of the great central valley. On the northern side of the Highlands was "Lake Orcadie," which was likely much larger than Lake Caledonia, although its exact boundaries can't be determined. It covered the Moray Firth and the eastern parts of Ross and Sutherland, extending from Caithness to the Orkney Islands and the South Shetlands. It may have even stretched across to Norway, where similar rocks are found in Sognefjord and Dalsfjord, and may have connected with some areas of northern Russia. A distinctive feature of this region is the dark gray and bituminous Caithness flags, which, along with the red sandstones and conglomerates beneath them, probably reach a thickness of 16,000 feet. The somewhat unique fauna of this series led Murchison to classify the flags as Middle Devonian. In the Shetland Islands, volcanic rocks from the same period have been observed. To the west of Argyllshire was "Lake Lorne," where volcanic rocks dominate, interspersed with shallow-water deposits. A similar set of rocks can be found in the Cheviot district.
The upper division of the Old Red Sandstone is represented in Shropshire and South Wales by a great series of red rocks, shales, sandstones and marls, some 10,000 ft. thick. They contain few fossils, and no break has yet been found in the series. In Scotland this series was deposited in basins which correspond only partially with those of the earlier period. They are well developed in central Scotland over the lowlands bordering the Moray Firth. Interbedded lavas and tuffs are found in the island of Hoy. An interesting feature of this series is the occurrence of great crowds of fossil fishes in some localities, notably at Dura Den in Fife. In the north of England this series rests unconformably upon the Lower Old Red and the Silurian.
The upper division of the Old Red Sandstone appears in Shropshire and South Wales as a large sequence of red rocks, shales, sandstones, and marls, measuring about 10,000 feet thick. They contain few fossils, and no gap in the series has been identified so far. In Scotland, this series was deposited in basins that only partially match those from the earlier period. It is prominently developed in central Scotland over the lowlands near the Moray Firth. Interbedded lavas and tuffs can be found on the island of Hoy. A notable aspect of this series is the presence of large groups of fossilized fish in certain locations, especially at Dura Den in Fife. In northern England, this series sits unconformably above the Lower Old Red and the Silurian.
Flanking the Silurian high ground of Cumberland and Westmorland, and also in the Lammermuir hills and in Flint and Anglesey, a brecciated conglomerate, presenting many of the characters of a glacial deposit in places, has often been classed with the Old Red Sandstone, but in parts, at least, it is more likely to belong to the base of the Carboniferous system. In Ireland the lower division appears to be represented by the Dingle beds and Glengariff grits, while the Kerry rocks and the Kiltorcan beds of Cork are the equivalents of the upper division. Rocks of Old Red type, both lower and upper, are found in Spitzbergen and in Bear Island. In New Brunswick and Nova Scotia the Old Red facies is extensively developed. The Gaspé sandstones have been estimated at 7036 ft. thick. In parts of western Russia Old Red Sandstone fossils are found in beds intercalated with others containing marine fauna of the Devonian facies.
Flanking the Silurian high ground of Cumberland and Westmorland, as well as in the Lammermuir hills and in Flint and Anglesey, a broken-up conglomerate, which shows many characteristics of a glacial deposit in some areas, has often been classified with the Old Red Sandstone, but in certain parts, it likely belongs at the base of the Carboniferous system. In Ireland, the lower division seems to be represented by the Dingle beds and Glengariff grits, while the Kerry rocks and the Kiltorcan beds of Cork correspond to the upper division. Rocks of Old Red type, both lower and upper, are found in Spitzbergen and Bear Island. In New Brunswick and Nova Scotia, the Old Red facies is widely developed. The Gaspé sandstones have been estimated to be 7036 ft. thick. In parts of western Russia, Old Red Sandstone fossils are found in layers mixed with others containing marine fauna of the Devonian type.
Devonian and Old Red Sandstone Faunas.
Devonian and Old Red Sandstone Faunas.
The two types of sediment formed during this period—the marine Devonian and the lagoonal Old Red Sandstone—representing as they do two different but essentially contemporaneous phases of physical condition, are occupied by two strikingly dissimilar faunas. Doubtless at all times there were regions of the earth that were marked off no less clearly from the normal marine conditions of which we have records; but this period is the earliest in which these variations of environment are made obvious. In some respects the faunal break between the older Silurian below and the younger Carboniferous above is not strongly marked; and in certain areas a very close relationship can be shown to exist between the older Devonian and the former, and the younger Devonian and the latter. Nevertheless, taken as a whole, the life of this period bears a distinct stamp of individuality.
The two types of sediment formed during this time—the marine Devonian and the lagoonal Old Red Sandstone—represent two different but essentially simultaneous phases of environmental conditions and are home to two very different types of fauna. It's likely that, throughout history, there were areas of the earth that were just as clearly distinct from the typical marine conditions we have records of; however, this period is the earliest when these environmental variations are clearly evident. In some ways, the distinction between the older Silurian below and the younger Carboniferous above isn't very pronounced; and in certain regions, there can be shown to be a close relationship between the older Devonian and the former, as well as the younger Devonian and the latter. Nevertheless, overall, the life of this period has a unique character.
The two most prominent features of the Devonian seas are presented by corals and brachiopods. The corals were abundant individually and varied in form; and they are so distinctive of the period that no Devonian species has yet been found either in the Silurian or in the Carboniferous. They built reefs, as in the present day, and contributed to the formation of limestone masses in Devonshire, on the continent of Europe and in North America. Rugose and tabulate forms prevailed; among the former the cyathophyllids (Cyathophyllum) were important, Phillipsastraea, Zaphrentis, Acervularia and the curious Calceola (sandalina), an operculate genus which has given palaeontologists much trouble in its diagnosis, for it has been regarded as a pelecypod (hippurite) and [Page 128] a brachiopod. The tabulate corals were represented by Favosites, Michelinia, Pleurodictyum, Fistulipora, Pachypora and others. Heliolites and Plasmopora represent the alcyonarians. Stromatoporoids were important reef builders. A well-known fossil is Receptaculites, a genus to which it has been difficult to assign a definite place; it has been thought to be a sponge, it may be a calcareous alga, or a curious representative of the foraminifera.
The two main features of the Devonian seas are corals and brachiopods. The corals were abundant and came in various shapes; they're so characteristic of this period that no Devonian species has been found in either the Silurian or the Carboniferous. They built reefs just like today and helped form limestone deposits in Devonshire, throughout Europe, and in North America. Rugose and tabulate forms were the most common; among the rugose, the cyathophyllids (Cyathophyllum) were significant, along with Phillipsastraea, Zaphrentis, Acervularia, and the unusual Calceola (sandalina), an operculate type that has confused paleontologists because it has been classified as both a pelecypod (hippurite) and [Page 128] a brachiopod. The tabulate corals included Favosites, Michelinia, Pleurodictyum, Fistulipora, Pachypora, and others. Heliolites and Plasmopora are examples of alcyonarians. Stromatoporoids played a key role as reef builders. A well-known fossil is Receptaculites, a genus that has been challenging to classify; it has been thought to be a sponge, could be a calcareous alga, or an odd type of foraminifera.
In the Devonian period the brachiopods reached the climax of their development: they compose three-quarters of the known fauna, and more than 1100 species have been described. Changes were taking place from the beginning of the period in the relative importance of genera; several Silurian forms dropped out, and new types were coming in. A noticeable feature was the development of broad-winged shells in the genus Spirifer, other spiriferids were Ambocoelia, Uncites, Verneuilia. Orthids and pentamerids were waning in importance, while the productids (Productella, Chonetes, Strophalosia) were increasing. The strophomenids were still flourishing, represented by the genera Leptaena, Stropheodonta, Kayserella, and others. The ancient Lingula, along with Crania and Orbiculoidea, occur among the inarticulate forms. Another long-lived and wide-ranging species is Atrypa reticularis. The athyrids were very numerous (Athyris, Retzia, Merista, Meristella, Kayserina, &c.); and the rhynchonellids were well represented by Pugnax, Hypothyris, and several other genera. The important group of terebratulids appears in this system; amongst them Stringocephalus is an eminently characteristic Devonian brachiopod; others are Dielasma, Cryptonella, Rensselaeria and Oriskania.
In the Devonian period, brachiopods reached the peak of their development: they made up three-quarters of the known fauna, and over 1,100 species have been described. Changes started happening from the beginning of the period regarding the relative importance of different genera; several Silurian forms went extinct, while new types emerged. A notable feature was the development of broad-winged shells in the genus Spirifer, with other spiriferids like Ambocoelia, Uncites, and Verneuilia. Orthids and pentamerids were becoming less significant, while the productids (Productella, Chonetes, Strophalosia) were on the rise. The strophomenids continued to thrive, represented by genera such as Leptaena, Stropheodonta, Kayserella, and others. The ancient Lingula, along with Crania and Orbiculoidea, can be found among the inarticulate forms. Another long-lived and widespread species is Atrypa reticularis. The athyrids were very numerous (Athyris, Retzia, Merista, Meristella, Kayserina, etc.); and the rhynchonellids were well represented by Pugnax, Hypothyris, and several other genera. The significant group of terebratulids appears in this system; among them, Stringocephalus is a particularly characteristic Devonian brachiopod, along with others like Dielasma, Cryptonella, Rensselaeria, and Oriskania.
The pelecypod molluscs were represented by Pterinea, abundant in the lower members along with other large-winged forms, and by Cucullella, Buchiola and Curtonotus in the upper members of the system. Other genera are Actinodesma, Cardiola, Nucula, Megalodon, Aviculopecten, &c. Gasteropods were becoming more important, but the simple capulid forms prevailed: Platyceras (Capulus), Straparollus, Pleurotomaria, Murchisonia, Macrocheilina, Euomphalus. Among the pteropods, Tentaculites was very abundant in some quarters; others were Conularia and Styliolina. In the Devonian period the cephalopods began to make a distinct advance in numbers, and in development. The goniatites appear with the genera Anarcestes, Agoniatites, Tornoceras, Bactrites and others; and in the upper strata the clymenoids, forerunners of the later ammonoids, began to take definite shape. While several new nautiloids (Homaloceras, Ryticeras, &c.) made their appearance several of the older genera still lived on (Orthoceras, Poterioceras, Actinoceras).
The pelecypod mollusks included Pterinea, which were abundant in the lower layers alongside other large-winged forms, as well as Cucullella, Buchiola, and Curtonotus in the upper layers of the system. Other genera included Actinodesma, Cardiola, Nucula, Megalodon, Aviculopecten, etc. Gastropods were becoming more significant, although the simpler capulid forms dominated: Platyceras (Capulus), Straparollus, Pleurotomaria, Murchisonia, Macrocheilina, Euomphalus. Among the pteropods, Tentaculites was very common in certain areas; others included Conularia and Styliolina. During the Devonian period, cephalopods began to significantly increase in both numbers and development. The goniatites appeared with genera like Anarcestes, Agoniatites, Tornoceras, Bactrites, and others; in the upper strata, the clymenoids, precursors to the later ammonoids, began to take on distinct shapes. While several new nautiloids (like Homaloceras, Ryticeras, etc.) emerged, many of the older genera continued to survive (Orthoceras, Poterioceras, Actinoceras).
Crinoids were very abundant in some parts of the Devonian sea, though they were relatively scarce in others; they include the genera Melocrinus, Haplocrinus, Cupressocrinus, Calceocrinus and Eleuthrocrinus. The cystideans were falling off (Proteocystis, Tiaracrinus), but blastoids were in the ascendant (Nucleocrinus, Codaster, &c.). Both brittle-stars, Ophiura, Palaeophiura, Eugaster, and true starfishes, Palaeaster, Aspidosoma, were present, as well as urchins (Lepidocentrus).
Crinoids were really common in some areas of the Devonian sea, although they were fairly rare in others; they include the genera Melocrinus, Haplocrinus, Cupressocrinus, Calceocrinus, and Eleuthrocrinus. The cystideans were declining (Proteocystis, Tiaracrinus), but blastoids were becoming more common (Nucleocrinus, Codaster, &c.). Both brittle-stars, Ophiura, Palaeophiura, Eugaster, and true starfishes, Palaeaster, Aspidosoma, were present, along with urchins (Lepidocentrus).
When we turn to the crustaceans we have to deal with two distinct assemblages, one purely marine, trilobitic, the other mainly lacustrine or lagoonal with a eurypteridian facies. The trilobites had already begun to decline in importance, and as happens not infrequently with degenerating races of beasts and men, they began to develop strange eccentricities of ornamentation in some of their genera. A number of Silurian genera lived on into the Devonian period, and some gradually developed into new and distinctive forms; such were Proëtus, Harpes, Cheirurus, Bronteus and others. Distinct species of Phacops mark the Lower and Upper Devonian respectively, while the genus Dalmania (Odontochile) was represented by species with an almost world-wide range. The Ostracod Entomis (Cypridina) was extremely abundant in places—Cypridinen-Schiefer—while the true Cypridina was also present along with Beyrichia, Leperditia, &c. The Phyllocarids, Echinocaris, Eleuthrocaris, Tropidocaris, are common in the United States. It is in the Old Red Sandstone that the eurypterids are best preserved; foremost among these was Pterygotus; P. anglicus has been found in Scotland with a length of nearly 6 ft.; Eurypterus, Slimonia, Stylonurus were other genera.
When we look at crustaceans, we find two distinct groups: one that is purely marine and trilobitic, and the other that is mostly lacustrine or lagoonal with a eurypterid appearance. The trilobites were already starting to lose their significance, and, as is often the case with declining species, some began to develop unusual and peculiar features in their ornamentation. Several Silurian genera made it into the Devonian period, gradually evolving into new and unique forms, such as Proëtus, Harpes, Cheirurus, Bronteus, and others. Distinct species of Phacops are found in the Lower and Upper Devonian, respectively, while the genus Dalmania (Odontochile) had species that were nearly globally distributed. The Ostracod Entomis (Cypridina) was very abundant in certain areas—Cypridinen-Schiefer—while true Cypridina was also present alongside Beyrichia, Leperditia, etc. The Phyllocarids, including Echinocaris, Eleuthrocaris, and Tropidocaris, are common in the United States. The eurypterids are best preserved in the Old Red Sandstone, with Pterygotus being the most notable; P. anglicus has been found in Scotland and measured nearly 6 ft. in length. Other genera include Eurypterus, Slimonia, and Stylonurus.
Insects appear well developed, including both orthopterous and neuropterous forms, in the New Brunswick rocks. Mr Scudder believed he had obtained a specimen of Orthoptera in which a stridulating organ was present. A species of Ephemera, allied to the modern may-fly, had a spread of wing extending to 5 in. In the Scottish Old Red Sandstone myriapods, Kampecaris and Archidesmus, have been described; they are somewhat simpler than more recent forms, each segment being separate, and supplied with only one pair of walking legs. Spiders and scorpions also lived upon the land.
Insects were well-developed, including both grasshoppers and lacewings, in the rocks of New Brunswick. Mr. Scudder thought he had found a specimen of grasshopper with a stridulating organ. A species of Ephemera, related to modern mayflies, had a wingspan of 5 inches. In the Scottish Old Red Sandstone, myriapods like Kampecaris and Archidesmus have been described; they are somewhat simpler than more recent types, with each segment being separate and having only one pair of walking legs. Spiders and scorpions also inhabited the land.
The great number of fish remains in the Devonian and Old Red strata, coupled with the truly remarkable characters possessed by some of the forms, has caused the period to be described as the "age of fishes." As in the case of the crustaceans, referred to above, we find one assemblage more or less peculiar to the freshwater or brackish conditions of the Old Red, and another characteristic of the marine Devonian; on the whole the former is the richer in variety, but there seems little doubt that quite a number of genera were capable of living in either environment, whatever may have been the real condition of the Old Red waters. Foremost in interest are the curious ostracoderms, a remarkable group of creatures possessing many of the characteristics of fishes, but more probably belonging to a distinct class of organisms, which appears to link the vertebrates with the arthropods. They had come into existence late in Silurian times; but it is in the Old Red strata that their remains are most fully preserved. They were abundant in the fresh or brackish waters of Scotland, England, Wales, Russia and Canada, and are represented by such forms as Pteraspis, Cephalaspis, Cyathaspis, Tremataspis, Bothriolepis and Pterichthys.
The large number of fish found in the Devonian and Old Red rock formations, along with the truly remarkable features of some species, has led to this period being called the "age of fishes." Similar to the crustaceans mentioned earlier, there is one group that is more or less unique to the freshwater or brackish conditions of the Old Red, and another that is typical of the marine Devonian; overall, the former has more variety, but there's little doubt that quite a few genera could thrive in either environment, regardless of the actual conditions in the Old Red waters. At the forefront of interest are the intriguing ostracoderms, an extraordinary group of creatures that exhibit many characteristics of fish but likely belong to a different class of organisms, which seems to connect vertebrates with arthropods. They emerged in the late Silurian period; however, it's in the Old Red strata where their fossils are most thoroughly preserved. They were plentiful in the fresh or brackish waters of Scotland, England, Wales, Russia, and Canada, and include forms like Pteraspis, Cephalaspis, Cyathaspis, Tremataspis, Bothriolepis, and Pterichthys.
In the lower members of the Old Red series Dipterus, and in the upper members Phaneropleuron, represented the dipnoid lung-fishes; and it is of extreme interest to note that a few of these curious forms still survive in the African Protopterus, the Australian Ceratodus and the South American Lepidosiren,—all freshwater fishes. Distantly related to the lung-fishes were the singular arthrodirans, a group possessing the unusual faculty of moving the head in a vertical plane. These comprise the wide-ranging Coccosteus with Homosteus and Dinichthys, the largest fish of the period. The latter probably reached 20 ft. in length; it was armed with exceedingly powerful jaws provided with turtle-like beaks. Sharks were fairly prominent denizens of the sea; some were armed with cutting teeth, others with crushing dental plates; and although they were on the whole marine fishes, they were evidently able to live in fresher waters, like some of their modern representatives, for their remains, mostly teeth and large dermal spines, are found both in the Devonian and Old Red rocks. Mesacanthus, Diplacanthus, Climatius, Cheiracanthus are characteristic genera. The crossopterygians, ganoids with a scaly lobe in the centre of the fins, were represented by Holoptychius and Glyptopomus in the Upper Old Red, and by such genera as Diplopterus, Osteolepis, Gyroptychius in the lower division. The Polypterus of the Nile and Calamoichthys of South Africa are the modern exemplars of this group. Cheirolepis, found in the Old Red of Scotland and Canada, is the only Devonian representative of the actinopterygian fishes. The cyclostome fishes have, so far, been discovered only in Scotland, in the tiny Palaeospondylus. Amphibian remains have been found in the Devonian of Belgium; and footprints supposed to belong to a creature of the same class (Thinopus antiquus) have been described by Professor Marsh from the Chemung formation of Pennsylvania.
In the lower sections of the Old Red series, *Dipterus* and in the upper sections, *Phaneropleuron*, represented the dipnoid lung-fishes. It's really interesting to note that a few of these unique forms still exist today in Africa as *Protopterus*, in Australia as *Ceratodus*, and in South America as *Lepidosiren*—all freshwater fish. Distantly related to the lung-fishes were the unusual arthrodirans, a group that had the unique ability to move their heads vertically. This group includes the widespread *Coccosteus*, along with *Homosteus* and *Dinichthys*, the largest fish of that time. The latter probably grew to about 20 feet long and was equipped with extremely strong jaws featuring turtle-like beaks. Sharks were fairly prominent inhabitants of the sea; some had sharp teeth while others had flat dental plates. Although they were mostly marine fish, they could clearly survive in freshwater environments, similar to some of their modern relatives, as their remains, mainly teeth and large dermal spines, are found in both the Devonian and Old Red rocks. *Mesacanthus*, *Diplacanthus*, *Climatius*, and *Cheiracanthus* are typical genera. The crossopterygians, ganoids with a scaly lobe in the center of their fins, were represented by *Holoptychius* and *Glyptopomus* in the Upper Old Red, and by genera such as *Diplopterus*, *Osteolepis*, and *Gyroptychius* in the lower division. The *Polypterus* of the Nile and *Calamoichthys* from South Africa are the modern representatives of this group. *Cheirolepis*, found in the Old Red of Scotland and Canada, is the only Devonian representative of actinopterygian fishes. So far, cyclostome fishes have only been discovered in Scotland, specifically the tiny *Palaeospondylus*. Amphibian remains have been found in the Devonian of Belgium, and footprints believed to belong to a creature from the same class (*Thinopus antiquus*) have been described by Professor Marsh from the Chemung formation in Pennsylvania.
Plant Life.—In the lacustrine deposits of the Old Red Sandstone we find the earliest well-defined assemblage of terrestrial plants. In some regions so abundant are the vegetable remains that in places they form thin seams of veritable coal. These plants evidently flourished around the shores of the lakes and lagoons in which their remains were buried along with the other forms of life. Lycopods and ferns were the predominant types; and it is important to notice that both groups were already highly developed. The ferns include the genera Sphenopteris, Megalopteris, Archaeopteris, Neuropteris. Among the Lycopods are Lycopodites, Psilophyton, Lepidodendron. Modern horsetails are represented by Calamocladus, Asterocalamites, Annularia. Of great interest are the genera Cordaites, Araucarioxylon, &c., which were synthetic types, uniting in some degree the Coniferae and the Cycadofilicales. With the exception of obscure markings, aquatic plants are not so well represented as might have been expected; Parka, a common fossil, has been regarded as a water plant with a creeping stem and two kinds of sporangia in sessile sporocarps.
Plant Life.—In the lake deposits of the Old Red Sandstone, we find the earliest clear collection of land plants. In some areas, plant remains are so abundant that they create thin layers of real coal. These plants clearly thrived around the edges of the lakes and lagoons where their remains were buried along with other forms of life. Lycopods and ferns were the main types; it's important to note that both groups were already highly developed. The ferns include the genera Sphenopteris, Megalopteris, Archaeopteris, and Neuropteris. Among the Lycopods are Lycopodites, Psilophyton, and Lepidodendron. Modern horsetails are represented by Calamocladus, Asterocalamites, and Annularia. Of great interest are the genera Cordaites, Araucarioxylon, etc., which were hybrid types, combining characteristics of Conifers and Cycadofilicales. Except for some unclear markings, aquatic plants aren’t as well represented as expected; Parka, a common fossil, has been considered a water plant with a creeping stem and two types of sporangia in sessile sporocarps.
Physical Conditions, &c.—Perhaps the most striking fact that is brought out by a study of the Devonian rocks and their fossils is the gradual transgression of the sea over the land, which took place quietly in every quarter of the globe shortly after the beginning of the period. While in most places the Lower Devonian sediments succeed the Silurian formations in a perfectly conformable manner, the Middle and Upper divisions, on account of this encroachment of the sea, rest unconformably upon the older rocks, the Lower division being unrepresented. This is true over the greater part of South America, so far as our limited knowledge goes, in much of the western side of North America, in western Russia, in Thuringia and other parts of central Europe. Of the distribution of land and sea and the position of the coast lines in Devonian times we can state nothing with precision. The known deposits all point to shallow waters of epicontinental seas; no abyssal formations have been recognized. E. Kayser has pointed out the probability of a Eurasian sea province extending through Europe towards the east, across north and central Asia towards Manitoba in Canada, and an American sea province embracing the United States, South America and South Africa. At the same time there existed a great North Atlantic land area caused partly by the uplift of the Caledonian range just before the beginning of the period, which stretched across north Europe to eastern Canada; on the fringe of this land the Old Red Sandstone was formed.
Physical Conditions, &c.—One of the most notable findings from studying the Devonian rocks and their fossils is the gradual rise of the sea over the land, which occurred peacefully around the world shortly after the start of this period. In many areas, the Lower Devonian sediments follow the Silurian formations in a completely consistent manner, but the Middle and Upper divisions sit unconformably on top of the older rocks due to this sea expansion, with the Lower division being missing. This is true for most of South America, as far as our limited knowledge goes, as well as much of the western part of North America, western Russia, Thuringia, and other parts of central Europe. We cannot say anything precise about the land and sea distribution or the coastline positions during Devonian times. The known deposits suggest shallow waters of epicontinental seas; no deep-sea formations have been identified. E. Kayser has pointed out the likelihood of a Eurasian sea province stretching through Europe to the east, across northern and central Asia to Manitoba in Canada, along with an American sea province covering the United States, South America, and South Africa. At the same time, there was a large land area in the North Atlantic region, partly due to the uplift of the Caledonian range just before this period began, which extended from northern Europe to eastern Canada; along the edge of this land, the Old Red Sandstone was formed.
In the European area C. Barrois has indicated the existence of three zones of deposition: (1) A northern, Old Red, region, [Page 129] including Great Britain, Scandinavia, European Russia and Spitzbergen; here the land was close at hand; great brackish lagoons prevailed, which communicated more or less directly with the open sea. In European Russia, during its general advance, the sea occasionally gained access to wide areas, only to be driven off again, during pauses in the relative subsidence of the land, when the continued terrigenous sedimentation once more established the lagoonal conditions. These alternating phases were frequently repeated. (2) A middle region, covering Devonshire and Cornwall, the Ardennes, the northern part of the lower Rhenish mountains, and the upper Harz to the Polish Mittelgebirge; here we find evidence of a shallow sea, clastic deposits and a sublittoral fauna. (3) A southern region reaching from Brittany to the south of the Rhenish mountains, lower Harz, Thuringia and Bohemia; here was a deeper sea with a more pelagic fauna. It must be borne in mind that the above-mentioned regions are intended to refer to the time when the extension of the Devonian sea was near its maximum. In the case of North America it has been shown that in early and middle Devonian time more or less distinct faunas invaded the continent from five different centres, viz. the Helderberg, the Oriskany, the Onondaga, the southern Hamilton and the north-western Hamilton; these reached the interior approximately in the order given.
In Europe, C. Barrois pointed out that there are three depositional zones: (1) A northern Old Red region, [Page 129] that includes Great Britain, Scandinavia, European Russia, and Spitzbergen; in this area, land was nearby, and there were large brackish lagoons that connected somewhat directly with the open sea. In European Russia, as the sea moved forward, it sometimes spread into wide areas, only to recede during pauses in the land’s relative sinking, when ongoing land-based sedimentation would again create lagoonal conditions. These alternating events happened frequently. (2) A middle region that covers Devonshire and Cornwall, the Ardennes, the northern part of the Lower Rhenish mountains, and the Upper Harz to the Polish Mittelgebirge; here, we find signs of a shallow sea, clastic deposits, and a sublittoral fauna. (3) A southern region that extends from Brittany to the south of the Rhenish mountains, the Lower Harz, Thuringia, and Bohemia; this area had a deeper sea with a more pelagic fauna. It's important to note that these regions refer to the time when the Devonian sea was at its highest extent. In North America, studies have shown that during the early and middle Devonian periods, distinct faunas migrated into the continent from five different centers: the Helderberg, the Oriskany, the Onondaga, the southern Hamilton, and the northwestern Hamilton; these entered the interior in roughly the order listed.
Towards the close of the period, when the various local faunas had mingled one with another and a more generalized life assemblage had been evolved, we find many forms with a very wide range, indicating great uniformity of conditions. Thus we find identical species of brachiopods inhabiting the Devonian seas of England, France, Belgium, Germany, Russia, southern Asia and China; such are, Hypothyris (Rhynchonella) cuboides, Spirifer disjunctus and others. The fauna of the Calceola shales can be traced from western Europe to Armenia and Siberia; the Stringocephalus limestones are represented in Belgium, England, the Urals and Canada; and the (Gephyroceras) intumescens shales are found in western Europe and in Manitoba.
Towards the end of the period, when various local creatures had mixed together and a more generalized collection of life had developed, we see many species with a wide range, indicating a lot of uniformity in conditions. For example, we find the same species of brachiopods living in the Devonian seas of England, France, Belgium, Germany, Russia, southern Asia, and China; these include Hypothyris (Rhynchonella) cuboides, Spirifer disjunctus, and others. The fauna of the Calceola shales can be traced from western Europe to Armenia and Siberia; the Stringocephalus limestones are found in Belgium, England, the Urals, and Canada; and the (Gephyroceras) intumescens shales appear in western Europe and Manitoba.
The Devonian period was one of comparative quietude; no violent crustal movements seem to have taken place, and while some changes of level occurred towards its close in Great Britain, Bohemia and Russia, generally the passage from Devonian to Carboniferous conditions was quite gradual. In later periods these rocks have suffered considerable movement and metamorphism, as in the Harz, Devonshire and Cornwall, and in the Belgian coalfields, where they have frequently been thrust over the younger Carboniferous rocks. Volcanic activity was fairly widespread, particularly during the middle portion of the period. In the Old Red rocks of Scotland there is a great thickness (6000 ft.) of igneous rocks, including diabases and andesitic lavas with agglomerates and tuffs. In Devonshire diabases and tuffs are found in the middle division. In west central Europe volcanic rocks are found at many horizons, the most common rocks are diabases and diabase tuffs, schalstein. Felsitic lavas and tuffs occur in the Middle Devonian of Australia. Contemporaneous igneous rocks are generally absent in the American Devonian, but in Nova Scotia and New Brunswick there appear to be some.
The Devonian period was relatively quiet; there don't seem to have been any major crustal movements. While some changes in sea level happened towards the end of the period in Great Britain, Bohemia, and Russia, the transition from Devonian to Carboniferous conditions was mostly gradual. Later on, these rocks experienced significant movement and transformation, such as in the Harz Mountains, Devon, and Cornwall, as well as in the Belgian coalfields, where they often pushed over the younger Carboniferous rocks. Volcanic activity was quite widespread, especially during the middle part of the period. In the Old Red rocks of Scotland, there is a substantial thickness (6000 ft.) of igneous rocks, including diabases and andesitic lavas alongside agglomerates and tuffs. In Devon, diabases and tuffs can be found in the middle section. In west-central Europe, volcanic rocks appear at many levels, with diabases and diabase tuffs being the most common. Felsitic lavas and tuffs are found in the Middle Devonian of Australia. Contemporaneous igneous rocks are generally missing in the American Devonian, but some do seem to exist in Nova Scotia and New Brunswick.
There is little evidence as to the climate of this period, but it is interesting to observe that local glacial conditions may have existed in places, as is suggested by the coarse conglomerate with striated boulders in the upper Old Red of Scotland. On the other hand, the prevalence of reef-building corals points to moderately warm temperatures in the Middle Devonian seas.
There isn't much evidence about the climate during this time, but it's interesting to note that local glacial conditions might have existed in some areas, as indicated by the coarse conglomerate with striated boulders found in the upper Old Red of Scotland. Conversely, the presence of reef-building corals suggests that the Middle Devonian seas had moderately warm temperatures.
The economic products of Devonian rocks are of some importance: in many of the metamorphosed regions veins of tin, lead, copper, iron are exploited, as in Cornwall, Devon, the Harz; in New Zealand, gold veins occur. Anthracite of Devonian age is found in China and a little coal in Germany, while the Upper Devonian is the chief source of oil and gas of western Pennsylvania and south-western New York. In Ontario the middle division is oil-bearing. Black phosphates are worked in central Tennessee, and in England the marls of the "Old Red" are employed for brick-making.
The economic products of Devonian rocks are quite significant: in many of the transformed areas, veins of tin, lead, copper, and iron are mined, like in Cornwall, Devon, and the Harz; in New Zealand, gold veins are present. Anthracite from the Devonian period is found in China, and there's some coal in Germany, while the Upper Devonian is the main source of oil and gas in western Pennsylvania and southwestern New York. In Ontario, the middle division contains oil. Black phosphates are extracted in central Tennessee, and in England, the marls from the "Old Red" are used for brick-making.
References.—The literature of the Devonian rocks and fossils is very extensive; important papers have been contributed by the following geologists: J. Barrande, C. Barrois, F. Béclard, E. W. Benecke, L. Beushausen, A. Champernowne, J. M. Clarke, Sir J. W. Dawson, A. Denckmann, J. S. Diller, E. Dupont, F. Frech, J. Fournet, Sir A. Geikie, G. Gürich, R. Hoernes, E. Kayser, C. and M. Koch, A. von Koenen, Hugh Miller, D. P. Oehlert, C. S. Prosser, P. de Rouville, C. Schuchert, T. Tschernyschew, E. O. Ulrich, W. A. E. Ussher, P. N. Wenjukoff, G. F. Whidborne, J. F. Whiteaves and H. S. Williams. Sedgwick and Murchison's original description appeared in the Trans. Geol. Soc. (2nd series, vol. v., 1839). Good general accounts will be found in Sir A. Geikie's Text-Book of Geology (vol. ii., 4th ed., 1903), in E. Kayser's Lehrbuch der Geologie (vol. ii., 2nd ed., 1902), and, for North America, in Chamberlin and Salisbury's Geology (vol. ii., 1906). See the Index to the Geological Magazine (1864-1903), and in subsequent annual volumes; Geological Literature added to the Geological Society's Library (London), annually since 1893; and the Neues Jahrbuch für Min., Geologie und Paläontologie (Stuttgart, 2 annual volumes). The U.S. Geological Survey publishes at intervals a Bibliography and Index of North American Geology, &c., and this (e.g. Bulletin 301,—the Bibliog. and Index for 1901-1905) contains numerous references for the Devonian system in North America.
References.—The literature on Devonian rocks and fossils is extensive; significant papers have been written by the following geologists: J. Barrande, C. Barrois, F. Béclard, E. W. Benecke, L. Beushausen, A. Champernowne, J. M. Clarke, Sir J. W. Dawson, A. Denckmann, J. S. Diller, E. Dupont, F. Frech, J. Fournet, Sir A. Geikie, G. Gürich, R. Hoernes, E. Kayser, C. and M. Koch, A. von Koenen, Hugh Miller, D. P. Oehlert, C. S. Prosser, P. de Rouville, C. Schuchert, T. Tschernyschew, E. O. Ulrich, W. A. E. Ussher, P. N. Wenjukoff, G. F. Whidborne, J. F. Whiteaves, and H. S. Williams. Sedgwick and Murchison's original description was published in the Trans. Geol. Soc. (2nd series, vol. v., 1839). Good general accounts can be found in Sir A. Geikie's Text-Book of Geology (vol. ii., 4th ed., 1903), in E. Kayser's Lehrbuch der Geologie (vol. ii., 2nd ed., 1902), and, for North America, in Chamberlin and Salisbury's Geology (vol. ii., 1906). See the Index to the Geological Magazine (1864-1903) and in subsequent annual volumes; Geological Literature added to the Geological Society's Library (London), published annually since 1893; and the Neues Jahrbuch für Min., Geologie und Paläontologie (Stuttgart, 2 annual volumes). The U.S. Geological Survey periodically releases a Bibliography and Index of North American Geology, &c., which (e.g., Bulletin 301— the Bibliog. and Index for 1901-1905) contains many references for the Devonian system in North America.
DEVONPORT, a municipal, county and parliamentary borough of Devonshire, England, contiguous to East Stonehouse and Plymouth, the seat of one of the royal dockyards, and an important naval and military station. Pop. (1901) 70,437. It is situated immediately above the N.W. angle of Plymouth Sound, occupying a triangular peninsula formed by Stonehouse Pool on the E. and the Hamoaze on the W. It is served by the Great Western and the London & South Western railways. The town proper was formerly enclosed by a line of ramparts and a ditch excavated out of the limestone, but these are in great part demolished. Adjoining Devonport are East Stonehouse (an urban district, pop. 15,111), Stoke and Morice Town, the two last being suburbs of Devonport. The town hall, erected in 1821-1822 partly after the design of the Parthenon, is distinguished by a Doric portico; while near it are the public library, in Egyptian style, and a conspicuous Doric column built of Devonshire granite. This monument, which is 100 ft. high, was raised in commemoration of the naming of the town in 1824. Other institutions are the Naval Engineering College, Keyham (1880); the municipal technical schools, opened in 1899, the majority of the students being connected with the dockyard; the naval barracks, Keyham (1885); the Raglan barracks and the naval and military hospitals. On Mount Wise, which was formerly defended by a battery (now a naval signalling station), stands the military residence, or Government House, occupied by the commander of the Plymouth Coast Defences; and near at hand is the principal naval residence, the naval commander-in-chief's house. The prospect from Mount Wise over the Hamoaze to Mount Edgecumbe on the opposite shore is one of the finest in the south of England. The most noteworthy feature of Devonport, however, is the royal dockyard, originally established by William III. in 1689 and until 1824 known as Plymouth Dock. It is situated within the old town boundary and contains four docks. To this in 1853 was added Keyham steamyard, situated higher up the Hamoaze beyond the old boundary and connected with the Devonport yard by a tunnel. In 1896 further extensions were begun at the Keyham yard, which became known as Devonport North yard. Before these were begun the yard comprised two basins, the northern one being 9 acres and the southern 7 acres in area, and three docks, having floor-lengths of 295, 347 and 413 ft., together with iron and brass foundries, machinery shops, engineer students' shop, &c. The new extensions, opened by the Prince of Wales on the 21st of February 1907, cover a total area of 118 acres lying to the northward in front of the Naval Barracks, and involved the reclamation of 77 acres of mudflats lying below high-water mark. The scheme presented three leading features—a tidal basin, a group of three graving docks with entrance lock, and a large enclosed basin with a coaling depôt at the north end. The tidal basin, close to the old Keyham north basin, is 740 ft. long with a mean width of 590 ft., and has an area of 10 acres, the depth being 32 ft. at low water of spring tides. It affords access to two graving docks, one with a floor-length of 745 ft. and 20½ ft. of water over the sill, and [Page 130] the other with a length of 741 ft. and 32 ft. of water over the sill. Each of these can be subdivided by means of an intermediate caisson, and (when unoccupied) may serve as an entrance to the closed basin. The lock which leads from the tidal to the closed basin is 730 ft. long, and if necessary can be used as a dock. The closed basin, out of which opens a third graving dock, 660 ft. long, measures 1550 ft. by 1000 ft. and has an area of 35½ acres, with a depth of 32 ft. at low-water springs; it has a direct entrance from the Hamoaze, closed by a caisson. The foundations of the walls are carried down to the rock, which in some places lies covered with mud 100 ft. or more below coping level. Compressed air is used to work the sliding caissons which close the entrances of the docks and closed basin. A ropery at Devonport produces half the hempen ropes used in the navy.
DEVONPORT, a municipal, county, and parliamentary borough of Devon, England, located next to East Stonehouse and Plymouth, is home to one of the royal dockyards and serves as an important naval and military station. Population (1901) was 70,437. It is situated just above the northwest corner of Plymouth Sound, covering a triangular peninsula formed by Stonehouse Pool on the east and the Hamoaze on the west. The town is served by the Great Western and the London & South Western railways. The town was once enclosed by ramparts and a ditch carved out of limestone, but most of these have been demolished. Nearby Devonport are East Stonehouse (an urban district, population 15,111), Stoke, and Morice Town, the last two being suburbs of Devonport. The town hall, built in 1821-1822 and partly designed after the Parthenon, features a notable Doric portico; nearby are the public library in Egyptian style and a prominent Doric column made of Devonshire granite. This 100-foot-high monument was raised to commemorate the naming of the town in 1824. Other institutions include the Naval Engineering College, Keyham (1880); municipal technical schools opened in 1899, mostly serving students connected with the dockyard; the naval barracks at Keyham (1885); Raglan barracks; and the naval and military hospitals. On Mount Wise, formerly defended by a battery (now a naval signaling station), stands the military residence, or Government House, occupied by the commander of the Plymouth Coast Defenses; nearby is the main naval residence, the house of the naval commander-in-chief. The view from Mount Wise over the Hamoaze to Mount Edgecumbe on the opposite shore is one of the finest in southern England. The most notable feature of Devonport, however, is the royal dockyard, initially established by William III in 1689 and known as Plymouth Dock until 1824. It is located within the old town boundary and contains four docks. In 1853, the Keyham steam yard was added, located higher up the Hamoaze beyond the old boundary and connected to the Devonport yard by a tunnel. In 1896, further expansions began at the Keyham yard, later known as Devonport North yard. Before these expansions, the yard included two basins, the northern one covering 9 acres and the southern one 7 acres, and three docks with floor lengths of 295, 347, and 413 feet, alongside iron and brass foundries, machinery shops, an engineering students' shop, etc. The new expansions, inaugurated by the Prince of Wales on February 21, 1907, cover a total area of 118 acres located to the north in front of the Naval Barracks, requiring the reclamation of 77 acres of mudflats below high water mark. The plan featured three main components—a tidal basin, a group of three graving docks with an entrance lock, and a large enclosed basin with a coaling depot at the north end. The tidal basin, located near the old Keyham north basin, measures 740 feet long with an average width of 590 feet, covering an area of 10 acres and a depth of 32 feet at low spring tides. It provides access to two graving docks, one with a floor length of 745 feet and 20½ feet of water over the sill, and [Page 130] the other measuring 741 feet long and 32 feet of water over the sill. Each dock can be subdivided with an intermediate caisson and may serve as an entrance to the closed basin when unoccupied. The lock connecting the tidal basin to the closed basin measures 730 feet long and can serve as a dock if necessary. The closed basin, which leads to a third graving dock measuring 660 feet long, measures 1550 feet by 1000 feet and covers an area of 35½ acres, with a depth of 32 feet at low-water springs; it has a direct entrance from the Hamoaze, sealed by a caisson. The wall foundations reach down to the rock, which in some spots is covered by mud more than 100 feet below coping level. Compressed air is used to operate the sliding caissons that close the entrances of the docks and the closed basin. A ropery at Devonport produces half of the hempen ropes used by the navy.
By the Reform Act of 1832 Devonport was erected into a parliamentary borough including East Stonehouse and returning two members. The ground on which it stands is for the most part the property of the St Aubyn family (Barons St Levan), whose steward holds a court leet and a court baron annually. The town is governed by a mayor, sixteen aldermen and forty-eight councillors. Area, 3044 acres.
By the Reform Act of 1832, Devonport was established as a parliamentary borough, which includes East Stonehouse and sends two representatives to Parliament. Most of the land it occupies belongs to the St Aubyn family (Barons St Levan), whose steward holds an annual court leet and court baron. The town is run by a mayor, sixteen aldermen, and forty-eight councilors. Area: 3,044 acres.
DEVONPORT, EAST and WEST, a town of Devon county, Tasmania, situated on both sides of the mouth of the river Mersey, 193 m. by rail N.W. of Hobart. Pop. (1901), East Devonport, 673, West Devonport, 2101. There is regular communication from this port to Melbourne and Sydney, and it ranks as the third port in Tasmania. A celebrated regatta is held on the Mersey annually on New Year's day.
DEVONPORT, EAST and WEST is a town in Devon County, Tasmania, located on both sides of the mouth of the Mersey River, 193 miles northwest of Hobart by rail. Population (1901): East Devonport, 673; West Devonport, 2,101. There are regular services from this port to Melbourne and Sydney, making it the third-largest port in Tasmania. A famous regatta takes place on the Mersey every year on New Year's Day.
DEVONSHIRE, EARLS AND DUKES OF. The Devonshire title, now in the Cavendish family, had previously been held by Charles Blount (1563-1606), 8th Lord Mountjoy, great-grandson of the 4th Lord Mountjoy (d. 1534), the pupil of Erasmus; he was created earl of Devonshire in 1603 for his services in Ireland, where he became famous in subduing the rebellion between 1600 and 1603; but the title became extinct at his death. In the Cavendish line the 1st earl of Devonshire was William (d. 1626), second son of Sir William Cavendish (q.v.), and of Elizabeth Hardwick, who afterwards married the 6th earl of Shrewsbury. He was created earl of Devonshire in 1618 by James I., and was succeeded by William, 2nd earl (1591-1628), and the latter by his son William (1617-1684), a prominent royalist, and one of the original members of the Royal Society, who married a daughter of the 2nd earl of Salisbury.
DEVONSHIRE, EARLS AND DUKES OF. The Devonshire title, which is currently held by the Cavendish family, was previously owned by Charles Blount (1563-1606), the 8th Lord Mountjoy, who was the great-grandson of the 4th Lord Mountjoy (d. 1534), a student of Erasmus. He was made the Earl of Devonshire in 1603 for his contributions in Ireland, where he became well-known for quelling the rebellion from 1600 to 1603, but the title became extinct upon his death. In the Cavendish line, the 1st Earl of Devonshire was William (d. 1626), the second son of Sir William Cavendish (q.v.) and Elizabeth Hardwick, who later married the 6th Earl of Shrewsbury. He was made Earl of Devonshire in 1618 by James I., followed by his son William, the 2nd Earl (1591-1628), and then by his son William (1617-1684), a notable royalist and one of the founding members of the Royal Society, who married a daughter of the 2nd Earl of Salisbury.
William Cavendish, 1st duke of Devonshire (1640-1707), English statesman, eldest son of the earl of Devonshire last mentioned, was born on the 25th of January 1640. After completing his education he made the tour of Europe according to the custom of young men of his rank, being accompanied on his travels by Dr Killigrew. On his return he obtained, in 1661, a seat in parliament for Derbyshire, and soon became conspicuous as one of the most determined and daring opponents of the general policy of the court. In 1678 he was one of the committee appointed to draw up articles of impeachment against the lord treasurer Danby. In 1679 he was re-elected for Derby, and made a privy councillor by Charles II.; but he soon withdrew from the board with his friend Lord Russell, when he found that the Roman Catholic interest uniformly prevailed. He carried up to the House of Lords the articles of impeachment against Lord Chief-Justice Scroggs, for his arbitrary and illegal proceedings in the court of King's bench; and when the king declared his resolution not to sign the bill for excluding the duke of York, afterwards James II., he moved in the House of Commons that a bill might be brought in for the association of all his majesty's Protestant subjects. He also openly denounced the king's counsellors, and voted for an address to remove them. He appeared in defence of Lord Russell at his trial, at a time when it was scarcely more criminal to be an accomplice than a witness. After the condemnation he gave the utmost possible proof of his attachment by offering to exchange clothes with Lord Russell in the prison, remain in his place, and so allow him to effect his escape. In November 1684 he succeeded to the earldom on the death of his father. He opposed arbitrary government under James II. with the same consistency and high spirit as during the previous reign. He was withdrawn from public life for a time, however, in consequence of a hasty and imprudent act of which his enemies knew how to avail themselves. Fancying that he had received an insulting look in the presence chamber from Colonel Colepepper, a swaggerer whose attendance at court the king encouraged, he immediately avenged the affront by challenging the colonel, and, on the challenge being refused, striking him with his cane. This offence was punished by a fine of £30,000, which was an enormous sum even to one of the earl's princely fortune. Not being able to pay he was imprisoned in the king's bench, from which he was released only on signing a bond for the whole amount. This was afterwards cancelled by King William. After his discharge the earl went for a time to Chatsworth, where he occupied himself with the erection of a new mansion, designed by William Talman, with decorations by Verrio, Thornhill and Grinling Gibbons. The Revolution again brought him into prominence. He was one of the seven who signed the original paper inviting the prince of Orange from Holland, and was the first nobleman who appeared in arms to receive him at his landing. He received the order of the Garter on the occasion of the coronation, and was made lord high steward of the new court. In 1690 he accompanied King William on his visit to Holland. He was created marquis of Hartington and duke of Devonshire in 1694 by William and Mary, on the same day on which the head of the house of Russell was created duke of Bedford. Thus, to quote Macaulay, "the two great houses of Russell and Cavendish, which had long been closely connected by friendship and by marriage, by common opinions, common sufferings and common triumphs, received on the same day the highest honour which it is in the power of the crown to confer." His last public service was assisting to conclude the union with Scotland, for negotiating which he and his eldest son, the marquis of Hartington, had been appointed among the commissioners by Queen Anne. He died on the 18th of August 1707, and ordered the following inscription to be put on his monument:—
William Cavendish, 1st Duke of Devonshire (1640-1707), an English statesman and the eldest son of the last mentioned Earl of Devonshire, was born on January 25, 1640. After finishing his education, he traveled around Europe, as was the custom for young men of his status, accompanied by Dr. Killigrew. Upon his return, in 1661, he secured a seat in parliament for Derbyshire and quickly became known as one of the most determined and audacious opponents of the court's general policies. In 1678, he was part of the committee tasked with drafting articles of impeachment against Lord Treasurer Danby. In 1679, he was re-elected for Derby and appointed a privy councillor by Charles II; however, he soon resigned from the council with his friend Lord Russell, upon realizing that the Roman Catholic interest consistently dominated. He presented impeachment articles against Lord Chief-Justice Scroggs for his arbitrary and illegal actions in the King's Bench; and when the king announced he wouldn’t sign the bill to exclude the Duke of York, later known as James II, he proposed in the House of Commons a bill for the association of all the king's Protestant subjects. He also publicly criticized the king's advisers and voted for a petition to remove them. He defended Lord Russell at his trial when it was nearly as dangerous to be a bystander as it was to be an accomplice. After the sentence, he showed his utmost loyalty by offering to swap clothes with Lord Russell in prison, allowing him to escape. In November 1684, he inherited the earldom upon the death of his father. He opposed the arbitrary rule under James II with the same commitment and courage as in the previous reign. However, he stepped back from public life temporarily due to a reckless and imprudent act his enemies exploited. Thinking he had received an insulting glance from Colonel Colepepper, a braggart supported by the king, he took immediate action by challenging the colonel. When the challenge was declined, he hit him with his cane. This act led to a fine of £30,000, a significant amount even for someone of the earl's wealth. Unable to pay, he was imprisoned in the King's Bench, from which he was released only after signing a bond for the entire sum. This was later canceled by King William. After his release, the earl spent some time at Chatsworth, working on the construction of a new mansion designed by William Talman, with decorations by Verrio, Thornhill, and Grinling Gibbons. The Revolution brought him back into the spotlight. He was one of the seven who signed the original document inviting the Prince of Orange from Holland and was the first nobleman to appear armed to greet him upon his arrival. He received the Order of the Garter during the coronation and was appointed Lord High Steward of the new court. In 1690, he accompanied King William on his visit to Holland. He was made Marquis of Hartington and Duke of Devonshire in 1694 by William and Mary, on the same day the leader of the Russell family was made Duke of Bedford. Thus, to quote Macaulay, "the two great houses of Russell and Cavendish, which had long been closely linked by friendship and marriage, shared opinions, sufferings, and triumphs, received on the same day the highest honor the crown can bestow." His final public service involved helping to finalize the union with Scotland, for which he and his eldest son, the Marquis of Hartington, were appointed as commissioners by Queen Anne. He passed away on August 18, 1707, and specified the following inscription for his monument:—
Willielmus Dux Devon,
Bonorum Principum Fidelis Subditus,
Inimicus et Invisus Tyrannis.
Willielmus Dux Devon,
Faithful Subject of Good Princes,
Enemy and Hated One of Tyrants.
He had married in 1661 the daughter of James, duke of Ormonde, and he was succeeded by his eldest son William as 2nd duke, and by the latter's son William as 3rd duke (viceroy of Ireland, 1737-1744). The latter's son William (1720-1764) succeeded in 1755 as 4th duke; he married the daughter and heiress of Richard Boyle, earl of Burlington and Cork, who brought Lismore Castle and the Irish estates into the family; and from November 1756 to May 1757 he was prime minister, mainly in order that Pitt, who would not then serve under the duke of Newcastle, should be in power. His son William (1748-1811), 5th duke, is memorable as the husband of the beautiful Georgiana Spencer, duchess of Devonshire (1757-1806), and of the intellectual Elizabeth Foster, duchess of Devonshire (1758-1824), both of whom Gainsborough painted. His son William, 6th duke (1790-1858), who died unmarried, was sent on a special mission to the coronation of the tsar Nicholas at Moscow in 1826, and became famous for his expenditure on that occasion; and it was he who employed Sir Joseph Paxton at Chatsworth. The title passed in 1858 to his cousin William (1808-1891), 2nd earl of Burlington, as 7th duke, a man who, without playing a prominent part in public affairs, exercised great influence, not only by his position but by his distinguished abilities. At Cambridge in 1829 he was second wrangler, first Smith's prizeman, and eighth classic, and subsequently he became chancellor of the university.
He married in 1661 the daughter of James, Duke of Ormonde, and his eldest son William succeeded him as the 2nd Duke. William's son, also named William, became the 3rd Duke and served as Viceroy of Ireland from 1737 to 1744. The latter William's son (1720-1764) took over as the 4th Duke in 1755; he married the daughter and heiress of Richard Boyle, Earl of Burlington and Cork, which brought Lismore Castle and Irish estates into the family. From November 1756 to May 1757, he served as Prime Minister mainly to ensure that Pitt, who would not serve under the Duke of Newcastle, was in power. His son William (1748-1811), the 5th Duke, is remembered as the husband of the beautiful Georgiana Spencer, Duchess of Devonshire (1757-1806), and the intellectual Elizabeth Foster, Duchess of Devonshire (1758-1824), both of whom were painted by Gainsborough. His son William, the 6th Duke (1790-1858), who died unmarried, was sent on a special mission to the coronation of Tsar Nicholas in Moscow in 1826 and became known for his lavish spending on that occasion; he also employed Sir Joseph Paxton at Chatsworth. In 1858, the title passed to his cousin William (1808-1891), the 2nd Earl of Burlington, as the 7th Duke, a man who, while not playing a major role in public affairs, held significant influence due to his status and notable abilities. At Cambridge in 1829, he was the second wrangler, first Smith’s prizeman, and eighth classic, and he later became the chancellor of the university.
Spencer Compton Cavendish, 8th duke (1833-1908), born on the 23rd of July 1833, was the son of the 7th duke (then earl of Burlington) and his wife Lady Blanche Howard (sister of the earl of Carlisle). In 1854 Lord Cavendish, as he then was, took his degree at Trinity College, Cambridge; in 1856 he was attached to the special mission to Russia for the new tsar's accession; and in 1857 he was returned to parliament as Liberal member for North Lancashire. At the opening of the new parliament of 1859 the [Page 131] marquis of Hartington (as he had now become) moved the amendment to the address which overthrew the government of Lord Derby. In 1863 he became first a lord of the admiralty, and then under-secretary for war, and on the formation of the Russell-Gladstone administration at the death of Lord Palmerston he entered it as war secretary. He retired with his colleagues in July 1866; but upon Mr Gladstone's return to power in 1868 he became postmaster-general, an office which he exchanged in 1871 for that of secretary for Ireland. When Mr Gladstone, after his defeat and resignation in 1874, temporarily withdrew from the leadership of the Liberal party in January 1875, Lord Hartington was chosen Liberal leader in the House of Commons, Lord Granville being leader in the Lords. Mr W. E. Forster, who had taken a much more prominent part in public life, was the only other possible nominee, but he declined to stand. Lord Hartington's rank no doubt told in his favour, and Mr Forster's education bill had offended the Nonconformist members, who would probably have withheld their support. Lord Hartington's prudent management in difficult circumstances laid his followers under great obligations, since not only was the opposite party in the ascendant, but his own former chief was indulging in the freedom of independence. After the complete defeat of the Conservatives in the general election of 1880, a large proportion of the party would have rejoiced if Lord Hartington could have taken the Premiership instead of Mr Gladstone, and the queen, in strict conformity with constitutional usage (though Gladstone himself thought Lord Granville should have had the preference), sent for him as leader of the Opposition. Mr Gladstone, however, was clearly master of the situation: no cabinet could be formed without him, nor could he reasonably be expected to accept a subordinate post. Lord Hartington, therefore, gracefully abdicated the leadership, and became secretary of state for India, from which office, in December 1882, he passed to the war office. His administration was memorable for the expeditions of General Gordon and Lord Wolseley to Khartum, and a considerable number of the Conservative party long held him chiefly responsible for the "betrayal of Gordon." His lethargic manner, apart from his position as war minister, helped to associate him in their minds with a disaster which emphasized the fact that the government acted "too late"; but Gladstone and Lord Granville were no less responsible than he. In June 1885 he resigned along with his colleagues, and in December was elected for the Rossendale Division of Lancashire, created by the new reform bill. Immediately afterwards the great political opportunity of Lord Hartington's life came to him in Mr Gladstone's conversion to home rule for Ireland. Lord Hartington's refusal to follow his leader in this course inevitably made him the chief of the new Liberal Unionist party, composed of a large and influential section of the old Liberals. In this capacity he moved the first resolution at the famous public meeting at the opera house, and also, in the House of Commons, moved the rejection of Mr Gladstone's Bill on the second reading. During the memorable electoral contest which followed, no election excited more interest than Lord Hartington's for the Rossendale division, where he was returned by a majority of nearly 1500 votes. In the new parliament he held a position much resembling that which Sir Robert Peel had occupied after his fall from power, the leader of a small, compact party, the standing and ability of whose members were out of all proportion to their numbers, generally esteemed and trusted beyond any other man in the country, yet in his own opinion forbidden to think of office. Lord Salisbury's offers to serve under him as prime minister (both after the general election, and again when Lord Randolph Churchill resigned) were declined, and Lord Hartington continued to discharge the delicate duties of the leader of a middle party with no less judgment than he had shown when leading the Liberals during the interregnum of 1875-1880. It was not until 1895, when the differences between Conservatives and Liberal Unionists had become almost obliterated by changed circumstances, and the habit of acting together, that the duke of Devonshire, as he had become by the death of his father in 1891, consented to enter Lord Salisbury's third ministry as president of the council. The duke thus was the nominal representative of education in the cabinet at a time when educational questions were rapidly becoming of great importance; and his own technical knowledge of this difficult and intricate question being admittedly superficial, a good deal of criticism from time to time resulted. He had however by this time an established position in public life, and a reputation for weight of character, which procured for him universal respect and confidence, and exempted him from bitter attack, even from his most determined political opponents. Wealth and rank combined with character to place him in a measure above party; and his succession to his father as chancellor of the university of Cambridge in 1892 indicated his eminence in the life of the country. In the same year he had married the widow of the 7th duke of Manchester.
Spencer Compton Cavendish, the 8th duke (1833-1908), was born on July 23, 1833. He was the son of the 7th duke (then the earl of Burlington) and his wife Lady Blanche Howard (sister of the earl of Carlisle). In 1854, Lord Cavendish, as he was then known, earned his degree from Trinity College, Cambridge. In 1856, he joined a special mission to Russia for the new tsar's accession. By 1857, he was elected to Parliament as a Liberal member for North Lancashire. At the opening of the new Parliament in 1859, the [Page 131] marquis of Hartington (as he had now become) moved an amendment to the address that led to the fall of Lord Derby's government. In 1863, he became a lord of the admiralty and then under-secretary for war. When the Russell-Gladstone administration formed after Lord Palmerston's death, he joined as war secretary. He resigned with his colleagues in July 1866, but when Mr. Gladstone returned to power in 1868, he took the position of postmaster-general, which he swapped for secretary for Ireland in 1871. After Mr. Gladstone's defeat and resignation in 1874, Lord Hartington was chosen as the Liberal leader in the House of Commons in January 1875, with Lord Granville leading in the Lords. Mr. W. E. Forster, who had been more prominent in public life, was the only other viable candidate, but he declined to run. Lord Hartington's rank likely worked in his favor, as Mr. Forster's education bill had upset the Nonconformist members, who likely would have withheld their support. Lord Hartington's careful management in challenging times earned him great respect from his followers, particularly since the opposite party was gaining influence and his former leader was embracing a more independent approach. After the Conservatives' total defeat in the general election of 1880, many in the party wished Lord Hartington could have taken the Premiership instead of Mr. Gladstone. The queen, following constitutional practice (though Gladstone believed Lord Granville deserved preference), invited him as the leader of the Opposition. However, Mr. Gladstone was clearly dominant; no cabinet could form without him, nor could he reasonably be asked to accept a lower position. Consequently, Lord Hartington graciously stepped down as leader and became secretary of state for India, later moving to the war office in December 1882. His time in office was notable for General Gordon's and Lord Wolseley's expeditions to Khartum, and many in the Conservative party blamed him for the "betrayal of Gordon." His sluggish demeanor, apart from his role as war minister, led many to associate him with a disaster that highlighted the government's "too late" actions, though Gladstone and Lord Granville were equally at fault. In June 1885, he resigned with his colleagues and was elected in December for the new Rossendale Division of Lancashire, created by the new reform bill. Shortly after, a major opportunity arose when Mr. Gladstone converted to home rule for Ireland. Lord Hartington's refusal to follow his leader on this matter made him the chief of the new Liberal Unionist party, which consisted of a significant and influential group of old Liberals. In this role, he presented the first resolution at the famous public meeting at the opera house and also rejected Mr. Gladstone's Bill in the House of Commons during its second reading. The notable electoral contest that followed drew much interest, with Lord Hartington winning the Rossendale division by nearly 1,500 votes. In the new Parliament, he held a role similar to that of Sir Robert Peel after his loss of power, leading a small but cohesive party whose members' reputation and skill far exceeded their numbers. He was generally esteemed and trusted across the country, yet he believed he shouldn't consider office. Lord Salisbury's offers to serve under him as prime minister (both after the general election and later when Lord Randolph Churchill resigned) were turned down, and Lord Hartington continued to perform the delicate duties of a middle party leader with the same sound judgment he had shown leading the Liberals from 1875 to 1880. It wasn't until 1895, when the differences between Conservatives and Liberal Unionists had largely faded due to changing circumstances and a history of collaboration, that the duke of Devonshire, as he became known after his father's death in 1891, agreed to join Lord Salisbury's third ministry as president of the council. The duke was then the nominal representative of education in the cabinet at a time when educational issues were quickly gaining importance, and his own technical understanding of this complex matter was acknowledged to be limited, attracting some criticism. However, by then, he had an established status in public life and a reputation for character and integrity, earning him widespread respect and shielding him from fierce attacks, even from his staunchest political opponents. His wealth and rank, combined with his character, placed him somewhat above party politics. His succession to his father as chancellor of the University of Cambridge in 1892 underscored his prominence in national life. In the same year, he married the widow of the 7th duke of Manchester.
He continued to hold the office of lord president of the council till the 3rd of October 1903, when he resigned on account of differences with Mr Balfour (q.v.) over the latter's attitude towards free trade. As Mr Chamberlain had retired from the cabinet, and the duke had not thought it necessary to join Lord George Hamilton and Mr Ritchie in resigning a fortnight earlier, the defection was unanticipated and was sharply criticized by Mr Balfour, who, in the rearrangement of his ministry, had only just appointed the duke's nephew and heir, Mr Victor Cavendish, to be secretary to the treasury. But the duke had come to the conclusion that while he himself was substantially a free-trader,[1] Mr Balfour did not mean the same thing by the term. He necessarily became the leader of the Free Trade Unionists who were neither Balfourites nor Chamberlainites, and his weight was thrown into the scale against any association of Unionism with the constructive policy of tariff reform, which he identified with sheer Protection. A struggle at once began within the Liberal Unionist organization between those who followed the duke and those who followed Mr Chamberlain (q.v.); but the latter were in the majority and a reorganization in the Liberal Unionist Association took place, the Unionist free-traders seceding and becoming a separate body. The duke then became president of the new organizations, the Unionist Free Food League and the Unionist Free Trade Club. In the subsequent developments the duke played a dignified but somewhat silent part, and the Unionist rout in 1906 was not unaffected by his open hostility to any taint of compromise with the tariff reform movement. But in the autumn of 1907 his health gave way, and grave symptoms of cardiac weakness necessitated his abstaining from public effort and spending the winter abroad. He died, rather suddenly, at Cannes on the 24th of March 1908.
He kept the role of lord president of the council until October 3, 1903, when he stepped down due to disagreements with Mr Balfour (q.v.) regarding Balfour's stance on free trade. Since Mr Chamberlain had already left the cabinet, and the duke hadn’t felt it necessary to join Lord George Hamilton and Mr Ritchie in resigning two weeks prior, this departure was unexpected and was strongly criticized by Mr Balfour. He had only recently appointed the duke's nephew and heir, Mr Victor Cavendish, as secretary to the treasury during a cabinet reshuffle. However, the duke had concluded that although he considered himself fundamentally a free trader, [1] Mr Balfour had a different interpretation of the term. Consequently, he became the leader of the Free Trade Unionists, who were neither aligned with Balfour nor Chamberlain, and he opposed any connection between Unionism and the constructive policy of tariff reform, which he equated with outright Protection. A struggle quickly emerged within the Liberal Unionist group between those who followed the duke and those who supported Mr Chamberlain (q.v.); however, the latter were in the majority, leading to a reorganization of the Liberal Unionist Association, with Unionist free traders breaking away to form a separate group. The duke then became president of the new organizations, the Unionist Free Food League and the Unionist Free Trade Club. In the developments that followed, the duke played a dignified but relatively quiet role, and the Unionist defeat in 1906 was influenced by his open opposition to any compromise with the tariff reform movement. However, in the fall of 1907, his health declined, and serious signs of heart weakness forced him to avoid public engagements and spend the winter abroad. He passed away quite suddenly in Cannes on March 24, 1908.
The head of an old and powerful family, a wealthy territorial magnate, and an Englishman with thoroughly national tastes for sport, his weighty and disinterested character made him a statesman of the first rank in his time, in spite of the absence of showy or brilliant qualities. He had no self-seeking ambitions, and on three occasions preferred not to become prime minister. Though his speeches were direct and forcible, he was not an orator, nor "clever"; and he lacked all subtlety of intellect; but he was conspicuous for solidity of mind and straightforwardness of action, and for conscientious application as an administrator, whether in his public or private life. The fact that he once yawned in the middle of a speech of his own was commonly quoted as characteristic; but he combined a great fund of common sense and knowledge of the average opinion with a patriotic sense of duty towards the state. Throughout his career he remained an old-fashioned Liberal, or rather Whig, of a type which in his later years was becoming gradually more and more rare.
The head of an old and powerful family, a wealthy landowner, and an Englishman with a strong love for sports, his solid and unselfish character made him a top-tier statesman in his time, despite lacking flashy or remarkable qualities. He had no personal ambitions, and on three occasions chose not to become prime minister. Although his speeches were straightforward and impactful, he wasn't a great orator, nor was he particularly clever; he also lacked subtlety of thought. However, he was known for his strong mind and direct actions, and for being diligent as an administrator in both his public and private life. The fact that he once yawned in the middle of a speech he was giving was often cited as typical of him; still, he had a wealth of common sense and an understanding of mainstream opinion, along with a strong sense of duty to the state. Throughout his career, he remained an old-fashioned Liberal, or rather Whig, of a type that was becoming increasingly rare in his later years.
There was no issue of his marriage, and he was succeeded as 9th duke by his nephew Victor Christian Cavendish (b. 1868), who had been Liberal Unionist member for West Derbyshire since 1891, and was treasurer of the household (1900 to 1903) and [Page 132] financial secretary to the treasury (1903 to 1905); in 1892 he married a daughter of the marquess of Lansdowne, by whom he had two sons.
There were no issues regarding his marriage, and he was succeeded as the 9th duke by his nephew Victor Cavendish (b. 1868), who had been the Liberal Unionist representative for West Derbyshire since 1891. He served as treasurer of the household from 1900 to 1903 and was the [Page 132] financial secretary to the treasury from 1903 to 1905. In 1892, he married a daughter of the marquess of Lansdowne, and they had two sons together.
[1] His own words to Mr Balfour at the time were: "I believe that our present system of free imports is on the whole the most advantageous to the country, though I do not contend that the principles on which it rests possess any such authority or sanctity as to forbid any departure from it, for sufficient reasons."
[1] His own words to Mr. Balfour at the time were: "I believe that our current system of free imports is generally the best for the country, although I’m not saying that the principles behind it have any special authority or importance that would prevent us from changing it for good reasons."
DEVONSHIRE (Devon), a south-western county of England, bounded N.W. and N. by the Bristol Channel, N.E. by Somerset and Dorset, S.E. and S. by the English Channel, and W. by Cornwall. The area, 2604.9 sq. m., is exceeded only by those of Yorkshire and Lincolnshire among the English counties. Nearly the whole of the surface is uneven and hilly. The county contains the highest land in England south of Derbyshire (excepting points on the south Welsh border); and the scenery, much varied, is in most parts striking and picturesque. The heather-clad uplands of Exmoor, though chiefly within the borders of Somerset, extend into North Devon, and are still the haunt of red deer, and of the small hardy ponies called after the district. Here, as on Dartmoor, the streams are rich in trout. Dartmoor, the principal physical feature of the county, is a broad and lofty expanse of moorland which rises in the southern part. Its highest point, 2039 ft., is found in the north-western portion. Its rough wastes contrast finely with the wild but wooded region which immediately surrounds the granite of which it is composed, and with the rich cultivated country lying beyond. Especially noteworthy in this fertile tract are the South Hams, a fruitful district of apple orchards, lying between the Erme and the Dart; the rich meadow-land around Crediton, in the vale of Exeter; and the red rocks near Sidmouth. Two features which lend a characteristic charm to the Devonshire landscape are the number of picturesque old cottages roofed with thatch; and the deep lanes, sunk below the common level of the ground, bordered by tall hedges, and overshadowed by an arch of boughs. The north and south coasts of the county differ much in character, but both have grand cliff and rock scenery, not surpassed by any in England or Wales, resembling the Mediterranean seaboard in its range of colour. As a rule the long combes or glens down which the rivers flow seaward are densely wooded, and the country immediately inland is of great beauty. Apart from the Tamar, which constitutes the boundary between Devon and Cornwall, and flows into the English Channel, after forming in its estuary the harbours of Devonport and Plymouth, the principal rivers rise on Dartmoor. These include the Teign, Dart, Plym and Tavy, falling into the English Channel, and the Taw flowing north towards Bideford Bay. The river Torridge, also discharging northward, receives part of its waters from Dartmoor through the Okement, but itself rises in the angle of high land near Hartland point on the north coast, and makes a wide sweep southward. The lesser Dartmoor streams are the Avon, the Erme and the Vealm, all running south. The Exe rises on Exmoor in Somersetshire; but the main part of its course is through Devonshire (where it gives name to Exeter), and it is joined on its way to the English Channel by the lesser streams of the Culm, the Creedy and the Clyst. The Otter, rising on the Blackdown Hills, also runs south, and the Axe, for part of its course, divides the counties of Devon and Dorset. These eastern streams are comparatively slow; while the rivers of Dartmoor have a shorter and more rapid course.
DEVONSHIRE (Devon) is a county in the southwest of England, bordered to the northwest and north by the Bristol Channel, to the northeast by Somerset and Dorset, to the southeast and south by the English Channel, and to the west by Cornwall. Its area is 2604.9 square miles, making it the third largest county in England, after Yorkshire and Lincolnshire. The landscape is mostly uneven and hilly, containing the highest land in England south of Derbyshire (excluding points on the southern Welsh border). The scenery is varied and often strikingly picturesque. The heather-covered uplands of Exmoor, which mainly lie in Somerset, extend into North Devon and are home to red deer and the small, hardy ponies named after the area. As in Dartmoor, the streams here are rich in trout. Dartmoor, the county's main physical feature, is a broad, high expanse of moorland in the southern part of Devon. Its highest point is 2,039 feet, located in the northwest section. Its rugged landscape contrasts beautifully with the surrounding wild but wooded areas made up of granite, as well as the lush farmland beyond. Notable features in this fertile region include the South Hams, a bountiful area of apple orchards between the Erme and the Dart; the rich meadows near Crediton in the vale of Exeter; and the red cliffs near Sidmouth. Two elements that enhance the charm of the Devon landscape are the numerous picturesque old cottages with thatched roofs and the deep sunken lanes, bordered by tall hedges and arching tree branches. The north and south coasts of the county vary significantly in character but both boast magnificent cliffs and rocky scenery, rivaling any found in England or Wales and reminiscent of the colors of the Mediterranean coastline. Typically, the long valleys or combes that lead down to the sea are densely forested, and the inland areas are exceptionally beautiful. Aside from the Tamar, which forms the boundary between Devon and Cornwall before flowing into the English Channel and creating the harbors of Devonport and Plymouth, the major rivers originate in Dartmoor. These include the Teign, Dart, Plym, and Tavy, which flow into the English Channel, along with the Taw heading north toward Bideford Bay. The Torridge River, which also flows north, receives some of its water from Dartmoor via the Okement but begins in a high land area near Hartland Point on the north coast, sweeping widely southward. The smaller Dartmoor streams are the Avon, Erme, and Vealm, all flowing south. The Exe rises on Exmoor in Somerset but mainly flows through Devon (where it names Exeter) and is joined on its path to the English Channel by the smaller tributaries of the Culm, Creedy, and Clyst. The Otter, which rises on the Blackdown Hills, also flows south, while the Axe partly marks the boundary between Devon and Dorset. The eastern rivers generally flow more slowly, whereas the rivers of Dartmoor have a shorter and faster course.
Geology.—The greatest area occupied by any one group of rocks in Devonshire is that covered by the Culm, a series of slates, grits and greywackes, with some impure limestones and occasional radiolarian cherts as at Codden Hill; beds of "culm," an impure variety of coal, are found at Bideford and elsewhere. This series of rocks occurs at Bampton, Exeter and Chudleigh and extends thence to the western boundary. North and south of the Culm an older series of slates, grits and limestones appears; it was considered so characteristic of the county that it was called the Devonian system (q.v.), the marine equivalent of the Old Red Sandstone of Hereford and Scotland. It lies in the form of a trough with its axis running east and west. In the central hollow the Culm reposes, while the northern and southern rims rise to the surface respectively north of the latitude of Barnstaple and South Molton and south of the latitude of Tavistock. These Devonian rocks have been subdivided into upper, middle and lower divisions, but the stratigraphy is difficult to follow as the beds have suffered much crumpling; fine examples of contorted strata may be seen almost anywhere on the north coast, and in the south, at Bolt Head and Start Point they have undergone severe metamorphism. Limestones are only poorly developed in the north, but in the south important masses occur, in the middle and at the base of the upper subdivisions, about Plymouth, Torquay, Brixham and between Newton Abbot and Totnes. Fossil corals abound in these limestones, which are largely quarried and when polished are known as Devonshire marbles.
Geology.—The largest area covered by a single group of rocks in Devonshire is the Culm, a mix of slates, grits, and greywackes, along with some impure limestones and occasional radiolarian cherts, like those at Codden Hill; deposits of "culm," an impure form of coal, can be found at Bideford and other locations. This rock series is present in Bampton, Exeter, and Chudleigh and stretches to the western boundary. Older slates, grits, and limestones appear to the north and south of the Culm; these were so distinctive to the county they were named the Devonian system (q.v.), which is the marine equivalent of the Old Red Sandstone found in Hereford and Scotland. It exists in a trough shape with its axis extending east to west. In the central depression, the Culm lies, while the northern and southern edges rise to the surface north of the latitude of Barnstaple and South Molton and south of the latitude of Tavistock, respectively. These Devonian rocks have been split into upper, middle, and lower divisions, but the layering is hard to track due to significant folding; excellent examples of contorted layers can be observed nearly anywhere along the northern coast, and in the south, at Bolt Head and Start Point, they have undergone intense metamorphism. Limestones are not well developed in the north, but in the south, significant formations are found in the middle and lower parts of the upper divisions, around Plymouth, Torquay, Brixham, and between Newton Abbot and Totnes. Fossil corals are abundant in these limestones, which are extensively quarried and when polished are referred to as Devonshire marbles.
On the eastern side of the county is found an entirely different set of rocks which cover the older series and dip away from them gently towards the east. The lower and most westerly situated members of the younger rocks is a series of breccias, conglomerates, sandstones and marls which are probably of lower Bunter age, but by some geologists have been classed as Permian. These red rocks are beautifully exposed on the coast by Dawlish and Teignmouth, and they extend inland, producing a red soil, past Exeter and Tiverton. A long narrow strip of the same formation reaches out westward on the top of the Culm as far as Jacobstow. Farther east, the Bunter pebble beds are represented by the well-known pebble deposit of Budleigh Salterton, whence they are traceable inland towards Rockbeare. These are succeeded by the Keuper marls and sandstones, well exposed at Sidmouth, where the upper Greensand plateau is clearly seen to overlie them. The Greensand covers all the high ground northward from Sidmouth as far as the Blackdown Hills. At Beer Head and Axmouth the Chalk is seen, and at the latter place is a famous landslip on the coast, caused by the springs which issue from the Greensand below the Chalk. The Lower Chalk at Beer has been mined for building stone and was formerly in considerable demand. At the extreme east of the county, Rhaetic and Lias beds make their appearance, the former with a "bone" bed bearing the remains of saurians and fish.
On the eastern side of the county, there’s a completely different set of rocks that cover the older layers and gently slope away from them toward the east. The lower and westernmost parts of the younger rocks consist of a series of breccias, conglomerates, sandstones, and marls, which are likely from the lower Bunter age, although some geologists classify them as Permian. These red rocks are beautifully exposed along the coast by Dawlish and Teignmouth, extending inland and creating a red soil that reaches past Exeter and Tiverton. A long, narrow strip of the same formation stretches westward on top of the Culm as far as Jacobstow. Further east, the Bunter pebble beds are represented by the well-known pebble deposit at Budleigh Salterton, from where they can be traced inland toward Rockbeare. These are followed by the Keuper marls and sandstones, prominently seen at Sidmouth, where the upper Greensand plateau clearly lies on top of them. The Greensand covers all the high ground north from Sidmouth as far as the Blackdown Hills. At Beer Head and Axmouth, the Chalk is visible, with a famous landslip on the coast at Axmouth caused by springs that emerge from the Greensand beneath the Chalk. The Lower Chalk at Beer has been mined for building stone and was once in high demand. At the far east of the county, Rhaetic and Lias beds appear, the former containing a "bone" bed with the remains of reptiles and fish.
Dartmoor is a mass of granite that was intruded into the Culm and Devonian strata in post-Carboniferous times and subsequently exposed by denudation. Evidences of Devonian volcanic activity are abundant in the masses of diabase, dolerite, &c., at Bradford and Trusham, south of Exeter, around Plymouth and at Ashprington. Perhaps the most interesting is the Carboniferous volcano of Brent Tor near Tavistock. An Eocene deposit, the product of the denudation of the Dartmoor Hills, lies in a small basin at Bovey Tracey (see Bovey Beds); it yields beds of lignite and valuable clays.
Dartmoor is a large area of granite that was pushed into the Culm and Devonian rock layers after the Carboniferous period and later revealed by erosion. There are plenty of signs of Devonian volcanic activity found in the diabase, dolerite, and other rocks at Bradford and Trusham, south of Exeter, around Plymouth, and at Ashprington. One of the most fascinating sites is the Carboniferous volcano at Brent Tor near Tavistock. An Eocene deposit, formed from the erosion of the Dartmoor Hills, is located in a small basin at Bovey Tracey (see Bovey Beds); it contains lignite beds and valuable clays.
Raised beaches occur at Hope's Nose and the Thatcher Stone near Torquay and at other points, and a submerged forest lies in the bay south of the same place. The caves and fissures in the Devonian limestone at Kent's Hole near Torquay, Brixham and Oreston are famous for the remains of extinct mammals; bones of the elephant, rhinoceros, bear and hyaena have been found as well as flint implements of early man.
Raised beaches can be found at Hope's Nose and the Thatcher Stone near Torquay, along with other locations. A submerged forest sits in the bay south of the same area. The caves and cracks in the Devonian limestone at Kent's Hole near Torquay, Brixham, and Oreston are well-known for the remains of extinct mammals; bones of elephants, rhinoceroses, bears, and hyenas have been discovered, as well as flint tools used by early humans.
Minerals.—Silver-lead was formerly worked at Combe Martin near the north coast, and elsewhere. Tin has been worked on Dartmoor (in stream works) from an unknown period. Copper was not much worked before the end of the 18th century. Tin occurs in the granite of Dartmoor, and along its borders, but rather where the Devonian than where the Carboniferous rocks border the granite. It is found most plentifully in the district which surrounds Tavistock, which, for tin and other ores, is in effect the great mining district of the county. Here, about 4 m. from Tavistock, are the Devon Great Consols mines, which from 1843 to 1871 were among the richest copper mines in the world, and by far the largest and most profitable in the kingdom. The divided profits during this period amounted to £1,192,960. But the mining interests of Devonshire are affected by the same causes, and in the same way, as those of Cornwall. The quantity of ore has greatly diminished, and the cost of raising it from the deep mines prevents competition with foreign markets. In many mines tin underlies the general depth of the copper, and is worked when the latter has been exhausted. The mineral products of the Tavistock district are various, and besides tin and copper, ores of zinc and iron are largely distributed. Great quantities of refined arsenic have been produced at the Devon Great Consols mine, by elimination from the iron pyrites contained in the various lodes. Manganese occurs in the neighbourhood of Exeter, in the valley of the Teign and in N. Devon; but the most profitable mines, which are shallow, are, like those of tin and copper, in the Tavistock district.
Minerals.—Silver-lead used to be mined at Combe Martin on the north coast and other locations. Tin has been extracted from Dartmoor (in stream works) for an unknown length of time. Copper was not extensively mined until the late 18th century. Tin is found in the granite of Dartmoor and along its edges, mostly where the Devonian rocks border the granite rather than the Carboniferous rocks. It is most plentiful in the area around Tavistock, which is effectively the main mining district of the county for tin and other ores. About 4 miles from Tavistock are the Devon Great Consols mines, which, from 1843 to 1871, were among the richest copper mines in the world and by far the largest and most profitable in the UK. The shared profits during this time totaled £1,192,960. However, the mining interests in Devonshire face the same challenges as those in Cornwall. The amount of ore has significantly decreased, and the cost of extracting it from the deep mines makes it hard to compete with international markets. In many mines, tin is found below the usual copper depth and is mined once the copper has been depleted. The mineral products of the Tavistock area are diverse, including significant deposits of zinc and iron ores, in addition to tin and copper. Large volumes of refined arsenic have been produced at the Devon Great Consols mine, extracted from the iron pyrites found in the various lodes. Manganese is present near Exeter, in the valley of the Teign, and in North Devon, but the most profitable mines, which are shallow, are, like those for tin and copper, located in the Tavistock district.
The other mineral productions of the county consist of marbles, building stones, slates and potters' clay. Among building stones, the granite of Dartmoor holds the foremost place. It is much quarried near Princetown, near Moreton Hampstead on the N.E. of Dartmoor and elsewhere. The annual export is considerable. Hard traps, which occur in many places, are also much used, as are the limestones of Buckfastleigh and of Plymouth. The Roborough stone, used from an early period in Devonshire churches, is found near Tavistock, and is a hard, porphyritic elvan, taking a fine polish. Excellent roofing slates occur in the Devonian series round the southern part of Dartmoor. The chief quarries are near Ashburton and Plymouth (Cann quarry). Potters' clay is worked at King's Teignton, whence it is largely exported; at Bovey Tracey; and at Watcombe near Torquay. The Watcombe clay is of the finest quality. China clay or kaolin is found on the southern side of Dartmoor, at Lee Moor, and near Trowlesworthy. There is a large deposit of umber close to Ashburton.
The other mineral resources of the county include marble, building stones, slate, and potter's clay. Among the building stones, the granite from Dartmoor is the most prominent. It is extensively quarried near Princetown, as well as near Moreton Hampstead in the northeast part of Dartmoor and other locations. The annual export is significant. Hard traps, found in many areas, are also widely used, along with the limestones from Buckfastleigh and Plymouth. Roborough stone, which has been used since early times in Devon churches, is located near Tavistock and is a tough, porphyritic elvan that takes a nice polish. High-quality roofing slate is found in the Devonian series around the southern area of Dartmoor, with major quarries located near Ashburton and Plymouth (Cann quarry). Potters' clay is mined at King's Teignton, where it is largely exported; at Bovey Tracey; and at Watcombe near Torquay. The clay from Watcombe is of the highest quality. China clay or kaolin can be found on the southern side of Dartmoor, at Lee Moor and near Trowlesworthy. There's also a large deposit of umber close to Ashburton.
Climate and Agriculture.—The climate varies greatly in different parts of the county, but everywhere it is more humid [Page 133] than that of the eastern or south-eastern parts of England. The mean annual temperature somewhat exceeds that of the midlands, but the average summer heat is rather less than that of the southern counties to the east. The air of the Dartmoor highlands is sharp and bracing. Mists are frequent, and snow often lies long. On the south coast frost is little known, and many half hardy plants, such as hydrangeas, myrtles, geraniums and heliotropes, live through the winter without protection. The climate of Sidmouth, Teignmouth, Torquay and other watering places on this coast is very equable, the mean temperature in January being 43.6° at Plymouth. The north coast, exposed to the storms and swell of the Atlantic, is more bracing; although there also, in the more sheltered nooks (as at Combe Martin), myrtles of great size and age flower freely, and produce their annual crop of berries.
Climate and Agriculture.—The climate varies greatly in different parts of the county, but it's generally more humid [Page 133] than in the eastern or southeastern parts of England. The average annual temperature is slightly higher than that of the Midlands, but summer temperatures are a bit lower than those in the southern counties to the east. The air in the Dartmoor highlands feels sharp and refreshing. Mists are common, and snow often sticks around for a while. On the south coast, frost is rare, and many semi-hardy plants like hydrangeas, myrtles, geraniums, and heliotropes can survive the winter without any protection. The climate in Sidmouth, Teignmouth, Torquay, and other resorts along this coast is very mild, with an average temperature of 43.6° in January at Plymouth. The north coast, which faces the storms and swells of the Atlantic, is more invigorating; however, even there, in the more sheltered spots (like Combe Martin), large, old myrtles bloom abundantly and produce their yearly crop of berries.
Rather less than three-quarters of the total area of the county is under cultivation; the cultivated area falling a little below the average of the English counties. There are, however, about 160,000 acres of hill pasture in addition to the area in permanent pasture, which is more than one-half that of the cultivated area. The Devon breed of cattle is well adapted both for fattening and for dairy purposes; while sheep are kept in great numbers on the hill pastures. Devonshire is one of the chief cattle-farming and sheep-farming counties. It is specially famous for two products of the dairy—the clotted cream to which it gives its name, and junket. Of the area under grain crops, oats occupy about three times the acreage under wheat or barley. The bulk of the acreage under green crops is occupied by turnips, swedes and mangold. Orchards occupy a large acreage, and consist chiefly of apple-trees, nearly every farm maintaining one for the manufacture of cider.
About three-quarters of the total area of the county is used for farming; the cultivated land is slightly below the average for English counties. However, there are around 160,000 acres of hill pasture in addition to the permanent pasture, which is more than half the size of the cultivated area. The Devon breed of cattle is well-suited for both fattening and dairy production, while sheep are raised in large numbers on the hill pastures. Devonshire is one of the leading counties for cattle and sheep farming. It is especially known for two dairy products—the clotted cream that bears its name and junket. In terms of grain crops, oats cover about three times the amount of land as wheat or barley. Most of the land for green crops is taken up by turnips, swedes, and mangold. Orchards cover a significant area and mainly consist of apple trees, with nearly every farm having one for cider production.
Fisheries.—Though the fisheries of Devon are less valuable than those of Cornwall, large quantities of the pilchard and herrings caught in Cornish waters are landed at Plymouth. Much of the fishing is carried on within the three-mile limit; and it may be asserted that trawling is the main feature of the Devonshire industry, whereas seining and driving characterize that of Cornwall. Pilchard, cod, sprats, brill, plaice, soles, turbot, shrimps, lobsters, oysters and mussels are met with, besides herring and mackerel, which are fairly plentiful. After Plymouth, the principal fishing station is at Brixham, but there are lesser stations in every bay and estuary.
Fisheries.—While the fisheries in Devon are not as valuable as those in Cornwall, a significant amount of pilchard and herring caught in Cornish waters is brought to Plymouth. Most of the fishing occurs within the three-mile limit, and it's fair to say that trawling is the primary method in Devon, while seining and driving are typical in Cornwall. Fishermen catch pilchard, cod, sprats, brill, plaice, soles, turbot, shrimps, lobsters, oysters, and mussels, in addition to fairly abundant herring and mackerel. After Plymouth, the main fishing hub is at Brixham, although there are smaller stations in every bay and estuary.
Other Industries.—The principal industrial works in the county are the various Government establishments at Plymouth and Devonport. Among other industries may be noted the lace-works at Tiverton; the manufacture of pillow-lace for which Honiton and its neighbourhood has long been famous; and the potteries and terra-cotta works of Bovey Tracey and Watcombe. Woollen goods and serges are made at Buckfastleigh and Ashburton, and boots and shoes at Crediton. Convict labour is employed in the direction of agriculture, quarrying, &c., in the great prison of Dartmoor.
Other Industries.—The main industrial facilities in the county are the various Government sites at Plymouth and Devonport. Other notable industries include the lace-making factories in Tiverton; the production of pillow-lace for which Honiton and its surrounding areas have long been renowned; and the potteries and terra-cotta shops in Bovey Tracey and Watcombe. Woolen products and serges are manufactured in Buckfastleigh and Ashburton, while boots and shoes are produced in Crediton. Prison labor is utilized for agricultural work, quarrying, etc., at the large prison in Dartmoor.
Communications.—The main line of the Great Western railway, entering the county in the east from Taunton, runs to Exeter, skirts the coast as far as Teignmouth, and continues a short distance inland by Newton Abbot to Plymouth, after which it crosses the estuary of the Tamar by a great bridge to Saltash in Cornwall. Branches serve Torquay and other seaside resorts of the south coast; and among other branches are those from Taunton to Barnstaple and from Plymouth northward to Tavistock and Launceston. The main line of the London & South-Western railway between Exeter and Plymouth skirts the north and west of Dartmoor by Okehampton and Tavistock. A branch from Yeoford serves Barnstaple, Ilfracombe, Bideford and Torrington, while the Lynton & Barnstaple and the Bideford, Westward Ho & Appledore lines serve the districts indicated by their names. The branch line to Princetown from the Plymouth-Tavistock line of the Great Western company in part follows the line of a very early railway—that constructed to connect Plymouth with the Dartmoor prison in 1819-1825, which was worked with horse cars. The only waterways of any importance are the Tamar, which is navigable up to Gunnislake (3 m. S.W. of Tavistock), and the Exeter ship canal, noteworthy as one of the oldest in England, for it was originally cut in the reign of Elizabeth.
Communications.—The main line of the Great Western railway enters the county from the east at Taunton and travels to Exeter, following the coast all the way to Teignmouth, then heads a bit inland by Newton Abbot to Plymouth. After that, it crosses the Tamar estuary via a large bridge to Saltash in Cornwall. Branch lines connect Torquay and other seaside resorts along the south coast, with additional branches extending from Taunton to Barnstaple and from Plymouth north to Tavistock and Launceston. The main line of the London & South-Western railway runs between Exeter and Plymouth, passing along the north and west of Dartmoor through Okehampton and Tavistock. A branch from Yeoford reaches Barnstaple, Ilfracombe, Bideford, and Torrington, while the Lynton & Barnstaple and the Bideford, Westward Ho & Appledore lines serve the areas indicated by their names. The branch line to Princetown from the Plymouth-Tavistock line of the Great Western company partially follows the route of an early railway built to connect Plymouth with Dartmoor prison between 1819 and 1825, which used horse-drawn cars. The only significant waterways are the Tamar, which is navigable up to Gunnislake (3 miles southwest of Tavistock), and the Exeter ship canal, notable for being one of the oldest in England, as it was originally dug during the reign of Elizabeth.
Population and Administration.—The area of the ancient county is 1,667,154 acres, with a population in 1891 of 631,808, and 1901 of 661,314. The area of the administrative county is 1,671,168 acres. The county contains 33 hundreds. The municipal boroughs are Barnstaple (pop. 14,137), Bideford (8754), Dartmouth (6579), Devonport, a county borough (70,437), Exeter, a city and county borough (47,185), Torrington, officially Great Torrington (3241), Honiton (3271), Okehampton (2569), Plymouth, a county borough (107,636), South Molton (2848), Tiverton (10,382), Torquay (33,625), Totnes (4035). The other urban districts are Ashburton (2628), Bampton (1657), Brixham (8092), Buckfastleigh (2520), Budleigh Salterton (1883), Crediton (3974), Dawlish (4003), East Stonehouse (15,111), Exmouth (10,485), Heavitree (7529), Holsworthy (1371), Ilfracombe (8557), Ivybridge (1575), Kingsbridge (3025), Lynton (1641), Newton Abbot (12,517), Northam (5355), Ottery St Mary (3495), Paignton (8385), Salcombe (1710), Seaton (1325), Sidmouth (4201), Tavistock (4728), Teignmouth (8636). The county is in the western circuit, and assizes are held at Exeter. It has one court of quarter sessions, and is divided into twenty-four petty sessional divisions. The boroughs of Barnstaple, Bideford, Devonport, Exeter, Plymouth, South Molton, and Tiverton have separate commissions of the peace and courts of quarter sessions, and those of Dartmouth, Great Torrington, Torquay and Totnes have commissions of the peace only. There are 461 civil parishes. Devonshire is in the diocese of Exeter, with the exception of small parts in those of Salisbury and Truro; and there are 516 ecclesiastical parishes or districts wholly or in part within the county. The parliamentary divisions are the Eastern or Honiton, North-eastern or Tiverton, Northern or South Molton, North-western or Barnstaple, Western or Tavistock, Southern or Totnes, Torquay, and Mid or Ashburton, each returning one member; and the county also contains the parliamentary boroughs of Devonport and Plymouth, each returning two members, and that of Exeter, returning one member.
Population and Administration.—The area of the ancient county is 1,667,154 acres, with a population in 1891 of 631,808, and in 1901 of 661,314. The area of the administrative county is 1,671,168 acres. The county consists of 33 hundreds. The municipal boroughs are Barnstaple (pop. 14,137), Bideford (8,754), Dartmouth (6,579), Devonport, a county borough (70,437), Exeter, a city and county borough (47,185), Torrington, officially Great Torrington (3,241), Honiton (3,271), Okehampton (2,569), Plymouth, a county borough (107,636), South Molton (2,848), Tiverton (10,382), Torquay (33,625), and Totnes (4,035). The other urban districts are Ashburton (2,628), Bampton (1,657), Brixham (8,092), Buckfastleigh (2,520), Budleigh Salterton (1,883), Crediton (3,974), Dawlish (4,003), East Stonehouse (15,111), Exmouth (10,485), Heavitree (7,529), Holsworthy (1,371), Ilfracombe (8,557), Ivybridge (1,575), Kingsbridge (3,025), Lynton (1,641), Newton Abbot (12,517), Northam (5,355), Ottery St Mary (3,495), Paignton (8,385), Salcombe (1,710), Seaton (1,325), Sidmouth (4,201), Tavistock (4,728), and Teignmouth (8,636). The county is in the western circuit, and assizes are held in Exeter. It has one quarter sessions court and is divided into twenty-four petty sessional divisions. The boroughs of Barnstaple, Bideford, Devonport, Exeter, Plymouth, South Molton, and Tiverton have separate commissions of the peace and quarter sessions courts, while Dartmouth, Great Torrington, Torquay, and Totnes have only commissions of the peace. There are 461 civil parishes. Devonshire is in the diocese of Exeter, except for small parts that belong to the dioceses of Salisbury and Truro; there are 516 ecclesiastical parishes or districts that are wholly or partially within the county. The parliamentary divisions are Eastern or Honiton, North-eastern or Tiverton, Northern or South Molton, North-western or Barnstaple, Western or Tavistock, Southern or Totnes, Torquay, and Mid or Ashburton, each returning one member; the county also includes the parliamentary boroughs of Devonport and Plymouth, each returning two members, and Exeter, which returns one member.
History.—The Saxon conquest of Devonshire must have begun some time before the 8th century, for in 700 there existed at Exeter a famous Saxon school. By this time, however, the Saxons had become Christians, and established their supremacy, not by destructive inroads, but by a gradual process of colonization, settling among the native Welsh and allowing them to hold lands under equal laws. The final incorporation of the district which is now Devonshire with the kingdom of Wessex must have taken place about 766, but the county, and even Exeter, remained partly Welsh until the time of Æthelstan. At the beginning of the 9th century Wessex was divided into definite pagi, probably corresponding to the later shires, and the Saxon Chronicle mentions Devonshire by name in 823, when a battle was fought between the Welsh in Cornwall and the people of Devonshire at Camelford. During the Danish invasions of the 9th century aldermen of Devon are frequently mentioned. In 851 the invaders were defeated by the fyrd and aldermen of Devon, and in 878, when the Danes under Hubba were harrying the coast with a squadron of twenty-three ships, they were again defeated with great slaughter by the fyrd. The modern hundreds of Devonshire correspond in position very nearly with those given in the Domesday Survey, though the names have in many cases been changed, owing generally to alterations in their places of meeting. The hundred of Bampton formerly included estates west of the Exe, now transferred to the hundred of Witheridge. Ten of the modern hundreds have been formed by the union of two or more Domesday hundreds, while the Domesday hundred of Liston has had the new hundred of Tavistock severed from it since 1114. Many of the hundreds were separated by tracts of waste and forest land, of which Devonshire contained a vast extent, until in 1204 the inhabitants paid 5000 marks to have the county disafforested, with the exception only of Dartmoor and Exmoor.
History.—The Saxon conquest of Devonshire must have started sometime before the 8th century, since there was a well-known Saxon school in Exeter by 700. By this point, the Saxons had adopted Christianity and established their control, not through violent invasions, but through a gradual process of colonization, settling among the native Welsh and allowing them to hold land under shared laws. The final incorporation of the area now known as Devonshire into the kingdom of Wessex likely occurred around 766, but the county, and even Exeter, remained partly Welsh until the period of Æthelstan. At the start of the 9th century, Wessex was organized into distinct pagi, which probably correspond to the later counties, and the Saxon Chronicle specifically names Devonshire in 823, when a battle took place between the Welsh in Cornwall and the people of Devonshire at Camelford. During the Danish invasions of the 9th century, aldermen of Devon are mentioned frequently. In 851, the invaders were defeated by the fyrd and aldermen of Devon, and in 878, when the Danes under Hubba were attacking the coast with a fleet of twenty-three ships, they suffered another great defeat by the fyrd. The modern hundreds of Devonshire are very closely aligned with those listed in the Domesday Survey, although many names have changed due to shifts in their meeting locations. The hundred of Bampton used to include estates west of the Exe, which are now part of the hundred of Witheridge. Ten of the current hundreds were formed by combining two or more Domesday hundreds, while the Domesday hundred of Liston has had the new hundred of Tavistock split off from it since 1114. Many hundreds were separated by areas of waste and forest land, which were vast in Devonshire, until in 1204 the residents paid 5000 marks to have the county disafforested, with the exception of Dartmoor and Exmoor.
Devonshire in the 7th century formed part of the vast bishopric [Page 134] of Dorchester-on-Thames. In 705 it was attached to the newly created diocese of Sherborne, and in 910 Archbishop Plegmund constituted Devonshire a separate diocese, and placed the see at Crediton. About 1030 the dioceses of Devonshire and Cornwall were united, and in 1049 the see was fixed at Exeter. The archdeaconries of Exeter, Barnstaple and Totnes are all mentioned in the 12th century and formerly comprised twenty-four deaneries. The deaneries of Three Towns, Collumpton and Ottery have been created since the 16th century, while those of Tamerton, Dunkeswell, Dunsford and Plymptre have been abolished, bringing the present number to twenty-three.
Devon in the 7th century was part of the large bishopric [Page 134] of Dorchester-on-Thames. In 705, it joined the newly formed diocese of Sherborne, and in 910, Archbishop Plegmund established Devon as a separate diocese, with the see located in Crediton. Around 1030, the dioceses of Devon and Cornwall were merged, and in 1049, the see was moved to Exeter. The archdeaconries of Exeter, Barnstaple, and Totnes are all mentioned in the 12th century and originally included twenty-four deaneries. The deaneries of Three Towns, Collumpton, and Ottery have been established since the 16th century, while those of Tamerton, Dunkeswell, Dunsford, and Plymptre have been removed, bringing the current total to twenty-three.
At the time of the Norman invasion Devonshire showed an active hostility to Harold, and the easy submission which it rendered to the Conqueror accounts for the exceptionally large number of Englishmen who are found retaining lands after the Conquest. The many vast fiefs held by Norman barons were known as honours, chief among them being Plympton, Okehampton, Barnstaple, Harberton and Totnes. The honour of Plympton was bestowed in the 12th century on the Redvers family, together with the earldom of Devon; in the 13th century it passed to the Courtenay family, who had already become possessed of the honour of Okehampton, and who in 1335 obtained the earldom. The dukedom of Exeter was bestowed in the 14th century on the Holland family, which became extinct in the reign of Edward IV. The ancestors of Sir Walter Raleigh, who was born at Budleigh, had long held considerable estates in the county.
At the time of the Norman invasion, Devonshire was openly hostile to Harold, and the easy submission it showed to the Conqueror explains the unusually large number of Englishmen who kept their lands after the Conquest. The numerous large estates held by Norman barons were called honours, with the most important being Plympton, Okehampton, Barnstaple, Harberton, and Totnes. The honour of Plympton was granted in the 12th century to the Redvers family, along with the earldom of Devon; in the 13th century, it was transferred to the Courtenay family, who had already acquired the honour of Okehampton and obtained the earldom in 1335. The dukedom of Exeter was given in the 14th century to the Holland family, which went extinct during the reign of Edward IV. The ancestors of Sir Walter Raleigh, who was born in Budleigh, had long held significant estates in the county.
Devonshire had an independent sheriff, the appointment being at first hereditary, but afterwards held for one year only. In 1320 complaint was made that all the hundreds of Devonshire were in the hands of the great lords, who did not appoint a sufficiency of bailiffs for their proper government. The miners of Devon had independent courts, known as stannary courts, for the regulation of mining affairs, the four stannary towns being Tavistock, Ashburton, Chagford, and Plympton. The ancient miners' parliament was held in the open air at Crockern's Tor.
Devonshire had its own sheriff, originally appointed through heredity, but later it was a one-year position. In 1320, there was a complaint that all the hundreds of Devonshire were controlled by the powerful lords, who weren’t appointing enough bailiffs for proper management. The miners in Devon had their own courts, called stannary courts, to handle mining matters, with the four stannary towns being Tavistock, Ashburton, Chagford, and Plympton. The traditional miners' parliament took place outdoors at Crockern's Tor.
The castles of Exeter and Plympton were held against Stephen by Baldwin de Redvers, and in the 14th and 15th centuries the French made frequent attacks on the Devonshire coast, being repulsed in 1404 by the people of Dartmouth. In the Wars of the Roses the county was much divided, and frequent skirmishes took place between the earl of Devon and Lord Bonville, the respective champions of the Lancastrian and Yorkist parties. Great disturbances in the county followed the Reformation of the 16th century and in 1549 a priest was compelled to say mass at Sampford Courtney. On the outbreak of the Civil War the county as a whole favoured the parliament, but the prevailing desire was for peace, and in 1643 a treaty for the cessation of hostilities in Devonshire and Cornwall was agreed upon. Skirmishes, however, continued until the capture of Dartmouth and Exeter in 1646 put an end to the struggle. In 1688 the prince of Orange landed at Torbay and was entertained for several days at Ford and at Exeter.
The castles of Exeter and Plympton were held against Stephen by Baldwin de Redvers, and in the 14th and 15th centuries, the French frequently attacked the Devonshire coast, being pushed back in 1404 by the people of Dartmouth. During the Wars of the Roses, the county was quite divided, with frequent skirmishes occurring between the Earl of Devon and Lord Bonville, who were the respective leaders of the Lancastrian and Yorkist sides. Significant unrest in the county followed the Reformation in the 16th century, and in 1549, a priest was forced to say mass at Sampford Courtney. When the Civil War broke out, the county overall supported Parliament, but the main wish was for peace, and in 1643, a treaty to stop hostilities in Devonshire and Cornwall was agreed upon. However, skirmishes continued until the capture of Dartmouth and Exeter in 1646 ended the conflict. In 1688, the Prince of Orange landed at Torbay and stayed for several days at Ford and Exeter.
The tin mines of Devon have been worked from time immemorial, and in the 14th century mines of tin, copper, lead, gold and silver are mentioned. Agriculturally the county was always poor, and before the disafforestation rendered especially so through the ravages committed by the herds of wild deer. At the time of the Domesday Survey the salt industry was important, and there were ninety-nine mills in the county and thirteen fisheries. From an early period the chief manufacture was that of woollen cloth, and a statute 4 Ed. IV. permitted the manufacture of cloths of a distinct make in certain parts of Devonshire. About 1505 Anthony Bonvis, an Italian, introduced an improved method of spinning into the county, and cider-making is mentioned in the 16th century. In 1680 the lace industry was already flourishing at Colyton and Ottery St Mary, and flax, hemp and malt were largely produced in the 17th and 18th centuries.
The tin mines in Devon have been in operation for ages, and in the 14th century, there are mentions of mines for tin, copper, lead, gold, and silver. The county has always been agriculturally poor, especially after disafforestation caused significant damage from wild deer herds. During the Domesday Survey, the salt industry was significant, with ninety-nine mills and thirteen fisheries in the county. From an early time, the main industry was woolen cloth production, and a law in 4 Ed. IV allowed the manufacturing of distinct types of cloth in certain areas of Devonshire. Around 1505, an Italian named Anthony Bonvis brought an improved spinning method to the county, and cider-making was noted in the 16th century. By 1680, the lace industry was thriving in Colyton and Ottery St Mary, and large amounts of flax, hemp, and malt were produced in the 17th and 18th centuries.
Devonshire returned two members to parliament in 1290, and in 1295 Barnstaple, Exeter, Plympton, Tavistock, Torrington and Totnes were also represented. In 1831 the county with its boroughs returned a total of twenty-six members, but under the Reform Act of 1832 it returned four members in two divisions, and with ten boroughs was represented by a total of eighteen members. Under the act of 1868 the county returned six members in three divisions, and four of the boroughs were disfranchised, making a total of seventeen members.
Devonshire sent two representatives to parliament in 1290, and by 1295, Barnstaple, Exeter, Plympton, Tavistock, Torrington, and Totnes were also represented. In 1831, the county and its boroughs sent a total of twenty-six members, but after the Reform Act of 1832, it sent four members across two divisions, and with ten boroughs, it was represented by a total of eighteen members. According to the act of 1868, the county sent six members across three divisions, and four of the boroughs lost their voting rights, reducing the total to seventeen members.
Antiquities.—In primeval antiquities Devonshire is not so rich as Cornwall; but Dartmoor abounds in remains of the highest interest, the most peculiar of which are the long parallel alignments of upright stones, which, on a small scale, resemble those of Carnac in Brittany. On Dartmoor the lines are invariably straight, and are found in direct connexion with cairns, and with circles which are probably sepulchral. These stone avenues are very numerous. Of the so-called sacred circles the best examples are the "Longstones" on Scorhill Down, and the "Grey Wethers" under Sittaford Tor. By far the finest cromlech is the "Spinster's Rock" at Drewsteignton, a three-pillared cromlech which may well be compared with those of Cornwall. There are numerous menhirs or single upright stones; a large dolmen or holed stone lies in the bed of the Teign, near the Scorhill circle; and rock basins occur on the summit of nearly every tor on Dartmoor (the largest are on Kestor, and on Heltor, above the Teign). It is, however, tolerably evident that these have been produced by the gradual disintegration of the granite, and that the dolmen in the Teign is due to the action of the river. Clusters of hut foundations, circular, and formed of rude granite blocks, are frequent; the best example of such a primitive village is at Batworthy, near Chagford; the type resembles that of East Cornwall. Walled enclosures, or pounds, occur in many places; Grimspound is the most remarkable. Boundary lines, also called trackways, run across Dartmoor in many directions; and the rude bridges, formed of great slabs of granite, deserve notice. All these remains are on Dartmoor. Scattered over the county are numerous large hill castles and camps,—all earthworks, and all apparently of the British period. Roman relics have been found from time to time at Exeter (Isca Damnoniorum), the only large Roman station in the county.
Antiquities.—In ancient history, Devonshire isn't as rich as Cornwall; however, Dartmoor has plenty of remains that are highly interesting. The most unique are the long lines of upright stones, which, on a smaller scale, look like those in Carnac, Brittany. On Dartmoor, these lines are always straight and are directly connected with cairns and circles that are likely burial sites. There are many of these stone avenues. Among the so-called sacred circles, the best examples are the "Longstones" on Scorhill Down and the "Grey Wethers" under Sittaford Tor. The most impressive cromlech is the "Spinster's Rock" at Drewsteignton, a three-pillar cromlech that can easily be compared to those in Cornwall. There are numerous menhirs, or single upright stones; a large dolmen or holed stone can be found in the bed of the Teign, near the Scorhill circle; and rock basins are present on the summit of almost every tor on Dartmoor (the largest ones are on Kestor and Heltor, above the Teign). However, it is quite clear that these basins have formed through the gradual wearing away of the granite, and that the dolmen in the Teign is a result of the river's action. Groups of hut foundations, circular and made of rough granite blocks, are common; the best example of such a primitive village is at Batworthy, near Chagford, resembling those in East Cornwall. Walled enclosures, or pounds, are found in many areas, with Grimspound being the most notable. Boundary lines, also known as trackways, crisscross Dartmoor in various directions, and the crude bridges made of large granite slabs are worth mentioning. All these remains are on Dartmoor. Scattered throughout the county are numerous large hill castles and camps—all earthworks, and all seemingly from the British period. Roman artifacts have occasionally been discovered in Exeter (Isca Damnoniorum), which is the only significant Roman station in the county.
The churches are for the most part of the Perpendicular period, dating from the middle of the 14th to the end of the 15th century. Exeter cathedral is of course an exception, the whole (except the Norman towers) being very beautiful Decorated work. The special features of Devonshire churches, however, are the richly carved pulpits and chancel screens of wood, in which this county exceeded every other in England, with the exception of Norfolk and Suffolk. The designs are rich and varied, and the skill displayed often very great. Granite crosses are frequent, the finest and earliest being that of Coplestone, near Crediton. Monastic remains are scanty; the principal are those at Tor, Buckfast, Tavistock and Buckland Abbeys. Among domestic buildings the houses of Wear Gilford, Bradley and Dartington of the 15th century; Bradfield and Holcombe Rogus (Elizabethan), and Forde (Jacobean), deserve notice. The ruined castles of Okehampton (Edward I.), Exeter, with its vast British earthworks, Berry Pomeroy (Henry III., with ruins of a large Tudor mansion), Totnes (Henry III.) and Compton (early 15th century), are all interesting and picturesque.
The churches are mostly from the Perpendicular period, dating from the mid-14th to the late 15th century. Exeter Cathedral is an exception, as most of it (except for the Norman towers) features beautiful Decorated architecture. The standout features of Devon churches are the intricately carved wooden pulpits and chancel screens, where this county surpasses every other in England, except for Norfolk and Suffolk. The designs are elaborate and diverse, often showcasing impressive craftsmanship. Granite crosses are common, with the most notable and oldest being the one at Coplestone, near Crediton. The remains of monasteries are limited; the main ones are at Tor, Buckfast, Tavistock, and Buckland Abbeys. Among residential buildings, the 15th-century houses of Wear Gilford, Bradley, and Dartington; the Elizabethan homes of Bradfield and Holcombe Rogus; and the Jacobean house of Forde are worth mentioning. The ruined castles of Okehampton (from Edward I's time), Exeter with its large British earthworks, Berry Pomeroy (from Henry III, featuring the remains of a large Tudor mansion), Totnes (from Henry III), and Compton (early 15th century) are all fascinating and picturesque.
Authorities.—T. Westcote, Survey of Devon, written about 1630, and first printed in 1845; J. Prince, Worthies of Devon (Exeter, 1701); Sir W. Pole, Collections towards a History of the County of Devon (London, 1791); R. Polwhele, History of Devonshire (3 vols. Exeter, 1797, 1798-1800); T. Moore, History of Devon from the Earliest Period to the Present Time (vols, i., ii., London, 1829-1831); G. Oliver, Historic Collections relating to the Monasteries in Devon (Exeter, 1820); D. and S. Lysons, Magna Britannia (vol. vi., London, 1822); Ecclesiastical Antiquities in Devon (Exeter, 1844); Mrs Bray, Traditions of Devonshire, in a series of letters to Robert Southey (London, 1838); G. C. Boase, Devonshire Bibliography (London, 1883); Sir W. R. Drake, Devonshire Notes and Notelets (London, 1888); S. Hewett, Peasant Speech of Devon (London, 1892); R. N. Worth, History of Devonshire (London, 1886, new edition, 1895); C. Worthy, Devonshire Parishes (Exeter, 1887); Devonshire Wills (London, 1896); Victoria County History, Devonshire.
Authorities.—T. Westcote, Survey of Devon, written around 1630, and first published in 1845; J. Prince, Worthies of Devon (Exeter, 1701); Sir W. Pole, Collections Towards a History of the County of Devon (London, 1791); R. Polwhele, History of Devonshire (3 vols. Exeter, 1797, 1798-1800); T. Moore, History of Devon from the Earliest Period to the Present Time (vols. i., ii., London, 1829-1831); G. Oliver, Historic Collections Relating to the Monasteries in Devon (Exeter, 1820); D. and S. Lysons, Magna Britannia (vol. vi., London, 1822); Ecclesiastical Antiquities in Devon (Exeter, 1844); Mrs. Bray, Traditions of Devonshire, in a series of letters to Robert Southey (London, 1838); G. C. Boase, Devonshire Bibliography (London, 1883); Sir W. R. Drake, Devonshire Notes and Notelets (London, 1888); S. Hewett, Peasant Speech of Devon (London, 1892); R. N. Worth, History of Devonshire (London, 1886, new edition, 1895); C. Worthy, Devonshire Parishes (Exeter, 1887); Devonshire Wills (London, 1896); Victoria County History, Devonshire.
DEVRIENT, the name of a family of German actors.
DEVRIENT, the name of a family of German actors.
Ludwig Devrient (1784-1832), born in Berlin on the 15th of December 1784, was the son of a silk merchant. He was [Page 135] apprenticed to an upholsterer, but, suddenly leaving his employment, joined a travelling theatrical company, and made his first appearance on the stage at Gera in 1804 as the messenger in Schiller's Braut von Messina. By the interest of Count Brühl, he appeared at Rudolstadt as Franz Moor in Schiller's Räuber, so successfully that he obtained a permanent engagement at the ducal theatre in Dessau, where he played until 1809. He then received a call to Breslau, where he remained for six years. So brilliant was his success in the title-parts of several of Shakespeare's plays, that Iffland began to fear for his own reputation; yet that great artist was generous enough to recommend the young actor as his only possible successor. On Iffland's death Devrient was summoned to Berlin, where he was for fifteen years the popular idol. He died there on the 30th of December 1832. Ludwig Devrient was equally great in comedy and tragedy. Falstaff, Franz Moor, Shylock, King Lear and Richard II. were among his best parts. Karl von Holtei in his Reminiscences has given a graphic picture of him and the "demoniac fascination" of his acting.
Ludwig Devrient (1784-1832), born in Berlin on December 15, 1784, was the son of a silk merchant. He was [Page 135] apprenticed to an upholsterer, but after suddenly leaving that job, he joined a traveling theater company and made his stage debut in Gera in 1804 as the messenger in Schiller's Braut von Messina. Thanks to the support of Count Brühl, he performed at Rudolstadt as Franz Moor in Schiller's Räuber, achieving such success that he received a permanent position at the ducal theater in Dessau, where he stayed until 1809. He then moved to Breslau, where he remained for six years. His remarkable performances in leading roles of several Shakespeare plays were so impressive that Iffland began to worry about his own reputation; still, that great artist generously recommended Devrient as his only potential successor. After Iffland's death, Devrient was called to Berlin, where he became a beloved figure for fifteen years. He passed away there on December 30, 1832. Ludwig Devrient excelled in both comedy and tragedy. Some of his standout roles included Falstaff, Franz Moor, Shylock, King Lear, and Richard II. Karl von Holtei in his Reminiscences painted a vivid picture of him and the "demoniac fascination" of his performances.
See Z. Funck, Aus dem Leben zweier Schauspieler, Ifflands und Devrients (Leipzig, 1838); H. Smidt in Devrient-Novellen (3rd ed., Berlin, 1882); R. Springer in the novel Devrient und Hoffmann (Berlin, 1873), and Eduard Devrient's Geschichte der deutschen Schauspielkunst (Leipzig, 1861).
See Z. Funck, From the Lives of Two Actors, Iffland and Devrient (Leipzig, 1838); H. Smidt in Devrient Novels (3rd ed., Berlin, 1882); R. Springer in the novel Devrient and Hoffmann (Berlin, 1873), and Eduard Devrient's History of German Acting (Leipzig, 1861).
Three of the nephews of Ludwig Devrient, sons of his brother, a merchant, were also connected with the stage. Karl August Devrient (1797-1872) was born at Berlin on the 5th of April 1797. After being for a short time in business, he entered a cavalry regiment as volunteer and fought at Waterloo. He then joined the stage, making his first appearance on the stage in 1819 at Brunswick. In 1821 he received an engagement at the court theatre in Dresden, where, in 1823, he married Wilhelmine Schröder (see Schröder-Devrient). In 1835 he joined the company at Karlsruhe, and in 1839 that at Hanover. His best parts were Wallenstein and King Lear. He died on the 5th of April 1872. His brother Philipp Eduard Devrient (1801-1877), born at Berlin on the 11th of August 1801, was for a time an opera singer. Turning his attention to theatrical management, he was from 1844 to 1846 director of the court theatre in Dresden. Appointed to Karlsruhe in 1852, he began a thorough reorganization of the theatre, and in the course of seventeen years of assiduous labour, not only raised it to a high position, but enriched its repertory by many noteworthy librettos, among which Die Gunst des Augenblicks and Verirrungen are the best known. But his chief work is his history of the German stage—Geschichte der deutschen Schauspielkunst (Leipzig, 1848-1874). He died on the 4th of October 1877. A complete edition of his works—Dramatische und dramaturgische Schriften—was published in ten volumes (Leipzig, 1846-1873).
Three of Ludwig Devrient's nephews, the sons of his brother who was a merchant, were also involved in the theater. Karl August Devrient (1797-1872) was born in Berlin on April 5, 1797. After a brief stint in business, he joined a cavalry regiment as a volunteer and fought at Waterloo. He then turned to acting, making his stage debut in 1819 in Brunswick. In 1821, he was hired at the court theater in Dresden, where he married Wilhelmine Schröder in 1823 (see Schröder-Devrient). In 1835, he joined the company in Karlsruhe, and in 1839, he moved to Hanover. His most notable roles were Wallenstein and King Lear. He passed away on April 5, 1872. His brother Philipp Eduard Devrient (1801-1877), born in Berlin on August 11, 1801, was initially an opera singer. He shifted his focus to theater management and served as the director of the court theater in Dresden from 1844 to 1846. In 1852, he was appointed to Karlsruhe, where he began a comprehensive reorganization of the theater. Over the course of seventeen years of dedicated work, he elevated its status and enriched its repertoire with many significant librettos, including Die Gunst des Augenblicks and Verirrungen, which are the most well-known. His major work is his history of the German stage—Geschichte der deutschen Schauspielkunst (Leipzig, 1848-1874). He died on October 4, 1877. A complete edition of his works—Dramatische und dramaturgische Schriften—was published in ten volumes (Leipzig, 1846-1873).
The youngest and the most famous of the three nephews of Ludwig Devrient was Gustav Emil Devrient (1803-1872), born in Berlin on the 4th of September 1803. He made his first appearance on the stage in 1821, at Brunswick, as Raoul in Schiller's Jungfrau von Orleans. After a short engagement in Leipzig, he received in 1829 a call to Hamburg, but after two years accepted a permanent appointment at the court theatre in Dresden, to which he belonged until his retirement in 1868. His chief characters were Hamlet, Uriel Acosta (in Karl Gutzkow's play), Marquis Posa (in Schiller's Don Carlos), and Goethe's Torquato Tasso. He acted several times in London, where his Hamlet was considered finer than Kemble's or Edmund Kean's. He died on the 7th of August 1872.
The youngest and most famous of Ludwig Devrient's three nephews was Gustav Emil Devrient (1803-1872), born in Berlin on September 4, 1803. He made his stage debut in 1821 in Brunswick as Raoul in Schiller's Jungfrau von Orleans. After a brief engagement in Leipzig, he was called to Hamburg in 1829, but after two years, he accepted a permanent position at the court theatre in Dresden, where he stayed until his retirement in 1868. His major roles included Hamlet, Uriel Acosta (in Karl Gutzkow's play), Marquis Posa (in Schiller's Don Carlos), and Goethe's Torquato Tasso. He performed several times in London, where his Hamlet was regarded as better than those of Kemble or Edmund Kean. He passed away on August 7, 1872.
Otto Devrient (1838-1894), another actor, born in Berlin on the 3rd of October 1838, was the son of Philipp Eduard Devrient. He joined the stage in 1856 at Karlsruhe, and acted successively in Stuttgart, Berlin and Leipzig, until he received a fixed appointment at Karlsruhe, in 1863. In 1873 he became stage manager at Weimar, where he gained great praise for his mise en scène of Goethe's Faust. After being manager of the theatres in Mannheim and Frankfort he retired to Jena, where in 1883 he was given the honorary degree of doctor of philosophy. In 1884 he was appointed director of the court theatre in Oldenburg, and in 1889 director of dramatic plays in Berlin. He died at Stettin on the 23rd of June 1894.
Otto Devrient (1838-1894), another actor, was born in Berlin on October 3, 1838, and was the son of Philipp Eduard Devrient. He started his acting career in 1856 in Karlsruhe and performed in Stuttgart, Berlin, and Leipzig before landing a permanent position in Karlsruhe in 1863. In 1873, he became the stage manager in Weimar, where he received high praise for his mise en scène of Goethe's Faust. After managing the theaters in Mannheim and Frankfurt, he retired to Jena, where he was awarded an honorary doctorate in philosophy in 1883. In 1884, he was named director of the court theater in Oldenburg, and in 1889, he became the director of dramatic plays in Berlin. He passed away in Stettin on June 23, 1894.
DEW. The word "dew" (O.E. deaw; cf. Ger. Tau) is a very ancient one and its meaning must therefore be defined on historical principles. According to the New English Dictionary, it means "the moisture deposited in minute drops upon any cool surface by condensation of the vapour of the atmosphere; formed after a hot day, during or towards night and plentiful in the early morning." Huxley in his Physiography makes the addition "without production of mist." The formation of mist is not necessary for the formation of dew, nor does it necessarily prevent it. If the deposit of moisture is in the form of ice instead of water it is called hoarfrost. The researches of Aitken suggest that the words "by condensation of the vapour in the atmosphere" might be omitted from the definition. He has given reasons for believing that the large dewdrops on the leaves of plants, the most characteristic of all the phenomena of dew, are to be accounted for, in large measure at least, by the exuding of drops of water from the plant through the pores of the leaves themselves. The formation of dewdrops in such cases is the continuation of the irrigation process of the plant for supplying the leaves with water from the soil. The process is set up in full vigour in the daytime to maintain tolerable thermal conditions at the surface of the leaf in the hot sun, and continued after the sun has gone.
DEW. The word "dew" (Old English deaw; compare German Tau) is very ancient, so its meaning has to be understood historically. According to the New English Dictionary, it refers to "the moisture deposited in tiny drops on any cool surface due to the condensation of atmospheric vapor; it forms after a hot day, during or towards evening, and is plentiful in the early morning." Huxley, in his Physiography, adds "without the formation of mist." The production of mist is not needed for dew to form, nor does it necessarily stop it. If moisture deposits as ice instead of water, it's called hoarfrost. Aitken's research suggests that the phrase "by condensation of the vapor in the atmosphere" could be left out of the definition. He believes that the large dewdrops on plant leaves, the most characteristic aspect of dew, are largely due to water being exuded through the leaf pores themselves. The formation of these dewdrops is a continuation of the plant's irrigation process to supply the leaves with water from the soil. This process is active during the day to help maintain acceptable temperature conditions on the leaf's surface in the hot sun and continues after the sun sets.
On the other hand, the most typical physical experiment illustrating the formation of dew is the production of a deposit of moisture, in minute drops, upon the exterior surface of a glass or polished metal vessel by the cooling of a liquid contained in the vessel. If the liquid is water, it can be cooled by pieces of ice; if volatile like ether, by bubbling air through it. No deposit is formed by this process until the temperature is reduced to a point which, from that circumstance, has received a special name, although it depends upon the state of the air round the vessel. So generally accepted is the physical analogy between the natural formation of dew and its artificial production in the manner described, that the point below which the temperature of a surface must be reduced in order to obtain the deposit is known as the "dew-point."
On the other hand, the most common physical experiment demonstrating how dew forms is by creating a layer of moisture in tiny droplets on the outside surface of a glass or polished metal container when a liquid inside it cools down. If the liquid is water, it can be cooled using ice; if it’s something volatile like ether, it can be done by blowing air through it. No moisture forms from this process until the temperature drops to a point that has a specific name due to this condition, although it depends on the air's state around the container. The similarity between how natural dew forms and how it’s artificially created this way is so widely accepted that the temperature below which a surface must be cooled to produce this moisture is referred to as the "dew-point."
In the view of physicists the dew-point is the temperature at which, by being cooled without change of pressure, the air becomes saturated with water vapour, not on account of any increase of supply of that compound, but by the diminution of the capacity of the air for holding it in the gaseous condition. Thus, when the dew-point temperature has been determined, the pressure of water vapour in the atmosphere at the time of the deposit is given by reference to a table of saturation pressures of water vapour at different temperatures. As it is a well-established proposition that the pressure of the water vapour in the air does not vary while the air is being cooled without change of its total external pressure, the saturation pressure at the dew-point gives the pressure of water vapour in the air when the cooling commenced. Thus the artificial formation of dew and consequent determination of the dew-point is a recognized method of measuring the pressure, and thence the amount of water vapour in the atmosphere. The dew-point method is indeed in some ways a fundamental method of hygrometry.
In simple terms, the dew-point is the temperature at which, when cooled without changing the pressure, the air gets filled with water vapor. This happens not because there's more water vapor added, but because the air can hold less of it in gas form as it cools. Once we know the dew-point temperature, we can look up the pressure of water vapor in the atmosphere at that point by using a table that shows saturation pressures at different temperatures. It's well-known that the pressure of water vapor in the air stays constant while the air cools down without changing its overall external pressure. Therefore, the saturation pressure at the dew-point tells us the water vapor pressure in the air when the cooling started. Because of this, creating artificial dew and finding the dew-point is a reliable way to measure the water vapor pressure, and from that, the amount of water vapor in the atmosphere. The dew-point method is actually a key technique in measuring humidity.
The dew-point is a matter of really vital consequence in the question of the oppressiveness of the atmosphere or its reverse. So long as the dew-point is low, high temperature does not matter, but when the dew-point begins to approach the normal temperature of the human body the atmosphere becomes insupportable.
The dew point is a crucial factor in determining how oppressive or comfortable the atmosphere feels. As long as the dew point is low, high temperatures aren’t an issue, but when the dew point starts to get close to the normal temperature of the human body, the air becomes unbearable.
The physical explanation of the formation of dew consists practically in determining the process or processes by which leaves, blades of grass, stones, and other objects in the open air upon which dew may be observed, become cooled "below the dew-point."
The physical explanation for how dew forms mainly involves figuring out the process or processes that cause leaves, blades of grass, stones, and other objects in the open air where dew is seen to cool down "below the dew point."
Formerly, from the time of Aristotle at least, dew was supposed to "fall." That view of the process was not extinct at the time of Wordsworth and poets might even now use the figure without reproach. To Dr Charles Wells of London belongs the credit of bringing to a focus the ideas which originated with the study of [Page 136] radiation at the beginning of the 19th century, and which are expressed by saying that the cooling necessary to produce dew on exposed surfaces is to be attributed to the radiation from the surfaces to a clear sky. He gave an account of the theory of automatic cooling by radiation, which has found a place in all text-books of physics, in his first Essay on Dew published in 1818. The theory is supported in that and in a second essay by a number of well-planned observations, and the essays are indeed models of scientific method. The process of the formation of dew as represented by Wells is a simple one. It starts from the point of view that all bodies are constantly radiating heat, and cool automatically unless they receive a corresponding amount of heat from other bodies by radiation or conduction. Good radiators, which are at the same time bad conductors of heat, such as blades of grass, lose heat rapidly on a clear night by radiation to the sky and become cooled below the dew-point of the atmosphere.
In the past, at least since the time of Aristotle, it was believed that dew would "fall." This idea was still around during Wordsworth's time, and poets might still use this metaphor today without any issue. Dr. Charles Wells from London deserves credit for clarifying the concepts that started with the study of [Page 136] radiation in the early 19th century. He explained that the cooling needed to create dew on surfaces is due to radiation from those surfaces into a clear sky. He detailed the theory of automatic cooling through radiation in his first Essay on Dew published in 1818. This theory is backed by well-designed observations in both this essay and a second one, making them excellent examples of the scientific method. According to Wells, the process of dew formation is straightforward. It starts from the idea that all objects are always radiating heat and will cool down automatically unless they gain an equivalent amount of heat from other objects by radiation or conduction. Good radiators that are also poor heat conductors, like blades of grass, lose heat quickly on a clear night by radiating to the sky and end up cooling below the dew point of the atmosphere.
The question was very fully studied by Melloni and others, but little more was added to the explanation given by Wells until 1885, when John Aitken of Falkirk called attention to the question whether the water of dewdrops on plants or stones came from the air or the earth, and described a number of experiments to show that under the conditions of observation in Scotland, it was the earth from which the moisture was probably obtained, either by the operation of the vascular system of plants in the formation of exuded dewdrops, or by evaporation and subsequent condensation in the lowest layer of the atmosphere. Some controversy was excited by the publication of Aitken's views, and it is interesting to revert to it because it illustrates a proposition which is of general application in meteorological questions, namely, that the physical processes operative in the evolution of meteorological phenomena are generally complex. It is not radiation alone that is necessary to produce dew, nor even radiation from a body which does not conduct heat. The body must be surrounded by an atmosphere so fully supplied with moisture that the dew-point can be passed by the cooling due to radiation. Thus the conditions favourable for the formation of dew are (1) a good radiating surface, (2) a still atmosphere, (3) a clear sky, (4) thermal insulation of the radiating surface, (5) warm moist ground or some other provision to produce a supply of moisture in the surface layers of air.
The question was thoroughly studied by Melloni and others, but little more was added to Wells' explanation until 1885, when John Aitken from Falkirk highlighted whether the water in dewdrops on plants or stones came from the air or the earth. He described several experiments to demonstrate that, under the observation conditions in Scotland, the moisture probably came from the earth, either through the vascular system of plants creating exuded dewdrops or through evaporation and subsequent condensation in the lowest layer of the atmosphere. Aitken's views sparked some controversy, and it's interesting to revisit this because it illustrates a concept that applies to meteorological questions in general: the physical processes involved in the development of meteorological phenomena are usually complex. It’s not just radiation that produces dew, nor even radiation from a body that doesn’t conduct heat. The body needs to be surrounded by an atmosphere rich enough in moisture that the dew point can be reached due to cooling from radiation. So, the conditions favorable for dew formation are (1) a good radiating surface, (2) a still atmosphere, (3) a clear sky, (4) thermal insulation of the radiating surface, and (5) warm, moist ground or some other method to create a moisture supply in the surface layers of air.
Aitken's contribution to the theory of dew shows that in considering the supply of moisture we must take into consideration the ground as well as the air and concern ourselves with the temperature of both. Of the five conditions mentioned, the first four may be considered necessary, but the fifth is very important for securing a copious deposit. It can hardly be maintained that no dew could form unless there were a supply of water by evaporation from warm ground, but, when such a supply is forthcoming, it is evident that in place of the limited process of condensation which deprives the air of its moisture and is therefore soon terminable, we have the process of distillation which goes on as long as conditions are maintained. This distinction is of some practical importance for it indicates the protecting power of wet soil in favour of young plants as against night frost. If distillation between the ground and the leaves is set up, the temperature of the leaves cannot fall much below the original dew-point because the supply of water for condensation is kept up; but if the compensation for loss of heat by radiation is dependent simply on the condensation of water from the atmosphere, without renewal of the supply, the dew-point will gradually get lower as the moisture is deposited and the process of cooling will go on.
Aitken's work on dew theory shows that when we look at moisture supply, we need to consider both the ground and the air, and pay attention to their temperatures. Of the five conditions mentioned, the first four are essential, but the fifth is crucial for getting a significant amount of dew. It’s hard to say that dew couldn’t form without water evaporating from warm ground, but when that water is available, it’s clear that instead of just a limited process of condensation where the air loses moisture and quickly stops, we have a distillation process that continues as long as conditions are right. This difference is practically important because it highlights how wet soil protects young plants from frost at night. When distillation happens between the ground and the leaves, the leaf temperature can't drop much below the original dew-point since there's a constant supply of water for condensation; however, if the heat loss through radiation relies only on condensation from the atmosphere without replenishing the supply, the dew-point will gradually drop as moisture accumulates and the cooling continues.
In these questions we have to deal with comparatively large changes taking place within a small range of level. It is with the layer a few inches thick on either side of the surface that we are principally concerned, and for an adequate comprehension of the conditions close consideration is required. To illustrate this point reference may be made to figs. 1 and 2, which represent the condition of affairs at 10.40 P.M. on about the 20th of October 1885, according to observations by Aitken. Vertical distances represent heights in feet, while the temperatures of the air and the dew-point are represented by horizontal distances and their variations with height by the curved lines of the diagram. The line marked 0 is the ground level itself, a rather indefinite quantity when the surface is grass. The whole vertical distance represented is from 4 ft. above ground to 1 ft. below ground, and the special phenomena which we are considering take place in the layer which represents the rapid transition between the temperature of the ground 3 in. below the surface and that of the air a few inches above ground.
In these questions, we need to address relatively large changes occurring within a small range of levels. Our main focus is on the layer just a few inches thick on either side of the surface, and understanding the conditions here requires careful attention. To illustrate this point, we can refer to figures 1 and 2, which show the situation at 10:40 PM on about October 20, 1885, based on observations by Aitken. Vertical distances represent heights in feet, while the temperatures of the air and the dew point are shown by horizontal distances, with their variations with height depicted by the curved lines in the diagram. The line marked 0 indicates the ground level, which is somewhat vague when the surface is grass. The entire vertical distance shown extends from 4 feet above the ground to 1 foot below it, and the specific phenomena we are examining occur in the layer that represents the rapid transition between the temperature of the ground 3 inches below the surface and that of the air just a few inches above the ground.
![]() |
![]() |
Fig. 1. | Fig. 2. |
The point of interest is to determine where the dew-point curve and dry-bulb curve will cut. If they cut above the surface, mist will result; if they cut at the surface, dew will be formed. Below the surface, it may be assumed that the air is saturated with moisture and any difference in temperature of the dew-point is accompanied by distillation. It may be remarked, by the way, that such distillation between soil layers of different temperatures must be productive of the transference of large quantities of water between different levels in the soil either upward or downward according to the time of year.
The key point is to find out where the dew-point curve and dry-bulb curve intersect. If they intersect above the ground, mist will form; if they intersect at ground level, dew will form. Below the surface, we can assume the air is saturated with moisture, and any temperature difference in the dew point will lead to condensation. It's worth noting that this condensation between soil layers at different temperatures likely causes large amounts of water to be transferred between various levels in the soil, either upward or downward depending on the season.
These diagrams illustrate the importance of the warmth and moisture of the ground in the phenomena which have been considered. From the surface there is a continual loss of heat going on by radiation and a continual supply of warmth and moisture from below. But while the heat can escape, the moisture cannot. Thus the dry-bulb line is deflected to the left as it approaches the surface, the dew-point line to the right. Thus the effect of the moisture of the ground is to cause the lines to approach. In the case of grass, fig. 2, the deviation of the dry-bulb line to the left to form a sharp minimum of temperature at the surface is well shown. The dew-point line is also shown diverted to the left to the same point as the dry-bulb; but that could only happen if there were so copious a condensation from the atmosphere as actually to make the air drier at the surface than up above. In diagram 1, for soil, the effect on air temperature and moisture is shown; the two lines converge to cut at the surface where a dew deposit will be formed. Along the underground line there must be a gradual creeping of heat and moisture towards the surface by distillation, the more rapid the greater the temperature gradient.
These diagrams show how important the warmth and moisture of the ground are in the phenomena we've discussed. At the surface, there’s a constant loss of heat through radiation, while warmth and moisture keep coming up from below. The heat can escape, but the moisture can’t. This causes the dry-bulb line to shift left as it gets closer to the surface, while the dew-point line moves to the right. So, the moisture in the ground makes these lines converge. In the case of grass, shown in fig. 2, the dry-bulb line dips sharply to the left, creating a low temperature at the surface. The dew-point line also shifts left to the same point as the dry-bulb line, but that can only happen if there’s such a significant condensation from the atmosphere that the air at the surface becomes drier than higher up. In diagram 1, which represents soil, we can see the effect on air temperature and moisture; the two lines meet at the surface where dew forms. Beneath the surface, heat and moisture must gradually move upwards through distillation, and this movement happens faster with a steeper temperature gradient.
The amount of dew deposited is considerable, and, in tropical countries, is sometimes sufficiently heavy to be collected by gutters and spouts, but it is not generally regarded as a large percentage of the total rainfall. Loesche estimates the amount of dew for a single night on the Loango coast at 3 mm., but the estimate seems a high one. Measurements go to show that the depth of water corresponding with the aggregate annual deposit of dew is 1 in. to 1.5 in. near London (G. Dines), 1.2 in. at Munich (Wollny), 0.3 in. at Montpellier (Crova), 1.6 in. at Tenbury, Worcestershire (Badgley).
The amount of dew collected is significant, and in tropical countries, it can sometimes be substantial enough to gather in gutters and spouts. However, it's not typically seen as a large part of the overall rainfall. Loesche estimates that dew accumulation for a single night along the Loango coast is about 3 mm, but that estimate seems a bit high. Measurements indicate that the total annual dew deposit corresponds to about 1 inch to 1.5 inches near London (G. Dines), 1.2 inches in Munich (Wollny), 0.3 inches in Montpellier (Crova), and 1.6 inches in Tenbury, Worcestershire (Badgley).
With the question of the amount of water collected as dew, that of the maintenance of "dew ponds" is intimately associated. The name is given to certain isolated ponds on the upper levels of the chalk downs of the south of England and elsewhere. Some of these ponds are very ancient, as the title of a work on Neolithic Dewponds by A. J. and G. Hubbard indicates. Their name seems to imply the hypothesis that they depend upon dew and not entirely upon rain for their maintenance as a source of water supply for cattle, for which they are used. The question has been discussed a good deal, but not settled; the balance of evidence seems to be against the view that dew deposits make any important contribution to the supply of water. The construction of dew ponds is, however, still practised on traditional lines, and it is said that a new dew pond has first to be filled artificially. [Page 137] It does not come into existence by the gradual accumulation of water in an impervious basin.
With the question of how much water is collected as dew, the maintenance of "dew ponds" is closely linked. This term refers to certain isolated ponds found on the higher chalk hills in southern England and other places. Some of these ponds are quite ancient, as suggested by the title of a work on Neolithic Dewponds by A. J. and G. Hubbard. The name hints at the idea that they rely on dew, not just rain, for their water supply, which is used for cattle. This has been a topic of much discussion, but it's not definitively settled; the evidence generally suggests that dew deposits don’t significantly contribute to the water supply. However, the construction of dew ponds is still done in traditional ways, and it's said that a new dew pond needs to be filled artificially at first. [Page 137] It doesn’t naturally form through the slow accumulation of water in a watertight basin.
Authorities.—For Dew, see the two essays by Dr Charles Wells (London, 1818), also "An Essay on Dew," edited by Casella (London, 1866), Longmans', with additions by Strachan; Melloni, Pogg. Ann. lxxi. pp. 416, 424 and lxxiii. p. 467; Jamin, "Compléments à la théorie de la rosée," Journal de physique, viii. p. 41; J. Aitken, on "Dew," Trans. Roy. Soc. of Edinburgh, xxxiii., part i. 2, and "Nature," vol. xxxiii. p. 256; C. Tomlinson, "Remarks on a new Theory of Dew," Phil. Mag. (1886), 5th series, vol. 21, p. 483 and vol. 22, p. 270; Russell, Nature, vol 47, p. 210; also Met. Zeit. (1893), p. 390; Homén, Bodenphysikalische und meteorologische Beobachtungen (Berlin, 1894), iii.; Taubildung, p. 88, &c.; Rubenson, "Die Temperatur-und Feuchtigkeitsverhältnisse in den unteren Luftschichten bei der Taubildung," Met. Zeit. xi. (1876), p. 65; H. E. Hamberg, "Température et humidité de l'air à différentes hauteurs à Upsal," Soc. R. des sciences d'Upsal (1876); review in Met. Zeit. xii. (1877), p. 105.
Authorities.—For Dew, see the two essays by Dr. Charles Wells (London, 1818), also "An Essay on Dew," edited by Casella (London, 1866), Longmans', with additions by Strachan; Melloni, Pogg. Ann. lxxi. pp. 416, 424 and lxxiii. p. 467; Jamin, "Compléments à la théorie de la rosée," Journal de physique, viii. p. 41; J. Aitken, on "Dew," Trans. Roy. Soc. of Edinburgh, xxxiii., part i. 2, and "Nature," vol. xxxiii. p. 256; C. Tomlinson, "Remarks on a new Theory of Dew," Phil. Mag. (1886), 5th series, vol. 21, p. 483 and vol. 22, p. 270; Russell, Nature, vol 47, p. 210; also Met. Zeit. (1893), p. 390; Homén, Bodenphysikalische und meteorologische Beobachtungen (Berlin, 1894), iii.; Taubildung, p. 88, &c.; Rubenson, "Die Temperatur-und Feuchtigkeitsverhältnisse in den unteren Luftschichten bei der Taubildung," Met. Zeit. xi. (1876), p. 65; H. E. Hamberg, "Température et humidité de l'air à différentes hauteurs à Upsal," Soc. R. des sciences d'Upsal (1876); review in Met. Zeit. xii. (1877), p. 105.
For Dew Ponds, see Stephen Hales, Statical Essays, vol. i., experiment xix., pp. 52-57 (2nd ed., London, 1731); Gilbert White, Natural History and Antiquities of Selborne, letter xxix. (London, 1789); Dr C. Wells, An Essay on Dew (London, 1818, 1821 and 1866); Rev. J. C. Clutterbuck, "Prize Essay on Water Supply," Journ. Roy. Agric. Soc., 2nd series, vol. i. pp. 271-287 (1865); Field and Symons, "Evaporation from the Surface of Water," Brit. Assoc. Rep. (1869), sect., pp. 25, 26; J. Lucas, "Hydrogeology: One of the Developments of Modern Practical Geology," Trans. Inst. Surveyors, vol. ix. pp. 153-232 (1877); H. P. Slade, "A Short Practical Treatise on Dew Ponds" (London, 1877); Clement Reid, "The Natural History of Isolated Ponds," Trans. Norfolk and Norwich Naturalists' Society, vol. v. pp. 272-286 (1892); Professor G. S. Brady, On the Nature and Origin of Freshwater Faunas (1899); Professor L. C. Miall, "Dew Ponds," Reports of the British Association (Bradford Meeting, 1900), pp. 579-585; A. J. and G. Hubbard, "Neolithic Dewponds and Cattle-Ways" (London, 1904, 1907).
For Dew Ponds, see Stephen Hales, Statical Essays, vol. i., experiment xix., pp. 52-57 (2nd ed., London, 1731); Gilbert White, Natural History and Antiquities of Selborne, letter xxix. (London, 1789); Dr C. Wells, An Essay on Dew (London, 1818, 1821 and 1866); Rev. J. C. Clutterbuck, "Prize Essay on Water Supply," Journ. Roy. Agric. Soc., 2nd series, vol. i. pp. 271-287 (1865); Field and Symons, "Evaporation from the Surface of Water," Brit. Assoc. Rep. (1869), sect., pp. 25, 26; J. Lucas, "Hydrogeology: One of the Developments of Modern Practical Geology," Trans. Inst. Surveyors, vol. ix. pp. 153-232 (1877); H. P. Slade, "A Short Practical Treatise on Dew Ponds" (London, 1877); Clement Reid, "The Natural History of Isolated Ponds," Trans. Norfolk and Norwich Naturalists' Society, vol. v. pp. 272-286 (1892); Professor G. S. Brady, On the Nature and Origin of Freshwater Faunas (1899); Professor L. C. Miall, "Dew Ponds," Reports of the British Association (Bradford Meeting, 1900), pp. 579-585; A. J. and G. Hubbard, "Neolithic Dewponds and Cattle-Ways" (London, 1904, 1907).
DEWAN or Diwan, an Oriental term for finance minister. The word is derived from the Arabian diwan, and is commonly used in India to denote a minister of the Mogul government, or in modern days the prime minister of a native state. It was in the former sense that the grant of the dewanny to the East India Company in 1765 became the foundation of the British empire in India.
DEWAN or Diwan (or Hall), an Eastern term for finance minister. The word comes from the Arabic diwan, and is commonly used in India to refer to a minister in the Mughal government, or in modern times, the prime minister of a native state. It was in this earlier context that the grant of the dewanny to the East India Company in 1765 laid the groundwork for the British empire in India.
DEWAR, SIR JAMES (1842- ), British chemist and physicist, was born at Kincardine-on-Forth, Scotland, on the 20th of September 1842. He was educated at Dollar Academy and Edinburgh University, being at the latter first a pupil, and afterwards the assistant, of Lord Playfair, then professor of chemistry; he also studied under Kekulé at Ghent. In 1875 he was elected Jacksonian professor of natural experimental philosophy at Cambridge, becoming a fellow of Peterhouse, and in 1877 he succeeded Dr J. H. Gladstone as Fullerian professor of chemistry in the Royal Institution, London. He was president of the Chemical Society in 1897, and of the British Association in 1902, served on the Balfour Commission on London Water Supply (1893-1894), and as a member of the Committee on Explosives (1888-1891) invented cordite jointly with Sir Frederick Abel. His scientific work covers a wide field. Of his earlier papers, some deal with questions of organic chemistry, others with Graham's hydrogenium and its physical constants, others with high temperatures, e.g. the temperature of the sun and of the electric spark, others again with electro-photometry and the chemistry of the electric arc. With Professor J. G. M'Kendrick, of Glasgow, he investigated the physiological action of light, and examined the changes which take place in the electrical condition of the retina under its influence. With Professor G. D. Liveing, one of his colleagues at Cambridge, he began in 1878 a long series of spectroscopic observations, the later of which were devoted to the spectroscopic examination of various gaseous constituents separated from atmospheric air by the aid of low temperatures; and he was joined by Professor J. A. Fleming, of University College, London, in the investigation of the electrical behaviour of substances cooled to very low temperatures. His name is most widely known in connexion with his work on the liquefaction of the so-called permanent gases and his researches at temperatures approaching the zero of absolute temperature. His interest in this branch of inquiry dates back at least as far as 1874, when he discussed the "Latent Heat of Liquid Gases" before the British Association. In 1878 he devoted a Friday evening lecture at the Royal Institution to the then recent work of L. P. Cailletet and R. P. Pictet, and exhibited for the first time in Great Britain the working of the Cailletet apparatus. Six years later, in the same place, he described the researches of Z. F. Wroblewski and K. S. Olszewski, and illustrated for the first time in public the liquefaction of oxygen and air, by means of apparatus specially designed for optical projection so that the actions taking place might be visible to the audience. Soon afterwards he constructed a machine from which the liquefied gas could be drawn off through a valve for use as a cooling agent, and he showed its employment for this purpose in connexion with some researches on meteorites; about the same time he also obtained oxygen in the solid state. By 1891 he had designed and erected at the Royal Institution an apparatus which yielded liquid oxygen by the pint, and towards the end of that year he showed that both liquid oxygen and liquid ozone are strongly attracted by a magnet. About 1892 the idea occurred to him of using vacuum-jacketed vessels for the storage of liquid gases, and so efficient did this device prove in preventing the influx of external heat that it is found possible not only to preserve the liquids for comparatively long periods, but also to keep them so free from ebullition that examination of their optical properties becomes possible. He next experimented with a high-pressure hydrogen jet by which low temperatures were realized through the Thomson-Joule effect, and the successful results thus obtained led him to build at the Royal Institution the large refrigerating machine by which in 1898 hydrogen was for the first time collected in the liquid state, its solidification following in 1899. Later he investigated the gas-absorbing powers of charcoal when cooled to low temperatures, and applied them to the production of high vacua and to gas analysis (see Liquid Gases). The Royal Society in 1894 bestowed the Rumford medal upon him for his work in the production of low temperatures, and in 1899 he became the first recipient of the Hodgkins gold medal of the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, for his contributions to our knowledge of the nature and properties of atmospheric air. In 1904 he was the first British subject to receive the Lavoisier medal of the French Academy of Sciences, and in 1906 he was the first to be awarded the Matteucci medal of the Italian Society of Sciences. He was knighted in 1904, and in 1908 he was awarded the Albert medal of the Society of Arts.
DEWAR, SIR JAMES (1842- ), British chemist and physicist, was born in Kincardine-on-Forth, Scotland, on September 20, 1842. He was educated at Dollar Academy and Edinburgh University, first as a student and later as an assistant to Lord Playfair, who was then a professor of chemistry; he also studied under Kekulé in Ghent. In 1875, he was appointed Jacksonian professor of natural experimental philosophy at Cambridge and became a fellow of Peterhouse. In 1877, he took over from Dr. J. H. Gladstone as Fullerian professor of chemistry at the Royal Institution in London. He served as president of the Chemical Society in 1897 and of the British Association in 1902, participated in the Balfour Commission on London Water Supply (1893-1894), and, as a member of the Committee on Explosives (1888-1891), jointly invented cordite with Sir Frederick Abel. His scientific work spans a wide range of topics. Some of his earlier papers address issues in organic chemistry, others investigate Graham's hydrogenium and its physical constants, high temperatures, such as the temperature of the sun and electric sparks, and also electro-photometry and the chemistry of the electric arc. Together with Professor J. G. M'Kendrick from Glasgow, he explored the physiological effects of light and examined the electrical changes occurring in the retina when exposed to it. In 1878, alongside Professor G. D. Liveing, a colleague at Cambridge, he began a long series of spectroscopic observations, later focusing on the spectroscopic analysis of various gaseous components separated from the atmosphere using low temperatures; he later collaborated with Professor J. A. Fleming from University College, London, to investigate the electrical behavior of materials cooled to extremely low temperatures. He is most widely recognized for his work on the liquefaction of so-called permanent gases and his research into temperatures close to absolute zero. His interest in this area began as early as 1874 when he talked about the "Latent Heat of Liquid Gases" at the British Association. In 1878, he presented a Friday evening lecture at the Royal Institution on the recent work of L. P. Cailletet and R. P. Pictet, showcasing the Cailletet apparatus for the first time in Great Britain. Six years later, he described the research of Z. F. Wroblewski and K. S. Olszewski at the same venue and publicly demonstrated the liquefaction of oxygen and air using specially designed equipment for optical projection, allowing the audience to see the process. Shortly after, he developed a machine to draw off the liquefied gas through a valve for use as a cooling agent, which he demonstrated in relation to research on meteorites; around the same time, he also obtained solid oxygen. By 1891, he had created a device at the Royal Institution that could produce liquid oxygen by the pint, and by the end of that year, he demonstrated that both liquid oxygen and liquid ozone are strongly attracted to magnets. Around 1892, he came up with the idea of using vacuum-jacketed vessels to store liquid gases, which proved to be so effective in keeping out external heat that it became possible to preserve the liquids for relatively long periods and keep them from boiling, allowing for examination of their optical properties. He then experimented with a high-pressure hydrogen jet that achieved low temperatures through the Thomson-Joule effect, and the successful results led him to build a large refrigerating machine at the Royal Institution, which collected hydrogen in liquid form for the first time in 1898, with solidification occurring in 1899. Later, he studied the gas-absorbing abilities of charcoal at low temperatures and applied these findings to create high vacuums and for gas analysis (see Liquid Gases). The Royal Society awarded him the Rumford medal in 1894 for his contributions to creating low temperatures, and in 1899 he became the first recipient of the Hodgkins gold medal from the Smithsonian Institution in Washington for his contributions to understanding atmospheric air. In 1904, he became the first British subject to receive the Lavoisier medal from the French Academy of Sciences, and in 1906, he was the first to receive the Matteucci medal from the Italian Society of Sciences. He was knighted in 1904, and in 1908, he received the Albert medal from the Society of Arts.
DEWAS, two native states of India, in the Malwa Political Charge of Central India, founded in the first half of the 18th century by two brothers, Punwar Mahrattas, who came into Malwa with the peshwa, Baji Rao, in 1728. Their descendants are known as the senior and junior branches of the family, and since 1841 each has ruled his own portion as a separate state, though the lands belonging to each are so intimately entangled, that even in Dewas, the capital town, the two sides of the main street are under different administrations and have different arrangements for water supply and lighting. The senior branch has an area of 446 sq. m. and a population of 62,312, while the area of the junior branch is 440 sq. m. and its population 54,904.
DEWAS, two native states in India, located in the Malwa Political Charge of Central India, were established in the early 18th century by two brothers, Punwar Mahrattas, who arrived in Malwa with the peshwa, Baji Rao, in 1728. Their descendants are recognized as the senior and junior branches of the family, and since 1841 each has governed its own area as a separate state. However, the territories of both branches are so closely intertwined that even in Dewas, the capital town, the two sides of the main street are managed by different administrations, each with its own arrangements for water supply and lighting. The senior branch covers an area of 446 sq. m. and has a population of 62,312, while the junior branch occupies 440 sq. m. with a population of 54,904.
DEWBERRY, Rubus caesius, a trailing plant, allied to the bramble, of the natural order Rosaceae. It is common in woods, hedges and the borders of fields in England and other countries of Europe. The leaves have three leaflets, are hairy beneath, and of a dusky green; the flowers which appear in June and July are white, or pale rose-coloured. The fruit is large, and closely embraced by the calyx, and consists of a few drupules, which are black, with a glaucous bloom; it has an agreeable acid taste.
DEWBERRY, Rubus caesius, is a creeping plant related to brambles, part of the Rosaceae family. It's commonly found in woods, hedges, and along the edges of fields in England and across other parts of Europe. The leaves have three leaflets, are hairy on the underside, and are a dark green color; the flowers that bloom in June and July are white or light pink. The fruit is large and closely surrounded by the calyx, made up of a few small drupelets that are black with a powdery coating; it has a pleasantly tart flavor.
DEW-CLAW, the rudimentary toes, two in number, or the "false hoof" of the deer, sometimes also called the "nails." In dogs the dew-claw is the rudimentary toe or hallux (corresponding to the big toe in man) hanging loosely attached to the skin, low down on the hinder part of the leg. The origin of the word is unknown, but it has been fancifully suggested that, while the other toes touch the ground in walking, the dew-claw merely brushes the dew from the grass.
DEW-CLAW, the basic toes, usually two in number, or the "false hoof" of the deer, sometimes referred to as "nails." In dogs, the dew-claw is the basic toe or hallux (similar to the big toe in humans) that hangs loosely attached to the skin, low on the back part of the leg. The origin of the word is unknown, but it has been playfully suggested that while the other toes touch the ground when walking, the dew-claw just brushes against the dew on the grass.
D'EWES, SIR SIMONDS, Bart. (1602-1650), English antiquarian, eldest son of Paul D'Ewes of Milden, Suffolk, and of [Page 138] Cecilia, daughter and heir of Richard Simonds, of Coaxdon or Coxden, Dorsetshire, was born on the 18th of December 1602, and educated at the grammar school of Bury St Edmunds, and at St John's College, Cambridge. He had been admitted to the Middle Temple in 1611, and was called to the bar in 1623, when he immediately began his collections of material and his studies in history and antiquities. In 1626 he married Anne, daughter and heir of Sir William Clopton, of Luton's Hall in Suffolk, through whom he obtained a large addition to his already considerable fortune. On the 6th of December he was knighted. He took an active part as a strong Puritan and member of the moderate party in the opposition to the king's arbitrary government in the Long Parliament of 1640, in which he sat as member for Sudbury. On the 15th of July he was created a baronet by the king, but nevertheless adhered to the parliamentary party when war broke out, and in 1643 took the Covenant. He was one of the members expelled by Pride's Purge in 1648, and died on the 18th of April 1650. He had married secondly Elizabeth, daughter of Sir Henry Willoughby, Bart., of Risley in Derbyshire, by whom he had a son, who succeeded to his estates and title, the latter becoming extinct on the failure of male issue in 1731. D'Ewes appears to have projected a work of very ambitious scope, no less than the whole history of England based on original documents. But though excelling as a collector of materials, and as a laborious, conscientious and accurate transcriber, he had little power of generalization or construction, and died without publishing anything except an uninteresting tract, The Primitive Practice for Preserving Truth (1645), and some speeches. His Journals of all the Parliaments during the Reign of Queen Elizabeth, however, a valuable work, was published in 1682. His large collections, including transcripts from ancient records, many of the originals of which are now dispersed or destroyed, are in the Harleian collection in the British Museum. His unprinted Diaries from 1621-1624 and from 1643-1647, the latter valuable for the notes of proceedings in parliament, are often the only authority for incidents and speeches during that period, and are amusing from the glimpses the diarist affords of his own character, his good estimation of himself and his little jealousies; some are in a cipher and some in Latin.
D'EWES, SIR SIMONDS, Bart. (1602-1650), was an English antiquarian, the eldest son of Paul D'Ewes from Milden, Suffolk, and of [Page 138] Cecilia, daughter and heir of Richard Simonds from Coaxdon or Coxden, Dorsetshire. He was born on December 18, 1602, and was educated at the grammar school in Bury St Edmunds and at St John's College, Cambridge. He was admitted to the Middle Temple in 1611 and called to the bar in 1623, when he immediately began collecting materials and studying history and antiquities. In 1626, he married Anne, the daughter and heir of Sir William Clopton of Luton's Hall in Suffolk, which significantly increased his already considerable wealth. On December 6, he was knighted. He played an active role as a strong Puritan and a member of the moderate party opposing the king's arbitrary rule during the Long Parliament of 1640, where he served as a member for Sudbury. On July 15, he was made a baronet by the king, but he still supported the parliamentary side when war broke out and took the Covenant in 1643. He was one of the members expelled by Pride's Purge in 1648 and passed away on April 18, 1650. He later married Elizabeth, the daughter of Sir Henry Willoughby, Bart., from Risley in Derbyshire, with whom he had a son who inherited his estates and title; however, the title became extinct due to the lack of male heirs in 1731. D'Ewes seems to have planned an ambitious project to write the complete history of England based on original documents. However, despite being an excellent collector of materials and a diligent, conscientious, and accurate transcriber, he lacked strong abilities in generalization or construction, and he died without publishing anything significant except for an unremarkable tract, The Primitive Practice for Preserving Truth (1645), and some speeches. His valuable work, Journals of all the Parliaments during the Reign of Queen Elizabeth, was published in 1682. His extensive collections, which include transcripts from ancient records—many of which are now lost or destroyed—are housed in the Harleian collection at the British Museum. His unpublished diaries from 1621-1624 and from 1643-1647, particularly useful for detailing parliamentary proceedings, are often the only records of incidents and speeches from that time and provide entertaining insights into his character, his self-regard, and his minor jealousies; some are written in cipher and some in Latin.
Extracts from his Autobiography and Correspondence from the MSS. in the British Museum were published by J. O. Halliwell-Phillips in 1845, by Hearne in the appendix to his Historia vitae et regni Ricardi II. (1729), and in the Bibliotheca topographica Britannica, No. xv. vol. vi. (1783); and from a Diary of later date, College Life in the Time of James I. (1851). His Diaries have been extensively drawn upon by Forster, Gardiner, and by Sanford in his Studies of the Great Rebellion. Some of his speeches have been reprinted in the Harleian Miscellany and in the Somers Tracts.
Extracts from his Autobiography and Correspondence from the manuscripts in the British Museum were published by J. O. Halliwell-Phillips in 1845, by Hearne in the appendix to his Historia vitae et regni Ricardi II. (1729), and in the Bibliotheca topographica Britannica, No. xv. vol. vi. (1783); and from a later Diary, College Life in the Time of James I. (1851). His Diaries have been widely referenced by Forster, Gardiner, and by Sanford in his Studies of the Great Rebellion. Some of his speeches have been reprinted in the Harleian Miscellany and in the Somers Tracts.
DE WET, CHRISTIAN (1854- ), Boer general and politician, was born on the 7th of October 1854 at Leeuwkop, Smithfield district (Orange Free State), and later resided at Dewetsdorp. He served in the first Anglo-Boer War of 1880-81 as a field cornet, and from 1881 to 1896 he lived on his farm, becoming in 1897 member of the Volksraad. He took part in the earlier battles of the Boer War of 1899 in Natal as a commandant and later, as a general, he went to serve under Cronje in the west. His first successful action was the surprise of Sanna's Post near Bloemfontein, which was followed by the victory of Reddersburg a little later. Thenceforward he came to be regarded more and more as the most formidable leader of the Boers in their guerrilla warfare. Sometimes severely handled by the British, sometimes escaping only by the narrowest margin of safety from the columns which attempted to surround him, and falling upon and annihilating isolated British posts, De Wet continued to the end of the war his successful career, striking heavily where he could do so and skilfully evading every attempt to bring him to bay. He took an active part in the peace negotiations of 1902, and at the conclusion of the war he visited Europe with the other Boer generals. While in England the generals sought, unavailingly, a modification of the terms of peace concluded at Pretoria. De Wet wrote an account of his campaigns, an English version of which appeared in November 1902 under the title Three Years' War. In November, 1907 he was elected a member of the first parliament of the Orange River Colony and was appointed minister of agriculture. In 1908-9 he was a delegate to the Closer Union Convention.
DE WET, CHRISTIAN (1854- ), Boer general and politician, was born on October 7, 1854, in Leeuwkop, Smithfield district (Orange Free State), and later lived in Dewetsdorp. He served as a field cornet in the first Anglo-Boer War of 1880-81, and from 1881 to 1896, he farmed before becoming a member of the Volksraad in 1897. He participated in the early battles of the Boer War of 1899 in Natal as a commandant and later, as a general, served under Cronje in the west. His first successful action was the surprise at Sanna's Post near Bloemfontein, followed by the victory at Reddersburg shortly after. From then on, he was increasingly seen as a leading figure among the Boers in their guerrilla warfare. He was sometimes heavily confronted by the British, often escaping by the skin of his teeth from encircling forces, and struck hard at isolated British positions. Throughout the war, De Wet maintained a successful campaign, hitting back fiercely whenever possible while skillfully avoiding capture. He actively participated in the peace negotiations of 1902, and after the war, he traveled to Europe with the other Boer generals. While in England, they unsuccessfully sought to change the terms of peace agreed upon in Pretoria. De Wet wrote an account of his campaigns, with an English version published in November 1902 titled Three Years' War. In November 1907, he was elected to the first parliament of the Orange River Colony and appointed as minister of agriculture. In 1908-09, he served as a delegate to the Closer Union Convention.
DE WETTE, WILHELM MARTIN LEBERECHT (1780-1849), German theologian, was born on the 12th of January 1780, at Ulla, near Weimar, where his father was pastor. He was sent to the gymnasium at Weimar, then at the height of its literary glory. Here he was much influenced by intercourse with Johann Gottfried Herder, who frequently examined at the school. In 1799 he entered on his theological studies at Jena, his principal teachers being J. J. Griesbach and H. E. G. Paulus, from the latter of whom he derived his tendency to free critical inquiry. Both in methods and in results, however, he occupied an almost solitary position among German theologians. Having taken his doctor's degree, he became privat-docent at Jena; in 1807 professor of theology at Heidelberg, where he came under the influence of J. F. Fries (1773-1843); and in 1810 was transferred to a similar chair in the newly founded university of Berlin, where he enjoyed the friendship of Schleiermacher. He was, however, dismissed from Berlin in 1819 on account of his having written a letter of consolation to the mother of Karl Ludwig Sand, the murderer of Kotzebue. A petition in his favour presented by the senate of the university was unsuccessful, and a decree was issued not only depriving him of the chair, but banishing him from the Prussian kingdom. He retired for a time to Weimar, where he occupied his leisure in the preparation of his edition of Luther, and in writing the romance Theodor oder die Weihe des Zweiflers (Berlin, 1822), in which he describes the education of an evangelical pastor. During this period he made his first essay in preaching, and proved himself to be possessed of very popular gifts. But in 1822 he accepted the chair of theology in the university of Basel, which had been reorganized four years before. Though his appointment had been strongly opposed by the orthodox party, De Wette soon won for himself great influence both in the university and among the people generally. He was admitted a citizen, and became rector of the university, which owed to him much of its recovered strength, particularly in the theological faculty. He died on the 16th of June 1849.
DE WETTE, WILHELM MARTIN LEBERECHT (1780-1849), a German theologian, was born on January 12, 1780, in Ulla, near Weimar, where his father was a pastor. He attended the gymnasium in Weimar, which was thriving with literary activity at the time. During this period, he was greatly influenced by interactions with Johann Gottfried Herder, who frequently examined at the school. In 1799, he began his theological studies at Jena, where his main teachers were J. J. Griesbach and H. E. G. Paulus, from whom he developed a tendency towards free critical inquiry. However, he took a unique approach that set him apart from other German theologians. After earning his doctorate, he became a privat-docent at Jena; in 1807, he was appointed professor of theology at Heidelberg, where he was influenced by J. F. Fries (1773-1843); and in 1810, he moved to a similar position at the newly established university of Berlin, where he enjoyed the friendship of Schleiermacher. He was dismissed from Berlin in 1819 because he had written a letter of consolation to the mother of Karl Ludwig Sand, the assassin of Kotzebue. A petition in his support from the university senate was unsuccessful, resulting in a decree that not only removed him from his chair but also banished him from the Prussian kingdom. He spent some time in Weimar, where he used his free time to prepare his edition of Luther and to write the novel Theodor oder die Weihe des Zweiflers (Berlin, 1822), which depicts the education of an evangelical pastor. During this time, he made his first attempts at preaching and showed himself to possess very popular talents. However, in 1822, he accepted the chair of theology at the University of Basel, which had been reorganized four years earlier. Despite strong opposition from the orthodox faction, De Wette quickly gained significant influence both within the university and among the general public. He became a citizen and served as rector of the university, which owed much of its revitalization, especially in the theological faculty, to him. He died on June 16, 1849.
De Wette has been described by Julius Wellhausen as "the epoch-making opener of the historical criticism of the Pentateuch." He prepared the way for the Supplement-theory. But he also made valuable contributions to other branches of theology. He had, moreover, considerable poetic faculty, and wrote a drama in three acts, entitled Die Entsagung (Berlin, 1823). He had an intelligent interest in art, and studied ecclesiastical music and architecture. As a Biblical critic he is sometimes classed with the destructive school, but, as Otto Pfleiderer says (Development of Theology, p. 102), he "occupied as free a position as the Rationalists with regard to the literal authority of the creeds of the church, but that he sought to give their due value to the religious feelings, which the Rationalists had not done, and, with a more unfettered mind towards history, to maintain the connexion of the present life of the church with the past." His works are marked by exegetical skill, unusual power of condensation and uniform fairness. Accordingly they possess value which is little affected by the progress of criticism.
De Wette has been described by Julius Wellhausen as "the groundbreaking initiator of the historical criticism of the Pentateuch." He paved the way for the Supplement-theory. However, he also made significant contributions to other areas of theology. He had a noteworthy poetic talent and wrote a play in three acts titled Die Entsagung (Berlin, 1823). He had a keen interest in art and studied church music and architecture. As a Biblical critic, he is sometimes associated with the destructive school, but, as Otto Pfleiderer mentions (Development of Theology, p. 102), he "held a position as free as the Rationalists concerning the literal authority of the church's creeds, but he aimed to acknowledge the true value of the religious feelings that the Rationalists overlooked, and, with a more open-minded approach to history, to maintain the connection between the current life of the church and its past." His works are characterized by exegetical skill, remarkable conciseness, and consistent fairness. Therefore, they hold value that is minimally impacted by advancements in criticism.
The most important of his works are:—Beiträge zur Einleitung in das Alte Testament (2 vols., 1806-1807); Kommentar über die Psalmen (1811), which has passed through several editions, and is still regarded as of high authority; Lehrbuch der hebräisch-jüdischen Archäologie (1814); Über Religion und Theologie (1815); a work of great importance as showing its author's general theological position; Lehrbuch der christlichen Dogmatik (1813-1816); Lehrbuch der historisch-kritischen Einleitung in die Bibel (1817); Christliche Sittenlehre (1819-1821); Einleitung in das Neue Testament (1826); Religion, ihr Wesen, ihre Erscheinungsform, und ihr Einfluss auf das Leben (1827); Das Wesen des christlichen Glaubens (1846); and Kurzgefasstes exegetisches Handbuch zum Neuen Testament (1836-1848). De Wette also edited Luther's works (5 vols., 1825-1828).
The most important of his works are:—Contributions to the Introduction of the Old Testament (2 vols., 1806-1807); Commentary on the Psalms (1811), which has gone through several editions and is still considered highly authoritative; Textbook of Hebrew-Jewish Archaeology (1814); On Religion and Theology (1815), a significant work that reflects its author's overall theological position; Textbook of Christian Dogmatics (1813-1816); Textbook of Historical-Critical Introduction to the Bible (1817); Christian Ethics (1819-1821); Introduction to the New Testament (1826); Religion, Its Essence, Its Manifestation, and Its Influence on Life (1827); The Essence of the Christian Faith (1846); and Concise Exegetical Handbook to the New Testament (1836-1848). De Wette also edited Luther's works (5 vols., 1825-1828).
See K. R. Hagenbach in Herzog's Realencyklopädie; G. C. F. Lücke's W. M. L. De Wette, zur freundschaftlicher Erinnerung (1850); and D. Schenkel's W. M. L. De Wette und die Bedeutung seiner Theologie für unsere Zeit (1849). Rudolf Stähelin, De Wette nach seiner theol. Wirksamkeit und Bedeutung (1880); F. Lichtenberger, History of German Theology in the Nineteenth Century (1889); Otto Pfleiderer, Development of Theology (1890), pp. 97 ff.; T. K. Cheyne, Founders of the Old Testament Criticism, pp. 31 ff.
See K. R. Hagenbach in Herzog's Encyclopedia; G. C. F. Lücke's W. M. L. De Wette, in Friendly Memory (1850); and D. Schenkel's W. M. L. De Wette and the Significance of His Theology for Our Time (1849). Rudolf Stähelin, De Wette According to His Theological Influence and Importance (1880); F. Lichtenberger, History of German Theology in the Nineteenth Century (1889); Otto Pfleiderer, Development of Theology (1890), pp. 97 ff.; T. K. Cheyne, Founders of the Old Testament Criticism, pp. 31 ff.
DEWEY, DAVIS RICH (1858- ), American economist and statistician, was born at Burlington, Vermont, U.S.A., on the 7th of April 1858. He was educated at the university of Vermont and at Johns Hopkins University, and afterwards became professor of economics and statistics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. He was chairman of the state board on the question of the unemployed (1895), member of the Massachusetts commission on public, charitable and reformatory interests (1897), special expert agent on wages for the 12th census, and member of a state commission (1904) on industrial relations. He wrote an excellent Syllabus on Political History since 1815 (1887), a Financial History of the U.S. (1902), and National Problems (1907).
DEWEY, DAVIS RICH (1858- ), American economist and statistician, was born in Burlington, Vermont, U.S.A., on April 7, 1858. He studied at the University of Vermont and at Johns Hopkins University, and later became a professor of economics and statistics at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. He served as chairman of the state board on unemployment issues (1895), was a member of the Massachusetts commission on public, charitable, and reformatory interests (1897), worked as a special expert agent on wages for the 12th census, and was a member of a state commission (1904) focused on industrial relations. He authored an excellent Syllabus on Political History since 1815 (1887), a Financial History of the U.S. (1902), and National Problems (1907).
DEWEY, GEORGE (1837- ), American naval officer, was born at Montpelier, Vermont, on the 26th of December 1837. He studied at Norwich University, then at Norwich, Vermont, and graduated at the United States Naval Academy in 1858. He was commissioned lieutenant in April 1861, and in the Civil War served on the steamsloop "Mississippi" (1861-1863) during Farragut's passage of the forts below New Orleans in April 1862, and at Port Hudson in March 1863; took part in the fighting below Donaldsonville, Louisiana, in July 1863; and in 1864-1865 served on the steam-gunboat "Agawam" with the North Atlantic blockading squadron and took part in the attacks on Fort Fisher in December 1864 and January 1865. In March 1865 he became a lieutenant-commander. He was with the European squadron in 1866-1867; was an instructor in the United States Naval Academy in 1868-1869; was in command of the "Narragansett" in 1870-1871 and 1872-1875, being commissioned commander in 1872; was light-house inspector in 1876-1877; and was secretary of the light-house board in 1877-1882. In 1884 he became a captain; in 1889-1893 was chief of the bureau of equipment and recruiting; in 1893-1895 was a member of the light-house board; and in 1895-1897 was president of the board of inspection and survey, being promoted to the rank of commodore in February 1896. In November 1897 he was assigned, at his own request, to sea service, and sent to Asiatic waters. In April 1898, while with his fleet at Hong Kong, he was notified by cable that war had begun between the United States and Spain, and was ordered to "capture or destroy the Spanish fleet" then in Philippine waters. On the 1st of May he overwhelmingly defeated the Spanish fleet under Admiral Montojo in Manila Bay, a victory won without the loss of a man on the American ships (see Spanish-American War). Congress, in a joint resolution, tendered its thanks to Commodore Dewey, and to the officers and men under his command, and authorized "the secretary of the navy to present a sword of honor to Commodore George Dewey, and cause to be struck bronze medals commemorating the battle of Manila Bay, and to distribute such medals to the officers and men of the ships of the Asiatic squadron of the United States." He was promoted rear-admiral on the 10th of May 1898. On the 18th of August his squadron assisted in the capture of the city of Manila. After remaining in the Philippines under orders from his government to maintain control, Dewey received the rank of admiral (March 3, 1899)—that title, formerly borne only by Farragut and Porter, having been revived by act of Congress (March 2, 1899),—and returned home, arriving in New York City, where, on the 3rd of October 1899, he received a great ovation. He was a member (1899) of the Schurman Philippine Commission, and in 1899 and 1900 was spoken of as a possible Democratic candidate for the presidency. He acted as president of the Schley court of inquiry in 1901, and submitted a minority report on a few details.
DEWEY, GEORGE (1837- ), American naval officer, was born in Montpelier, Vermont, on December 26, 1837. He studied at Norwich University, then at Norwich, Vermont, and graduated from the United States Naval Academy in 1858. He was commissioned as a lieutenant in April 1861 and served in the Civil War on the steamsloop "Mississippi" (1861-1863) during Farragut's passage of the forts below New Orleans in April 1862, and at Port Hudson in March 1863; he participated in the fighting below Donaldsonville, Louisiana, in July 1863; and from 1864 to 1865, he served on the steam-gunboat "Agawam" with the North Atlantic blockading squadron, taking part in the attacks on Fort Fisher in December 1864 and January 1865. In March 1865, he was promoted to lieutenant-commander. He was part of the European squadron in 1866-1867; served as an instructor at the United States Naval Academy in 1868-1869; commanded the "Narragansett" from 1870 to 1871 and again from 1872 to 1875, being promoted to commander in 1872; was a lighthouse inspector from 1876 to 1877; and was the secretary of the lighthouse board from 1877 to 1882. He became a captain in 1884; from 1889 to 1893, he was chief of the bureau of equipment and recruiting; from 1893 to 1895, he served on the lighthouse board; and from 1895 to 1897, he was president of the board of inspection and survey, receiving a promotion to commodore in February 1896. In November 1897, at his own request, he was assigned to sea service and sent to Asiatic waters. In April 1898, while with his fleet at Hong Kong, he received a cable notifying him that war had begun between the United States and Spain, and he was ordered to "capture or destroy the Spanish fleet" in Philippine waters. On May 1, he decisively defeated the Spanish fleet under Admiral Montojo in Manila Bay, achieving this victory without losing a single man on the American ships (see Spanish-American War). Congress, in a joint resolution, expressed gratitude to Commodore Dewey, along with the officers and men under his command, and authorized "the secretary of the navy to present a sword of honor to Commodore George Dewey, and to strike bronze medals commemorating the battle of Manila Bay, to be distributed to the officers and men of the ships of the Asiatic squadron of the United States." He was promoted to rear-admiral on May 10, 1898. On August 18, his squadron assisted in the capture of Manila. After staying in the Philippines under orders from his government to maintain control, Dewey was promoted to admiral (March 3, 1899)—a title previously held only by Farragut and Porter, revived by an act of Congress (March 2, 1899)—and returned home, arriving in New York City, where he received a grand welcome on October 3, 1899. He was a member of the Schurman Philippine Commission in 1899, and in 1899 and 1900, he was mentioned as a potential Democratic presidential candidate. He served as president of the Schley court of inquiry in 1901, where he submitted a minority report on a few details.
DEWEY, MELVIL (1851- ), American librarian, was born at Adams Center, New York, on the 10th of December 1851. He graduated in 1874 at Amherst College, where he was assistant librarian from 1874 to 1877. In 1877 he removed to Boston, where he founded and became editor of The Library Journal, which became an influential factor in the development of libraries in America, and in the reform of their administration. He was also one of the founders of the American Library Association, of which he was secretary from 1876 to 1891, and president in 1891 and 1893. In 1883 he became librarian of Columbia College, and in the following year founded there the School of Library Economy, the first institution for the instruction of librarians ever organized. This school, which was very successful, was removed to Albany in 1890, where it was re-established as the State Library School under his direction; from 1888 to 1906 he was director of the New York State Library and from 1888 to 1900 was secretary of the University of the State of New York, completely reorganizing the state library, which he made one of the most efficient in America, and establishing the system of state travelling libraries and picture collections. His "Decimal System of Classification" for library cataloguing, first proposed in 1876, is extensively used.
DEWEY, MELVIL (1851- ), American librarian, was born in Adams Center, New York, on December 10, 1851. He graduated from Amherst College in 1874, where he served as assistant librarian from 1874 to 1877. In 1877, he moved to Boston, where he founded and became the editor of The Library Journal, which played a key role in the development of libraries in America and the reform of their management. He was also one of the founders of the American Library Association, serving as secretary from 1876 to 1891 and as president in 1891 and 1893. In 1883, he became the librarian of Columbia College and the following year established the School of Library Economy, the first institution for training librarians ever created. This school, which was quite successful, was relocated to Albany in 1890, where it was reestablished as the State Library School under his leadership. From 1888 to 1906, he was the director of the New York State Library, and from 1888 to 1900, he was the secretary of the University of the State of New York, completely reorganizing the state library, which he turned into one of the most effective in America, and creating the system of state traveling libraries and picture collections. His "Decimal System of Classification" for library cataloging, first introduced in 1876, is widely used.
DEWING, THOMAS WILMER (1851- ), American figure painter, was born in Boston, Massachusetts, on the 4th of May 1851. He was a pupil of Jules Lefebvre in Paris from 1876 to 1879; was elected a full member of the National Academy of Design in 1888; was a member of the society of Ten American Painters, New York; and received medals at the Paris Exhibition (1889), at Chicago (1893), at Buffalo (1901) and at St Louis (1904). His decorative genre pictures are notable for delicacy and finish. Among his portraits are those of Mrs Stanford White and of his own wife. Mrs Dewing (b, 1855), née Maria Oakey, a figure and flower painter, was a pupil of John La Farge in New York, and of Couture in Paris.
DEWING, THOMAS WILMER (1851- ), American figure painter, was born in Boston, Massachusetts, on May 4, 1851. He studied under Jules Lefebvre in Paris from 1876 to 1879; became a full member of the National Academy of Design in 1888; was part of the Society of Ten American Painters in New York; and won medals at the Paris Exhibition (1889), the Chicago Exposition (1893), the Buffalo Exhibition (1901), and the St. Louis Exposition (1904). His decorative genre paintings are known for their delicacy and attention to detail. Some of his portraits include those of Mrs. Stanford White and his wife. Mrs. Dewing (b. 1855), née Maria Oakey, was a figure and flower painter who studied under John La Farge in New York and Couture in Paris.
DE WINT, PETER (1784-1849), English landscape painter, of Dutch extraction, son of an English physician, was born at Stone, Staffordshire, on the 21st of January 1784. He studied art in London, and in 1809 entered the Academy schools. In 1812 he became a member of the Society of Painters in Watercolours, where he exhibited largely for many years, as well as at the Academy. He married in 1810 the sister of William Hilton, R.A. He died in London on the 30th of January 1849. De Wint's life was devoted to art; he painted admirably in oils, and he ranks as one of the chief English water-colourists. A number of his pictures are in the National Gallery and the Victoria and Albert Museum.
DE WINT, PETER (1784-1849), an English landscape painter of Dutch descent, was born to an English physician in Stone, Staffordshire, on January 21, 1784. He studied art in London and joined the Academy schools in 1809. In 1812, he became a member of the Society of Painters in Watercolours, where he exhibited extensively for many years, as well as at the Academy. He married William Hilton's sister, R.A., in 1810. De Wint passed away in London on January 30, 1849. His life was dedicated to art; he painted beautifully in oils and is considered one of the leading English water-colourists. Several of his works can be found in the National Gallery and the Victoria and Albert Museum.
DE WINTER, JAN WILLEM (1750-1812), Dutch admiral, was born at Kampen, and in 1761 entered the naval service at the age of twelve years. He distinguished himself by his zeal and courage, and at the revolution of 1787 he had reached the rank of lieutenant. The overthrow of the "patriot" party forced him to fly for his safety to France. Here he threw himself heart and soul into the cause of the Revolution, and took part under Dumouriez and Pichegru in the campaigns of 1792 and 1793, and was soon promoted to the rank of brigadier-general. When Pichegru in 1795 overran Holland, De Winter returned with the French army to his native country. The states-general now utilized the experience he had gained as a naval officer by giving him the post of adjunct-general for the reorganization of the Dutch navy. In 1796 he was appointed vice-admiral and commander-in-chief of the fleet. He spared no efforts to strengthen it and improve its condition, and on the 11th of October 1797 he ventured upon an encounter off Camperdown with the British fleet under Admiral Duncan. After an obstinate struggle the Dutch were defeated, and De Winter himself was taken prisoner. He remained in England until December, when he was liberated by exchange. His conduct in the battle of Camperdown was declared by a court-martial to have nobly maintained the honour of the Dutch flag.
DE WINTER, JAN WILLEM (1750-1812), was a Dutch admiral born in Kampen. He joined the naval service at the age of twelve in 1761. He stood out for his enthusiasm and bravery, and by the time of the revolution in 1787, he had achieved the rank of lieutenant. The fall of the "patriot" party forced him to escape to France for his safety. There, he fully committed to the Revolution and participated in the campaigns of 1792 and 1793 under Dumouriez and Pichegru, quickly advancing to the rank of brigadier-general. When Pichegru invaded Holland in 1795, De Winter returned to his homeland with the French army. The states-general took advantage of his naval experience by appointing him adjunct-general for reorganizing the Dutch navy. In 1796, he was made vice-admiral and commander-in-chief of the fleet. He dedicated himself to strengthening and improving it, and on October 11, 1797, he engaged the British fleet led by Admiral Duncan off Camperdown. After a fierce battle, the Dutch were defeated, and De Winter was captured. He remained in England until December when he was released through a prisoner exchange. A court-martial later declared that his actions in the battle of Camperdown upheld the honor of the Dutch flag.
From 1798 to 1802 De Winter filled the post of ambassador to the French republic, and was then once more appointed commander of the fleet. He was sent with a strong squadron to the Mediterranean to repress the Tripoli piracies, and negotiated a treaty of peace with the Tripolitan government. He enjoyed the confidence of Louis Bonaparte, when king of Holland, and, after the incorporation of the Netherlands in the French empire, in an equal degree of the emperor Napoleon. By the former he was created marshal and count of Huessen, and given the command of the armed forces both by sea and land. Napoleon gave him the grand cross of the Legion of Honour and appointed him inspector-general of the northern coasts, and in 1811 he placed him at the head of the fleet he had collected at the Texel. Soon afterwards [Page 140] De Winter was seized with illness and compelled to betake himself to Paris, where he died on the 2nd of June 1812. He had a splendid public funeral and was buried in the Pantheon. His heart was enclosed in an urn and placed in the Nicolaas Kerk at Kampen.
From 1798 to 1802, De Winter served as ambassador to the French Republic, and then he was once again appointed commander of the fleet. He was sent with a strong squadron to the Mediterranean to tackle the Tripoli piracy issue and negotiated a peace treaty with the Tripolitan government. He earned the trust of Louis Bonaparte when he was king of Holland, and after the Netherlands were incorporated into the French Empire, he had similar trust from Emperor Napoleon. The former made him a marshal and count of Huessen and gave him command of the armed forces on both land and sea. Napoleon awarded him the grand cross of the Legion of Honour and appointed him inspector-general of the northern coasts. In 1811, he put him in charge of the fleet gathered at the Texel. Soon afterwards, [Page 140] De Winter fell ill and had to go to Paris, where he died on June 2, 1812. He was given a grand public funeral and was buried in the Pantheon. His heart was placed in an urn and put in the Nicolaas Kerk in Kampen.
DE WITT, CORNELIUS (1623-1672), brother of John de Witt (q.v.), was born at Dort in 1623. In 1650 he became burgomaster of Dort and member of the states of Holland and West Friesland. He was afterwards appointed to the important post of ruwaard or governor of the land of Putten and bailiff of Beierland. He associated himself closely with his greater brother, the grand pensionary, and supported him throughout his career with great ability and vigour. In 1667 he was the deputy chosen by the states of Holland to accompany Admiral de Ruyter in his famous expedition to Chatham. Cornelius de Witt on this occasion distinguished himself greatly by his coolness and intrepidity. He again accompanied De Ruyter in 1672 and took an honourable part in the great naval fight at Sole Bay against the united English and French fleets. Compelled by illness to leave the fleet, he found on his return to Dort that the Orange party were in the ascendant, and he and his brother were the objects of popular suspicion and hatred. An account of his imprisonment, trial and death, is given below.
DE WITT, CORNELIUS (1623-1672), brother of John de Witt (q.v.), was born in Dort in 1623. In 1650, he became the mayor of Dort and a member of the states of Holland and West Friesland. He was later appointed to the important role of ruwaard or governor of the land of Putten and bailiff of Beierland. He closely worked with his older brother, the grand pensionary, and supported him throughout his career with great skill and energy. In 1667, he was chosen by the states of Holland to accompany Admiral de Ruyter on his famous mission to Chatham. Cornelius de Witt distinguished himself on this occasion with his composure and bravery. He again joined De Ruyter in 1672 and played a significant role in the major naval battle at Sole Bay against the combined English and French fleets. Forced by illness to leave the fleet, he returned to Dort to find that the Orange party was gaining power, and he and his brother were the targets of public distrust and animosity. An account of his imprisonment, trial, and death is given below.
DE WITT, JOHN (1625-1672), Dutch statesman, was born at Dort, on the 24th of September 1625. He was a member of one of the old burgher-regent families of his native town. His father, Jacob de Witt, was six times burgomaster of Dort, and for many years sat as a representative of the town in the states of Holland. He was a strenuous adherent of the republican or oligarchical states-right party in opposition to the princes of the house of Orange, who represented the federal principle and had the support of the masses of the people. John was educated at Leiden, and early displayed remarkable talents, more especially in mathematics and jurisprudence. In 1645 he and his elder brother Cornelius visited France, Italy, Switzerland and England, and on his return he took up his residence at the Hague, as an advocate. In 1650 he was appointed pensionary of Dort, an office which made him the leader and spokesman of the town's deputation in the state of Holland. In this same year the states of Holland found themselves engaged in a struggle for provincial supremacy, on the question of the disbanding of troops, with the youthful prince of Orange, William II. William, with the support of the states-general and the army, seized five of the leaders of the states-right party and imprisoned them in Loevestein castle; among these was Jacob de Witt. The sudden death of William, at the moment when he had crushed opposition, led to a reaction. He left only a posthumous child, afterwards William III. of Orange, and the principles advocated by Jacob de Witt triumphed, and the authority of the states of Holland became predominant in the republic.
DE WITT, JOHN (1625-1672), a Dutch statesman, was born in Dort on September 24, 1625. He came from one of the old burgher-regent families in his hometown. His father, Jacob de Witt, served as burgomaster of Dort six times and represented the town in the states of Holland for many years. He was a strong supporter of the republican or oligarchical states-right party, opposing the princes of the house of Orange, who favored the federal principle and had broad public support. John studied at Leiden and showed impressive talents early on, particularly in mathematics and law. In 1645, he and his older brother Cornelius traveled to France, Italy, Switzerland, and England. Upon returning, he settled in The Hague and worked as an advocate. In 1650, he became the pensionary of Dort, a role that made him the leader and spokesperson for the town's delegation in the state of Holland. That same year, the states of Holland were in a power struggle regarding the disbanding of troops against the young prince of Orange, William II. With backing from the states-general and the army, William imprisoned five leaders of the states-right party, including Jacob de Witt, in Loevestein castle. William's sudden death, just as he had eliminated opposition, sparked a backlash. He left behind a posthumous son, who would later become William III of Orange, and Jacob de Witt's principles prevailed, leading to the dominance of the states of Holland in the republic.
At this time of constitutional crisis such were the eloquence, sagacity and business talents exhibited by the youthful pensionary of Dort that on the 23rd of July 1653 he was appointed to the office of grand pensionary (Raadpensionaris) of Holland at the age of twenty-eight. He was re-elected in 1658, 1663 and 1668, and held office until his death in 1672. During this period of nineteen years the general conduct of public affairs and administration, and especially of foreign affairs, such was the confidence inspired by his talents and industry, was largely placed in his hands. He found in 1653 his country brought to the brink of ruin through the war with England, which had been caused by the keen commercial rivalry of the two maritime states. The Dutch were unprepared, and suffered severely through the loss of their carrying trade, and De Witt resolved to bring about peace as soon as possible. The first demands of Cromwell were impossible, for they aimed at the absorption of the two republics into a single state, but at last in the autumn of 1654 peace was concluded, by which the Dutch made large concessions and agreed to the striking of the flag to English ships in the narrow seas. The treaty included a secret article, which the states-general refused to entertain, but which De Witt succeeded in inducing the states of Holland to accept, by which the provinces of Holland pledged themselves not to elect a stadtholder or a captain-general of the union. This Act of Seclusion, as it was called, was aimed at the young prince of Orange, whose close relationship to the Stuarts made him an object of suspicion to the Protector. De Witt was personally favourable to this exclusion of William III. from his ancestral dignities, but there is no truth in the suggestion that he prompted the action of Cromwell in this matter.
During this time of constitutional crisis, the young pensionary of Dort showed such eloquence, wisdom, and administrative skills that he was appointed grand pensionary (Raadpensionaris) of Holland on July 23, 1653, at the age of twenty-eight. He was re-elected in 1658, 1663, and 1668, and held the position until his death in 1672. Over these nineteen years, he had significant influence over public affairs and administration, particularly in foreign relations, due to the confidence his talents and hard work inspired. When he took office in 1653, the country was on the verge of disaster from the war with England, sparked by intense commercial competition between the two maritime nations. The Dutch were unprepared and suffered greatly from the loss of their shipping trade, prompting De Witt to seek peace as quickly as possible. Cromwell's initial demands were unacceptable as they aimed to merge the two republics into one state. However, by autumn 1654, peace was finally established, with the Dutch making substantial concessions and agreeing to lower their flag for English ships in the narrow seas. The treaty included a secret article that the states-general initially rejected but that De Witt managed to persuade the states of Holland to accept, preventing the provinces from electing a stadtholder or captain-general of the union. This Act of Seclusion targeted the young prince of Orange, whose connection to the Stuarts made him a suspect to the Protector. Personally, De Witt supported this exclusion of William III from his hereditary titles, but there is no truth to the claim that he influenced Cromwell’s actions regarding this issue.
The policy of De Witt after the peace of 1654 was eminently successful. He restored the finances of the state, and extended its commercial supremacy in the East Indies. In 1658-59 he sustained Denmark against Sweden, and in 1662 concluded an advantageous peace with Portugal. The accession of Charles II. to the English throne led to the rescinding of the Act of Seclusion; nevertheless De Witt steadily refused to allow the prince of Orange to be appointed stadtholder or captain-general. This led to ill-will between the English and Dutch governments, and to a renewal of the old grievances about maritime and commercial rights, and war broke out in 1665. The zeal, industry and courage displayed by the grand pensionary during the course of this fiercely contested naval struggle could scarcely have been surpassed. He himself on more than one occasion went to sea with the fleet, and inspired all with whom he came in contact by the example he set of calmness in danger, energy in action and inflexible strength of will. It was due to his exertions as an organizer and a diplomatist quite as much as to the brilliant seamanship of Admiral de Ruyter, that the terms of the treaty of peace signed at Breda (July 31, 1667), on the principle of uti possidetis, were so honourable to the United Provinces. A still greater triumph of diplomatic skill was the conclusion of the Triple Alliance (January 17, 1668) between the Dutch Republic, England and Sweden, which checked the attempt of Louis XIV. to take possession of the Spanish Netherlands in the name of his wife, the infanta Maria Theresa. The check, however, was but temporary, and the French king only bided his time to take vengeance for the rebuff he had suffered. Meanwhile William III. was growing to manhood, and his numerous adherents throughout the country spared no efforts to undermine the authority of De Witt, and secure for the young prince of Orange the dignities and authority of his ancestors.
The policy of De Witt after the peace of 1654 was extremely successful. He improved the state's finances and expanded its commercial dominance in the East Indies. In 1658-59, he supported Denmark against Sweden, and in 1662, he negotiated a favorable peace with Portugal. The rise of Charles II to the English throne resulted in the repeal of the Act of Seclusion; however, De Witt consistently refused to allow the prince of Orange to be appointed stadtholder or captain-general. This created tension between the English and Dutch governments, leading to the revival of old disputes regarding maritime and commercial rights, which resulted in war breaking out in 1665. The enthusiasm, hard work, and bravery shown by the grand pensionary during this intensely fought naval conflict were remarkable. On several occasions, he sailed with the fleet, inspiring everyone he met with his calmness in danger, energy in action, and unwavering willpower. It was thanks to his organizational skills and diplomacy, as much as to Admiral de Ruyter's impressive seamanship, that the terms of the peace treaty signed at Breda (July 31, 1667), based on the principle of uti possidetis, were so favorable to the United Provinces. An even greater diplomatic achievement was the formation of the Triple Alliance (January 17, 1668) between the Dutch Republic, England, and Sweden, which thwarted Louis XIV's attempt to seize the Spanish Netherlands in the name of his wife, infanta Maria Theresa. However, this setback was only temporary, and the French king was just waiting for the right moment to take revenge for the humiliation he had faced. Meanwhile, William III was growing up, and his many supporters across the country were doing everything they could to undermine De Witt's authority and restore the titles and powers of the young prince of Orange.
In 1672 Louis XIV. suddenly declared war, and invaded the United Provinces at the head of a splendid army. Practically no resistance was possible. The unanimous voice of the people called William III. to the head of affairs, and there were violent demonstrations against John de Witt. His brother Cornelius was (July 24) arrested on a charge of conspiring against the prince. On the 4th of August John de Witt resigned the post of grand pensionary that he had held so long and with such distinction. Cornelius was put to the torture, and on the 19th of August he was sentenced to deprivation of his offices and banishment. He was confined in the Gevangenpoort, and his brother came to visit him in the prison. A vast crowd on hearing this collected outside, and finally burst into the prison, seized the two brothers and literally tore them to pieces. Their mangled remains were hung up by the feet to a lamp-post. Thus perished, by the savage act of an infuriated mob, one of the greatest statesmen of his age.
In 1672, Louis XIV suddenly declared war and invaded the Dutch Republic with a powerful army. There was almost no resistance. The people unanimously called for William III to take charge, leading to intense protests against John de Witt. His brother Cornelius was arrested on July 24, accused of conspiring against the prince. On August 4, John de Witt resigned as grand pensionary, a position he had held for a long time with great distinction. Cornelius was tortured, and on August 19, he was sentenced to lose his offices and be exiled. He was locked up in the Gevangenpoort, and his brother came to visit him in prison. A huge crowd gathered outside when they heard about this, eventually storming the prison, seizing the two brothers, and brutally killing them. Their dismembered bodies were hung by the feet from a lamp post. Thus fell, at the hands of an enraged mob, one of the greatest statesmen of his time.
John de Witt married Wendela Bicker, daughter of an influential burgomaster of Amsterdam, in 1655, by whom he had two sons and three daughters.
John de Witt married Wendela Bicker, the daughter of a powerful mayor of Amsterdam, in 1655, with whom he had two sons and three daughters.
Bibliography.—J. Geddes, History of the Administration of John de Witt, (vol. i. only, London, 1879); A. Lefèvre-Pontalis, Jean de Witt, grand pensionnaire de Hollande (2 vols., Paris, 1884); P. Simons, Johan de Witt en zijn tijd (3 vols., Amsterdam, 1832-1842); W. C. Knottenbelt, Geschiedenis der Staatkunde van J. de Witt (Amsterdam, 1862); J. de Witt, Brieven ... gewisselt tusschen den Heer Johan de Witt ... ende de gevolgmaghtigden v. d. staedt d. Vereen. Nederlanden so in Vranckryck, Engelandt, Sweden, Denemarken, Poolen, enz. 1652-69 (6 vols., The Hague, 1723-1725); Brieven ... 1650-1657 (1658) eerste deel bewerkt den R. Fruin uitgegeven d., C. W. Kernkamp (Amsterdam, 1906).
References.—J. Geddes, History of the Administration of John de Witt, (vol. i. only, London, 1879); A. Lefèvre-Pontalis, Jean de Witt, grand pensionnaire de Hollande (2 vols., Paris, 1884); P. Simons, Johan de Witt en zijn tijd (3 vols., Amsterdam, 1832-1842); W. C. Knottenbelt, Geschiedenis der Staatkunde van J. de Witt (Amsterdam, 1862); J. de Witt, Brieven ... gewisselt tusschen den Heer Johan de Witt ... ende de gevolgmaghtigden v. d. staedt d. Vereen. Nederlanden so in Vranckryck, Engelandt, Sweden, Denemarken, Poolen, enz. 1652-69 (6 vols., The Hague, 1723-1725); Brieven ... 1650-1657 (1658) eerste deel bewerkt den R. Fruin uitgegeven d., C. W. Kernkamp (Amsterdam, 1906).
DEWLAP (from the O.E. læppa, a lappet, or hanging fold; the first syllable is of doubtful origin and the popular explanation that the word means "the fold which brushes the dew" is not borne out, according to the New English Dictionary, by the [Page 141] equivalent words such as the Danish doglaeb, in Scandinavian languages), the loose fold of skin hanging from the neck of cattle, also applied to similar folds in the necks of other animals and fowls, as the dog, turkey, &c. The American practice of branding cattle by making a cut in the neck is known as a "dewlap brand." The skin of the neck in human beings often becomes pendulous with age, and is sometimes referred to humorously by the same name.
DEWLAP (from the Old English læppa, which means a lappet or hanging fold; the first syllable's origin is uncertain, and the common belief that it refers to "the fold that brushes the dew" is not supported, according to the New English Dictionary, by equivalent words like the Danish doglaeb, found in Scandinavian languages), is the loose fold of skin hanging from the neck of cattle. It's also used to describe similar folds in the necks of other animals and birds, like dogs and turkeys. The American practice of branding cattle by making a cut in the neck is called a "dewlap brand." In humans, the skin around the neck often becomes saggy with age and is sometimes jokingly referred to by the same name.
DEWSBURY, a market town and municipal and parliamentary borough in the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, on the river Calder, 8 m. S.S.W. of Leeds, on the Great Northern, London & North-Western, and Lancashire & Yorkshire railways. Pop. (1901) 28,060. The parish church of All Saints was for the most part rebuilt in the latter half of the 18th century; the portions still preserved of the original structure are mainly Early English. The chief industries are the making of blankets, carpets, druggets and worsted yarn; and there are iron foundries and machinery works. Coal is worked in the neighbourhood. The parliamentary borough includes the adjacent municipal borough of Batley, and returns one member. The municipal borough, incorporated in 1862, is under a mayor, 6 aldermen and 18 councillors. Area, 1471 acres. Paulinus, first archbishop of York, about the year 627 preached in the district of Dewsbury, where Edwin, king of Northumbria, whom he converted to Christianity, had a royal mansion. At Kirklees, in the parish, are remains of a Cistercian convent of the 12th century, in an extensive park, where tradition relates that Robin Hood died and was buried.
DEWSBURY, a market town and municipal and parliamentary borough in the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, located on the river Calder, 8 miles S.S.W. of Leeds, served by the Great Northern, London & North-Western, and Lancashire & Yorkshire railways. Population (1901) was 28,060. The parish church of All Saints was mostly rebuilt in the second half of the 18th century; the parts that remain of the original structure are mainly from the Early English period. The main industries include the production of blankets, carpets, druggets, and worsted yarn; there are also iron foundries and machinery manufacturing. Coal is mined in the surrounding area. The parliamentary borough includes the nearby municipal borough of Batley and elects one representative. The municipal borough, incorporated in 1862, is governed by a mayor, 6 aldermen, and 18 councillors. Area: 1,471 acres. Paulinus, the first archbishop of York, preached in the Dewsbury area around the year 627, where Edwin, king of Northumbria, whom he converted to Christianity, had a royal residence. In Kirklees, within the parish, are the remains of a 12th-century Cistercian convent in a large park, where tradition says Robin Hood died and was buried.
DEXIPPUS, PUBLIUS HERENNIUS (c. A.D. 210-273), Greek historian, statesman and general, was an hereditary priest of the Eleusinian family of the Kerykes, and held the offices of archon basileus and eponymus in Athens. When the Heruli overran Greece and captured Athens (269), Dexippus showed great personal courage and revived the spirit of patriotism among his degenerate fellow-countrymen. A statue was set up in his honour, the base of which, with an inscription recording his services, has been preserved (Corpus Inscrr. Atticarum, iii. No. 716). It is remarkable that the inscription is silent as to his military achievements. Photius (cod. 82) mentions three historical works by Dexippus, of which considerable fragments remain: (1) Τὰ μετ᾽ Ἀλέξανδρον, an epitome of a similarly named work by Arrian; (2) Σκυθικά, a history of the wars of Rome with the Goths (or Scythians) in the 3rd century; (3) Χρονικὴ ἱστορία, a chronological history from the earliest times to the emperor Claudius Gothicus (270), frequently referred to by the writers of the Augustan history. The work was continued by Eunapius of Sardis down to 404. Photius speaks very highly of the style of Dexippus, whom he places on a level with Thucydides, an opinion by no means confirmed by the fragments (C. W. Müller, F.H.G. iii. 666-687).
DEXIPPUS, PUBLIUS HERENNIUS (c. A.D. 210-273), was a Greek historian, statesman, and general. He came from a hereditary line of priests in the Eleusinian family of the Kerykes and served as archon basileus and eponymous in Athens. When the Heruli invaded Greece and took over Athens in 269, Dexippus demonstrated remarkable bravery and inspired a sense of patriotism among his disheartened fellow citizens. In recognition of his contributions, a statue was erected in his honor, and the base, which includes an inscription detailing his services, has been preserved (Corpus Inscrr. Atticarum, iii. No. 716). Interestingly, the inscription does not mention his military accomplishments. Photius (cod. 82) notes three historical works by Dexippus, of which substantial fragments survive: (1) After Alexander, a summary of a work with the same name by Arrian; (2) Scythian, a history of Rome's wars with the Goths (or Scythians) in the 3rd century; (3) Chronological history, a chronological account from ancient times to the reign of Emperor Claudius Gothicus (270), which is frequently referenced by writers of the Augustan history. Eunapius of Sardis continued the work until 404. Photius has high praise for Dexippus's writing style, placing him on par with Thucydides, although this view is not entirely supported by the available fragments (C. W. Müller, F.H.G. iii. 666-687).
DEXTER, HENRY MARTYN (1821-1890), American clergyman and author, was born in Plympton, Massachusetts, on the 13th of August 1821. He graduated at Yale in 1840 and at the Andover Theological Seminary in 1844; was pastor of a Congregational church in Manchester, New Hampshire, in 1844-1849, and of the Berkeley Street Congregational church, Boston, in 1849-1867; was an editor of the Congregationalist in 1851-1866, of the Congregational Quarterly in 1859-1866, and of the Congregationalist, with which the Recorder was merged, from 1867 until his death in New Bedford, Mass., on the 13th of November 1890. He was an authority on the history of Congregationalism and was lecturer on that subject at the Andover Theological Seminary in 1877-1879; he left his fine library on the Puritans in America to Yale University. Among his works are: Congregationalism, What it is, Whence it is, How it works, Why it is better than any other Form of Church Government, and its consequent Demands (1865), The Church Polity of the Puritans the Polity of the New Testament (1870), As to Roger Williams and His "Banishment" from the Massachusetts Colony (1876), Congregationalism of the Last Three Hundred Years, as seen in its Literature (1880), his most important work, A Handbook of Congregationalism (1880), The True Story of John Smyth, the "Se-Baptist" (1881), Common Sense as to Woman Suffrage (1885), and many reprints of pamphlets bearing on early church history in New England, especially Baptist controversies. His The England and Holland of the Pilgrims was completed by his son, Morton Dexter (b. 1846), and published in 1905.
DEXTER, HENRY MARTYN (1821-1890), American clergyman and author, was born in Plympton, Massachusetts, on August 13, 1821. He graduated from Yale in 1840 and from the Andover Theological Seminary in 1844; he served as pastor of a Congregational church in Manchester, New Hampshire, from 1844 to 1849, and at the Berkeley Street Congregational church in Boston from 1849 to 1867. He was the editor of the Congregationalist from 1851 to 1866, of the Congregational Quarterly from 1859 to 1866, and of the Congregationalist, which merged with the Recorder, from 1867 until his death in New Bedford, MA, on November 13, 1890. He was an expert on Congregationalism's history and lectured on the topic at Andover Theological Seminary from 1877 to 1879; he donated his impressive library on the Puritans in America to Yale University. Some of his works include: Congregationalism, What it is, Whence it is, How it works, Why it is better than any other Form of Church Government, and its consequent Demands (1865), The Church Polity of the Puritans the Polity of the New Testament (1870), As to Roger Williams and His "Banishment" from the Massachusetts Colony (1876), Congregationalism of the Last Three Hundred Years, as seen in its Literature (1880), his most significant work, A Handbook of Congregationalism (1880), The True Story of John Smyth, the "Se-Baptist" (1881), Common Sense as to Woman Suffrage (1885), and many reprints of pamphlets related to early church history in New England, especially Baptist controversies. His The England and Holland of the Pilgrims was finished by his son, Morton Dexter (b. 1846), and published in 1905.
DEXTER, TIMOTHY (1747-1806), American merchant, remarkable for his eccentricities, was born at Malden, Massachusetts, on the 22nd of February 1747. He acquired considerable wealth by buying up quantities of the depreciated continental currency, which was ultimately redeemed by the Federal government at par. He assumed the title of Lord Dexter and built extraordinary houses at Newburyport, Mass., and Chester, New Hampshire. He maintained a poet laureate and collected inferior pictures, besides erecting in one of his gardens some forty colossal statues carved in wood to represent famous men. A statue of himself was included in the collection, and had for an inscription "I am the first in the East, the first in the West, and the greatest philosopher in the Western World." He wrote a book entitled Pickle for the Knowing Ones. It was wholly without punctuation marks, and as this aroused comment, he published a second edition, at the end of which was a page displaying nothing but commas and stops, from which the readers were invited to "peper and solt it as they plese." He beat his wife for not weeping enough at the rehearsal of his funeral, which he himself carried out in a very elaborate manner. He died at Newburyport on the 26th of October 1806.
DEXTER, TIMOTHY (1747-1806), American merchant known for his eccentricities, was born in Malden, Massachusetts, on February 22, 1747. He gained significant wealth by purchasing large amounts of devalued Continental currency, which the Federal government eventually redeemed at full value. He took the title of Lord Dexter and built remarkable houses in Newburyport, Massachusetts, and Chester, New Hampshire. He employed a poet laureate and collected mediocre artwork, in addition to setting up around forty large wooden statues in one of his gardens to honor famous figures. One of the statues was of himself and featured the inscription, "I am the first in the East, the first in the West, and the greatest philosopher in the Western World." He authored a book titled Pickle for the Knowing Ones, which was entirely devoid of punctuation. When this attracted criticism, he released a second edition that included a page filled with just commas and periods, inviting readers to "pepper and salt it as they please." He physically abused his wife for not crying enough at the rehearsal of his elaborate funeral, which he organized himself. He passed away in Newburyport on October 26, 1806.
DEXTRINE (British Gum, Starch Gum, Leiocome), (C6H10O5)x, a substance produced from starch by the action of dilute acids, or by roasting it at a temperature between 170° and 240° C. It is manufactured by spraying starch with 2% nitric acid, drying in air, and then heating to about 110°. Different modifications are known, e.g. amylodextrine, erythrodextrine and achroodextrine. Its name has reference to its powerful dextrorotatory action on polarized light. Pure dextrine is an insipid, odourless, white substance; commercial dextrine is sometimes yellowish, and contains burnt or unchanged starch. It dissolves in water and dilute alcohol; by strong alcohol it is precipitated from its solutions as the hydrated compound, C6H10O5.H2O. Diastase converts it eventually into maltose, C12H22O11; and by boiling with dilute acids (sulphuric, hydrochloric, acetic) it is transformed into dextrose, or ordinary glucose, C6H12O6. It does not ferment in contact with yeast, and does not reduce Fehling's solution. If heated with strong nitric acid it gives oxalic, and not mucic acid. Dextrine much resembles gum arabic, for which it is generally substituted. It is employed for sizing paper, for stiffening cotton goods, and for thickening colours in calico printing, also in the making of lozenges, adhesive stamps and labels, and surgical bandages.
DEXTRINE (British Gum, Starch Gum, Leiocome), (C6H10O5)x, is a substance made from starch through the action of dilute acids or by roasting it at temperatures between 170° and 240° C. It's produced by spraying starch with 2% nitric acid, drying it in air, and then heating it to around 110°. There are different forms known, such as amylodextrine, erythrodextrine, and achroodextrine. Its name relates to its strong dextrorotatory effect on polarized light. Pure dextrine is a tasteless, odorless, white substance; commercial dextrine can be slightly yellow and may contain burnt or unaltered starch. It dissolves in water and dilute alcohol; when mixed with strong alcohol, it precipitates as the hydrated compound, C6H10O5.H2O. Diastase eventually converts it into maltose, C12H22O11; and boiling it with dilute acids (sulphuric, hydrochloric, acetic) changes it into dextrose, or regular glucose, C6H12O6. It does not ferment when in contact with yeast, and it does not reduce Fehling's solution. When heated with strong nitric acid, it produces oxalic acid instead of mucic acid. Dextrine closely resembles gum arabic, which it often replaces. It is used for sizing paper, stiffening cotton fabrics, thickening colors in calico printing, and in the production of lozenges, adhesive stamps, labels, and surgical bandages.
See Otto Lueger, Lexikon der gesamten Technik.
See Otto Lueger, Lexicon of Complete Technology.
DEY (an adaptation of the Turk, dāī, a maternal uncle), an honorary title formerly bestowed by the Turks on elderly men, and appropriated by the janissaries as the designation of their commanding officers. In Algeria the deys of the janissaries became in the 17th century rulers of that country (see Algeria: History). From the middle of the 16th century to the end of the 17th century the ruler of Tunisia was also called dey, a title frequently used during the same period by the sovereigns of Tripoli.
DEY (an adaptation of the Turkish word dāī, meaning maternal uncle) was an honorary title given by the Turks to older men, and it was adopted by the janissaries as the name for their commanding officers. In Algeria, the deys of the janissaries became rulers of the country in the 17th century (see Algeria: History). From the mid-16th century to the late 17th century, the leader of Tunisia was also referred to as dey, a title often used by the rulers of Tripoli during the same time.
DHAMMAPĀLA, the name of one of the early disciples of the Buddha, and therefore constantly chosen as their name in religion by Buddhist novices on their entering the brotherhood. The most famous of the Bhikshus so named was the great commentator who lived in the latter half of the 5th century A.D. at the Badara Tittha Vihdāra, near the east coast of India, just a little south of where Madras now stands. It is to him we owe the commentaries on seven of the shorter canonical books, consisting almost entirely of verses, and also the commentary on the Netti, perhaps the oldest Pāli work outside the canon. Extracts from the latter work, and the whole of three out of the seven others, have been published by the Pdāli Text Society. These works show great learning, exegetical skill and sound judgment. But as Dhammapāla confines himself rigidly either to questions of [Page 142] the meaning of words, or to discussions of the ethical import of his texts, very little can be gathered from his writings of value for the social history of his time. For the right interpretation of the difficult texts on which he comments, they are indispensable. Though in all probability a Tamil by birth, he declares, in the opening lines of those of his works that have been edited, that he followed the tradition of the Great Minster at Anurdādhapura in Ceylon, and the works themselves confirm this in every respect. Hsüan Tsang, the famous Chinese pilgrim, tells a quaint story of a Dhammapdāla of Kdānchipura (the modern Konjevaram). He was a son of a high official, and betrothed to a daughter of the king, but escaped on the eve of the wedding feast, entered the order, and attained to reverence and distinction. It is most likely that this story, whether legendary or not (and Hsüan Tsang heard the story at Kdānchipura nearly two centuries after the date of Dhammapdāla), referred to this author. But it may also refer, as Hsüan Tsang refers it, to another author of the same name. Other unpublished works, besides those mentioned above, have been ascribed to Dhammapdāla, but it is very doubtful whether they are really by him.
DHAMMAPĀLA, the name of one of the early disciples of the Buddha, is often chosen by Buddhist novices when they join the brotherhood. The most well-known of the Bhikshus with this name was the great commentator who lived in the latter half of the 5th century A.D. at the Badara Tittha Vihdāra, near the east coast of India, just a bit south of where modern-day Madras is located. We owe the commentaries on seven of the shorter canonical books, which are mostly composed of verses, and also the commentary on the Netti, possibly the oldest Pāli work outside of the canon, to him. Extracts from the latter work, along with the complete texts of three out of the seven others, have been published by the Pāli Text Society. These works demonstrate significant learning, interpretive skill, and sound judgment. However, since Dhammapāla strictly focuses either on the meaning of words or on discussions of the ethical implications of his texts, there's very little information of value regarding the social history of his time that can be gleaned from his writings. For accurately interpreting the challenging texts he comments on, his works are essential. Though he was probably Tamil by birth, he states in the opening lines of the edited works that he followed the tradition of the Great Minister at Anurdādhapura in Ceylon, and the works themselves confirm this in every way. Hsüan Tsang, the renowned Chinese pilgrim, shares an interesting story about a Dhammapāla from Kdānchipura (present-day Konjevaram). He was the son of a high official and engaged to a king's daughter but escaped on the eve of the wedding feast, joined the order, and gained respect and prominence. It's likely that this story, whether legendary or not (and Hsüan Tsang heard it at Kdānchipura nearly two centuries after Dhammapāla's time), pertains to this author. However, it may also refer to another author with the same name, as Hsüan Tsang suggested. Other unpublished works attributed to Dhammapāla exist, but it's highly questionable whether they were truly created by him.
Authorities.—T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang (ed. Rhys Davids and Bushell, London, 1905), ii. 169, 228; Edmund Hardy in Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft (1898), pp. 97 foll.; Netti (ed. E. Hardy, London, Pāli Text Society, 1902), especially the Introduction, passim; Therī Gdāthdā Commentary, Peta Vatthu Commentary, and Vimdāna Vatthu Commentary, all three published by the Pāli Text Society.
Authorities.—T. Watters, On Yuan Chwang (ed. Rhys Davids and Bushell, London, 1905), ii. 169, 228; Edmund Hardy in Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenländischen Gesellschaft (1898), pp. 97 and following; Netti (ed. E. Hardy, London, Pāli Text Society, 1902), especially the Introduction, throughout; Therī Gdāthdā Commentary, Peta Vatthu Commentary, and Vimdāna Vatthu Commentary, all three published by the Pāli Text Society.
DHANIS, FRANCIS, Baron (1861-1909), Belgian administrator, was born in London in 1861 and passed the first fourteen years of his life at Greenock, where he received his early education. He was the son of a Belgian merchant and of an Irish lady named Maher. The name Dhanis is supposed to be a variation of D'Anvers. Having completed his education at the École Militaire he entered the Belgian army, joining the regiment of grenadiers, in which he rose to the rank of major. As soon as he reached the rank of lieutenant he volunteered for service on the Congo, and in 1887 he went out for a first term. He did so well in founding new stations north of the Congo that, when the government decided to put an end to the Arab domination on the Upper Congo, he was selected to command the chief expedition sent against the slave dealers. The campaign began in April 1892, and it was not brought to a successful conclusion till January 1894. The story of this war has been told in detail by Dr Sydney Hinde, who took part in it, in his book The Fall of the Congo Arabs. The principal achievements of the campaign were the captures in succession of the three Arab strongholds at Nyangwe, Kassongo and Kabambari. For his services Dhanis was raised to the rank of baron, and in 1895 was made vice-governor of the Congo State. In 1896 he took command of an expedition to the Upper Nile. His troops, largely composed of the Batetela tribes who had only been recently enlisted, and who had been irritated by the execution of some of their chiefs for indulging their cannibal proclivities, mutinied and murdered many of their white officers. Dhanis found himself confronted with a more formidable adversary than even the Arabs in these well-armed and half-disciplined mercenaries. During two years (1897-1898) he was constantly engaged in a life-and-death struggle with them. Eventually he succeeded in breaking up the several bands formed out of his mutinous soldiers. Although the incidents of the Batetela operations were less striking than those of the Arab war, many students of both think that the Belgian leader displayed the greater ability and fortitude in bringing them to a successful issue. In 1899 Baron Dhanis returned to Belgium with the honorary rank of vice governor-general. He died on the 14th of November 1909.
DHANIS, FRANCIS, Baron (1861-1909), Belgian administrator, was born in London in 1861 and spent the first fourteen years of his life in Greenock, where he received his early education. He was the son of a Belgian merchant and an Irish woman named Maher. The name Dhanis is thought to be a variation of D'Anvers. After completing his education at the École Militaire, he joined the Belgian army, enlisting in the grenadier regiment, where he rose to the rank of major. As soon as he became a lieutenant, he volunteered for service in the Congo, and in 1887 he went out for his first term. He excelled in establishing new stations north of the Congo, so when the government decided to end Arab domination in the Upper Congo, he was chosen to lead the main expedition against the slave traders. The campaign began in April 1892 and concluded successfully in January 1894. The details of this war have been documented by Dr. Sydney Hinde, who participated in it, in his book The Fall of the Congo Arabs. The main achievements of the campaign included the capture of the three Arab strongholds at Nyangwe, Kassongo, and Kabambari. For his efforts, Dhanis was elevated to the rank of baron and appointed vice-governor of the Congo State in 1895. In 1896, he led an expedition to the Upper Nile. His troops, mainly made up of the Batetela tribes who had only recently been recruited and who were angered by the execution of some of their chiefs for cannibalism, mutinied and killed many of their white officers. Dhanis faced a more serious opponent than even the Arabs in these well-armed and poorly disciplined mercenaries. For two years (1897-1898), he was locked in a life-and-death struggle with them. He ultimately succeeded in dismantling the various groups formed from his mutinous soldiers. Although the events of the Batetela operations were less dramatic than those of the Arab war, many scholars of both conflicts believe that the Belgian leader showed greater skill and resilience in achieving a successful outcome. In 1899, Baron Dhanis returned to Belgium with the honorary title of vice governor-general. He passed away on November 14, 1909.
DHAR, a native state of India, in the Bhopawar agency, Central India. It includes many Rajput and Bhil feudatories, and has an area of 1775 sq. m. The raja is a Punwar Mahratta. The founder of the present ruling family was Anand Rao Punwar, a descendant of the great Paramara clan of Rajputs who from the 9th to the 13th century, when they were driven out by the Mahommedans, had ruled over Malwa from their capital at Dhar. In 1742 Anand Rao received Dhar as a fief from Baji Rao, the peshwa, the victory of the Mahrattas thus restoring the sovereign power to the family which seven centuries before had been expelled from this very city and country. Towards the close of the 18th and in the early part of the 19th century, the state was subject to a series of spoliations by Sindia and Holkar, and was only preserved from destruction by the talents and courage of the adoptive mother of the fifth raja. By a treaty of 1819 Dhar passed under British protection, and bound itself to act in subordinate co-operation. The state was confiscated for rebellion in 1857, but in 1860 was restored to Raja Anand Rao Punwar, then a minor, with the exception of the detached district of Bairusia, which was granted to the begum of Bhopal. Anand Rao, who received the personal title Maharaja and the K.C.S.I. in 1877, died in 1898, and was succeeded by Udaji Rao Punwar. In 1901 the population was 142,115. The state includes the ruins of Mandu, or Mandogarh, the Mahommedan capital of Malwa.
DHAR, a native state of India located in the Bhopawar agency, Central India. It consists of numerous Rajput and Bhil vassals and covers an area of 1,775 square miles. The raja is a Punwar Mahratta. The current ruling family was founded by Anand Rao Punwar, a descendant of the illustrious Paramara clan of Rajputs, who ruled Malwa from their capital at Dhar from the 9th to the 13th century until they were ousted by the Mahommedans. In 1742, Anand Rao received Dhar as a fief from Baji Rao, the peshwa, with the Mahrattas regaining sovereign power for a family that had been expelled from the region seven centuries earlier. Toward the end of the 18th century and in the early 19th century, the state endured a series of plundering acts by Sindia and Holkar, and it was only saved from destruction by the skill and bravery of the adoptive mother of the fifth raja. Through a treaty in 1819, Dhar came under British protection and agreed to cooperate in a subordinate role. The state was confiscated due to rebellion in 1857, but in 1860 it was restored to Raja Anand Rao Punwar, who was still a minor at the time, except for the separate district of Bairusia, which was given to the begum of Bhopal. Anand Rao, who was granted the personal title of Maharaja and made a K.C.S.I. in 1877, passed away in 1898 and was succeeded by Udaji Rao Punwar. In 1901, the population was recorded at 142,115. The state includes the ruins of Mandu, or Mandogarh, the Mahommedan capital of Malwa.
The Town of Dhar is 33 m. W. of Mhow, 908 ft. above the sea. Pop. (1901) 17,792. It is picturesquely situated among lakes and trees surrounded by barren hills, and possesses, besides its old walls, many interesting buildings, Hindu and Mahommedan, some of them containing records of a great historical importance. The Lat Masjid, or Pillar Mosque, was built by Dilawar Khan in 1405 out of the remains of Jain temples. It derives its name from an iron pillar, supposed to have been originally set up at the beginning of the 13th century in commemoration of a victory, and bearing a later inscription recording the seven days' visit to the town of the emperor Akbar in 1598. The pillar, which was 43 ft. high, is now overthrown and broken. The Kamal Maula is an enclosure containing four tombs, the most notable being that of Shaikh Kamal Maulvi (Kamal-ud-din), a follower of the famous 13th-century Mussulman saint Nizam-ud-din Auliya.[1] The mosque known as Raja Bhoj's school was built out of Hindu remains in the 14th or 15th century: its name is derived from the slabs, covered with inscriptions giving rules of Sanskrit grammar, with which it is paved. On a small hill to the north of the town stands the fort, a conspicuous pile of red sandstone, said to have been built by Mahommed ben Tughlak of Delhi in the 14th century. It contains the palace of the raja. Of modern institutions may be mentioned the high school, public library, hospital, and the chapel, school and hospital of the Canadian Presbyterian mission. There is also a government opium depot for the payment of duty, the town being a considerable centre for the trade in opium as well as in grain.
The City of Dhar is 33 miles west of Mhow, at an elevation of 908 feet above sea level. Population (1901) was 17,792. It’s beautifully located among lakes and trees, surrounded by barren hills, and features, in addition to its ancient walls, many fascinating buildings, both Hindu and Muslim, some of which hold great historical significance. The Lat Masjid, or Pillar Mosque, was constructed by Dilawar Khan in 1405 using remnants of Jain temples. It gets its name from an iron pillar, believed to have been originally erected at the start of the 13th century to commemorate a victory, and later inscribed to mark the visit of Emperor Akbar to the town in 1598. The pillar, which was 43 feet tall, is now toppled and broken. The Kamal Maula is an enclosed area that contains four tombs, the most notable being that of Shaikh Kamal Maulvi (Kamal-ud-din), a follower of the renowned 13th-century Muslim saint Nizam-ud-din Auliya.[1] The mosque known as Raja Bhoj's school was built using Hindu remnants in the 14th or 15th century; its name comes from the slabs paved with inscriptions that outline the rules of Sanskrit grammar. On a small hill to the north of the town lies the fort, a prominent structure made of red sandstone, said to have been built by Mahommed ben Tughlak of Delhi in the 14th century. It houses the raja's palace. Among modern institutions are a high school, public library, hospital, and the chapel, school, and hospital of the Canadian Presbyterian mission. There is also a government opium depot for duty payments, as the town is a significant center for the trade in opium as well as grain.
The town, the name of which is usually derived from Dhara Nagari (the city of sword blades), is of great antiquity, and was made the capital of the Paramara chiefs of Malwa by Vairisinha II., who transferred his headquarters hither from Ujjain at the close of the 9th century. During the rule of the Paramara dynasty Dhar was famous throughout India as a centre of culture and learning; but, after suffering various vicissitudes, it was finally conquered by the Mussulmans at the beginning of the 14th century. At the close of the century Dilawar Khan, the builder of the Lat Masjid, who had been appointed governor in 1399, practically established his independence, his son Hoshang Shah being the first Mahommedan king of Malwa. Under this dynasty Dhar was second in importance to the capital Mandu. Subsequently, in the time of Akbar, Dhar fell under the dominion of the Moguls, in whose hands it remained till 1730, when it was conquered by the Mahrattas.
The town, whose name usually comes from Dhara Nagari (the city of sword blades), has a long history and was made the capital of the Paramara chiefs of Malwa by Vairisinha II, who moved his base here from Ujjain at the end of the 9th century. During the Paramara dynasty, Dhar was famous across India as a center of culture and learning; however, after experiencing various ups and downs, it was ultimately conquered by the Muslims at the start of the 14th century. By the end of that century, Dilawar Khan, the builder of the Lat Masjid and appointed governor in 1399, essentially established his own independence, with his son Hoshang Shah becoming the first Muslim king of Malwa. Under this dynasty, Dhar was the second most important city after the capital, Mandu. Later, during Akbar's reign, Dhar fell under Mughal control, remaining in their hands until 1730, when it was taken over by the Marathas.
See Imperial Gazetteer of India (Oxford, 1908).
See *Imperial Gazetteer of India* (Oxford, 1908).
[1] Nizam-ud-din, whose beautiful marble tomb is at Indarpat near Delhi, was, according to some authorities, an assassin of the secret society of Khorasan. By some modern authorities he is supposed to have been the founder of Thuggism, the Thugs having a special reverence for his memory.
[1] Nizam-ud-din, whose stunning marble tomb is located in Indarpat near Delhi, is believed by some sources to have been an assassin associated with the secret society of Khorasan. Some contemporary experts think he may have been the founder of Thuggism, as the Thugs hold a unique respect for his legacy.
DHARAMPUR, a native state of India, in the Surat political agency division of Bombay, with an area of 704 sq. m. The population in 1901 was 100,430, being a decrease of 17% during the decade; the estimated gross revenue is £25,412; and the tribute £600. Its chief is a Sesodia Rajput. The state has been surveyed for land revenue on the Bombay system. It contains one town, Dharampur (pop. in 1901, 63,449), and 272 villages. Only a small part of the state, the climate of which is very unhealthy, is capable of cultivation; the rest is covered with rocky hills, forest and brushwood.
DHARAMPUR, a native state in India, located in the Surat political agency division of Bombay, covers an area of 704 square miles. In 1901, the population was 100,430, which marked a 17% decrease over the decade. The estimated gross revenue is £25,412, and the tribute is £600. Its leader is a Sesodia Rajput. The land revenue has been assessed using the Bombay system. The state includes one town, Dharampur (population in 1901, 63,449), and 272 villages. Only a small portion of the state, which has a very unhealthy climate, can be cultivated; the remainder is covered with rocky hills, forests, and brushwood.
DHARMSALA, a hill-station and sanatorium of the Punjab, India, situated on a spur of the Dhaola Dhar, 16 m. N.E. of Kangra town, at an elevation of some 6000 ft. Pop. (1901) 6971. The scenery of Dharmsala is of peculiar grandeur. The spur on which it stands is thickly wooded with oak and other trees; behind it the pine-clad slopes of the mountain tower towards the jagged peaks of the higher range, snow-clad for half the year; while below stretches the luxuriant cultivation of the Kangra valley. In 1855 Dharmsala was made the headquarters of the Kangra district of the Punjab in place of Kangra, and became the centre of a European settlement and cantonment, largely occupied by Gurkha regiments. The station was destroyed by the earthquake of April 1905, in which 1625 persons, including 25 Europeans and 112 of the Gurkha garrison, perished (Imperial Gazetteer of India, 1908).
DHARMSALA, a hill station and health resort in Punjab, India, located on a ridge of the Dhaola Dhar, 16 miles northeast of Kangra town, at an elevation of about 6000 feet. Population (1901) 6971. The scenery of Dharmsala is uniquely stunning. The ridge it sits on is densely forested with oak and other trees; behind it, the pine-covered slopes of the mountain rise toward the jagged peaks of the higher range, which are snow-covered for half the year, while below lies the lush farmland of the Kangra valley. In 1855, Dharmsala became the headquarters of the Kangra district of Punjab, replacing Kangra, and evolved into a center for a European settlement and military camp, largely inhabited by Gurkha regiments. The station was devastated by the earthquake of April 1905, which claimed the lives of 1625 people, including 25 Europeans and 112 from the Gurkha garrison (Imperial Gazetteer of India, 1908).
DHARWAR, a town and district of British India, in the southern division of Bombay. The town has a station on the Southern Mahratta railway. The population in 1901 was 31,279. It has several ginning factories and a cotton-mill; two high schools, one maintained by the Government and the other by the Basel German Mission.
DHARWAR, a town and district in British India, located in the southern part of Bombay. The town has a station on the Southern Mahratta railway. The population in 1901 was 31,279. It has several ginning factories and a cotton mill; two high schools, one run by the Government and the other by the Basel German Mission.
The District of Dharwar has an area of 4602 sq. m. In the north and north-east are great plains of black soil, favourable to cotton-growing; in the south and west are successive ranges of low hills, with flat fertile valleys between them. The whole district lies high and has no large rivers.
The Dharwar District covers an area of 4602 sq. m. The northern and northeastern parts feature expansive plains of black soil, ideal for cotton farming; to the south and west, there are a series of low hills with flat, fertile valleys in between. The entire district is situated at a high elevation and doesn’t have any large rivers.
In 1901 the population was 1,113,298, showing an increase of 6% in the decade. The most influential classes of the community are Brahmans and Lingayats. The Lingayats number 436,968, or 46% of the Hindu population; they worship the symbol of Siva, and males and females both carry this emblem about their person in a silver case. The principal crops are millets, pulse and cotton. The centres of the cotton trade are Hubli and Gadag, junctions on the Southern Mahratta railway, which traverses the district in several directions.
In 1901, the population was 1,113,298, reflecting a 6% increase over the decade. The most influential groups in the community are the Brahmans and Lingayats. The Lingayats make up 436,968, or 46% of the Hindu population; they worship the symbol of Shiva, and both men and women carry this emblem in a silver case. The main crops are millets, pulses, and cotton. The key centers of the cotton trade are Hubli and Gadag, junctions on the Southern Mahratta railway, which runs through the district in several directions.
The early history of the territory comprised within the district of Dharwar has been to a certain extent reconstructed from the inscription slabs and memorial stones which abound there. From these it is clear that the country fell in turn under the sway of the various dynasties that ruled in the Deccan, memorials of the Chalukyan dynasty, whether temples or inscriptions, being especially abundant. In the 14th century the district was first overrun by the Mahommedans, after which it was annexed to the newly established Hindu kingdom of Vijayanagar, an official of which named Dhar Rao, according to local tradition, built the fort at Dharwar town in 1403. After the defeat of the king of Vijayanagar at Talikot (1565), Dharwar was for a few years practically independent under its Hindu governor; but in 1573 the fort was captured by the sultan of Bijapur, and Dharwar was annexed to his dominions. In 1685 the fort was taken by the emperor Aurangzeb, and Dharwar, on the break-up of the Mogul empire, fell under the sway of the peshwa of Poona. In 1764 the province was overrun by Hyder Ali of Mysore, who in 1778 captured the fort of Dharwar. This was retaken in 1791 by the Mahrattas. On the final overthrow of the peshwa in 1817, Dharwar was incorporated with the territory of the East India Company.
The early history of the area within the district of Dharwar has been somewhat reconstructed from the numerous inscription slabs and memorial stones found there. These clearly show that the region was ruled by various dynasties that held power in the Deccan, with memorials from the Chalukyan dynasty, including temples and inscriptions, being particularly plentiful. In the 14th century, the district was first invaded by the Muslims, after which it was incorporated into the newly formed Hindu kingdom of Vijayanagar. According to local tradition, an official named Dhar Rao built the fort in Dharwar town in 1403. Following the defeat of the king of Vijayanagar at Talikot in 1565, Dharwar was essentially independent for a few years under its Hindu governor; however, in 1573, the fort was captured by the sultan of Bijapur, and Dharwar became part of his realms. In 1685, the fort was seized by Emperor Aurangzeb, and after the fall of the Mughal Empire, Dharwar came under the control of the Peshwa of Poona. In 1764, the province was invaded by Hyder Ali of Mysore, who captured the fort of Dharwar in 1778. The Mahrattas retook it in 1791. After the final defeat of the Peshwa in 1817, Dharwar was incorporated into the territory of the East India Company.
DHOLPUR, a native state of India, in the Rajputana agency, with an area of 1155 sq. m. It is a crop-producing country, without any special manufactures. All along the bank of the river Chambal the country is deeply intersected by ravines; low ranges of hills in the western portion of the state supply inexhaustible quarries of fine-grained and easily-worked red sandstone. In 1901 the population of Dholpur was 270,973, showing a decrease of 3% in the decade. The estimated revenue is £83,000. The state is crossed by the Indian Midland railway from Jhansi to Agra. In recent years it has suffered severely from drought. In 1896-1897 the expenditure on famine relief amounted to £8190.
DHOLPUR, a native state in India, part of the Rajputana region, covers an area of 1155 sq. m. It's primarily an agricultural area with no significant industries. The banks of the Chambal River are heavily cut up by ravines, and low hills in the western part of the state provide endless supplies of fine-grained, easily worked red sandstone. In 1901, Dholpur's population was 270,973, reflecting a 3% decrease over the previous decade. The estimated revenue is £83,000. The Indian Midland railway runs through the state from Jhansi to Agra. In recent years, Dholpur has faced severe drought conditions. During 1896-1897, the spending on famine relief reached £8190.
The town of Dholpur is 34 m. S. of Agra by rail. Pop. (1901) 19,310. The present town, which dates from the 16th century, stands somewhat to the north of the site of the older Hindu town built, it is supposed, in the 11th century by the Tonwar Rajput Raja Dholan (or Dhawal) Deo, and named after him Dholdera or Dhawalpuri. Among the objects of interest in the town may be mentioned the fortified sarai built in the reign of Akbar, within which is the fine tomb of Sadik Mahommed Khan (d. 1595), one of his generals. The town, from its position on the railway, is growing in importance as a centre of trade.
The town of Dholpur is 34 miles south of Agra by train. Population (1901) 19,310. The current town, which dates back to the 16th century, is located slightly north of the site of the older Hindu town, believed to have been built in the 11th century by the Tonwar Rajput Raja Dholan (or Dhawal) Deo, and named after him Dholdera or Dhawalpuri. Notable attractions in the town include the fortified sarai built during Akbar's reign, which houses the impressive tomb of Sadik Mahommed Khan (d. 1595), one of his generals. Due to its position on the railway, the town is becoming increasingly important as a trade center.
Little is known of the early history of the country forming the state of Dholpur. Local tradition affirms that it was ruled by the Tonwar Rajputs, who had their seat at Delhi from the 8th to the 12th century. In 1450 it had a raja of its own; but in 1501 the fort of Dholpur was taken by the Mahommedans under Sikandar Lodi and in 1504 was transferred to a Mussulman governor. In 1527, after a strenuous resistance, the fort was captured by Baber and with the surrounding country passed under the sway of the Moguls, being included by Akbar in the province of Agra. During the dissensions which followed the death of Aurangzeb in 1707, Raja Kalyan Singh Bhadauria obtained possession of Dholpur, and his family retained it till 1761, after which it was taken successively by the Jat raja, Suraj Mal of Bharatpur, by Mirza Najaf Khan in 1775, by Sindhia in 1782, and in 1803 by the British. It was restored to Sindhia by the treaty of Sarji Anjangaon, but in consequence of new arrangements was again occupied by the British. Finally, in 1806, the territories of Dholpur, Bari and Rajakhera were handed over to the maharaj rana Kirat Singh, ancestor of the present chiefs of Dholpur, in exchange for his state of Gohad, which was ceded to Sindhia.
Little is known about the early history of the area that is now the state of Dholpur. Local tradition claims that it was ruled by the Tonwar Rajputs, who had their capital in Delhi from the 8th to the 12th century. By 1450, it had its own raja; however, in 1501, the Dholpur fort was captured by the Muslims under Sikandar Lodi, and in 1504, it was handed over to a Muslim governor. In 1527, after a tough battle, the fort was taken by Babur, and the surrounding area came under Mogul control, being included by Akbar in the province of Agra. Following the conflicts after Aurangzeb’s death in 1707, Raja Kalyan Singh Bhadauria seized control of Dholpur, and his family held it until 1761. After that, it was taken in succession by the Jat raja, Suraj Mal of Bharatpur, by Mirza Najaf Khan in 1775, by Sindhia in 1782, and finally by the British in 1803. It was returned to Sindhia by the treaty of Sarji Anjangaon, but due to new agreements, it was once again occupied by the British. Ultimately, in 1806, the territories of Dholpur, Bari, and Rajakhera were given to maharaj rana Kirat Singh, the ancestor of the current chiefs of Dholpur, in exchange for his state of Gohad, which was ceded to Sindhia.
The maharaj rana of Dholpur belongs to the clan of Bamraolia Jats, who are believed to have formed a portion of the Indo-Scythian wave of invasion which swept over northern India about A.D. 100. An ancestor of the family appears to have held certain territories at Bamraoli near Agra c. 1195. His descendant in 1505, Singhan Deo, having distinguished himself in an expedition against the freebooters of the Deccan, was rewarded by the sovereignty of the small territory of Gohad, with the title of rana. In 1779 the rana of Gohad joined the British forces against Sindhia, under a treaty which stipulated that, at the conclusion of peace between the English and Mahrattas, all the territories then in his possession should be guaranteed to him, and protected from invasion by Sindhia. This protection was subsequently withdrawn, the rana having been guilty of treachery, and in 1783 Sindhia succeeded in recapturing the fortress of Gwalior, and crushed his Jat opponent by seizing the whole of Gohad. In 1804, however, the family were restored to Gohad by the British government; but, owing to the opposition of Sindhia, the rana agreed in 1805 to exchange Gohad for his present territory of Dholpur, which was taken under British protection, the chief binding himself to act in subordinate co-operation with the paramount power, and to refer all disputes with neighbouring princes to the British government. Kirat Singh, the first maharaj rana of Dholpur, was succeeded in 1836 by his son Bhagwant Singh, who showed great loyalty during the Mutiny of 1857, was created a K.C.S.I., and G.C.S.I. in 1869. He was succeeded in 1873 by his grandson Nihal Singh, who received the C.B. and frontier medal for services in the Tirah campaign. He died in 1901, and was succeeded by his eldest son Ram Singh (b. 1883).
The maharaj rana of Dholpur comes from the Bamraolia Jat clan, believed to be part of the Indo-Scythian invasions that hit northern India around A.D. 100. An ancestor of this family held lands at Bamraoli near Agra around 1195. His descendant, Singhan Deo, distinguished himself in 1505 during a campaign against the raiders in the Deccan and was awarded the rule over the small territory of Gohad, earning the title of rana. In 1779, the rana of Gohad allied with British forces against Sindhia, under a treaty that promised protection of his territories following peace between the English and the Mahrattas. However, this protection was later revoked due to the rana's betrayal, leading to Sindhia recapturing Gwalior in 1783 and taking complete control of Gohad. In 1804, the British government restored the family to Gohad, but due to Sindhia's opposition, the rana agreed in 1805 to trade Gohad for the current territory of Dholpur, which was secured under British protection. The chief committed to work in cooperation with the British authority and to settle disputes with nearby rulers through the British government. Kirat Singh, the first maharaj rana of Dholpur, was succeeded by his son Bhagwant Singh in 1836, who remained loyal during the Mutiny of 1857 and was honored as a K.C.S.I. and G.C.S.I. in 1869. He was followed in 1873 by his grandson Nihal Singh, who earned the C.B. and frontier medal for his contributions in the Tirah campaign. He passed away in 1901 and was succeeded by his eldest son Ram Singh (b. 1883).
See Imperial Gazetteer of India (Oxford, 1908) and authorities there given.
See Imperial Gazetteer of India (Oxford, 1908) and the sources listed there.
DHOW, the name given to a type of vessel used throughout the Arabian Sea. The language to which the word belongs is unknown. According to the New English Dictionary the place of origin may be the Persian Gulf, assuming that the word is identical with the tava mentioned by Athanasius Nikitin (India in the 15th Century, Hakluyt Society, 1858). Though the word is used generally of any craft along the East African coast, it is usually applied to the vessel of about 150 to 200 tons burden with a stem rising with a long slope from the water; dhows generally have one mast with a lateen sail, the yard being of enormous length. Much of the coasting trade of the Red Sea and Persian Gulf is carried on by these vessels. They were the regular vessels employed in the slave trade from the east coast of Africa.
DHOW, the term used for a type of boat found throughout the Arabian Sea. The language of origin for the word is uncertain. According to the New English Dictionary, it may have originated in the Persian Gulf, assuming the word is the same as the tava referenced by Athanasius Nikitin (India in the 15th Century, Hakluyt Society, 1858). Although the term typically refers to any boat along the East African coast, it usually describes a vessel weighing about 150 to 200 tons, characterized by a stem that slopes gently upward from the water. Dhows normally have a single mast with a lateen sail, and their yard is exceptionally long. Much of the coastal trade in the Red Sea and Persian Gulf is conducted using these boats. They were commonly used in the slave trade from the east coast of Africa.
DHRANGADRA, a native state of India, in the Gujarat division of Bombay, situated in the north of the peninsula of Kathiawar. Its area is 1156 sq. m. Pop. (1901) 70,880. The estimated gross revenue is £38,000 and the tribute £3000. A state railway on the metre gauge from Wadhwan to the town of Dhrangadra, a distance of 21 m., was opened for traffic in 1898. Some cotton is grown, although the soil is as a whole poor; the manufactures include salt, metal vessels and stone hand-mills. The chief town, Dhrangadra, has a population (1901) of 14,770.
DHRANGADRA, a native state in India, located in the Gujarat region of Bombay, is in the northern part of the Kathiawar peninsula. It covers an area of 1,156 square miles. The population in 1901 was 70,880. The estimated total revenue is £38,000, and the tribute is £3,000. A state railway, using a meter gauge, connects Wadhwan to Dhrangadra, a distance of 21 miles, and was opened for traffic in 1898. Some cotton is grown, though the soil is generally poor; local industries include salt production, metal vessel manufacturing, and stone hand-mill crafting. The main town, Dhrangadra, had a population of 14,770 in 1901.
The chief of Dhrangadra, who bears the title of Raj Sahib, with the predicate of His Highness, is head of the ancient clan of Jhala Rajputs, who are said to have entered Kathiawar from Sind in the 8th century. Raj Sahib Sir Mansinghji Ranmalsinghji (b. 1837), who succeeded his father in 1869, was distinguished for the enlightened character of his administration, especially in the matter of establishing schools and internal communications. He was created a K.C.S.I in 1877. He died in 1900, and was succeeded by his grandson Ajitsinghji Jaswatsinghji (b. 1872).
The leader of Dhrangadra, known as Raj Sahib with the title of His Highness, heads the ancient clan of Jhala Rajputs, who are said to have migrated to Kathiawar from Sind in the 8th century. Raj Sahib Sir Mansinghji Ranmalsinghji (b. 1837), who took over from his father in 1869, was recognized for the progressive nature of his governance, particularly in establishing schools and improving internal communications. He was honored as a K.C.S.I in 1877. He passed away in 1900 and was succeeded by his grandson Ajitsinghji Jaswatsinghji (b. 1872).
DHULEEP SINGH (1837-1893), maharaja of Lahore, was born in February 1837, and was proclaimed maharaja on the 18th of September 1843, under the regency of his mother the rani Jindan, a woman of great capacity and strong will, but extremely inimical to the British. He was acknowledged by Ranjit Singh and recognized by the British government. After six years of peace the Sikhs invaded British territory in 1845, but were defeated in four battles, and terms were imposed upon them at Lahore, the capital of the Punjab. Dhuleep Singh retained his territory, but it was administered to a great extent by the British government in his name. This arrangement increased the regent's dislike of the British, and a fresh outbreak occurred in 1848-49. In spite of the valour of the Sikhs, they were utterly routed at Gujarat, and in March 1849 Dhuleep Singh was deposed, a pension of £40,000 a year being granted to him and his dependants. He became a Christian and elected to live in England. On coming of age he made an arrangement with the British government by which his income was reduced to £25,000 in consideration of advances for the purchase of an estate, and he finally settled at Elvedon in Suffolk. While passing through Alexandria in 1864 he met Miss Bamba Müller, the daughter of a German merchant who had married an Abyssinian. The maharaja had been interested in mission work by Sir John Login, and he met Miss Müller at one of the missionary schools where she was teaching. She became his wife on the 7th of June 1864, and six children were the issue of the marriage. In the year after her death in 1890 the maharaja married at Paris, as his second wife, an English lady, Miss Ada Douglas Wetherill, who survived him. The maharaja was passionately fond of sport, and his shooting parties were celebrated, while he himself became a persona grata in English society. The result, however, was financial difficulty, and in 1882 he appealed to the government for assistance, making various claims based upon the alleged possession of private estates in the Punjab, and upon the surrender of the Koh-i-nor diamond to the British Crown. His demand was rejected, whereupon he started for India, after drawing up a proclamation to his former subjects. But as it was deemed inadvisable to allow him to visit the Punjab, he remained for some time as a guest at the residency at Aden, and was allowed to receive some of his relatives to witness his abjuration of Christianity, which actually took place within the residency itself. As the climate began to affect his health, the maharaja at length left Aden and returned to Europe. He stayed for some time in Russia, hoping that his claim against England would be taken up by the Russians; but when that expectation proved futile he proceeded to Paris, where he lived for the rest of his life on the pension allowed him by the Indian government. His death from an attack of apoplexy took place at Paris on the 22nd of October 1893. The maharaja's eldest son, Prince Victor Albert Jay Dhuleep Singh (b. 1866), was educated at Trinity and Downing Colleges, Cambridge. In 1888 he obtained a commission in the 1st Royal Dragoon Guards. In 1898 he married Lady Anne Coventry, youngest daughter of the earl of Coventry.
DHULEEP SINGH (1837-1893), maharaja of Lahore, was born in February 1837 and was proclaimed maharaja on September 18, 1843, under the regency of his mother, the rani Jindan, a capable and strong-willed woman who was very hostile to the British. He was recognized by Ranjit Singh and acknowledged by the British government. After six years of peace, the Sikhs invaded British territory in 1845 but were defeated in four battles, leading to terms being imposed on them in Lahore, the capital of the Punjab. Dhuleep Singh kept his territory, but it was largely administered by the British government in his name. This arrangement increased the regent's resentment towards the British, and a new uprising occurred in 1848-49. Despite the bravery of the Sikhs, they were completely defeated at Gujarat, and in March 1849, Dhuleep Singh was deposed, receiving a pension of £40,000 a year for himself and his dependents. He converted to Christianity and chose to live in England. When he came of age, he made a deal with the British government that reduced his income to £25,000 in exchange for funds to purchase an estate, eventually settling at Elvedon in Suffolk. While passing through Alexandria in 1864, he met Miss Bamba Müller, the daughter of a German merchant who had married an Abyssinian. The maharaja had been interested in mission work led by Sir John Login and met Miss Müller at one of the missionary schools where she taught. She became his wife on June 7, 1864, and they had six children together. The year after her death in 1890, the maharaja married his second wife, an English lady named Miss Ada Douglas Wetherill, in Paris, who survived him. The maharaja had a deep love for sports, and his shooting parties were famous, making him a favorite in English society. However, this led to financial problems, and in 1882 he appealed to the government for help, making various claims about the supposed ownership of private estates in the Punjab and regarding the surrender of the Koh-i-noor diamond to the British Crown. His request was denied, prompting him to travel to India, after drafting a proclamation to his former subjects. However, since it was deemed unwise to allow him to visit the Punjab, he remained for a while as a guest at the residency in Aden and was permitted to receive some relatives to witness his renunciation of Christianity, which actually occurred within the residency itself. As the climate negatively impacted his health, the maharaja eventually left Aden and returned to Europe. He spent some time in Russia, hoping the Russians would take up his claim against England, but when that proved fruitless, he moved to Paris, where he lived the remainder of his life on the pension provided by the Indian government. He died from a stroke in Paris on October 22, 1893. The maharaja's eldest son, Prince Victor Albert Jay Dhuleep Singh (b. 1866), was educated at Trinity and Downing Colleges, Cambridge. In 1888, he received a commission in the 1st Royal Dragoon Guards. In 1898, he married Lady Anne Coventry, the youngest daughter of the Earl of Coventry.
DHULIA, a town of British India, administrative headquarters of West Khandesh district in Bombay, on the right bank of the Panjhra river. Pop. (1901) 24,726. Considerable trade is done in cotton and oil-seeds, and weaving of cotton. A railway connects Dhulia with Chalisgaon, on the main line of the Great Indian Peninsula railway.
DHULIA, a town in British India, is the administrative center of the West Khandesh district in Bombay, located on the right bank of the Panjhra River. Population (1901) 24,726. There is significant trade in cotton and oilseeds, as well as cotton weaving. A railway links Dhulia to Chalisgaon, on the main line of the Great Indian Peninsula Railway.
DIABASE, in petrology, a rock which is a weathered form of dolerite. It was long widely accepted that the pre-Tertiary rocks of this group differed from their Tertiary and Recent representatives in certain essential respects, but this is now admitted to be untenable, and the differences are known to be merely the result of the longer exposure to decomposition, pressure and shearing, which the older rocks have experienced. Their olivine tends to become serpentinized; their augite changes to chlorite and uralite; their felspars are clouded by formation of zeolites, calcite, sericite and epidote. The rocks acquire a green colour (from the development of chlorite, uralite and epidote); hence the older name of "greenstones," which is now little used. Many of them become somewhat schistose from pressure ("greenstone-schists," meta-diabase, &c.). Although the original definition of the group can no longer be justified, the name is so well established in current usage that it can hardly be discarded. The terms diabase and dolerite are employed really to designate distinct facies of the same set of rocks.
DIABASE, in petrology, is a type of rock that has weathered from dolerite. It was once widely believed that the pre-Tertiary rocks in this group were significantly different from their Tertiary and recent counterparts, but this view is now considered outdated. The differences are understood to arise simply from the extended exposure of older rocks to decomposition, pressure, and shearing. Their olivine often becomes serpentinized; their augite transforms into chlorite and uralite; their felspars get clouded by the formation of zeolites, calcite, sericite, and epidote. The rocks take on a green color (due to the development of chlorite, uralite, and epidote); this is why they were previously referred to as "greenstones," a term that's now rarely used. Many of them develop a schistose texture from pressure ("greenstone-schists," meta-diabase, etc.). While the original definition of this group can no longer be supported, the name is so firmly established in current usage that it's unlikely to be abandoned. The terms diabase and dolerite are actually used to describe different facies of the same group of rocks.
The minerals of diabase are the same as those of dolerite, viz. olivine, augite, and plagioclase felspar, with subordinate quantities of hornblende, biotite, iron oxides and apatite.
The minerals in diabase are the same as those in dolerite, including olivine, augite, and plagioclase feldspar, along with smaller amounts of hornblende, biotite, iron oxides, and apatite.
There are olivine-diabases and diabases without olivine; quartz-diabases, analcite-diabases (or teschenites) and hornblende diabases (or proterobases). Hypersthene (or bronzite) is characteristic of another group. Many of them are ophitic, especially those which contain olivine, but others are intersertal, like the intersertal dolerites. The last include most quartz-diabases, hypersthene-diabases and the rocks which have been described as tholeites. Porphyritic structure appears in the diabase-porphyrites, some of which are highly vesicular and contain remains of an abundant fine-grained or partly glassy ground-mass (diabas-mandelstein, amygdaloidal diabase). The somewhat ill-defined spilites are regarded by many as modifications of diabase-porphyrite. In the intersertal and porphyrite diabases, fresh or devitrified glassy base is not infrequent. It is especially conspicuous in some tholeites (hyalo-tholeites) and in weisselbergites. These rocks consist of augite and plagioclase, with little or no olivine, on a brown, vitreous, interstitial matrix. Devitrified forms of tachylyte (sordawilite, &c.) occur at the rapidly chilled margins of dolerite sills and dikes, and fine-grained spotted rocks with large spherulites of grey or greenish felspar, and branching growths of brownish-green augite (variolites).
There are olivine-diabases and diabases without olivine; quartz-diabases, analcite-diabases (or teschenites), and hornblende diabases (or proterobases). Hypersthene (or bronzite) is typical of another group. Many of them are ophitic, especially those that contain olivine, while others are intersertal, like the intersertal dolerites. The latter include most quartz-diabases, hypersthene-diabases, and the rocks referred to as tholeites. Porphyritic structure is seen in the diabase-porphyrites, some of which are highly vesicular and have remains of a fine-grained or partly glassy ground mass (diabas-mandelstein, amygdaloidal diabase). The somewhat unclear spilites are considered by many as variations of diabase-porphyrite. In the intersertal and porphyrite diabases, fresh or devitrified glassy bases are common. This is particularly noticeable in some tholeites (hyalo-tholeites) and in weisselbergites. These rocks consist of augite and plagioclase, with little or no olivine, set in a brown, glassy, interstitial matrix. Devitrified forms of tachylyte (sordawilite, etc.) are found at the rapidly chilled edges of dolerite sills and dikes, along with fine-grained spotted rocks that have large spherulites of gray or greenish feldspar and branching formations of brownish-green augite (variolites).
To nearly every variety in composition and structure presented by the diabases, a counterpart can be found among the Tertiary dolerites. In the older rocks, however, certain minerals are more common than in the newer. Hornblende, mostly of pale green colours and somewhat fibrous habit, is very frequent in diabase; it is in most cases secondary after pyroxene, and is then known as uralite; often it forms pseudomorphs which retain the shape of the original augite. Where diabases have been crushed or sheared, hornblende readily develops at the expense of pyroxene, sometimes replacing it completely. In the later stages of alteration the amphibole becomes compact and well crystallized; the rocks consist of green hornblende and plagioclase felspar, and are then generally known as epidiorites or amphibolites. At the same time a schistose structure is produced. But transition forms are very common, having more or less of the augite remaining, surrounded by newly formed hornblende which at first is rather fibrous and tends to spread outwards through the surrounding felspar. Chlorite also is abundant both in sheared and unsheared diabases, and with it calcite may make its appearance, or the lime set free from the augite may combine with the titanium of the iron oxide and with silica to form incrustations or borders of sphene around the original crystals of ilmenite. Epidote is another secondary lime-bearing mineral which results from the decomposition of the soda lime felspars and the pyroxenes. Many diabases, especially those of the teschenite sub-group, are filled with zeolites.
In almost every variation in composition and structure found in diabases, there’s a matching type among the Tertiary dolerites. However, in the older rocks, certain minerals are more prevalent than in the newer ones. Hornblende, usually in pale green shades and a somewhat fibrous form, is quite common in diabase; it typically appears as a secondary mineral after pyroxene and is then known as uralite; often, it takes the shape of the original augite. When diabases are crushed or sheared, hornblende easily develops at the expense of pyroxene, sometimes replacing it entirely. In the later stages of alteration, the amphibole becomes compact and well crystallized; the rocks then consist of green hornblende and plagioclase feldspar, and are usually referred to as epidiorites or amphibolites. At the same time, a schistose structure forms. However, transitional forms are very common, containing varying amounts of remaining augite, surrounded by newly formed hornblende that initially appears somewhat fibrous and tends to spread outwards through the surrounding feldspar. Chlorite is also abundant in both sheared and unsheared diabases, and along with it, calcite may appear, or the lime released from the augite may combine with the titanium from the iron oxide and with silica to create crusts or borders of sphene around the original ilmenite crystals. Epidote is another secondary lime-containing mineral that results from the breakdown of soda lime feldspars and pyroxenes. Many diabases, particularly those from the teschenite subgroup, are filled with zeolites.
Diabases are exceedingly abundant among the older rocks of all parts of the globe. Popular names for them are "whinstone," "greenstone," "toadstone" and "trap." They form excellent road-mending stones and are much quarried for this purpose, being tough, durable and resistant to wear, so long as they are not extremely decomposed. Many of them are to be preferred to the fresher dolerites as being less brittle. The quality of the Cornish greenstones appears to have been distinctly improved by a smaller amount of recrystallization where they have been heated by contact with intrusive masses of granite.
Diabases are very common in the older rocks all over the world. They are often called "whinstone," "greenstone," "toadstone," and "trap." They make excellent materials for road repairs and are widely quarried for this reason, as they are tough, durable, and resistant to wear, as long as they aren't overly decomposed. Many of them are actually better than fresher dolerites because they are less brittle. The quality of Cornish greenstones seems to have improved due to a smaller amount of recrystallization when they were heated by coming into contact with intrusive granite masses.
DIABETES (from Gr. διά, through, and βαίνειν, to pass), a constitutional disease characterized by a habitually excessive discharge of urine. Two forms of this complaint are described, viz. Diabetes Mellitus, or Glycosuria, where the urine is not only increased in quantity, but persistently contains a greater or less amount of sugar, and Diabetes Insipidus, or Polyuria, where the urine is simply increased in quantity, and contains no abnormal ingredient. This latter, however, must be distinguished from the polyuria due to chronic granular kidney, lardaceous disease of the kidney, and also occurring in certain cases of hysteria.
DIABETES (from Gr. διά, through, and βαίνειν, to pass), a systemic condition characterized by a consistently high discharge of urine. Two types of this condition are identified: Diabetes Mellitus, or Glycosuria, where the urine not only increases in volume but also consistently contains varying amounts of sugar, and Diabetes Insipidus, or Polyuria, where the urine is simply increased in volume and does not contain any abnormal substances. However, the latter must be differentiated from polyuria caused by chronic granular kidney disease, lardaceous kidney disease, and also seen in certain cases of hysteria.
Diabetes mellitus is the disease to which the term is most commonly applied, and is by far the more serious and important ailment. It is one of the diseases due to altered metabolism (see Metabolic Diseases). It is markedly hereditary, much more prevalent in towns and especially modern city life than in more primitive rustic communities, and most common among the Jews. The excessive use of sugar as a food is usually considered one cause of the disease, and obesity is supposed to favour its occurrence, but many observers consider that the obesity so often met with among diabetics is due to the same cause as the disease itself. No age is exempt, but it occurs most commonly in the fifth decade of life. It attacks males twice as frequently as females, and fair more frequently than dark people.
Diabetes mellitus is the condition that the term most often refers to, and it's definitely the more serious and significant illness. It's one of the disorders related to altered metabolism (see Metabolic Diseases). It's highly hereditary, more common in urban areas, especially in modern city life, than in more traditional rural communities, and is most prevalent among Jewish populations. The high consumption of sugar as a food source is typically seen as one of the causes of the disease, while obesity is thought to contribute to its development; however, many experts believe that the obesity often found in diabetics is a result of the same underlying cause as the disease itself. No age group is exempt, but it most commonly occurs in people in their fifties. It affects men twice as often as women, and is significantly more common among lighter-skinned individuals than darker-skinned ones.
The symptoms are usually gradual in their onset, and the patient may suffer for a length of time before he thinks it necessary to apply for medical aid. The first symptoms which attract attention are failure of strength, and emaciation, along with great thirst and an increased amount and frequent passage of urine. From the normal quantity of from 2 to 3 pints in the 24 hours it may be increased to 10, 20 or 30 pints, or even more. It is usually of pale colour, and of thicker consistence than normal urine, possesses a decidedly sweet taste, and is of high specific gravity (1030 to 1050). It frequently gives rise to considerable irritation of the urinary passages.
The symptoms typically develop gradually, and a person might endure them for quite some time before deciding to seek medical help. The initial signs that raise concern are weakness and weight loss, along with intense thirst and an increased volume and frequency of urination. The usual amount of urine produced in 24 hours, which is about 2 to 3 pints, can increase to 10, 20, or even 30 pints or more. The urine is generally pale in color, thicker than normal, has a noticeably sweet taste, and has a high specific gravity (1030 to 1050). It often causes considerable irritation in the urinary tract.
By simple evaporation crystals of sugar may be obtained from diabetic urine, which also yields the characteristic chemical tests of sugar, while the amount of this substance can be accurately estimated by certain analytical processes. The quantity of sugar passed may vary from a few ounces to two or more pounds per diem, and it is found to be markedly increased after saccharine or starchy food has been taken. Sugar may also be found in the blood, saliva, tears, and in almost all the excretions of persons suffering from this disease. One of the most distressing symptoms is intense thirst, which the patient is constantly seeking to allay, the quantity of liquid consumed being in general enormous, and there is usually, but not invariably, a voracious appetite. The mouth is always parched, and a faint, sweetish odour may be evolved from the breath. The effect of the disease upon the general health is very marked, and the patient becomes more and more emaciated. He suffers from increasing muscular weakness, the temperature of his body is lowered, and the skin is dry and harsh. There is often a peculiar flush on the face, not limited to the malar eminences, but extending up to the roots of the hair. The teeth are loosened or decay, there is a tendency to bleeding from the gums, while dyspeptic symptoms, constipation and loss of sexual power are common accompaniments. There is in general great mental depression or irritability.
By simple evaporation, crystals of sugar can be obtained from diabetic urine, which also provides the characteristic chemical tests for sugar. The amount of this substance can be accurately measured using certain analytical methods. The quantity of sugar excreted can range from a few ounces to two or more pounds per day, and it tends to increase significantly after consuming sugary or starchy foods. Sugar can also be found in the blood, saliva, tears, and almost all bodily excretions of individuals suffering from this condition. One of the most distressing symptoms is intense thirst, which the patient continually tries to quench, leading to a typically excessive intake of liquids, along with a usually insatiable appetite. The mouth often feels dry, and there may be a faint, sweet odor on the breath. The impact of the disease on overall health is quite significant, resulting in noticeable emaciation. The patient experiences increasing muscle weakness, a drop in body temperature, and dry, rough skin. There is often a peculiar flush on the face, not just on the cheekbones, but extending up to the hairline. The teeth may become loose or decay, there is often bleeding from the gums, and dyspeptic symptoms, constipation, and a loss of sexual vitality are common. Generally, there is significant mental depression or irritability.
Diabetes as a rule advances comparatively slowly except in the case of young persons, in whom its progress is apt to be rapid. The complications of the disease are many and serious. It may cause impaired vision by weakening the muscles of accommodation, or by lessening the sensitiveness of the retina to light. Also cataract is very common. Skin affections of all kinds may occur and prove very intractable. Boils, carbuncles, cellulitis and gangrene are all apt to occur as life advances, though gangrene is much more frequent in men than in women. Diabetics are especially liable to phthisis and pneumonia, and gangrene of the lungs may set in if the patient survives the crisis in the latter disease. Digestive troubles of all kinds, kidney diseases and heart failure due to fatty heart are all of common occurrence. Also patients seem curiously susceptible to the poison of enteric fever, though the attack usually runs a mild course. The sugar temporarily disappears during the fever. But the most serious complication of all is known as diabetic coma, which is very commonly the final cause of death. The onset is often insidious, but may be indicated by loss of appetite, a rapid fall in the quantity of both urine and sugar, and by either constipation or diarrhoea. More rarely there is most acute abdominal pain. At first the condition is rather that of collapse than true coma, though later the patient is absolutely comatose. The patient suffers from a peculiar kind of dyspnoea, and the breath and skin have a sweet ethereal odour. The condition may last from twenty-four hours to three days, but is almost invariably the precursor of death.
Diabetes usually progresses slowly, except in young people, where it can progress quickly. The complications of the disease are numerous and serious. It can impair vision by weakening the eye muscles or reducing the retina's sensitivity to light, and cataracts are very common. Various skin issues can occur and can be quite stubborn. Boils, carbuncles, cellulitis, and gangrene are more likely to happen as one ages, although gangrene is more common in men than in women. People with diabetes are particularly prone to tuberculosis and pneumonia, and lung gangrene may develop if the patient survives the crisis of pneumonia. Digestive issues, kidney diseases, and heart failure due to fatty heart are also common. Additionally, patients seem unusually sensitive to the effects of typhoid fever, although the illness usually is mild. The sugar in their urine may temporarily vanish during the fever. However, the most serious complication is diabetic coma, which is often the leading cause of death. The onset can be gradual but may be marked by loss of appetite, a rapid drop in urine and sugar output, and either constipation or diarrhea. In rarer cases, there may be severe abdominal pain. Initially, the state resembles collapse more than true coma, though eventually, the patient becomes fully comatose. The patient experiences a unique type of shortness of breath, and their breath and skin emit a sweet, fruity smell. This condition can last from 24 hours to three days and almost always precedes death.
Diabetes is a very fatal form of disease, recovery being exceedingly rare. Over 50% die of coma, another 25% of phthisis or pneumonia, and the remainder of Bright's disease, cerebral haemorrhage, gangrene, &c. The most favourable cases are those in which the patient is advanced in years, those in which it is associated with obesity or gout, and where the social conditions are favourable. A few cures have been recorded in which the disease supervened after some acute illness. The unfavourable cases are those in which there is a family history of the disease and in which the patient is young. Nevertheless much may be done by appropriate treatment to mitigate the severity of the symptoms and to prolong life.
Diabetes is a very serious disease, and recovery is extremely rare. Over 50% of patients die from coma, another 25% from tuberculosis or pneumonia, and the rest from kidney disease, brain hemorrhage, gangrene, etc. The most promising cases are those where the patient is older, where it’s linked to obesity or gout, and where social conditions are good. A few recoveries have been reported in cases where the disease followed some acute illness. The less favorable cases are those with a family history of the disease and where the patient is young. Still, appropriate treatment can do a lot to reduce the severity of symptoms and extend life.
There are two distinct lines of treatment, that of diet and that of drugs, but each must be modified and determined entirely by the idiosyncrasy of the patient, which varies in this condition between very wide limits. That of diet is of primary importance inasmuch as it has been proved beyond question that certain kinds of food have a powerful influence in aggravating the disease, more particularly those consisting largely of saccharine and starchy matter; and it may be stated generally that the various methods of treatment proposed aim at the elimination as far as possible of these constituents from the diet. Hence it is recommended that such articles as bread, potatoes and all farinaceous foods, turnips, carrots, parsnips and most fruits should be avoided; while animal food and soups, green vegetables, cream, cheese, eggs, butter, and tea and coffee without sugar, may be taken with advantage. As a substitute for ordinary bread, which most persons find it difficult to do without for any length of time, bran bread, gluten bread and almond biscuits. A patient must never pass suddenly from an ordinary to a carbohydrate-free diet. Any such sudden transition is extremely liable to bring on diabetic coma, and the change must be made quite gradually, one form of carbohydrate after another being taken out of the diet, whilst the effect on the quantity of sugar passed is being carefully noted meanwhile. The treatment may be begun by excluding potatoes, sugar and fruit, and only after several days is the bread to be replaced by some diabetic substitute. When the sugar excretion has been reduced to its lowest point, and maintained there for some time, a certain amount of carbohydrate may be cautiously allowed, the consequent effect on the glycosuria being estimated. The best diet can only be worked out experimentally for each individual patient. But in every case, if drowsiness or any symptom suggesting coma supervene, all restrictions must be withdrawn, and carbohydrate freely allowed. The question of alcohol is one which must be largely determined by the previous history of the patient, but a small quantity will help to make up the deficiencies of a diet poor in carbohydrate. Scotch and Irish whisky, and Hollands gin, are usually free from sugar, and some of the light Bordeaux wines contain very little. Fat is beneficial, and can be given as cream, fat of meat and cod-liver oil. Green vegetables are harmless, but the white stalks of cabbages and lettuces and also celery and endive yield sugar. Laevulose can be assimilated up to 1½ ozs. daily without increasing the glycosuria, and hence apples, cooked or raw, are allowable, as the sugar they contain is in this form. The question of milk is somewhat disputed; but it is usual to exclude it from the rigid diet, allowing a certain quantity when the diet is being extended. Thirst is relieved by anything that relieves the polyuria. But hypodermic injections of pilocarpine stimulate the flow of saliva, and thus relieve the dryness of the [Page 146] mouth. Constipation appears to increase the thirst, and must always be carefully guarded against. The best remedies are the aperient mineral waters.
There are two main types of treatment: diet and medication, but each should be tailored completely to the patient’s unique situation, which can vary greatly in this condition. The dietary approach is the most important since it has been clearly shown that certain foods can significantly worsen the disease, especially those high in sugar and starch. Generally, the various treatment methods aim to remove these components from the diet as much as possible. Therefore, it's advised to avoid items like bread, potatoes, and all starchy foods, as well as turnips, carrots, parsnips, and most fruits. On the other hand, animal products and soups, green vegetables, cream, cheese, eggs, and unsweetened tea and coffee can be beneficial. For those who find it hard to go without regular bread, alternatives like bran bread, gluten bread, and almond biscuits are recommended. Patients should never abruptly switch from a regular diet to a carbohydrate-free diet. Such a sudden change can easily lead to diabetic coma, so the transition must be gradual, removing one type of carbohydrate at a time while carefully monitoring the sugar levels. Treatment can start by cutting out potatoes, sugar, and fruit, and only after several days should bread be replaced with a diabetic-friendly substitute. Once sugar excretion has dropped to its lowest level and stayed there for a while, a small amount of carbohydrates may be cautiously reintroduced, while keeping track of its effect on glycosuria. The ideal diet must be determined through trial and error for each individual patient. However, in every case, if the patient shows signs of drowsiness or any indication of coma, all dietary restrictions should be lifted, and carbohydrates should be freely allowed. The decision regarding alcohol largely depends on the patient’s previous history, but a small amount can help balance a carbohydrate-poor diet. Scotch and Irish whiskey, along with Hollands gin, are usually sugar-free, and some light Bordeaux wines have very little sugar. Fat is beneficial and can be included in the form of cream, meat fat, and cod-liver oil. Green vegetables are safe, but the white stalks of cabbages and lettuces, as well as celery and endive, contain sugar. Laevulose can be consumed up to 1½ ounces daily without increasing glycosuria, so apples, whether cooked or raw, can be included since their sugar is in this form. The inclusion of milk is somewhat debated; however, it is generally excluded from strict diets, with a small amount allowed when gradually increasing the diet. Thirst can be alleviated by anything that helps with polyuria. Hypodermic injections of pilocarpine can stimulate saliva production, easing mouth dryness. Constipation seems to worsen thirst, so it should always be carefully managed. The best remedies for this are aperient mineral waters.
Numerous medicinal substances have been employed in diabetes, but few of them are worthy of mention as possessed of any efficacy. Opium is often found of great service, its administration being followed by marked amelioration in all the symptoms. Morphia and codeia have a similar action. In the severest cases, however, these drugs appear to be of little or no use, and they certainly increase the constipation. Heroin hydrochloride has been tried in their place, but this seems to have more power over slight than over severe cases. Salicylate of sodium and aspirin are both very beneficial, causing a diminution in the sugar excretion without counterbalancing bad effects.
Many medications have been used to treat diabetes, but only a few are really effective. Opium is often very helpful, as it noticeably improves all the symptoms after it's taken. Morphine and codeine have similar effects. However, in the most severe cases, these medications seem to be ineffective, and they definitely worsen constipation. Heroin hydrochloride has been tested as an alternative, but it appears to work better for milder cases than for severe ones. Sodium salicylate and aspirin are both quite helpful, as they reduce sugar excretion without any negative side effects.
In diabetes insipidus there is constant thirst and an excessive flow of urine, which, however, is not found to contain any abnormal constituent. Its effects upon the system are often similar to those of diabetes mellitus, except that they are much less marked, the disease being in general very slow in its progress. In some cases the health appears to suffer very slightly. It is rarely a direct cause of death, but from its debilitating effects may predispose to serious and fatal complications. It is best treated by tonics and generous diet. Valerian has been found beneficial, the powdered root being given in 5-grain doses.
In diabetes insipidus, there is constant thirst and an excessive amount of urine, which does not show any abnormal substances. Its effects on the body are often similar to those of diabetes mellitus, but they are much less severe, and the disease generally progresses very slowly. In some cases, the individual's health seems to be affected very little. It rarely directly causes death, but its draining effects can make a person more susceptible to serious and fatal complications. It is best treated with tonics and a rich diet. Valerian has been found helpful, with the powdered root given in 5-grain doses.
DIABOLO, a game played with a sort of top in the shape of two cones joined at their apices, which is spun, thrown, and caught by means of a cord strung to two sticks. The idea of the game appears originally to have come from China, where a top (Kouengen), made of two hollow pierced cylinders of metal or wood, joined by a rod—and often of immense size,—was made by rotation to hum with a loud noise, and was used by pedlars to attract customers. From China it was introduced by missionaries to Europe; and a form of the game, known as "the devil on two sticks," appears to have been known in England towards the end of the 18th century, and Lord Macartney is credited with improvements in it. But its principal vogue was in France in 1812, where the top was called "le diable." Amusing old prints exist (see Fry's Magazine, March and December 1907), depicting examples of the popular craze in France at the time. The diable of those days resembled a globular wooden dumb-bell with a short waist, and the sonorous hum when spinning—the bruit du diable—was a pronounced feature. At intervals during the century occasional attempts to revive the game of spinning a top of this sort on a string were made, but it was not till 1906 that the sensation of 1812 began to be repeated. A French engineer, Gustave Phillipart, discovering some old implements of the game, had experimented for some time with new forms of top with a view to bringing it again into popularity; and having devised the double-cone shape, and added a miniature bicycle tire of rubber round the rims of the two ends of the double-cone, with other improvements, he named it "diabolo." The use of celluloid in preference to metal or wood as its material appears to have been due to a suggestion of Mr C. B. Fry, who was consulted by the inventor on the subject. The game of spinning, throwing and catching the diabolo was rapidly elaborated in various directions, both as an exercise of skill in doing tricks, and in "diabolo tennis" and other ways as an athletic pastime. From Paris, Ostend and the chief French seaside resorts, where it became popular in 1906, its vogue spread in 1907 so that in France and England it became the fashionable "rage" among both children and adults.
DIABOLO, a game played with a kind of top shaped like two cones connected at their points, which is spun, thrown, and caught using a string tied to two sticks. The concept of the game seems to have originated in China, where a top (Kouengen), made of two hollow pierced cylinders of metal or wood joined by a rod—and often quite large—was spun to make a loud humming noise, used by vendors to attract customers. It was brought to Europe by missionaries from China; a version of the game, known as "the devil on two sticks," appears to have been recognized in England by the late 18th century, with Lord Macartney credited for making improvements. However, it gained the most popularity in France in 1812, where the top was referred to as "le diable." There are amusing old illustrations (see Fry's Magazine, March and December 1907) showcasing the popular craze in France during that time. The diable from those days looked like a round wooden dumbbell with a narrow middle, and the distinct humming sound while spinning—the bruit du diable—was a key feature. Throughout the century, there were occasional attempts to revive the game of spinning a top like this, but it wasn't until 1906 that the sensation of 1812 began to resurface. A French engineer, Gustave Phillipart, found some old game tools and experimented with new top designs to bring it back into fashion. After creating the double-cone shape and adding a small rubber bicycle tire around the rims of both ends, along with other improvements, he named it "diabolo." The switch to using celluloid instead of metal or wood seems to have been suggested by Mr. C. B. Fry, who was consulted by the inventor. The game of spinning, throwing, and catching the diabolo quickly evolved into various skills, including tricks and "diabolo tennis," becoming an athletic pastime. From Paris, Ostend, and the main French seaside resorts where it gained popularity in 1906, its trend spread in 1907, turning into the fashionable "rage" among both kids and adults in France and England.
The mechanics of the diabolo were worked out by Professor C. V. Boys in the Proc. Phys. Soc. (London), Nov. 1907.
The mechanics of the diabolo were figured out by Professor C. V. Boys in the Proc. Phys. Soc. (London), Nov. 1907.
DIACONICON, in the Greek Church, the name given to a chamber on the south side of the central apse, where the sacred utensils, vessels, &c., of the church were kept. In the reign of Justin II. (565-574), owing to a change in the liturgy, the diaconicon and protheses were located in apses at the east end of the aisles. Before that time there was only one apse. In the churches in central Syria of slightly earlier date, the diaconicon is rectangular, the side apses at Kalat-Seman having been added at a later date.
DIACONICON, in the Greek Church, refers to a room on the south side of the main apse where the church's sacred items, utensils, and vessels were stored. During the reign of Justin II (565-574), a change in the liturgy resulted in the diaconicon and prothesis being moved to apses at the east end of the aisles. Previously, there was only one apse. In slightly older churches in central Syria, the diaconicon is rectangular, with the side apses at Kalat-Seman added at a later time.
DIADOCHI (Gr. διαδἐχεσθαι, to receive from another), i.e. "Successors," the name given to the Macedonian generals who fought for the empire of Alexander after his death in 323 B.C. The name includes Antigonus and his son Demetrius Poliorcetes, Antipater and his son Cassander, Seleucus, Ptolemy, Eumenes and Lysimachus. The kingdoms into which the Macedonian empire was divided under these rulers are known as Hellenistic. The chief were Asia Minor and Syria under the Seleucid Dynasty (q.v.), Egypt under the Ptolemies (q.v.), Macedonia under the successors of Antigonus Gonatas, Pergamum (q.v.) under the Attalid dynasty. Gradually these kingdoms were merged in the Roman empire. (See Macedonian Empire.)
DIADOCHI (Gr. διαδἐχεσθαι, to receive from another), meaning "Successors," is the term used for the Macedonian generals who vied for Alexander's empire after his death in 323 B.C. This group includes Antigonus and his son Demetrius Poliorcetes, Antipater and his son Cassander, Seleucus, Ptolemy, Eumenes, and Lysimachus. The territories into which the Macedonian empire was split under these leaders are referred to as Hellenistic. The main ones were Asia Minor and Syria governed by the Seleucid Dynasty (q.v.), Egypt ruled by the Ptolemies (q.v.), Macedonia under the successors of Antigonus Gonatas, and Pergamum (q.v.) under the Attalid dynasty. Over time, these kingdoms were absorbed into the Roman empire. (See Macedonian Empire.)
DIAGONAL (Gr. ;δία, through, γωνία, a corner), in geometry, a line joining the intersections of two pairs of sides of a rectilinear figure.
DIAGONAL (Gr. ;δία, through, corner, a corner), in geometry, a line that connects the corners formed by two pairs of sides of a straight-edged shape.
DIAGORAS, of Melos, surnamed the Atheist, poet and sophist, flourished in the second half of the 5th century B.C. Religious in his youth and a writer of hymns and dithyrambs, he became an atheist because a great wrong done to him was left unpunished by the gods. In consequence of his blasphemous speeches, and especially his criticism of the Mysteries, he was condemned to death at Athens, and a price set upon his head (Aristoph. Clouds, 830; Birds, 1073 and Schol.). He fled to Corinth, where he is said to have died. His work on the Mysteries was called Φρύγιοι λόγοι or Ἀποπυργίζοντες, in which he probably attacked the Phrygian divinities.
DIAGORAS, from Melos, known as the Atheist, was a poet and sophist who thrived in the latter half of the 5th century B.C. He was religious in his youth and wrote hymns and dithyrambs, but he became an atheist after suffering a significant injustice that the gods did not rectify. Due to his critical speeches, especially regarding the Mysteries, he was sentenced to death in Athens, and a bounty was placed on his head (Aristoph. Clouds, 830; Birds, 1073 and Schol.). He escaped to Corinth, where he is believed to have died. His work on the Mysteries was titled Frigian sayings or Ἀποπυργίζοντες, in which he likely criticized the Phrygian deities.
DIAGRAM (Gr. διάγραμμα, from διαγράφειν, to mark out by lines), a figure drawn in such a manner that the geometrical relations between the parts of the figure illustrate relations between other objects. They may be classed according to the manner in which they are intended to be used, and also according to the kind of analogy which we recognize between the diagram and the thing represented. The diagrams in mathematical treatises are intended to help the reader to follow the mathematical reasoning. The construction of the figure is defined in words so that even if no figure were drawn the reader could draw one for himself. The diagram is a good one if those features which form the subject of the proposition are clearly represented.
DIAGRAM (Gr. diagram, from erase, to outline with lines, is a figure drawn in a way that shows the geometric relationships between its parts to illustrate connections with other objects. They can be categorized based on their intended use and the type of analogy recognized between the diagram and what it represents. Diagrams in math texts are meant to help the reader follow the reasoning. The construction of the figure is explained in words so that even without a visual, the reader can sketch it out themselves. A diagram is effective if it clearly represents the features that are the focus of the proposition.
Diagrams are also employed in an entirely different way—namely, for purposes of measurement. The plans and designs drawn by architects and engineers are used to determine the value of certain real magnitudes by measuring certain distances on the diagram. For such purposes it is essential that the drawing be as accurate as possible. We therefore class diagrams as diagrams of illustration, which merely suggest certain relations to the mind of the spectator, and diagrams drawn to scale, from which measurements are intended to be made. There are some diagrams or schemes, however, in which the form of the parts is of no importance, provided their connexions are properly shown. Of this kind are the diagrams of electrical connexions, and those belonging to that department of geometry which treats of the degrees of cyclosis, periphraxy, linkedness and knottedness.
Diagrams are also used in a completely different way—for measurement. The plans and designs created by architects and engineers help determine the value of specific measurements by measuring certain distances on the diagram. For this purpose, it’s essential that the drawing is as accurate as possible. We classify diagrams into two categories: illustrative diagrams, which only suggest certain relationships to the viewer’s mind, and scale drawings, from which measurements can be taken. However, some diagrams or schemes don't care about the actual shape of the parts, as long as their connections are shown correctly. Examples include diagrams of electrical connections and those related to geometry that deal with degrees of cyclosis, periphraxy, linkedness, and knottedness.
Diagrams purely Graphic and mixed Symbolic and Graphic.—Diagrams may also be classed either as purely graphical diagrams, in which no symbols are employed except letters or other marks to distinguish particular points of the diagrams, and mixed diagrams, in which certain magnitudes are represented, not by the magnitudes of parts of the diagram, but by symbols, such as numbers written on the diagram. Thus in a map the height of places above the level of the sea is often indicated by marking the number of feet above the sea at the corresponding places on the map. There is another method in which a line called a contour line is drawn through all the places in the map whose height above the sea is a certain number of feet, and the number of feet is written at some point or points of this line. By the use of a series of contour lines, the height of a great number of places can be indicated on a map by means of a small number of written symbols. Still this method is not a purely graphical method, but a partly symbolical method of expressing the third dimension of objects on a diagram in two dimensions.
Diagrams that are purely Graphic and mixed Symbolic and Graphic.—Diagrams can be categorized as either purely graphical diagrams, which use no symbols except letters or other marks to identify specific points, or mixed diagrams, where certain measurements are represented not by the sizes of parts of the diagram, but by symbols like numbers displayed on the diagram. For example, in a map, the elevation of locations above sea level is often shown by noting the number of feet above sea level at the respective spots on the map. Another approach involves drawing a line called a contour line through all the locations on the map that have the same elevation above sea level, with the elevation indicated at one or more points along this line. By employing a series of contour lines, the elevation of many places can be represented on a map using a few written symbols. However, this method is not purely graphical; it’s a partially symbolic way of representing the third dimension of objects in a two-dimensional diagram.
In order to express completely by a purely graphical method the relations of magnitudes involving more than two variables, we must use more than one diagram. Thus in the arts of construction we use plans and elevations and sections through different planes, to specify the form of objects having three [Page 147] dimensions. In such systems of diagrams we have to indicate that a point in one diagram corresponds to a point in another diagram. This is generally done by marking the corresponding points in the different diagrams with the same letter. If the diagrams are drawn on the same piece of paper we may indicate corresponding points by drawing a line from one to the other, taking care that this line of correspondence is so drawn that it cannot be mistaken for a real line in either diagram. (See Geometry: Descriptive.)
To fully represent the relationships between magnitudes involving more than two variables using a purely graphical method, we need to use multiple diagrams. In construction, for example, we create plans, elevations, and sections through different planes to illustrate the shape of objects with three dimensions. In these diagram systems, we must indicate that a specific point in one diagram corresponds to a point in another. This is usually done by marking the corresponding points in the different diagrams with the same letter. If the diagrams are on the same sheet of paper, we can show corresponding points by drawing a line between them, ensuring that this line of correspondence is drawn in a way that it cannot be confused with an actual line in either diagram. (See Geometry: Descriptive.)
In the stereoscope the two diagrams, by the combined use of which the form of bodies in three dimensions is recognized, are projections of the bodies taken from two points so near each other that, by viewing the two diagrams simultaneously, one with each eye, we identify the corresponding points intuitively. The method in which we simultaneously contemplate two figures, and recognize a correspondence between certain points in the one figure and certain points in the other, is one of the most powerful and fertile methods hitherto known in science. Thus in pure geometry the theories of similar, reciprocal and inverse figures have led to many extensions of the science. It is sometimes spoken of as the method or principle of Duality. Geometry Projective.)
In the stereoscope, the two images work together to help us recognize the three-dimensional shape of objects. These images are taken from two points that are close enough together so that, by looking at both images at the same time—one with each eye—we can intuitively identify the corresponding points. The approach of observing two figures at once and finding a connection between certain points in each figure is one of the most effective and productive methods known in science. For instance, in pure geometry, the concepts of similar, reciprocal, and inverse figures have led to many developments in the field. This is sometimes referred to as the method or principle of Duality. Geometry Projective.
Diagrams in Mechanics.
Diagrams in Mechanics.
The study of the motion of a material system is much assisted by the use of a series of diagrams representing the configuration, displacement and acceleration of the parts of the system.
The study of how a material system moves is greatly aided by a series of diagrams showing the configuration, displacement, and acceleration of different parts of the system.
Diagram of Configuration.—In considering a material system it is often convenient to suppose that we have a record of its position at any given instant in the form of a diagram of configuration. The position of any particle of the system is defined by drawing a straight line or vector from the origin, or point of reference, to the given particle. The position of the particle with respect to the origin is determined by the magnitude and direction of this vector. If in the diagram we draw from the origin (which need not be the same point of space as the origin for the material system) a vector equal and parallel to the vector which determines the position of the particle, the end of this vector will indicate the position of the particle in the diagram of configuration. If this is done for all the particles we shall have a system of points in the diagram of configuration, each of which corresponds to a particle of the material system, and the relative positions of any pair of these points will be the same as the relative positions of the material particles which correspond to them.
Diagram of Configuration.—When looking at a material system, it's often helpful to imagine we have a record of its position at any moment in a diagram of configuration. The position of any particle in the system is identified by drawing a straight line or vector from the origin, or reference point, to that particle. The position of the particle in relation to the origin is determined by the length and direction of this vector. If we draw a vector from the origin (which doesn't have to be the same point in space as the origin for the material system) that is equal and parallel to the vector defining the particle's position, the tip of this vector will show where the particle is located in the diagram of configuration. Doing this for all the particles will result in a set of points in the diagram, each representing a particle of the material system, and the relative positions of any two points will match the relative positions of the actual material particles they represent.
We have hitherto spoken of two origins or points from which the vectors are supposed to be drawn—one for the material system, the other for the diagram. These points, however, and the vectors drawn from them, may now be omitted, so that we have on the one hand the material system and on the other a set of points, each point corresponding to a particle of the system, and the whole representing the configuration of the system at a given instant.
We have so far discussed two origins or points from which the vectors are assumed to be drawn—one for the material system and the other for the diagram. However, we can now ignore these points and the vectors drawn from them, leaving us with, on one side, the material system and, on the other, a set of points, each corresponding to a particle in the system, with the whole representing the configuration of the system at a specific moment.
This is called a diagram of configuration.
This is called a configuration diagram.
Diagram of Displacement.—Let us next consider two diagrams of configuration of the same system, corresponding to two different instants. We call the first the initial configuration and the second the final configuration, and the passage from the one configuration to the other we call the displacement of the system. We do not at present consider the length of time during which the displacement was effected, nor the intermediate stages through which it passed, but only the final result—a change of configuration. To study this change we construct a diagram of displacement.
Diagram of Displacement.—Now, let’s look at two diagrams that show the same system at different moments in time. We’ll refer to the first as the initial configuration and the second as the final configuration. The transition from the first configuration to the second is what we call the displacement of the system. For now, we won't focus on how long the displacement took or any intermediate stages it went through; instead, we’ll just look at the final result—a change in configuration. To analyze this change, we create a diagram of displacement.
Let A, B, C be the points in the initial diagram of configuration, and A′, B′, C′ be the corresponding points in the final diagram of configuration. From o, the origin of the diagram of displacement, draw a vector oa equal and parallel to AA′, ob equal and parallel to BB′, oc to CC′, and so on. The points a, b, c, &c., will be such that the vector ab indicates the displacement of B relative to A, and so on. The diagram containing the points a, b, c, &c., is therefore called the diagram of displacement.
Let A, B, and C be the points in the initial configuration diagram, and A′, B′, and C′ be the corresponding points in the final configuration diagram. From o, the origin of the displacement diagram, draw a vector oa that is equal and parallel to AA′, ob that is equal and parallel to BB′, oc to CC′, and so on. The points a, b, c, etc., will be positioned so that vector ab shows the displacement of B in relation to A, and so on. The diagram containing the points a, b, c, etc., is therefore called the displacement diagram.
In constructing the diagram of displacement we have hitherto assumed that we know the absolute displacements of the points of the system. For we are required to draw a line equal and parallel to AA′, which we cannot do unless we know the absolute final position of A, with respect to its initial position. In this diagram of displacement there is therefore, besides the points a, b, c, &c., an origin, o, which represents a point absolutely fixed in space. This is necessary because the two configurations do not exist at the same time; and therefore to express their relative position we require to know a point which remains the same at the beginning and end of the time.
In creating the displacement diagram, we've been assuming that we know the absolute displacements of the points in the system. We need to draw a line that is equal and parallel to AA′, which we can’t do unless we know the absolute final position of A in relation to its initial position. In this displacement diagram, there is, in addition to points a, b, c, etc., an origin, o, which represents a point that is completely fixed in space. This is important because the two configurations don’t exist at the same time; therefore, to show their relative positions, we need to identify a point that stays the same from the start to the end of the time period.
But we may construct the diagram in another way which does not assume a knowledge of absolute displacement or of a point fixed in space. Assuming any point and calling it a, draw ak parallel and equal to BA in the initial configuration, and from k draw kb parallel and equal to A′B′ in the final configuration. It is easy to see that the position of the point b relative to a will be the same by this construction as by the former construction, only we must observe that in this second construction we use only vectors such as AB, A′B′, which represent the relative position of points both of which exist simultaneously, instead of vectors such as AA′, BB′, which express the position of a point at one instant relative to its position at a former instant, and which therefore cannot be determined by observation, because the two ends of the vector do not exist simultaneously.
But we can create the diagram in another way that doesn’t require knowing absolute displacement or a fixed point in space. We can choose any point and label it a, then draw ak parallel and equal to BA in the initial setup, and from k draw kb parallel and equal to A′B′ in the final setup. It's clear that the position of point b in relation to a will be the same with this method as in the previous one. However, we should note that in this second method we only use vectors like AB, A′B′, which represent the relative positions of points that exist at the same time, instead of vectors like AA′, BB′, which show the position of a point at one moment relative to its position at a previous moment, and that can’t be determined by observation because the two ends of the vector don’t exist at the same time.
It appears therefore that the diagram of displacements, when drawn by the first construction, includes an origin o, which indicates that we have assumed a knowledge of absolute displacements. But no such point occurs in the second construction, because we use such vectors only as we can actually observe. Hence the diagram of displacements without an origin represents neither more nor less than all we can ever know about the displacement of the material system.
It seems that the displacement diagram created with the first construction includes an origin o, suggesting that we've assumed a knowledge of absolute displacements. However, there's no such point in the second construction, because we only use vectors that we can actually observe. Therefore, the displacement diagram without an origin represents exactly what we can know about the displacement of the material system.
Diagram of Velocity.—If the relative velocities of the points of the system are constant, then the diagram of displacement corresponding to an interval of a unit of time between the initial and the final configuration is called a diagram of relative velocity. If the relative velocities are not constant, we suppose another system in which the velocities are equal to the velocities of the given system at the given instant and continue constant for a unit of time. The diagram of displacements for this imaginary system is the required diagram of relative velocities of the actual system at the given instant. It is easy to see that the diagram gives the velocity of any one point relative to any other, but cannot give the absolute velocity of any of them.
Diagram of Velocity.—If the relative speeds of the points in the system are constant, then the displacement diagram for a unit time interval between the start and end positions is called a relative velocity diagram. If the relative speeds are not constant, we consider another system where the speeds match those of the original system at that moment and remain constant for a unit of time. The displacement diagram for this hypothetical system represents the relative velocities of the actual system at that moment. It’s clear that the diagram shows the speed of any point relative to any other, but it doesn’t provide the absolute speed of any of them.
Diagram of Acceleration.—By the same process by which we formed the diagram of displacements from the two diagrams of initial and final configuration, we may form a diagram of changes of relative velocity from the two diagrams of initial and final velocities. This diagram may be called that of total accelerations in a finite interval of time. And by the same process by which we deduced the diagram of velocities from that of displacements we may deduce the diagram of rates of acceleration from that of total acceleration.
Diagram of Acceleration.—Using the same method we used to create the diagram of displacements from the initial and final configuration diagrams, we can create a diagram of changes in relative velocity from the initial and final velocity diagrams. This diagram can be referred to as the total acceleration diagram for a specific time period. Similarly, using the method by which we derived the velocity diagram from the displacement diagram, we can derive the acceleration rate diagram from the total acceleration diagram.
We have mentioned this system of diagrams in elementary kinematics because they are found to be of use especially when we have to deal with material systems containing a great number of parts, as in the kinetic theory of gases. The diagram of configuration then appears as a region of space swarming with points representing molecules, and the only way in which we can investigate it is by considering the number of such points in unit of volume in different parts of that region, and calling this the density of the gas.
We talked about this system of diagrams in basic kinematics because they are really useful, especially when dealing with material systems that have many components, like in the kinetic theory of gases. The configuration diagram appears as an area in space filled with points representing molecules, and the only way we can study it is by looking at the number of those points in a unit volume in different parts of that area, which we refer to as the density of the gas.
In like manner the diagram of velocities appears as a region containing points equal in number but distributed in a different manner, and the number of points in any given portion of the region expresses the number of molecules whose velocities lie within given limits. We may speak of this as the velocity-density.
Similarly, the velocity diagram shows a region filled with points that are the same in number but arranged differently. The count of points in any specific part of the region represents the number of molecules with velocities within certain limits. We can refer to this as velocity density.
Diagrams of Stress.—Graphical methods are peculiarly applicable to statical questions, because the state of the system is constant, so that we do not need to construct a series of diagrams corresponding to the successive states of the system. The most useful of these applications, collectively termed Graphic Statics, relates to the equilibrium of plane framed structures familiarly represented in bridges and roof-trusses. Two diagrams are used, one called the diagram of the frame and the other called the diagram of stress. The structure itself consists of a number of separable pieces or links jointed together at their extremities. In practice these joints have friction, or may be made purposely stiff, so that the force acting at the extremity of a piece may not pass exactly through the axis of the joint; but as it is unsafe to make the stability of the structure depend in any degree upon the stiffness of joints, we assume in our calculations that all the joints are perfectly smooth, and therefore that the force acting on the end of any link passes through the axis of the joint.
Diagrams of Stress.—Graphical methods are especially useful for static problems because the system's state remains constant, so we don't need to create a series of diagrams for each state of the system. The most important of these applications, collectively known as Graphic Statics, deals with the equilibrium of plane framed structures, commonly seen in bridges and roof trusses. Two diagrams are used: one called the diagram of the frame and the other the diagram of stress. The structure itself is made up of several separable pieces or links connected at their ends. In practice, these joints experience friction or can be intentionally made stiff, meaning the force acting at the end of a piece might not align perfectly with the joint's axis; however, since it’s not safe to rely on the stability of the structure being dependent on the stiffness of the joints, we assume in our calculations that all joints are perfectly smooth, and thus that the force acting on the end of any link goes directly through the axis of the joint.
The axes of the joints of the structure are represented by points in the diagram of the frame. The link which connects two joints in the actual structure may be of any shape, but in the diagram of the frame it is represented by a straight line joining the points representing the two joints. If no force acts on the link except the two forces acting through the centres of the joints, these two forces must be equal and opposite, and their direction must coincide with the straight line joining the centres of the joints. If the force acting on either extremity of the link is directed towards the other extremity, the stress on the link is called pressure and the link is called a "strut." If it is directed away from the other extremity, the stress on the link is called tension and the link is called a "tie." In this case, therefore, the only stress acting in a link is a pressure or a tension in the direction of the straight line which represents it in the diagram of the frame, and all that we have to do is to find the magnitude of this stress. In the actual structure gravity acts on every part of the link, but in the diagram we substitute for the actual weight of the different parts of the link two weights which have the same resultant acting at the extremities of the link.
The axes of the joints in the structure are shown as points in the diagram of the frame. The connection between two joints in the actual structure can be any shape, but in the frame diagram, it's depicted as a straight line connecting the points that represent the two joints. If no force is acting on the link except the two forces that go through the centers of the joints, these two forces must be equal and opposite, and their direction must line up with the straight line connecting the centers of the joints. If the force on either end of the link is pushing towards the other end, the stress on the link is called pressure, and the link is referred to as a "strut." If the force is pulling away from the other end, the stress is called tension, and the link is called a "tie." Therefore, in this case, the only stress acting on a link is either pressure or tension in the direction of the straight line that represents it in the frame diagram, and all we need to do is determine the magnitude of this stress. In the actual structure, gravity acts on every part of the link, but in the diagram, we replace the actual weight of the various parts of the link with two weights that have the same resultant acting at the ends of the link.
We may now treat the diagram of the frame as composed of links without weight, but loaded at each joint with a weight made up of portions of the weights of all the links which meet in that joint. If any link has more than two joints we may substitute for it in the diagram an imaginary stiff frame, consisting of links, each of which has only two joints. The diagram of the frame is now reduced to a system of points, certain pairs of which are joined by straight lines, and each point is in general acted on by a weight or other force acting between it and some point external to the system. To complete [Page 148] the diagram we may represent these external forces as links, that is to say, straight lines joining the points of the frame to points external to the frame. Thus each weight may be represented by a link joining the point of application of the weight with the centre of the earth.
We can now consider the diagram of the frame as made up of weightless links, but each joint is loaded with weight based on the weights of all the links that connect at that joint. If any link has more than two joints, we can replace it in the diagram with a fictional rigid frame made of links, each having only two joints. The diagram of the frame is now simplified to a system of points, with certain pairs connected by straight lines, and each point is usually influenced by a weight or force acting between it and some external point. To complete [Page 148] the diagram, we can depict these external forces as links, meaning straight lines connecting the frame's points to points outside the frame. Therefore, each weight can be illustrated as a link connecting the weight's application point to the center of the earth.
But we can always construct an imaginary frame having its joints in the lines of action of these external forces, and this frame, together with the real frame and the links representing external forces, which join points in the one frame to points in the other frame, make up together a complete self-strained system in equilibrium, consisting of points connected by links acting by pressure or tension. We may in this way reduce any real structure to the case of a system of points with attractive or repulsive forces acting between certain pairs of these points, and keeping them in equilibrium. The direction of each of these forces is sufficiently indicated by that of the line joining the points, so that we have only to determine its magnitude. We might do this by calculation, and then write down on each link the pressure or the tension which acts in it.
But we can always create a hypothetical framework with its joints along the lines of action of these external forces. This framework, along with the actual framework and the links representing external forces that connect points in one framework to points in the other, together form a complete self-strained system in equilibrium. This system consists of points linked by connections that exert pressure or tension. In this way, we can simplify any real structure to a system of points with attractive or repulsive forces acting between specific pairs of these points, keeping them in equilibrium. The direction of each force is indicated by the line connecting the points, so we only need to determine its strength. We could do this through calculations and then note the pressure or tension acting on each link.
We should in this way obtain a mixed diagram in which the stresses are represented graphically as regards direction and position, but symbolically as regards magnitude. But we know that a force may be represented in a purely graphical manner by a straight line in the direction of the force containing as many units of length as there are units of force in the force. The end of this line is marked with an arrow head to show in which direction the force acts. According to this method each force is drawn in its proper position in the diagram of configuration of the frame. Such a diagram might be useful as a record of the result of calculation of the magnitude of the forces, but it would be of no use in enabling us to test the correctness of the calculation.
We should create a mixed diagram that visually shows the stresses in terms of direction and position, but symbolically represents them in terms of magnitude. However, we know that a force can be depicted graphically as a straight line pointing in the direction of the force, with the length of the line reflecting the magnitude of the force. The end of this line is marked with an arrowhead to indicate which way the force is acting. Using this method, each force is drawn in its correct position on the configuration diagram of the frame. While this diagram could serve as a record of the calculated magnitudes of the forces, it wouldn’t help us verify the accuracy of those calculations.
But we have a graphical method of testing the equilibrium of any set of forces acting at a point. We draw in series a set of lines parallel and proportional to these forces. If these lines form a closed polygon the forces are in equilibrium. (See Mechanics.) We might in this way form a series of polygons of forces, one for each joint of the frame. But in so doing we give up the principle of drawing the line representing a force from the point of application of the force, for all the sides of the polygon cannot pass through the same point, as the forces do. We also represent every stress twice over, for it appears as a side of both the polygons corresponding to the two joints between which it acts. But if we can arrange the polygons in such a way that the sides of any two polygons which represent the same stress coincide with each other, we may form a diagram in which every stress is represented in direction and magnitude, though not in position, by a single line which is the common boundary of the two polygons which represent the joints at the extremities of the corresponding piece of the frame.
But we have a visual way to test if any set of forces acting at a point is balanced. We draw a series of lines that are parallel and proportional to these forces. If these lines create a closed polygon, the forces are in equilibrium. (See Mechanics.) We could create a series of force polygons, one for each joint of the frame. However, this means we can't draw the line representing a force from the point where the force is applied, as not all sides of the polygon can converge on the same point like the forces do. We also end up representing each stress twice because it shows up as a side of both polygons corresponding to the two joints it connects. But if we can organize the polygons so that the sides of any two polygons representing the same stress align, we can create a diagram where every stress is indicated in direction and magnitude, though not in position, by a single line that is the shared boundary of the two polygons that represent the joints at either end of the corresponding section of the frame.
We have thus obtained a pure diagram of stress in which no attempt is made to represent the configuration of the material system, and in which every force is not only represented in direction and magnitude by a straight line, but the equilibrium of the forces at any joint is manifest by inspection, for we have only to examine whether the corresponding polygon is closed or not.
We have now created a clear stress diagram that doesn’t try to show the layout of the material system. In this diagram, each force is represented as a straight line, indicating both direction and magnitude. You can easily see whether the forces at any joint are balanced simply by checking if the corresponding polygon is closed.
The relations between the diagram of the frame and the diagram of stress are as follows:—To every link in the frame corresponds a straight line in the diagram of stress which represents in magnitude and direction the stress acting in that link; and to every joint of the frame corresponds a closed polygon in the diagram, and the forces acting at that joint are represented by the sides of the polygon taken in a certain cyclical order, the cyclical order of the sides of the two adjacent polygons being such that their common side is traced in opposite directions in going round the two polygons.
The relationship between the frame diagram and the stress diagram is as follows: For every link in the frame, there’s a straight line in the stress diagram that shows the magnitude and direction of the stress acting on that link. For every joint in the frame, there’s a closed shape in the diagram, and the forces acting at that joint are represented by the sides of the shape taken in a specific order. The order of the sides of the two adjacent shapes is arranged so that their common side is traced in opposite directions when moving around the two shapes.
The direction in which any side of a polygon is traced is the direction of the force acting on that joint of the frame which corresponds to the polygon, and due to that link of the frame which corresponds to the side. This determines whether the stress of the link is a pressure or a tension. If we know whether the stress of any one link is a pressure or a tension, this determines the cyclical order of the sides of the two polygons corresponding to the ends of the links, and therefore the cyclical order of all the polygons, and the nature of the stress in every link of the frame.
The direction in which any side of a polygon is traced reflects the direction of the force acting on the joint of the frame that corresponds to that polygon, and it relates to the link of the frame that corresponds to that side. This indicates whether the stress in the link is compression or tension. If we know whether the stress in any one link is compression or tension, it determines the sequence of the sides of the two polygons at the ends of the links, which in turn establishes the sequence of all the polygons and the nature of the stress in every link of the frame.
Reciprocal Diagrams.—When to every point of concourse of the lines in the diagram of stress corresponds a closed polygon in the skeleton of the frame, the two diagrams are said to be reciprocal.
Reciprocal Diagrams.—When each intersection point of the lines in the stress diagram corresponds to a closed polygon in the frame's skeleton, the two diagrams are considered reciprocal.
The first extensions of the method of diagrams of forces to other cases than that of the funicular polygon were given by Rankine in his Applied Mechanics (1857). The method was independently applied to a large number of cases by W. P. Taylor, a practical draughtsman in the office of J. B. Cochrane, and by Professor Clerk Maxwell in his lectures in King's College, London. In the Phil. Mag. for 1864 the latter pointed out the reciprocal properties of the two diagrams, and in a paper on "Reciprocal Figures, Frames and Diagrams of Forces," Trans. R.S. Edin. vol. xxvi., 1870, he showed the relation of the method to Airy's function of stress and to other mathematical methods. Professor Fleeming Jenkin has given a number of applications of the method to practice (Trans. R.S. Edin. vol. xxv.).
The first extensions of the force diagram method to cases beyond the funicular polygon were introduced by Rankine in his Applied Mechanics (1857). This method was also independently used in many situations by W. P. Taylor, a practical draftsman in J. B. Cochrane's office, and by Professor Clerk Maxwell during his lectures at King's College, London. In the Phil. Mag. in 1864, he highlighted the reciprocal properties of the two diagrams, and in a paper titled "Reciprocal Figures, Frames and Diagrams of Forces," Trans. R.S. Edin. vol. xxvi., 1870, he demonstrated the method's connection to Airy's stress function and other mathematical techniques. Professor Fleeming Jenkin has provided several practical applications of the method (Trans. R.S. Edin. vol. xxv.).
L. Cremona (Le Figure reciproche nella statica grafica, 1872) deduced the construction of reciprocal figures from the theory of the two components of a wrench as developed by Möbius. Karl Culmann, in his Graphische Statik (1st ed. 1864-1866, 2nd ed. 1875), made great use of diagrams of forces, some of which, however, are not reciprocal. Maurice Levy in his Statique graphique (1874) has treated the whole subject in an elementary but copious manner, and R. H. Bow, in his The Economics of Construction in Relation to Framed Structures (1873), materially simplified the process of drawing a diagram of stress reciprocal to a given frame acted on by a system of equilibrating external forces.
L. Cremona (Le Figure reciproche nella statica grafica, 1872) derived the construction of reciprocal figures from the theory of the two components of a wrench as developed by Möbius. Karl Culmann, in his Graphische Statik (1st ed. 1864-1866, 2nd ed. 1875), extensively utilized force diagrams, although some of them are not reciprocal. Maurice Levy, in his Statique graphique (1874), covered the entire topic in a straightforward yet thorough way, and R. H. Bow, in his The Economics of Construction in Relation to Framed Structures (1873), significantly simplified the process of drawing a stress diagram that is reciprocal to a given frame influenced by a system of balancing external forces.
![]() |
Fig. 1 Diagram of Configuration. |
Instead of lettering the joints of the frame, as is usually done, or the links of the frame, as was the custom of Clerk Maxwell, Bow places a letter in each of the polygonal areas enclosed by the links of the frame, and also in each of the divisions of surrounding space as separated by the lines of action of the external forces. When one link of the frame crosses another, the point of apparent intersection of the links is treated as if it were a real joint, and the stresses of each of the intersecting links are represented twice in the diagram of stress, as the opposite sides of the parallelogram which corresponds to the point of intersection.
Instead of labeling the joints of the frame, as is typically done, or the links of the frame, as was the practice of Clerk Maxwell, Bow places a letter in each of the polygonal areas surrounded by the links of the frame, and also in each of the sections of surrounding space divided by the lines of action of the external forces. When one link of the frame crosses another, the point where the links appear to intersect is treated like it’s a real joint, and the stresses of each of the intersecting links are shown twice in the stress diagram, reflecting the opposite sides of the parallelogram that corresponds to the point of intersection.
This method is followed in the lettering of the diagram of configuration (fig. 1), and the diagram of stress (fig. 2) of the linkwork which Professor Sylvester has called a quadruplane.
This approach is used in the labeling of the diagram of configuration (fig. 1) and the diagram of stress (fig. 2) of the linkwork that Professor Sylvester refers to as a quadruplane.
In fig. 1 the real joints are distinguished from the places where one link appears to cross another by the little circles O, P, Q, R, S, T, V. The four links RSTV form a "contraparallelogram" in which RS = TV and RV = ST. The triangles ROS, RPV, TQS are similar to each other. A fourth triangle (TNV), not drawn in the figure, would complete the quadruplane. The four points O, P, N, Q form a parallelogram whose angle POQ is constant and equal to π - SOR. The product of the distances OP and OQ is constant. The linkwork may be fixed at O. If any figure is traced by P, Q will trace the inverse figure, but turned round O through the constant angle POQ. In the diagram forces Pp, Qq are balanced by the force Co at the fixed point. The forces Pp and Qq are necessarily inversely as OP and OQ, and make equal angles with those lines.
In fig. 1, the actual joints are marked by the little circles O, P, Q, R, S, T, and V, distinguishing them from places where one link seems to cross another. The four links RSTV create a "contraparallelogram" where RS = TV and RV = ST. The triangles ROS, RPV, and TQS are similar to each other. A fourth triangle (TNV), which isn't shown in the figure, would complete the quadruplane. The four points O, P, N, and Q form a parallelogram, with the angle POQ being constant and equal to π - SOR. The product of the distances OP and OQ remains constant. The linkwork can be fixed at O. If P traces a figure, Q will trace the inverse figure, but rotated around O through the constant angle POQ. In the diagram, the forces Pp and Qq are balanced by the force Co at the fixed point. The forces Pp and Qq are inversely proportional to OP and OQ and make equal angles with those lines.
![]() |
Fig. 2 Diagram of Stress. |
Every closed area formed by the links or the external forces in the diagram of configuration is marked by a letter which corresponds to a point of concourse of lines in the diagram of stress. The stress in the link which is the common boundary of two areas is represented in the diagram of stress by the line joining the points corresponding to those areas. When a link is divided into two or more parts by lines crossing it, the stress in each part is represented by a different line for each part, but as the stress is the same throughout the link these lines are all equal and parallel. Thus in the figure the stress in RV is represented by the four equal and parallel lines HI, FG, DE and AB. If two areas have no part of their boundary in common the letters corresponding to them in the diagram of stress are not joined by a straight line. If, however, a straight line were drawn between them, it would represent in direction and magnitude the resultant of all the stresses in the links which are cut by any line, straight or curved, joining the two areas. For instance the areas F and C in fig. 1 have no common boundary, and the points F and C in fig. 2 are not joined by a straight line. But every path from the area F to the area C in fig. 1 passes through a series of other areas, and each passage from one area into a contiguous area corresponds to a line drawn in the diagram of stress. Hence the whole path from F [Page 149] to C in fig. 1 corresponds to a path formed of lines in fig. 2 and extending from F to C, and the resultant of all the stresses in the links cut by the path is represented by FC in fig. 2.
Every enclosed area created by the links or external forces in the configuration diagram is labeled with a letter that corresponds to a point where lines converge in the stress diagram. The stress in the link that forms the common boundary of two areas is shown in the stress diagram by the line connecting the points for those areas. When a link is divided into two or more segments by intersecting lines, the stress in each segment is depicted by a different line for each segment, but since the stress is the same throughout the link, these lines are all equal and parallel. So, in the figure, the stress in RV is illustrated by the four equal and parallel lines HI, FG, DE, and AB. If two areas don’t share any part of their boundary, the letters that represent them in the stress diagram are not connected by a straight line. However, if a straight line were drawn between them, it would indicate, in terms of direction and magnitude, the result of all the stresses in the links that are intersected by any line, whether straight or curved, joining the two areas. For example, the areas F and C in fig. 1 do not share a common boundary, and the points F and C in fig. 2 are not connected by a straight line. But every route from area F to area C in fig. 1 passes through a series of other areas, and each transition from one area to an adjacent area corresponds to a line drawn in the stress diagram. Therefore, the entire path from F [Page 149] to C in fig. 1 corresponds to a path made up of lines in fig. 2 extending from F to C, and the result of all the stresses in the links intersected by the path is represented by FC in fig. 2.
Many examples of stress diagrams are given in the article on bridges (q.v.).
Many examples of stress diagrams are provided in the article on bridges (see also).
Automatic Description of Diagrams.
Auto Description of Diagrams.
There are many other kinds of diagrams in which the two co-ordinates of a point in a plane are employed to indicate the simultaneous values of two related quantities. If a sheet of paper is made to move, say horizontally, with a constant known velocity, while a tracing point is made to move in a vertical straight line, the height varying as the value of any given physical quantity, the point will trace out a curve on the paper from which the value of that quantity at any given time may be determined. This principle is applied to the automatic registration of phenomena of all kinds, from those of meteorology and terrestrial magnetism to the velocity of cannon-shot, the vibrations of sounding bodies, the motions of animals, voluntary and involuntary, and the currents in electric telegraphs.
There are many other types of diagrams where the two coordinates of a point in a plane are used to show the simultaneous values of two related quantities. If a sheet of paper moves horizontally at a constant known speed while a tracing point moves straight up and down, with the height representing the value of a certain physical quantity, the point will create a curve on the paper that allows us to determine the value of that quantity at any specific time. This principle is used for the automatic recording of various phenomena, ranging from weather patterns and terrestrial magnetism to the speed of cannonballs, the vibrations of sound-producing objects, the movements of animals, both voluntary and involuntary, and the currents in electric telegraphs.
In Watt's indicator for steam engines the paper does not move with a constant velocity, but its displacement is proportional to that of the piston of the engine, while that of the tracing point is proportional to the pressure of the steam. Hence the co-ordinates of a point of the curve traced on the diagram represent the volume and the pressure of the steam in the cylinder. The indicator-diagram not only supplies a record of the pressure of the steam at each stage of the stroke of the engine, but indicates the work done by the steam in each stroke by the area enclosed by the curve traced on the diagram.(J. C. M.)
In Watt's indicator for steam engines, the paper doesn't move at a constant speed; instead, its movement corresponds to that of the engine's piston, while the tracing point's movement is linked to the steam pressure. This means that the coordinates of any point on the curve drawn on the diagram reflect the volume and pressure of the steam in the cylinder. The indicator diagram not only records the steam pressure at every stage of the engine's stroke but also shows the work done by the steam in each stroke through the area enclosed by the curve on the diagram.(J. C. M.)
DIAL and DIALLING. Dialling, sometimes called gnomonics, is a branch of applied mathematics which treats of the construction of sun-dials, that is, of those instruments, either fixed or portable, which determine the divisions of the day (Lat. dies) by the motion of the shadow of some object on which the sun's rays fall. It must have been one of the earliest applications of a knowledge of the apparent motion of the sun; though for a long time men would probably be satisfied with the division into morning and afternoon as marked by sun-rise, sun-set and the greatest elevation.
DIAL and DIALLING. Dialling, also known as gnomonics, is a branch of applied mathematics that focuses on creating sundials. These instruments, whether fixed or portable, measure the divisions of the day (Lat. dies) based on the movement of a shadow cast by an object that the sun’s rays hit. This must have been one of the earliest uses of knowledge about the sun's apparent movement; however, for a long time, people likely satisfied themselves with just recognizing morning and afternoon marked by sunrise, sunset, and the highest point of the sun.
History.—The earliest mention of a sun-dial is found in Isaiah xxxviii. 8: "Behold, I will bring again the shadow of the degrees which is gone down in the sun-dial of Ahaz ten degrees backward." The date of this would be about 700 years before the Christian era, but we know nothing of the character or construction of the instrument. The earliest of all sun-dials of which we have any certain knowledge was the hemicycle, or hemisphere, of the Chaldaean astronomer Berossus, who probably lived about 300 B.C. It consisted of a hollow hemisphere placed with its rim perfectly horizontal, and having a bead, or globule, fixed in any way at the centre. So long as the sun remained above the horizon the shadow of the bead would fall on the inside of the hemisphere, and the path of the shadow during the day would be approximately a circular arc. This arc, divided into twelve equal parts, determined twelve equal intervals of time for that day. Now, supposing this were done at the time of the solstices and equinoxes, and on as many intermediate days as might be considered sufficient, and then curve lines drawn through the corresponding points of division of the different arcs, the shadow of the bead falling on one of these curve lines would mark a division of time for that day, and thus we should have a sun-dial which would divide each period of daylight into twelve equal parts. These equal parts were called temporary hours; and, since the duration of daylight varies from day to day, the temporary hours of one day would differ from those of another; but this inequality would probably be disregarded at that time, and especially in countries where the variation between the longest summer day and the shortest winter day is much less than in our climates.
History.—The earliest mention of a sundial is found in Isaiah xxxviii. 8: "Look, I will make the shadow go back ten degrees on the sundial of Ahaz." This would date back around 700 years before the Christian era, but we don’t know much about the design or build of the device. The earliest known sundial was the hemicycle, or hemisphere, created by the Chaldean astronomer Berossus, who probably lived around 300 B.C. It consisted of a hollow hemisphere placed horizontally, with a bead or globule fixed at the center. As long as the sun was above the horizon, the shadow of the bead would fall inside the hemisphere, tracing an approximate circular arc throughout the day. This arc, divided into twelve equal parts, marked twelve equal intervals of time for that day. If this was done during the solstices and equinoxes, as well as on several intermediate days, they could draw curved lines through the corresponding division points of the different arcs, allowing the shadow of the bead to fall on one of these curved lines to mark a time segment for that day. Thus, we would have a sundial that divided each period of daylight into twelve equal parts. These segments were called temporary hours; since the length of daylight changes from day to day, the temporary hours of one day would be different from another; however, this difference was likely overlooked at the time, especially in regions where the variation between the longest summer day and the shortest winter day is much less than in our climates.
The dial of Berossus remained in use for centuries. The Arabians, as appears from the work of Albategnius, still followed the same construction about the year A.D. 900. Four of these dials have in modern times been found in Italy. One, discovered at Tivoli in 1746, is supposed to have belonged to Cicero, who, in one of his letters, says that he had sent a dial of this kind to his villa near Tusculum. The second and third were found in 1751—one at Castel-Nuovo and the other at Rignano; and a fourth was found in 1762 at Pompeii. G. H. Martini in his Abhandlungen von den Sonnenuhren der Alten (Leipzig, 1777), says that this dial was made for the latitude of Memphis; it may therefore be the work of Egyptians, perhaps constructed in the school of Alexandria.
The dial of Berossus was used for centuries. The Arabs, as shown in the work of Albategnius, were still using the same design around A.D. 900. Four of these dials have been discovered in Italy in modern times. One, found in Tivoli in 1746, is thought to have belonged to Cicero, who mentioned in one of his letters that he sent a dial of this type to his villa near Tusculum. The second and third were found in 1751—one at Castel-Nuovo and the other at Rignano; a fourth was discovered in 1762 at Pompeii. G. H. Martini in his Abhandlungen von den Sonnenuhren der Alten (Leipzig, 1777) states that this dial was made for the latitude of Memphis; it may therefore be the work of Egyptians, possibly created in the school of Alexandria.
Herodotus recorded that the Greeks derived from the Babylonians the use of the gnomon, but the great progress made by the Greeks in geometry enabled them in later times to construct dials of great complexity, some of which remain to us, and are proof not only of extensive knowledge but also of great ingenuity.
Herodotus noted that the Greeks learned how to use the gnomon from the Babylonians, but the significant advancements the Greeks made in geometry allowed them later to create highly complex sundials, some of which still exist today and demonstrate not just extensive knowledge but also remarkable ingenuity.
Ptolemy's Almagest treats of the construction of dials by means of his analemma, an instrument which solved a variety of astronomical problems. The constructions given by him were sufficient for regular dials, that is, horizontal dials, or vertical dials facing east, west, north or south, and these are the only ones he treats of. It is certain, however, that the ancients were able to construct declining dials, as is shown by that most interesting monument of ancient gnomics—the Tower of the Winds at Athens. This is a regular octagon, on the faces of which the eight principal winds are represented, and over them eight different dials—four facing the cardinal points and the other four facing the intermediate directions. The date of the dials is long subsequent to that of the tower; for Vitruvius, who describes the tower in the sixth chapter of his first book, says nothing about the dials, and as he has described all the dials known in his time, we must believe that the dials of the tower did not then exist. The hours are still the temporary hours or, as the Greeks called them, hectemoria.
Ptolemy's Almagest discusses how to build dials using his analemma, a tool that addressed various astronomical challenges. The designs he provided were enough for standard dials, meaning horizontal dials or vertical dials facing east, west, north, or south, which are the only ones he covers. However, it's clear that ancient people could construct declining dials, as evidenced by the fascinating ancient gnomics monument—the Tower of the Winds in Athens. This is a regular octagon, with each side representing one of the eight main winds, and above them are eight distinct dials—four facing the cardinal points and the other four aimed at the intermediate directions. The dials were created much later than the tower itself; Vitruvius, who mentions the tower in the sixth chapter of his first book, doesn't mention the dials, and since he documented all the dials known in his time, we must conclude that the tower's dials didn't exist then. The hours on these dials are still the temporary hours or, as the Greeks called them, hectemoria.
The first sun-dial erected at Rome was in the year 290 B.C., and this Papirius Cursor had taken from the Samnites. A dial which Valerius Messalla had brought from Catania, the latitude of which is five degrees less than that of Rome, was placed in the forum in the year 261 B.C. The first dial actually constructed at Rome was in the year 164 B.C., by order of Q. Marcius Philippus, but as no other Roman has written on gnomonics, this was perhaps the work of a foreign artist. If, too, we remember that the dial found at Pompeii was made for the latitude of Memphis, and consequently less adapted to its position than that of Catania to Rome, we may infer that mathematical knowledge was not cultivated in Italy.
The first sundial built in Rome was in 290 B.C., and it was taken by Papirius Cursor from the Samnites. A dial that Valerius Messalla brought from Catania, which is five degrees further south than Rome, was put up in the forum in 261 B.C. The first sundial actually made in Rome was in 164 B.C., ordered by Q. Marcius Philippus, but since no other Roman has written about gnomonics, it was probably created by a foreign artist. If we also consider that the dial found in Pompeii was designed for the latitude of Memphis, making it less suitable for its location than the Catania dial is for Rome, we can assume that mathematical knowledge was not significantly developed in Italy.
The Arabians were much more successful. They attached great importance to gnomonics, the principles of which they had learned from the Greeks, but they greatly simplified and diversified the Greek constructions. One of their writers, Abu'l Hassan, who lived about the beginning of the 13th century, taught them how to trace dials on cylindrical, conical and other surfaces. He even introduced equal or equinoctial hours, but the idea was not supported, and the temporary hours alone continued in use.
The Arabians were much more successful. They placed a high value on gnomonics, the principles of which they had learned from the Greeks, but they simplified and expanded on the Greek designs. One of their writers, Abu'l Hassan, who lived around the early 13th century, taught them how to create dials on cylindrical, conical, and other surfaces. He even introduced equal or equinoctial hours, but the concept didn’t catch on, and only the temporary hours remained in use.
Where or when the great and important step already conceived by Abu'l Hassan, and perhaps by others, of reckoning by equal hours was generally adopted cannot now be determined. The history of gnomonics from the 13th to the beginning of the 16th century is almost a blank, and during that time the change took place. We can see, however, that the change would necessarily follow the introduction of clocks and other mechanical methods of measuring time; for, however imperfect these were, the hours they marked would be of the same length in summer and in winter, and the discrepancy between these equal hours and the temporary hours of the sun-dial would soon be too important to be overlooked. Now, we know that a balance clock was put up in the palace of Charles V. of France about the year 1370, and we may reasonably suppose that the new sun-dials came into general use during the 14th and 15th centuries.
Where or when the significant step of measuring time using equal hours, first conceived by Abu'l Hassan and possibly others, became widely accepted is unclear today. The history of gnomonics from the 13th to the early 16th century is mostly unknown, and this is when the change occurred. However, it is evident that this shift would follow the introduction of clocks and other mechanical timekeeping methods; despite their imperfections, the hours they tracked would remain consistent in length throughout the year, making the differences between these equal hours and the temporary hours from sundials impossible to ignore. We know that a balance clock was installed in the palace of Charles V of France around 1370, and it’s reasonable to assume that the new sundials became commonly used during the 14th and 15th centuries.
Among the earliest of the modern writers on gnomonics was Sebastian Münster (q.v.), who published his Horologiographia at Basel in 1531. He gives a number of correct rules, but without demonstrations. Among his inventions was a moon-dial,[1] but this does not admit of much accuracy.
Among the earliest modern writers on gnomonics was Sebastian Münster (see above), who published his Horologiographia in Basel in 1531. He provided several accurate rules, but without proofs. One of his inventions was a moon dial,[1] but this doesn't allow for much accuracy.
During the 17th century dialling was discussed at great length by many writers on astronomy. Clavius devotes a quarto [Page 150] volume of 800 pages entirely to the subject. This was published in 1612, and may be considered to contain all that was known at that time.
During the 17th century, many writers on astronomy extensively discussed dialling. Clavius dedicated a sizeable 800-page quarto [a id="page150"] entirely to the topic. This was published in 1612 and can be seen as containing all that was known at that time.
In the 18th century clocks and watches began to supersede sun-dials, and these have gradually fallen into disuse except as an additional ornament to a garden, or in remote country districts where the old dial on the church tower still serves as an occasional check on the modern clock by its side. The art of constructing dials may now be looked upon as little more than a mathematical recreation.
In the 18th century, clocks and watches started to replace sundials, which have slowly become obsolete except as decorative pieces in gardens, or in isolated rural areas where the old dial on the church tower still acts as an occasional reference for the modern clock next to it. The skill of making sundials can now be seen as little more than a mathematical hobby.
General Principles.—The diurnal and the annual motions of the earth are the elementary astronomical facts on which dialling is founded. That the earth turns upon its axis uniformly from west to east in twenty-four hours, and that it is carried round the sun in one year at a nearly uniform rate, is the correct way of expressing these facts. But the effect will be precisely the same, and it will suit our purpose better, and make our explanations easier, if we adopt the ideas of the ancients, of which our senses furnish apparent confirmation, and assume the earth to be fixed. Then, the sun and stars revolve round the earth's axis uniformly from east to west once a day—the sun lagging a little behind the stars, making its day some four minutes longer—so that at the end of the year it finds itself again in the same place, having made a complete revolution of the heavens relatively to the stars from west to east.
General Principles.—The daily and yearly movements of the Earth are the basic astronomical facts that dialling relies on. The Earth rotates on its axis consistently from west to east every twenty-four hours, and it travels around the sun in a year at almost a steady rate; this is the accurate way to describe these facts. However, the effect will be exactly the same, and it will work better for our purpose, making our explanations clearer, if we adopt the views of the ancients, which our senses confirm. We can assume the Earth is stationary. Then, the sun and stars revolve around the Earth’s axis consistently from east to west every day—the sun trailing a little behind the stars, making its day about four minutes longer—so that by the end of the year, it returns to the same position after completing a full revolution of the heavens in relation to the stars from west to east.
The fixed axis about which all these bodies revolve daily is a line through the earth's centre; but the radius of the earth is so small, compared with the enormous distance of the sun, that, if we draw a parallel axis through any point of the earth's surface, we may safely look on that as being the axis of the celestial motions. The error in the case of the sun would not, at its maximum, that is, at 6 A.M. and 6 P.M., exceed half a second of time, and at noon would vanish. An axis so drawn is in the plane of the meridian, and points to the pole, its elevation being equal to the latitude of the place.
The fixed axis around which all these bodies rotate daily is a line through the center of the Earth; however, since the radius of the Earth is tiny compared to the vast distance to the sun, we can consider a parallel axis drawn through any point on the Earth's surface to be the axis of the celestial motions. The maximum error for the sun would be at most half a second of time, occurring at 6 A.M. and 6 P.M., and at noon, it would be negligible. This axis is in the plane of the meridian and points to the pole, with its elevation equal to the latitude of the location.
The diurnal motion of the stars is strictly uniform, and so would that of the sun be if the daily retardation of about four minutes, spoken of above, were always the same. But this is constantly altering, so that the time, as measured by the sun's motion, and also consequently as measured by a sun-dial, does not move on at a strictly uniform pace. This irregularity, which is slight, would be of little consequence in the ordinary affairs of life, but clocks and watches being mechanical measures of time could not, except by extreme complication, be made to follow this irregularity, even if desirable.
The daily movement of the stars is perfectly consistent, and the sun's movement would be too if the daily delay of about four minutes mentioned earlier remained constant. However, this delay is always changing, which means that the time measured by the sun's path— and therefore by a sundial— doesn't tick away at a completely steady rate. This slight irregularity wouldn’t matter much in our everyday lives, but because clocks and watches are mechanical timekeeping devices, they can't accurately account for this inconsistency without getting really complicated, even if we wanted them to.
The clock is constructed to mark uniform time in such wise that the length of the clock day shall be the average of all the solar days in the year. Four times a year the clock and the sun-dial agree exactly; but the sun-dial, now going a little slower, now a little faster, will be sometimes behind, sometimes before the clock-the greatest accumulated difference being about sixteen minutes for a few days in November, but on the average much less. The four days on which the two agree are April 15, June 15, September 1 and December 24.
The clock is designed to keep consistent time so that the length of the clock day is the average of all the solar days throughout the year. Four times a year, the clock and the sun-dial match perfectly; however, the sun-dial, sometimes running a bit slower and other times a bit faster, can be ahead or behind the clock—with the largest difference reaching about sixteen minutes for a few days in November, but usually much less. The four days when the two align are April 15, June 15, September 1, and December 24.
Clock-time is called mean time, that marked by the sun-dial is called apparent time, and the difference between them is the equation of time. It is given in most calendars and almanacs, frequently under the heading "clock slow," "clock fast." When the time by the sun-dial is known, the equation of time will at once enable us to obtain the corresponding clock-time, or vice versa.
Clock-time is referred to as mean time, while the time indicated by the sundial is known as apparent time, and the difference between the two is called the equation of time. This information is provided in most calendars and almanacs, often under titles like "clock slow" or "clock fast." When we know the time from the sundial, the equation of time allows us to quickly find the matching clock-time, or the other way around.
Atmospheric refraction introduces another error by altering the apparent position of the sun; but the effect is too small to need consideration in the construction of an instrument which, with the best workmanship, does not after all admit of very great accuracy.
Atmospheric refraction causes another error by changing where we see the sun; however, the effect is too minor to worry about when building an instrument that, even with top-notch craftsmanship, isn't capable of extreme accuracy anyway.
The general principles of dialling will now be readily understood. The problem before us is the following:—A rod, or style, as it is called, being firmly fixed in a direction parallel to the earth's axis, we have to find how and where points or lines of reference must be traced on some fixed surface behind the style, so that when the shadow of the style falls on a certain one of these lines, we may know that at that moment it is solar noon,—that is, that the plane through the style and through the sun then coincides with the meridian; again, that when the shadow reaches the next line of reference, it is 1 o'clock by solar time, or, which comes to the same thing, that the above plane through the style and through the sun has just turned through the twenty-fourth part of a complete revolution; and so on for the subsequent hours,—the hours before noon being indicated in a similar manner. The style and the surface on which these lines are traced together constitute the dial.
The basic principles of dialing should now be clear. The problem we have is this: a rod, or style, is securely positioned parallel to the earth's axis. We need to determine how and where to mark points or lines of reference on a fixed surface behind the style, so that when the shadow of the style falls on one of these lines, we know it's solar noon. This means that the plane formed by the style and the sun aligns with the meridian. Also, when the shadow reaches the next reference line, it indicates it's 1 o'clock by solar time, which means that the plane through the style and the sun has just rotated through one twenty-fourth of a full revolution. This process continues for the following hours, with the hours before noon marked in a similar way. The style and the surface where these lines are drawn together make up the dial.
The position of an intended sun-dial having been selected—whether on church tower, south front of farmstead or garden wall—the surface must be prepared, if necessary, to receive the hour-lines.
The location for the intended sundial has been chosen—whether on a church tower, the south side of a farmhouse, or a garden wall—the surface needs to be prepared, if necessary, to accommodate the hour lines.
The chief, and in fact the only practical difficulty will be the accurate fixing of the style, for on its accuracy the value of the instrument depends. It must be in the meridian plane, and must make an angle with the horizon equal to the latitude of the place. The latter condition will offer no difficulty, but the exact determination of the meridian plane which passes through the point where the style is fixed to the surface is not so simple. At present we shall assume that the style has been fixed in its true position. The style itself will be usually a stout metal wire, and when we speak of the shadow cast by the style it must always be understood that the middle line of the thin band of shade is meant.
The main, and really the only practical challenge will be getting the style set correctly because its accuracy affects the instrument's value. It has to be in the meridian plane and create an angle with the horizon that matches the latitude of the location. The latter requirement should be straightforward, but accurately determining the meridian plane that goes through the point where the style is attached to the surface is not that simple. For now, we'll assume the style is positioned correctly. The style itself will typically be a sturdy metal wire, and when we talk about the shadow cast by the style, we always mean the center line of the thin band of shade.
The point where the style meets the dial is called the centre of the dial. It is the centre from which all the hour-lines radiate.
The spot where the style connects with the dial is known as the center of the dial. It is the center from which all the hour lines spread out.
The position of the XII o'clock line is the most important to determine accurately, since all the others are usually made to depend on this one. We cannot trace it correctly on the dial until the style has been itself accurately fixed in its proper place. When that is done the XII o'clock line will be found by the intersection of the dial surface with the vertical plane which contains the style; and the most simple way of drawing it on the dial will be by suspending a plummet from some point of the style whence it may hang freely, and waiting until the shadows of both style and plumb-line coincide on the dial. This single shadow will be the XII o'clock line.
The position of the 12 o'clock line is crucial to determine accurately, since all the other lines usually rely on this one. We can't trace it correctly on the dial until the gnomon is accurately fixed in its proper place. Once that's done, the 12 o'clock line will be found at the intersection of the dial surface with the vertical plane containing the gnomon. The simplest way to draw it on the dial is by hanging a weight from some point on the gnomon, allowing it to hang freely, and waiting until the shadows of both the gnomon and the weight align on the dial. This single shadow will represent the 12 o'clock line.
In one class of dials, namely, all the vertical ones, the XII o'clock line is simply the vertical line from the centre; it can, therefore, at once be traced on the dial face by using a fine plumb-line.
In one type of dials, specifically all the vertical ones, the XII o'clock line is just the vertical line from the center; it can, therefore, be easily marked on the dial face using a fine plumb line.
The XII o'clock line being traced, the easiest and most accurate method of tracing the other hour-lines would, at the present day when good watches are common, be by marking where the shadow of the style falls when 1, 2, 3, &c., hours have elapsed since noon, and the next morning by the same means the forenoon hour-lines could be traced; and in the same manner the hours might be subdivided into halves and quarters, or even into minutes.
The 12 o'clock line being drawn, the simplest and most accurate way to mark the other hour lines today, when good watches are common, would be to note where the shadow of the gnomon falls after 1, 2, 3, etc., hours have passed since noon. The next morning, the same method can be used to mark the morning hour lines; similarly, the hours can be divided into halves, quarters, or even into minutes.
But formerly, when watches did not exist, the tracing of the I, II, III, &c., o'clock lines was done by calculating the angle which each of these lines would make with the XII o'clock line. Now, except in the simple cases of a horizontal dial or of a vertical dial facing a cardinal point, this would require long and intricate calculations, or elaborate geometrical constructions, implying considerable mathematical knowledge, but also introducing increased chances of error. The chief source of error would lie in the uncertainty of the data; for the position of the dial-plane would have to be found before the calculations began,—that is, it would be necessary to know exactly by how many degrees it declined from the south towards the east or west, and by how many degrees it inclined from the vertical. The ancients, with the means at their disposal, could obtain these results only very roughly.
But in the past, when watches didn't exist, the drawing of the I, II, III, etc., o'clock lines was done by calculating the angle that each line would make with the XII o'clock line. Nowadays, except in simple situations like a horizontal or a vertical dial facing a cardinal direction, this would involve complicated calculations or detailed geometrical constructions, requiring a good amount of mathematical knowledge and also increasing the chances of error. The main source of error would come from uncertainties in the data; the position of the dial plane would need to be determined before starting the calculations—that is, it would be essential to know exactly how many degrees it tilted from south towards east or west, and how many degrees it leaned from the vertical. The ancients, with the tools they had, could only achieve these results very roughly.
Dials received different names according to their position:—
Dials were given different names based on their position:—
Horizontal dials, when traced on a horizontal plane;
Horizontal dials, when drawn on a flat surface;
Vertical dials, when on a vertical plane facing one of the cardinal points;
Vertical dials, when positioned on a vertical surface facing one of the main directions;
Vertical declining dials, on a vertical plane not facing a cardinal point;
Vertical declining dials, positioned on a vertical plane that doesn’t face a cardinal point;
Inclining dials, when traced on planes neither vertical nor horizontal (these were further distinguished as reclining when leaning backwards from an observer, proclining when leaning forwards);
Inclining dials, when drawn on surfaces that are neither vertical nor horizontal (these were further categorized as reclining when slanting backwards from an observer, proclining when slanting forwards);
Equinoctial dials, when the plane is at right angles to the earth's axis, &c. &c.
Equinoctial dials, when the plane is perpendicular to the earth's axis, etc. etc.
Dial Construction.—A very correct view of the problem of dial construction may be obtained as follows:—
Dial Construction.—A clear understanding of the issue of dial construction can be gained as follows:—
![]() |
Fig. 1 |
Conceive a transparent cylinder (fig. 1) having an axis AB parallel to the axis of the earth. On the surface of the cylinder let equidistant generating-lines be traced 15° apart, one of them XII ... XII being in the meridian plane through AB, and the others I ... I, II ... II, &c., following in the order of the sun's motion.
Conceive a clear cylinder (fig. 1) with an axis AB that runs parallel to the Earth's axis. On the surface of the cylinder, draw equidistant lines 15° apart, with one line XII ... XII located in the meridian plane through AB, and the others I ... I, II ... II, etc., arranged in the sequence of the sun's movement.
Then the shadow of the line AB will obviously fall on the line XII ... XII at apparent noon, on the line I ... I at one hour after noon, on II ... II at two hours after noon, and so on. If now the cylinder be cut by any plane MN representing the plane on which the dial is to be traced, the shadow of AB will be intercepted by this plane and fall on the lines AXII AI, AII, &c.
Then the shadow of the line AB will clearly fall on the line XII ... XII at apparent noon, on the line I ... I at one hour after noon, on II ... II at two hours after noon, and so on. If we now cut the cylinder with any plane MN that represents the plane where the dial will be created, the shadow of AB will be blocked by this plane and land on the lines AXII AI, AII, etc.
The construction of the dial consists in determining the angles made [Page 151] by AI, AII, &c. with AXII; the line AXII itself, being in the vertical plane through AB, may be supposed known.
The construction of the dial involves figuring out the angles created by AI, AII, etc., with AXII; the line AXII itself, being in the vertical plane through AB, can be assumed to be known.
For the purposes of actual calculation, perhaps a transparent sphere will, with advantage, replace the cylinder, and we shall here apply it to calculate the angles made by the hour-line with the XII o'clock line in the two cases of a horizontal dial and of a vertical south dial.
For the actual calculations, it might be better to use a transparent sphere instead of a cylinder, and we'll use it here to calculate the angles formed by the hour line with the 12 o'clock line in the two cases of a horizontal dial and a vertical south dial.
![]() |
Fig. 2. |
Horizontal Dial.—Let PEp (fig. 2), the axis of the supposed transparent sphere, be directed towards the north and south poles of the heavens. Draw the two great circles, HMA, QMa, the former
Horizontal Dial.—Let PEp (fig. 2), the axis of the assumed transparent sphere, be aimed at the north and south poles of the sky. Draw the two great circles, HMA, QMa, the former
horizontal, the other perpendicular to the axis Pp, and therefore coinciding with the plane of the equator. Let EZ be vertical, then the circle QZP will be the meridian, and by its intersection A with the horizontal circle will determine the XII o'clock line EA. Next divide the equatorial circle QMa into 24 equal parts ab, bc, cd, &c. ... of 15° each, beginning from the meridian Pa, and through the various points of division and the poles draw the great circles Pbp, Pcp, &c. ... These will exactly correspond to the equidistant generating lines on the cylinder in the previous construction, and the shadow of the style will fall on these circles after successive intervals of 1,2, 3, &c., hours from noon. If they meet the horizontal circle in the points B, C, D, &c., then EB, EC, ED, &c. ... will be the I, II, III, &c., hour-lines required; and the problem of the horizontal dial consists in calculating the angles which these lines make with the XII o'clock line EA, whose position is known. The spherical triangles PAB, PAC, &c., enable us to do this readily. They are all right-angled at A, the side PA is the latitude of the place, and the angles APB, APC, &c., are respectively 15°, 30°, &c., then
horizontal, the other perpendicular to the axis Pp, and therefore coinciding with the plane of the equator. Let EZ be vertical, then the circle QZP will be the meridian, and by its intersection A with the horizontal circle, it will determine the XII o'clock line EA. Next, divide the equatorial circle QMa into 24 equal parts ab, bc, cd, &c. ... of 15° each, starting from the meridian Pa, and through the various division points and the poles, draw the great circles Pbp, Pcp, &c. ... These will directly correspond to the equally spaced generating lines on the cylinder in the previous construction, and the shadow of the gnomon will fall on these circles at successive intervals of 1, 2, 3, &c., hours from noon. If they meet the horizontal circle at points B, C, D, &c., then EB, EC, ED, &c. ... will be the I, II, III, &c., hour-lines needed; and the problem of the horizontal dial consists in calculating the angles that these lines make with the XII o'clock line EA, whose position is known. The spherical triangles PAB, PAC, &c. allow us to do this easily. They are all right-angled at A, the side PA is the latitude of the location, and the angles APB, APC, &c. are respectively 15°, 30°, &c., then
tan AB = tan 15° sin latitude,
tan AC = tan 30° sin latitude,
&c. &c.
tan AB = tan 15° sin latitude,
tan AC = tan 30° sin latitude,
&c. &c.
These determine the sides AB, AC, &c., that is, the angles AEB, AEC, &c., required.
These determine the sides AB, AC, etc., that is, the angles AEB, AEC, etc., needed.
The I o'clock hour-line EB must make an angle with the meridian EA of 11° 51' on a London dial, of 12° 31' at Edinburgh, of 11° 23' at Paris, 12° 0' at Berlin, 9° 55' at New York and 9° 19' at San Francisco. In the same way may be found the angles made by the other hour-lines.
The 1 o'clock hour line EB should form an angle with the meridian EA of 11° 51' on a London dial, 12° 31' at Edinburgh, 11° 23' at Paris, 12° 0' at Berlin, 9° 55' at New York, and 9° 19' at San Francisco. Similarly, the angles formed by the other hour lines can be determined.
The calculations of these angles must extend throughout one quadrant from noon to VI o'clock, but need not be carried further, because all the other hour-lines can at once be deduced from these. In the first place the dial is symmetrically divided by the meridian, and therefore two times equidistant from noon will have their hour-lines equidistant from the meridian; thus the XI o'clock line and the I o'clock line must make the same angles with it, the X o'clock the same as the II o'clock, and so on. And next, the 24 great circles, which were drawn to determine these lines, are in reality only 12; for clearly the great circle which gives I o'clock after midnight, and that which gives I o'clock after noon, are one and the same, and so also for the other hours. Therefore the hour-lines between VI in the evening and VI the next morning are the prolongations of the remaining twelve.
The calculations for these angles should cover one quadrant from noon to 6 o'clock, but there's no need to go beyond that because all the other hour lines can be figured out from these. First, the dial is divided symmetrically by the meridian, so two times that are equidistant from noon will have their hour lines at the same distance from the meridian. This means that the 11 o'clock line and the 1 o'clock line will create the same angles with it, the 10 o'clock line will be the same as the 2 o'clock line, and so on. Also, the 24 hour lines drawn to establish these times are actually just 12; because the hour line for 1 o'clock after midnight and the one for 1 o'clock after noon are the same line, and this holds true for the other hours as well. So, the hour lines between 6 in the evening and 6 the next morning are simply the extensions of the other twelve.
Let us now remove the imaginary sphere with all its circles, and retain only the style EP and the plane HMA with the lines traced on it, and we shall have the horizontal dial.
Let’s now take away the imaginary sphere with all its circles and keep just the style EP and the plane HMA with the lines drawn on it, and we’ll have the horizontal dial.
On the longest day in London the sun rises a little before 4 o'clock, and sets a little after 8 o'clock; there is therefore no necessity for extending a London dial beyond those hours. At Edinburgh the limits will be a little longer, while at Hammerfest, which is within the Arctic circle, the whole circuit will be required.
On the longest day in London, the sun rises just before 4 AM and sets just after 8 PM; so there's no need to extend a London clock beyond those hours. In Edinburgh, the daylight will last a bit longer, while in Hammerfest, which is within the Arctic circle, the whole span of daylight will be needed.
Instead of a wire style it is often more convenient to use a metal plate from one quarter to half an inch in thickness. This plate, which is sometimes in the form of a right-angled triangle, must have an acute angle equal to the latitude of the place, and, when properly fixed in a vertical position on the dial, its two faces must coincide with the meridian plane, and the sloping edges formed by the thickness of the plate must point to the pole and form two parallel styles. Since there are two styles, there must be two dials, or rather two half dials, because a little consideration will show that, owing to the thickness of the plate, these styles will only one at a time cast a shadow. Thus the eastern edge will give the shadow for all hours before 6 o'clock in the morning. From 6 o'clock until noon the western edge will be used. At noon it will change again to the eastern edge until 6 o'clock in the evening, and finally the western edge for the remaining hours of daylight.
Instead of using a wire style, it’s often easier to use a metal plate that’s about a quarter to half an inch thick. This plate, which can sometimes be shaped like a right-angled triangle, needs to have an acute angle equal to the latitude of the location. When it’s properly secured in a vertical position on the dial, its two faces should line up with the meridian plane, and the sloping edges created by the thickness of the plate must point toward the pole, forming two parallel styles. Since there are two styles, you’ll need two dials, or rather two half dials, because if you think about it, due to the plate's thickness, only one style will cast a shadow at a time. So, the eastern edge will cast the shadow for all hours before 6 a.m. From 6 a.m. until noon, the western edge will be used. At noon, it will switch back to the eastern edge until 6 p.m., and finally, it will use the western edge for the rest of the daylight hours.
![]() |
Fig. 3. |
The centres of the two dials will be at the points where the styles meet the dial face; but, in drawing the hour-lines, we must be careful to draw only those lines for which the corresponding style is able to give a shadow as explained above. The dial will thus have the appearance of a single dial plate, and there will be no confusion (see fig. 3).
The centers of the two dials will be where the styles meet the dial face; however, when drawing the hour lines, we need to make sure to only draw the lines that the corresponding style can cast a shadow for, as explained above. This way, the dial will look like a single dial plate, and there won’t be any confusion (see fig. 3).
The line of demarcation between the shadow and the light will be better defined than when a wire style is used; but the indications by this double dial will always be one minute too fast in the morning and one minute too slow in the afternoon. This is owing to the magnitude of the sun, whose angular breadth is half a degree. The well-defined shadows are given, not by the centre of the sun, as we should require them, but by the forward limb in the morning and by the backward one in the afternoon; and the sun takes just about a minute to advance through a space equal to its half-breadth.
The boundary between shadow and light will be clearer than when using a wire style; however, the readings on this double dial will always be one minute too fast in the morning and one minute too slow in the afternoon. This is because of the size of the sun, which has an angular width of half a degree. The clearly defined shadows are cast not by the center of the sun, as we might expect, but by the leading edge in the morning and by the trailing edge in the afternoon. The sun takes about a minute to move through a distance equal to its half-width.
Dials of this description are frequently met with. The dial plate is of metal as well as the vertical piece upon it, and they may be purchased ready for placing on the pedestal,—the dial with all the hour-lines traced on it and the style plate firmly fastened in its proper position, if not even cast in the same piece with the dial plate.
Dials like this are commonly found. The dial plate is made of metal, as is the vertical piece on it, and you can buy them ready to set on the pedestal—the dial with all the hour lines marked on it and the style plate securely attached in the right spot, if not even cast as part of the same piece with the dial plate.
When placing it on the pedestal care must be taken that the dial be perfectly horizontal and accurately oriented. The levelling will be done with a spirit-level, and the orientation will be best effected either in the forenoon or in the afternoon, by turning the dial plate till the time given by the shadow (making the one minute correction mentioned above) agrees with a good watch whose error on solar time is known. It is, however, important to bear in mind that a dial, so built up beforehand, will have the angle at the base equal to the latitude of some selected place, such as London, and the hour-lines will be drawn in directions calculated for the same latitude. Such a dial can therefore not be used near Edinburgh or Glasgow, although it would, without appreciable error, be adapted to any place whose latitude did not differ more than 20 or 30 m. from that of London, and it would be safe to employ it in Essex, Kent or Wiltshire.
When placing it on the stand, you need to make sure that the dial is perfectly horizontal and properly oriented. Leveling will be done with a spirit level, and you should best orient it in the morning or afternoon by adjusting the dial plate until the time indicated by the shadow (making the one-minute adjustment mentioned earlier) matches a reliable watch with a known error on solar time. However, it's important to remember that a dial built this way will have its base angle equal to the latitude of a specific location, like London, and the hour lines will be drawn for that same latitude. Therefore, this dial cannot be used near Edinburgh or Glasgow, although it can be used with negligible error in any location where the latitude is within 20 or 30 miles of that of London. It would be safe to use it in Essex, Kent, or Wiltshire.
If a series of such dials were constructed, differing by 30 m. in latitude, then an intending purchaser could select one adapted to a place whose latitude was within 15 m. of his own, and the error of time would never exceed a small fraction of a minute. The following table will enable us to check the accuracy of the hour-lines and of the angle of the style,—all angles on the dial being readily measured with an ordinary protractor. It extends from 50° lat. to 59½° lat., and therefore includes the whole of Great Britain and Ireland:—
If a series of dials like this were made, each differing by 30 minutes in latitude, a buyer could choose one that matched a location within 15 minutes of their own latitude, ensuring the time error wouldn't exceed a small fraction of a minute. The following table will help us verify the accuracy of the hour lines and the angle of the gnomon—all angles on the dial can be easily measured with a standard protractor. It ranges from 50° latitude to 59½° latitude, so it covers all of Great Britain and Ireland:—
LAT. |
11 A.M. 1 P.M. |
X a.m. II p.m. |
IX A.M. III P.M. |
8 A.M. 4 P.M. |
VII. A.M. V. P.M. |
6 A.M. 6 P.M. |
|||||||
50° | 0′ | 11° | 36′ | 23° | 51′ | 37° | 27′ | 53° | 0′ | 70° | 43′ | 90° | 0′ |
50 | 30 | 11 | 41 | 24 | 1 | 37 | 39 | 53 | 12 | 70 | 51 | 90 | 0 |
51 | 0 | 11 | 46 | 24 | 10 | 37 | 51 | 53 | 23 | 70 | 59 | 90 | 0 |
51 | 30 | 11 | 51 | 24 | 19 | 38 | 3 | 53 | 35 | 71 | 6 | 90 | 0 |
52 | 0 | 11 | 55 | 24 | 28 | 38 | 14 | 53 | 46 | 71 | 13 | 90 | 0 |
52 | 30 | 12 | 0 | 24 | 37 | 38 | 25 | 53 | 57 | 71 | 20 | 90 | 0 |
53 | 0 | 12 | 5 | 24 | 45 | 38 | 37 | 54 | 8 | 71 | 27 | 90 | 0 |
53 | 30 | 12 | 9 | 24 | 54 | 38 | 48 | 54 | 19 | 71 | 34 | 90 | 0 |
54 | 0 | 12 | 14 | 25 | 2 | 38 | 58 | 54 | 29 | 71 | 40 | 90 | 0 |
54 | 30 | 12 | 18 | 25 | 10 | 39 | 9 | 54 | 39 | 71 | 47 | 90 | 0 |
55 | 0 | 12 | 23 | 25 | 19 | 39 | 19 | 54 | 49 | 71 | 53 | 90 | 0 |
55 | 30 | 12 | 27 | 25 | 27 | 39 | 30 | 54 | 59 | 71 | 59 | 90 | 0 |
56 | 0 | 12 | 31 | 25 | 35 | 39 | 40 | 55 | 9 | 72 | 5 | 90 | 0 |
56 | 30 | 12 | 36 | 25 | 43 | 39 | 50 | 55 | 18 | 72 | 11 | 90 | 0 |
57 | 0 | 12 | 40 | 25 | 50 | 39 | 59 | 55 | 27 | 72 | 17 | 90 | 0 |
57 | 30 | 12 | 44 | 25 | 58 | 40 | 9 | 55 | 36 | 72 | 22 | 90 | 0 |
58 | 0 | 12 | 48 | 26 | 5 | 40 | 18 | 55 | 45 | 72 | 28 | 90 | 0 |
58 | 30 | 12 | 52 | 26 | 13 | 40 | 27 | 55 | 54 | 72 | 33 | 90 | 0 |
59 | 0 | 12 | 56 | 26 | 20 | 40 | 36 | 56 | 2 | 72 | 39 | 90 | 0 |
59 | 30 | 13 | 0 | 26 | 27 | 40 | 45 | 56 | 11 | 72 | 44 | 90 | 0 |
Vertical South Dial.—Let us take again our imaginary transparent sphere QZPA (fig. 4), whose axis PEp is parallel to the earth's axis. Let Z be the zenith, and, consequently, the great circle QZP the [Page 152] meridian. Through E, the centre of the sphere, draw a vertical plane facing south. This will cut the sphere in the great circle ZMA, which, being vertical, will pass through the zenith, and, facing south, will be at right angles to the meridian. Let QMa be the equatorial circle, obtained by drawing a plane through E at right angles to the axis PEp. The lower portion Ep of the axis will be the style, the vertical line EA in the meridian plane will be the XII o'clock line, and the line EM, which is obviously horizontal, since M is the intersection of two great circles ZM, QM, each at right angles to the vertical plane QZP, will be the VI o'clock line. Now, as in the previous problem, divide the equatorial circle into 24 equal arcs of 15° each, beginning at a, viz. ab, bc, &c.,—each quadrant aM, MQ, &c., containing 6,—then through each point of division and through the axis Pp draw a plane cutting the sphere in 24 equidistant great circles. As the sun revolves round the axis the shadow of the axis will successively fall on these circles at intervals of one hour, and if these circles cross the vertical circle ZMA in the points A, B, C, &c., the shadow of the lower portion Ep of the axis will fall on the lines EA, EB, EC, &c., which will therefore be the required hour-lines on the vertical dial, Ep being the style.
Vertical South Dial.—Let's go back to our imaginary transparent sphere QZPA (fig. 4), whose axis PEp is aligned with the earth's axis. Let Z be the zenith, making the great circle QZP the [Page 152] meridian. Through E, the center of the sphere, draw a vertical plane facing south. This will intersect the sphere at the great circle ZMA, which, being vertical, passes through the zenith and, facing south, is at right angles to the meridian. Let QMa be the equatorial circle, created by drawing a plane through E that is perpendicular to the axis PEp. The lower part Ep of the axis will be the style, the vertical line EA in the meridian plane will be the XII o'clock line, and the line EM, which is clearly horizontal since M is where two great circles ZM and QM intersect at right angles to the vertical plane QZP, will be the VI o'clock line. Now, as in the previous problem, divide the equatorial circle into 24 equal arcs of 15° each, starting at a, namely ab, bc, &c.,—each quadrant aM, MQ, &c., containing 6,—then through each division point and through the axis Pp draw a plane cutting the sphere into 24 spaced-out great circles. As the sun moves around the axis, the shadow of the axis will fall on these circles at one-hour intervals, and if these circles intersect the vertical circle ZMA at points A, B, C, &c., the shadow of the lower part Ep of the axis will fall on the lines EA, EB, EC, &c., which will thus be the hour-lines on the vertical dial, with Ep being the style.
![]() |
Fig. 4. |
There is no necessity for going beyond the VI o'clock hour-line on each side of noon; for, in the winter months the sun sets earlier than 6 o'clock, and in the summer months it passes behind the plane of the dial before that time, and is no longer available.
There’s no need to go past the 6 o'clock mark on either side of noon; during the winter months, the sun sets before 6 o'clock, and in the summer months, it drops behind the plane of the dial before that time and isn’t visible anymore.
It remains to show how the angles AEB, AEC, &c., may be calculated.
It still needs to be shown how the angles AEB, AEC, etc., can be calculated.
The spherical triangles pAB, pAC, &c., will give us a simple rule. These triangles are all right-angled at A, the side pA, equal to ZP, is the co-latitude of the place, that is, the difference between the latitude and 90°; and the successive angles ApB, ApC, &c., are 15°, 30°, &c., respectively. Then
The spherical triangles pAB, pAC, etc., will provide us with a straightforward rule. These triangles are all right-angled at A, the side pA, which is equal to ZP, represents the co-latitude of the location, meaning the difference between the latitude and 90°; and the successive angles ApB, ApC, etc., are 15°, 30°, etc., respectively. Then
tan AB = tan 15° sin co-latitude;
tan AB = tan 15° sin co-latitude;
or more simply,
or just,
tan AB = tan 15° cos latitude,
tan AC = tan 30° cos latitude,
&c. &c.
tan AB = tan 15° cos latitude,
tan AC = tan 30° cos latitude,
&c. &c.
and the arcs AB, AC so found are the measure of the angles AEB, AEC, &c., required.
and the arcs AB, AC found are the measurements of the angles AEB, AEC, etc., as needed.
In this ease the angles diminish as the latitudes increase, the opposite result to that of the horizontal dial.
In this case, the angles decrease as the latitudes increase, which is the opposite of what happens with the horizontal dial.
Inclining, Reclining, &c., Dials.—We shall not enter into the calculation of these cases. Our imaginary sphere being, as before supposed, constructed with its centre at the centre of the dial, and all the hour-circles traced upon it, the intersection of these hour-circles with the plane of the dial will determine the hour-lines just as in the previous cases; but the triangles will no longer be right-angled, and the simplicity of the calculation will be lost, the chances of error being greatly increased by the difficulty of drawing the dial plane in its true position on the sphere, since that true position will have to be found from observations which can be only roughly performed.
Inclining, Reclining, &c., Dials.—We won't go into the calculations for these cases. Our imagined sphere, as previously mentioned, is assumed to be centered at the middle of the dial, with all the hour circles marked on it. The intersection of these hour circles with the plane of the dial will create the hour lines just like in the earlier examples; however, the triangles will no longer be right-angled, making the calculations more complicated and increasing the risk of error. This is due to the challenge of accurately positioning the dial plane on the sphere, as this true position will need to be determined from observations that can only be roughly taken.
In all these cases, and in cases where the dial surface is not a plane, and the hour-lines, consequently, are not straight lines, the only safe practical way is to mark rapidly on the dial a few points (one is sufficient when the dial face is plane) of the shadow at the moment when a good watch shows that the hour has arrived, and afterwards connect these points with the centre by a continuous line. Of course the style must have been accurately fixed in its true position before we begin.
In all these situations, and in cases where the dial surface isn’t flat, meaning the hour lines aren’t straight, the safest practical approach is to quickly mark a few points on the dial (one is enough when the dial face is flat) of the shadow at the moment a reliable watch indicates the hour has arrived, and then connect these points to the center with a continuous line. Of course, the style must be accurately positioned in its true spot before we start.
Equatorial Dial.—The name equatorial dial is given to one whose plane is at right angles to the style, and therefore parallel to the equator. It is the simplest of all dials. A circle (fig. 5) divided into 24 equal ares is placed at right angles to the style, and hour divisions are marked upon it. Then if care be taken that the style point accurately to the pole, and that the noon division coincide with the meridian plane, the shadow of the style will fall on the other divisions, each at its proper time. The divisions must be marked on both sides of the dial, because the sun will shine on opposite sides in the summer and in the winter months, changing at each equinox.
Equatorial Dial.—An equatorial dial is one where the plane is perpendicular to the style, making it parallel to the equator. It’s the simplest type of dial. A circle (fig. 5) divided into 24 equal parts is positioned perpendicular to the style, with hour divisions marked on it. If the style's point is accurately aimed at the pole and the noon division aligns with the meridian plane, the shadow of the style will fall on the other divisions at the correct times. The divisions need to be marked on both sides of the dial since the sun will shine on opposite sides during the summer and winter months, switching at each equinox.
To find the Meridian Plane.—We have, so far, assumed the meridian plane to be accurately known; we shall proceed to describe some of the methods by which it may be found.
To find the Meridian Plane.—So far, we've assumed that the meridian plane is accurately known; now we will describe some methods to determine how it can be found.
![]() |
Fig. 5. |
The mariner's compass may be employed as a first rough approximation. It is well known that the needle of the compass, when free to move horizontally, oscillates upon its pivot and settles in a direction termed the magnetic meridian. This does not coincide with the true north and south line, but the difference between them is generally known with tolerable accuracy, and is called the variation of the compass. The variation differs widely at different parts of the surface of the earth, and is not stationary at any particular place, though the change is slow; and there is even a small daily oscillation which takes place about the mean position, but too small to need notice here (see Magnetism, Terrestrial).
The mariner's compass can be used as a basic starting point. It's well known that when the needle of the compass can move freely, it swings on its pivot and aligns itself with a direction called the magnetic meridian. This does not match the true north and south line, but the difference between the two is usually known quite accurately and is referred to as the variation of the compass. The variation varies significantly in different parts of the Earth's surface and isn't fixed at any particular location, although the changes are gradual; there’s even a small daily swing that occurs around the average position, but it's too minor to mention here (see Magnetism, Terrestrial).
With all these elements of uncertainty, it is obvious that the compass can only give a rough approximation to the position of the meridian, but it will serve to fix the style so that only a small further alteration will be necessary when a more perfect determination has been made.
With all these uncertainties, it's clear that the compass can only provide a rough estimate of the meridian's position, but it will help establish the style, so only a minor adjustment will be needed once a more accurate determination is made.
A very simple practical method is the following:—
A very simple practical method is as follows:—
Place a table (fig. 6), or other plane surface, in such a position that it may receive the sun's rays both in the morning and in the afternoon. Then carefully level the surface by means of a spirit-level. This must be done very accurately, and the table in that position made perfectly secure, so that there be no danger of its shifting during the day.
Place a table (fig. 6) or another flat surface in a spot where it will get sunlight in both the morning and afternoon. Then, carefully level the surface using a spirit level. This needs to be done very accurately, and the table must be made completely secure in that position to ensure it doesn’t shift throughout the day.
Next, suspend a plummet SH from a point S, which must be rigidly fixed. The extremity H, where the plummet just meets the surface, should be somewhere near the middle of one end of the table. With H for centre, describe any number of concentric arcs of circles, AB, CD, EF, &c.
Next, hang a plumb bob SH from a fixed point S. The end H, where the plumb bob touches the surface, should be close to the middle of one end of the table. With H as the center, draw several concentric circular arcs, AB, CD, EF, etc.
A bead P, kept in its place by friction, is threaded on the plummet line at some convenient height above H.
A bead P, held in place by friction, is strung on the plummet line at a convenient height above H.
![]() |
Fig. 6. |
Everything being thus prepared, let us follow the shadow of the bead P as it moves along the surface of the table during the day. It will be found to describe a curve ACE ... FDB, approaching the point H as the sun advances towards noon, and receding from it afterwards. (The curve is a conic section—an hyperbola in these regions.) At the moment when it crosses the arc AB, mark the point A; AP is then the direction of the sun, and, as AH is horizontal, the angle PAH is the altitude of the sun. In the afternoon mark the point B where it crosses the same arc; then the angle PBH is the altitude. But the right-angled triangles PHA, PHB are obviously equal; and the sun has therefore the same altitudes at those two instants, the one before, the other after noon. It follows that, if the sun has not changed its declination during the interval, the two positions will be symmetrically placed one on each side of the meridian. Therefore, drawing the chord AB, and bisecting it in M, HM will be the meridian line.
Everything being prepared, let’s follow the path of the bead P as it moves across the table during the day. It will trace a curve ACE ... FDB, getting closer to point H as the sun moves towards noon, and then moving away from it afterward. (This curve is a conic section—a hyperbola in this case.) When it crosses the arc AB, mark point A; AP is now the direction of the sun, and since AH is horizontal, the angle PAH represents the sun’s altitude. In the afternoon, mark point B where it crosses the same arc; now the angle PBH is the altitude. However, the right-angled triangles PHA and PHB are clearly equal; thus, the sun has the same altitudes at those two moments, one before and one after noon. This means that, if the sun has not changed its declination during this time, the two positions will be symmetrically located on either side of the meridian. So, by drawing the chord AB and bisecting it at M, HM will be the meridian line.
Each of the other concentric arcs, CD, EF, &c., will furnish its meridian line. Of course these should all coincide, but if not, the mean of the positions thus found must be taken.
Each of the other concentric arcs, CD, EF, etc., will provide its meridian line. Naturally, these should all align, but if they don’t, the average of the positions found should be used.
The proviso mentioned above, that the sun has not changed its declination, is scarcely ever realized; but the change is slight, and may be neglected, except perhaps about the time of the equinoxes, at the end of March and at the end of September. Throughout the remainder of the year the change of declination is so slow that we may safely neglect it. The most favourable times are at the end of June and at the end of December, when the sun's declination is almost stationary. If the line HM be produced both ways to the edges of the table, then the two points on the ground vertically below those on the edges may be found by a plummet, and, if permanent marks be made there, the meridian plane, which is the vertical plane passing through these two points, will have its position perfectly secured.
The condition mentioned earlier, that the sun hasn’t changed its declination, is rarely noticed; however, the change is minimal and can usually be ignored, except maybe around the equinoxes, at the end of March and at the end of September. For the rest of the year, the change in declination is so gradual that it can safely be overlooked. The best times are at the end of June and at the end of December when the sun's declination is almost stable. If the line HM is extended both ways to the edges of the table, you can find the two points on the ground directly below those on the edges by using a plumb line. If permanent markers are made there, the meridian plane, which is the vertical plane passing through these two points, will be perfectly established.
To place the Style of a Dial in its True Position.—Before giving any other method of finding the meridian plane, we shall complete the construction of the dial, by showing how the style may now be accurately placed in its true position. The angle which the style makes with a hanging plumb-line, being the co-latitude of the place, is known, and the north and south direction is also roughly given by the mariner's compass. The style may therefore be already adjusted approximately—correctly, indeed, as to its inclination—but probably requiring a little horizontal motion east or west. Suspend a fine plumb-line from some point of the style, then the style will be properly adjusted if, at the very instant of noon, its shadow falls exactly on the plumb-line,—or, which is the same thing, if both shadows coincide on the dial.
To Place the Style of a Dial in Its True Position.—Before presenting any other method for finding the meridian plane, let’s finalize the construction of the dial by showing how to accurately position the style. The angle that the style forms with a hanging plumb-line, which represents the co-latitude of the location, is known. The north-south direction can also be roughly determined using a mariner's compass. Thus, the style may already be adjusted to some extent—correct in its angle, but likely needing a slight horizontal adjustment east or west. Hang a fine plumb-line from a point on the style, and the style will be properly positioned if, exactly at noon, its shadow falls directly on the plumb-line—or, similarly, if the shadows align perfectly on the dial.
This instant of noon will be given very simply, by the meridian plane, whose position we have secured by the two permanent marks on the ground. Stretch a cord from the one mark to the other. This will not generally be horizontal, but the cord will be wholly in the meridian plane, and that is the only necessary condition. Next, suspend a plummet over the mark which is nearer to the sun, and, when the shadow of the plumb-line falls on the stretched cord, it is noon. A signal from the observer there to the observer at the dial enables the latter to adjust the style as directed above.
This moment at noon will be determined very simply by the meridian plane, which we've established using two permanent markers on the ground. Stretch a cord between the two markers. This won't usually be horizontal, but the cord will be completely in the meridian plane, and that's the only requirement. Next, hang a plumb line over the marker that's closer to the sun, and when the shadow of the plumb line falls on the stretched cord, it's noon. A signal from the observer at this point to the observer at the dial allows the latter to adjust the gnomon as instructed above.
Other Methods of finding the Meridian Plane.—We have dwelt at some length on these practical operations because they are simple and tolerably accurate, and because they want neither watch, nor sextant, nor telescope—nothing more, in fact, than the careful observation of shadow lines.
Other Methods of Finding the Meridian Plane.—We have spent some time discussing these practical techniques because they are straightforward and fairly accurate, and they don’t require a watch, sextant, or telescope—just the careful observation of shadow lines.
The Pole star, or Ursae Minoris, may also be employed for finding the meridian plane without other apparatus than plumb-lines. This star is now only about 1° 14' from the pole; if therefore a plumb-line be suspended at a few feet from the observer, and if he shift his position till the star is exactly hidden by the line, then the plane through his eye and the plumb-line will never be far from the meridian plane. Twice in the course of the twenty-four hours the planes would be strictly coincident. This would be when the star crosses the meridian above the pole, and again when it crosses it below. If we wished to employ the method of determining the meridian, the times of the stars crossing would have to be calculated from the data in the Nautical Almanac, and a watch would be necessary to know when the instant arrived. The watch need not, however, be very accurate, because the motion of the star is so slow that an error of ten minutes in the time would not give an error of one-eighth of a degree in the azimuth.
The Pole Star, or Ursae Minoris, can also be used to find the meridian plane with nothing more than plumb lines. This star is now only about 1° 14' from the pole; if a plumb line is hung a few feet away from the observer, and they adjust their position until the star is perfectly aligned with the line, then the line of sight from their eye to the plumb line will be close to the meridian plane. This alignment happens exactly twice within twenty-four hours. It occurs when the star crosses the meridian above the pole and again when it crosses below. To use this method for determining the meridian, the times when the star crosses would need to be calculated using data from the Nautical Almanac, and a watch would be necessary to know when those moments occur. However, the watch does not need to be extremely precise, as the star's movement is so slow that a ten-minute error in time would only result in an azimuth error of one-eighth of a degree.
The following accidental circumstance enables us to dispense with both calculation and watch. The right ascension of the star η Ursae Majoris, that star in the tail of the Great Bear which is farthest from the "pointers," happens to differ by a little more than 12 hours from the right ascension of the Pole star. The great circle which joins the two stars passes therefore close to the pole. When the Pole star, at a distance of about 1° 14' from the pole, is crossing the meridian above the pole, the star η Ursae Majoris, whose polar distance is about 40°, has not yet reached the meridian below the pole.
The following accidental situation allows us to skip both calculation and timing. The right ascension of the star η Ursae Majoris, which is the furthest star in the tail of the Great Bear from the "pointers," happens to be slightly more than 12 hours different from the right ascension of the Pole star. The great circle connecting the two stars passes close to the pole. When the Pole star, about 1° 14' away from the pole, is crossing the meridian above the pole, the star η Ursae Majoris, which is about 40° away from the pole, has not yet reached the meridian below the pole.
When η Ursae Majoris reaches the meridian, which will be within half an hour later, the Pole star will have left the meridian; but its slow motion will have carried it only a very little distance away. Now at some instant between these two times—much nearer the latter than the former—the great circle joining the two stars will be exactly vertical; and at this instant, which the observer determines by seeing that the plumb-line hides the two stars simultaneously, neither of the stars is strictly in the meridian; but the deviation from it is so small that it may be neglected, and the plane through the eye and the plumb-line taken for meridian plane.
When η Ursae Majoris hits the meridian, which will be in about half an hour, the Pole star will have moved off the meridian; however, its slow movement will have taken it only a short distance away. Now, at some moment between these two times—much closer to the latter than the former—the great circle connecting the two stars will be perfectly vertical; and at this moment, which the observer notes by seeing that the plumb-line hides both stars at the same time, neither star is exactly on the meridian; but the difference is so small that it can be overlooked, and the plane through the eye and the plumb-line can be considered the meridian plane.
In all these cases it will be convenient, instead of fixing the plane by means of the eye and one fixed plummet, to have a second plummet at a short distance in front of the eye; this second plummet, being suspended so as to allow of lateral shifting, must be moved so as always to be between the eye and the fixed plummet. The meridian plane will be secured by placing two permanent marks on the ground, one under each plummet.
In all these cases, it will be easier, instead of aligning the plane using just your eye and one fixed plumb bob, to use a second plumb bob positioned a short distance in front of your eye. This second plumb bob, which should be hung in a way that allows for sideways adjustment, needs to be moved so that it stays between your eye and the fixed plumb bob. The meridian plane can be established by placing two permanent marks on the ground, one directly under each plumb bob.
This method, by means of the two stars, is only available for the upper transit of Polaris; for, at the lower transit, the other star η Ursae Majoris would pass close to or beyond the zenith, and the observation could not be made. Also the stars will not be visible when the upper transit takes place in the daytime, so that one-half of the year is lost to this method.
This method, using the two stars, is only applicable for the upper transit of Polaris; during the lower transit, the other star η Ursae Majoris would pass close to or beyond the zenith, making the observation impossible. Additionally, the stars won't be visible during the daytime when the upper transit occurs, which means half of the year is not usable for this method.
Neither could it be employed in lower latitudes than 40° N., for there the star would be below the horizon at its lower transit;—we may even say not lower than 45° N., for the star must be at least 5° above the horizon before it becomes distinctly visible.
Neither could it be used in latitudes lower than 40° N., because there the star would be below the horizon at its lowest transit;—we might even say not lower than 45° N., since the star needs to be at least 5° above the horizon before it becomes clearly visible.
There are other pairs of stars which could be similarly employed, but none so convenient as these two, on account of Polaris with its very slow motion being one of the pair.
There are other pairs of stars that could be used in a similar way, but none are as convenient as these two, because one of the pair, Polaris, has very slow motion.
To place the Style in its True Position without previous Determination of the Meridian Plane.—The various methods given above for finding the meridian plane have for ultimate object the determination of the plane, not on its own account, but as an element for fixing the instant of noon, whereby the style may be properly placed.
To put the Style in its Correct Place without deciding the Meridian Plane beforehand.—The different methods mentioned above for locating the meridian plane ultimately aim to identify the plane, not for its own sake, but as a factor for determining the exact moment of noon, so that the style can be accurately positioned.
We shall dispense, therefore, with all this preliminary work if we determine noon by astronomical observation. For this we shall want a good watch, or pocket chronometer, and a sextant or other instrument for taking altitudes. The local time at any moment may be determined in a variety of ways by observation of the celestial bodies. The simplest and most practically useful methods will be found described and investigated in any work on astronomy.
We'll skip all this initial work if we figure out noon through astronomical observation. For this, we'll need a reliable watch or pocket chronometer, and a sextant or another tool for measuring altitudes. You can determine local time at any moment in different ways by observing celestial bodies. The easiest and most useful methods are described and explored in any astronomy book.
For our present purpose a single altitude of the sun taken in the forenoon will be most suitable. At some time in the morning, when the sun is high enough to be free from the mists and uncertain refractions of the horizon—but to ensure accuracy, while the rate of increase of the altitude is still tolerably rapid, and, therefore, not later than 10 o'clock—take an altitude of the sun, an assistant, at the same moment, marking the time shown by the watch. The altitude so observed being properly corrected for refraction, parallax, &c., will, together with the latitude of the place, and the sun's declination, taken from the Nautical Almanac, enable us to calculate the time. This will be the solar or apparent time, that is, the very time we require. Comparing the time so found with the time shown by the watch, we see at once by how much the watch is fast or slow of solar time; we know, therefore, exactly what time the watch must mark when solar noon arrives, and waiting for that instant we can fix the style in its proper position as explained before.
For our current needs, taking a single altitude of the sun in the morning will work best. At some point during the morning, when the sun is high enough to avoid the fog and unclear refractions near the horizon—but to ensure accuracy, while the altitude is still increasing at a decent pace, and definitely not later than 10 o'clock—measure the altitude of the sun, while an assistant records the time shown on the watch. The altitude observed should be correctly adjusted for refraction, parallax, etc., which, along with the location's latitude and the sun's declination from the Nautical Almanac, will allow us to calculate the time. This will give us the solar or apparent time, which is exactly what we need. By comparing this calculated time with the time on the watch, we can immediately see how much the watch is fast or slow compared to solar time, so we know precisely what time the watch should show when solar noon arrives. By waiting for that moment, we can set the style in its proper position as explained earlier.
We can dispense with the sextant and with all calculation and observation if, by means of the pocket chronometer, we bring the time from some observatory where the work is done; and, allowing for the change of longitude, and also for the equation of time, if the time we have brought is clock time, we shall have the exact instant of solar noon as in the previous case.
We can skip the sextant along with all the calculations and observations if we use the pocket chronometer to get the time from an observatory where the work is done. By adjusting for the change in longitude and also for the equation of time, if the time we’ve obtained is clock time, we will know the exact moment of solar noon just like in the earlier case.
In former times the fancy of dialists seems to have run riot in devising elaborate surfaces on which the dial was to be traced. Sometimes the shadow was received on a cone, sometimes on a cylinder, or on a sphere, or on a combination of these. A universal dial was constructed of a figure in the shape of a cross; another universal dial showed the hours by a globe and by several gnomons. These universal dials required adjusting before use, and for this a mariner's compass and a spirit-level were necessary. But it would be tedious and useless to enumerate the various forms designed, and, as a rule, the more complex the less accurate.
In earlier times, dial makers seemed to go wild creating intricate surfaces for their dials. Sometimes the shadow fell on a cone, other times on a cylinder or a sphere, or even a combination of these shapes. A universal dial was made in the shape of a cross; another universal dial displayed the hours with a globe and several gnomons. These universal dials needed to be adjusted before use, requiring a mariner's compass and a spirit level. However, it would be lengthy and pointless to list all the different designs, and generally, the more complicated they were, the less accurate.
Another class of useless dials consisted of those with variable centres. They were drawn on fixed horizontal planes, and each day the style had to be shifted to a new position. Instead of hour-lines they had hour-points; and the style, instead of being parallel to the axis of the earth, might make any chosen angle with the horizon. There was no practical advantage in their use, but rather the reverse; and they can only be considered as furnishing material for new mathematical problems.
Another type of useless dials included those with adjustable centers. They were laid out on stationary horizontal surfaces, and each day the gnomon had to be moved to a new spot. Instead of hour lines, they featured hour points; and the gnomon, rather than aligning with the earth's axis, could be set at any angle with the horizon. There was no practical benefit to using them; in fact, it was quite the opposite. They can only be viewed as providing material for new mathematical challenges.
Portable Dials.—The dials so far described have been fixed dials, for even the fanciful ones to which reference was just now made were to be fixed before using. There were, however, other dials, made generally of a small size, so as to be carried in the pocket; and these, so long as the sun shone, roughly answered the purpose of a watch.
Portable Dials.—The dials mentioned so far have been stationary, since even the imaginative ones just referenced were meant to be set in place before use. However, there were also other dials, typically small enough to fit in a pocket; these could serve the function of a watch as long as the sun was shining.
The description of the portable dial has generally been mixed up with that of the fixed dial, as if it had been merely a special case, and the same principle had been the basis of both; whereas there are essential points of difference between them, besides those which are at once apparent.
The description of the portable dial has often been confused with that of the fixed dial, as if it were just a special case, and that the same principle applied to both; however, there are significant differences between them, in addition to those that are immediately obvious.
In the fixed dial the result depends on the uniform angular motion of the sun round the fixed style; and a small error in the assumed position of the sun, whether due to the imperfection of the instrument, or to some small neglected correction, has only a trifling effect on the time. This is owing to the angular displacement of the sun being so rapid—a quarter of a degree every minute—that for the ordinary affairs of life greater accuracy is not required, as a displacement of a quarter of a degree, or at any rate of one degree, can be readily seen by nearly every person. But with a portable dial this is no longer the case. The uniform angular motion is not now available, because we have no determined fixed plane to which we may refer it. In the new position, to which the observer has gone, the zenith is the only point of the heavens he can at once practically find; and the basis for the determination of the time is the constantly but very irregularly varying zenith distance of the sun.
In the fixed dial, the outcome relies on the uniform angular motion of the sun around the fixed gnomon; even a minor error in the estimated position of the sun, whether from imperfections in the instrument or some small missed correction, has only a slight impact on the time. This is because the sun’s angular displacement is quite fast—a quarter degree every minute—so for everyday purposes, greater precision isn’t necessary, as almost anyone can easily recognize a quarter-degree or, at most, a one-degree shift. However, with a portable dial, this changes. The uniform angular motion isn’t useful anymore because there’s no fixed plane to reference. In the new location where the observer has moved, the zenith is the only point in the sky they can readily identify; thus, the basis for determining the time is the constantly yet very irregularly changing zenith distance of the sun.
At sea the observation of the altitude of a celestial body is the only method available for finding local time; but the perfection which has been attained in the construction of the sextant enables the sailor to reckon on an accuracy of seconds. Certain precautions have, however, to be taken. The observations must not be made within a couple of hours of noon, on account of the slow rate of change at that time, nor too near the horizon, on account of the uncertain refractions there; and the same restrictions must be observed in using a portable dial.
At sea, measuring the altitude of a celestial body is the only way to determine local time; however, the high precision of the sextant allows sailors to achieve accuracy to the second. Some precautions need to be taken, though. Observations shouldn't be made within a couple of hours of noon because of the slow changes during that time, nor too close to the horizon due to unpredictable refractions in that area; the same rules apply when using a portable dial.
To compare roughly the accuracy of the fixed and the portable dials, let us take a mean position in Great Britain, say 54° lat., and a mean declination when the sun is in the equator. It will rise at 6 o'clock, and at noon have an altitude of 36°,—that is, the portable dial will indicate an average change of one-tenth of a degree in each minute, or two and a half times slower than the fixed dial. The vertical motion of the sun increases, however, nearer the horizon, but even there it will be only one-eighth of a degree each minute, or half the rate of the fixed dial, which goes on at nearly the same speed throughout the day.
To roughly compare the accuracy of the fixed and portable dials, let’s consider a central position in Great Britain, around 54° latitude, and a mean declination when the sun is at the equator. It will rise at 6 o'clock and, at noon, have an altitude of 36°—which means the portable dial will show an average change of one-tenth of a degree each minute, or two and a half times slower than the fixed dial. However, the vertical motion of the sun increases as it gets closer to the horizon, yet even then it will only change by one-eighth of a degree each minute, or half the speed of the fixed dial, which maintains a nearly consistent rate throughout the day.
Portable dials are also much more restricted in the range of latitude [Page 154] for which they are available, and they should not be used more than 4 or 5 m. north or south of the place for which they were constructed.
Portable dials are also much more limited in the range of latitude [Page 154] for which they are designed, and they shouldn't be used more than 4 or 5 miles north or south of the location for which they were made.
We shall briefly describe two portable dials which were in actual use.
We will briefly describe two portable dials that were actually used.
![]() |
Fig. 7. |
Dial on a Cylinder.—A hollow cylinder of metal (fig. 7), 4 or 5 in. high, and about an inch in diameter, has a lid which admits of tolerably easy rotation. A hole in the lid receives the style shaped somewhat like a bayonet; and the straight part of the style, which, on account of the two bends, is lower than the lid, projects horizontally out from the cylinder to a distance of 1 or 1½ in. When not in use the style would be taken out and placed inside the cylinder.
Dial on a Cylinder.—A hollow metal cylinder (fig. 7), 4 or 5 inches high and about an inch in diameter, has a lid that can rotate fairly easily. A hole in the lid holds a stylus shaped a bit like a bayonet; the straight part of the stylus, which is lower than the lid due to the two bends, extends horizontally out from the cylinder to a length of 1 or 1.5 inches. When not in use, the stylus can be removed and stored inside the cylinder.
A horizontal circle is traced on the cylinder opposite the projecting style, and this circle is divided into 36 approximately equidistant intervals.[2] These intervals represent spaces of time, and to each division is assigned a date, so that each month has three dates marked as follows:-January 10, 20, 31; February 10, 20, 28; March 10, 20, 31; April 10, 20, 30, and so on,—always the 10th, the 20th, and the last day of each month.
A horizontal circle is drawn on the cylinder opposite the projecting style, and this circle is divided into 36 roughly equal sections. [2] These sections represent intervals of time, and each division is assigned a date, so that each month has three dates marked as follows: January 10, 20, 31; February 10, 20, 28; March 10, 20, 31; April 10, 20, 30; and so on—always the 10th, the 20th, and the last day of each month.
Through each point of division a vertical line parallel to the axis of the cylinder is drawn from top to bottom. Now it will be readily understood that if, upon one of these days, the lid be turned, so as to bring the style exactly opposite the date, and if the dial be then placed on a horizontal table so as to receive sunlight, and turned round bodily until the shadow of the style falls exactly on the vertical line below it, the shadow will terminate at some definite point of this line, the position of which point will depend on the length of the style—that is, the distance of its end from the surface of the cylinder—and on the altitude of the sun at that instant. Suppose that the observations are continued all day, the cylinder being very gradually turned so that the style may always face the sun, and suppose that marks are made on the vertical line to show the extremity of the shadow at each exact hour from sunrise to sunset-these times being taken from a good fixed sun-dial,—then it is obvious that the next year, on the same date, the sun's declination being about the same, and the observer in about the same latitude, the marks made the previous year will serve to tell the time all that day.
Through each division point, a vertical line parallel to the axis of the cylinder is drawn from top to bottom. It’s easy to understand that if, on one of these days, the lid is turned to align the gnomon directly opposite the date, and if the dial is then placed on a flat table to receive sunlight, and rotated until the shadow of the gnomon falls exactly on the vertical line below it, the shadow will end at a specific point on this line. The location of this point will depend on the length of the gnomon—that is, the distance from its tip to the surface of the cylinder—and the height of the sun at that time. If observations are made throughout the day, slowly turning the cylinder so that the gnomon always faces the sun, and if marks are made on the vertical line to indicate the tip of the shadow at each exact hour from sunrise to sunset—these times being taken from a reliable fixed sundial—it becomes clear that the following year, on the same date, with the sun's declination about the same and the observer at a similar latitude, the marks made the previous year will help tell the time all day.
What we have said above was merely to make the principle of the instrument clear, for it is evident that this mode of marking, which would require a whole year's sunshine and hourly observation, cannot be the method employed.
What we've mentioned above was just to clarify the principle of the instrument since it's clear that this way of marking, which would need a whole year of sunshine and constant observation, can't be the method used.
The positions of the marks are, in fact, obtained by calculation. Corresponding to a given date, the declination of the sun is taken from the almanac, and this, together with the latitude of the place and the length of the style, will constitute the necessary data for computing the length of the shadow, that is, the distance of the mark below the style for each successive hour.
The positions of the marks are actually calculated. For a specific date, the sun's declination is taken from the almanac, and this, along with the location's latitude and the length of the gnomon, will provide the needed information to calculate the length of the shadow, meaning the distance of the mark below the gnomon for each hour that passes.
We have assumed above that the declination of the sun is the same at the same date in different years. This is not quite correct, but, if the dates be taken for the second year after leap year, the results will be sufficiently approximate.
We assumed earlier that the sun's declination is the same on the same date in different years. This isn't entirely accurate, but if we take the dates from the second year after a leap year, the results will be close enough.
When all the hour-marks have been placed opposite to their respective dates, then a continuous curve, joining the corresponding hour-points, will serve to find the time for a day intermediate to those set down, the lid being turned till the style occupy a proper position between the two divisions. The horizontality of the surface on which the instrument rests is a very necessary condition, especially in summer, when, the shadow of the style being long, the extreme end will shift rapidly for a small deviation from the vertical, and render the reading uncertain. The dial can also be used by holding it up by a small ring in the top of the lid, and probably the vertically is better ensured in that way.
When all the hour marks have been set against their respective dates, a continuous curve connecting the corresponding hour points will allow you to determine the time for a day between those marked. You should turn the lid until the style is in the right position between the two divisions. It's really important that the surface the instrument sits on is flat, especially in summer, because the shadow of the style can be long, and even a slight tilt from vertical can cause the shadow's end to move quickly, making the reading unreliable. You can also use the dial by holding it up by a small ring on the top of the lid, which likely keeps it more vertical.
Portable Dial on a Card.—This neat and very ingenious dial is attributed by Ozanam to a Jesuit Father, De Saint Rigaud, and probably dates from the early part of the 17th century. Ozanam says that it was sometimes called the capuchin, from some fancied resemblance to a cowl thrown back.
Portable Dial on a Card.—This clever and very inventive dial is credited to Jesuit Father De Saint Rigaud by Ozanam, and it likely originates from the early 17th century. Ozanam mentions that it was sometimes referred to as the capuchin, due to a supposed similarity to a cowl pulled back.
Construction.—Draw a straight line ACB parallel to the top of the card (fig. 8) and another DCE at right angles to it; with C as centre, and any convenient radius CA, describe the semicircle AEB below the horizontal. Divide the whole arc AEB into 12 equal parts at the points r, s, t, &c., and through these points draw perpendiculars to the diameter ACB; these lines will be the hour-lines, viz. the line through r will be the XI ... I line, the line through s the X ... II line, and so on; the hour-line of noon will be the point A itself; by subdivision of the small arcs Ar, rs, st, &c., we may draw the hour-lines corresponding to halves and quarters, but this only where it can be done without confusion.
Construction.—Draw a straight line ACB parallel to the top of the card (fig. 8) and another line DCE at a right angle to it; with point C as the center, and any convenient radius CA, draw the semicircle AEB below the horizontal line. Divide the whole arc AEB into 12 equal sections at the points r, s, t, etc., and from these points, draw perpendicular lines to the diameter ACB; these lines will represent the hour markings, meaning the line through r will be the XI ... I line, the line through s will be the X ... II line, and so on; the hour line for noon will be point A itself. By further dividing the small arcs Ar, rs, st, etc., we can draw hour lines for half and quarter hours, but only where it can be done clearly.
Draw ASD making with AC an angle equal to the latitude of the place, and let it meet EC in D, through which point draw FDG at right angles to AD.
Draw ASD making an angle with AC that matches the latitude of the location, and let it intersect EC at D, then draw FDG from that point at right angles to AD.
![]() |
Fig. 8. |
With centre A, and any convenient radius AS, describe an arc of circle RST, and graduate this arc by marking degree divisions on it, extending from 0° at S to 23½° on each side at R and T. Next determine the points on the straight line FDG where radii drawn from A to the degree divisions on the arc would cross it, and carefully mark these crossings.
With center A and any convenient radius AS, draw an arc of circle RST, and label this arc by marking degree divisions on it, extending from 0° at S to 23½° on each side at R and T. Next, find the points on the straight line FDG where radii drawn from A to the degree divisions on the arc would intersect it, and carefully mark these intersections.
The divisions of RST are to correspond to the sun's declination, south declinations on RS and north declinations on ST. In the other hemisphere of the earth this would be reversed; the north declinations would be on the upper half.
The sections of RST correspond to the sun's declination, with south declinations on RS and north declinations on ST. In the opposite hemisphere of the Earth, this would be flipped; the north declinations would be on the top half.
Now, taking a second year after leap year (because the declinations of that year are about the mean of each set of four years), find the days of the month when the sun has these different declinations, and place these dates, or so many of them as can be shown without confusion, opposite the corresponding marks on FDG. Draw the sun-line at the top of the card parallel to the line ACB; and, near the extremity, to the right, draw any small figure intended to form, as it were, a door of which a b shall be the hinge. Care must be taken that this hinge is exactly at right angles to the sun-line. Make a fine open slit c d right through the card and extending from the hinge to a short distance on the door,—the centre line of this slit coinciding accurately with the sun-line. Now, cut the door completely through the card; except, of course, along the hinge, which, when the card is thick, should be partly cut through at the back, to facilitate the opening. Cut the card right through along the line FDG, and pass a thread carrying a little plummet W and a very small bead P; the bead having sufficient friction with the thread to retain any position when acted on only by its own weight, but sliding easily along the thread when moved by the hand. At the back of the card the thread terminates in a knot to hinder it from being drawn through; or better, because giving more friction and a better hold, it passes through the centre of a small disk of card—a fraction of an inch in diameter—and, by a knot, is made fast at the back of the disk.
Now, after taking a second year following a leap year (since the declinations of that year are about the average of each set of four years), find the days of the month when the sun has these different declinations, and place these dates, or as many of them as can be displayed without confusion, next to the corresponding marks on FDG. Draw the sun-line at the top of the card parallel to the line ACB; and near the end, to the right, draw a small figure meant to represent a door with a hinge at point b. Make sure this hinge is exactly at right angles to the sun-line. Create a fine open slit c d all the way through the card, extending from the hinge to a short distance on the door, with the center line of this slit perfectly aligned with the sun-line. Now, cut the door all the way through the card except along the hinge, which, when the card is thick, should be partially cut through at the back to help with opening it. Cut the card all the way through along the line FDG and pass a thread that carries a small weight W and a very small bead P; the bead should have enough friction with the thread to hold any position when affected only by its own weight but slide easily along the thread when moved by hand. At the back of the card, the thread ends in a knot to prevent it from being pulled through; or better, as it provides more friction and a better hold, it goes through the center of a small disk of card—just a fraction of an inch in diameter—and is secured at the back of the disk by a knot.
To complete the construction,—with the centres F and G, and [Page 155] radii FA and GA, draw the two arcs AY and AZ which will limit the hour-lines; for in an observation the bead will always be found between them. The forenoon and afternoon hours may then be marked as indicated in the figure. The dial does not of itself discriminate between forenoon and afternoon; but extraneous circumstances, as, for instance, whether the sun is rising or falling, will settle that point, except when close to noon, where it will always be uncertain.
To finish the construction—using points F and G, and [Page 155] radii FA and GA, draw the two arcs AY and AZ that will define the hour lines; during an observation, the bead will always be located between them. You can then mark the morning and afternoon hours as shown in the figure. The dial itself doesn’t differentiate between morning and afternoon; however, outside factors, like whether the sun is rising or setting, will determine that, except when it’s close to noon, where it will always be uncertain.
To rectify the dial (using the old expression, which means to prepare the dial for an observation),—open the small door, by turning it about its hinge, till it stands well out in front. Next, set the thread in the line FG opposite the day of the month, and stretching it over the point A, slide the bead P along till it exactly coincides with A.
To adjust the dial (using the old term, which means to prepare the dial for an observation),—open the small door by turning it on its hinge until it extends fully in front. Next, align the thread with the line FG opposite the date, and stretch it over point A, sliding the bead P until it perfectly lines up with A.
![]() |
Fig. 9. |
To find the hour of the day,—hold the dial in a vertical position in such a way that its plane may pass through the sun. The verticality is ensured by seeing that the bead rests against the card without pressing. Now gradually tilt the dial (without altering its vertical plane), until the central line of sunshine, passing through the open slit of the door, just falls along the sun-line. The hour-line against which the bead P then rests indicates the time.
To find the time of day, hold the dial upright so that its surface is aligned with the sun. Make sure it’s upright by checking that the bead touches the card without pushing down. Now slowly tilt the dial (keeping it vertical) until the center of sunlight, coming through the open slit of the door, aligns with the sun-line. The hour line that the bead P rests on indicates the time.
The sun-line drawn above has always, so far as we know, been used as a shadow-line. The upper edge of the rectangular door was the prolongation of the line, and, the door being opened, the dial was gradually tilted until the shadow cast by the upper edge exactly coincided with it. But this shadow tilts the card one-quarter of a degree more than the sun-line, because it is given by that portion of the sun which just appears above the edge, that is, by the upper limb of the sun, which is one-quarter of a degree higher than the centre. Now, even at some distance from noon, the sun will sometimes take a considerable time to rise one-quarter of a degree, and by so much time will the indication of the dial be in error.
The sun-line shown above has always been used as a shadow-line. The top edge of the rectangular door extended the line, and when the door was opened, the dial was gradually tilted until the shadow from the top edge matched it perfectly. However, this shadow tilts the card an extra quarter degree compared to the sun-line because it's created by the part of the sun that just shows above the edge, specifically the upper limb of the sun, which is a quarter degree higher than the center. Even a little before noon, the sun can take some time to rise a quarter degree, which means the indication on the dial will be off by that much time.
The central line of light which comes through the open slit will be free from this error, because it is given by light from the centre of the sun.
The central beam of light coming through the open slit will be free from this error because it comes from the center of the sun.
The card-dial deserves to be looked upon as something more than a mere toy. Its ingenuity and scientific accuracy give it an educational value which is not to be measured by the roughness of the results obtained.
The card-dial should be seen as more than just a toy. Its clever design and scientific precision provide educational value that goes beyond the roughness of the results it produces.
The theory of this instrument is as follows:—Let H (fig. 9) be the point of suspension of the plummet at the time of observation, so that the angle DAH is the north declination of the sun,—P, the bead, resting against the hour-line VX. Join CX, then the angle ACX is the hour-angle from noon given by the bead, and we have to prove that this hour-angle is the correct one corresponding to a north latitude DAC, a north declination DAH and an altitude equal to the angle which the sun-line, or its parallel AC, makes with the horizontal. The angle PHQ will be equal to the altitude, if HQ be drawn parallel to DC, for the pair of lines HQ, HP will be respectively at right angles to the sun-line and the horizontal.
The theory behind this instrument is as follows: Let H (fig. 9) be the point where the plumb line is suspended during observation, so that the angle DAH represents the sun's north declination. P is the bead that rests against the hour-line VX. Join CX, then the angle ACX is the hour-angle measured from noon indicated by the bead, and we need to show that this hour-angle is the correct one corresponding to a north latitude DAC, a north declination DAH, and an altitude equal to the angle the sun-line, or its parallel AC, makes with the horizontal. The angle PHQ will equal the altitude if HQ is drawn parallel to DC, because the lines HQ and HP will be at right angles to the sun-line and the horizontal.
Draw PQ and HM parallel to AC, and let them meet DCE in M and N respectively.
Draw PQ and HM parallel to AC, and let them intersect DCE at M and N, respectively.
Let HP and its equal HA be represented by a. Then the following values will be readily deduced from the figure:—
Let HP and its equal HA be represented by a. Then the following values can be easily obtained from the figure:—
AD = a cos decl. DH = a sin decl. PQ = a sin alt.
AD = a cos decl. DH = a sin decl. PQ = a sin alt.
PN = CV = CX cos ACX = a cos decl. cos lat. cos ACX.
NQ = MH = DH sin MDH = sin decl. sin lat.
And sincePQ = NQ + PN,
And since PQ = NQ + PN,
we have, by simple substitution,
we have, by straightforward substitution,
a sin alt. = a sin decl. sin lat. + a cos del. cos lat. cos ACX; or, dividing by a throughout,
a sin alt. = a sin decl. sin lat. + a cos del. cos lat. cos ACX; or, dividing by a throughout,
which equation determines the hour-angle ACX shown by the bead.
which equation determines the hour angle ACX shown by the bead.
To determine the hour-angle of the sun at the same moment, let fig. 10 represent the celestial sphere, HR the horizon, P the pole, Z the zenith and S the sun.
To find the hour-angle of the sun at the same time, let fig. 10 show the celestial sphere, HR the horizon, P the pole, Z the zenith, and S the sun.
From the spherical triangle PZS, we have
From the spherical triangle PZS, we have
PS = polar distance = 90° - declination,
therefore, by substitution
therefore, by replacing
and ZPS is the hour-angle of the sun.
and ZPS is the hour angle of the sun.
A comparison of the two formulae (1) and (2) shows that the hour-angle given by the bead will be the same as that given by the sun, and proves the theoretical accuracy of the card-dial. Just at sun-rise or at sun-set the amount of refraction slightly exceeds half a degree. If, then, a little cross m (see fig. 8) be made just below the sun-line, at a distance from it which would subtend half a degree at c, the time of sun-set would be found corrected for refraction, if the central line of light were made to fall on cm.
A comparison of the two formulas (1) and (2) shows that the hour angle indicated by the bead matches the one given by the sun, confirming the theoretical accuracy of the card dial. Right at sunrise or sunset, the amount of refraction slightly exceeds half a degree. If a small cross m (see fig. 8) is placed just below the sun line, at a distance from it that would subtend half a degree at c, the time of sunset would be corrected for refraction if the central line of light is made to fall on cm.
![]() |
Fig. 10. |
Literature.—The following list includes the principal writers on dialling whose works have come down, to us, and to these we must refer for descriptions of the various constructions, some simple and direct, others fanciful and intricate, which have been at different times employed: Ptolemy, Analemma, restored by Commandine; Vitruvius, Architecture; Sebastian Münster, Horologiographia; Orontius Fineus, De horologiis solaribus; Mutio Oddi da Urbino, Horologi solari; Dryander, De horologiorum compositione; Conrad Gesner, Pandectae; Andreas Schöner, Gnomonicae; F. Commandine, Horologiorum descriptio; Joan. Bapt. Benedictus, De gnomonum usu; Georgius Schomberg, Exegesis fundamentorum gnomonicorum; Joan. Solomon de Caus, Horologes solaires; Joan. Bapt. Trolta, Praxis horologiorum; Desargues, Manière universelle pour poser l'essieu, &c.; Ath. Kircher, Ars magna lucis et Umbrae; Hallum, Explicatio horologii in horto regio Londini; Joan. Mark, Tractatus horologiorum; Clavius, Gnomonices de horologiis. Also among more modern writers, Deschales, Ozanam, Schottus, Wolfius, Picard, Lahire, Walper; in German, Paterson, Michael, Müller; in English, Foster, Wells, Collins, Leadbetter, Jones, Leybourn, Emerson and Ferguson. See also Hans Löschner, Über Sonnenuhren (2nd ed., Graz, 1906).
Literature.—The following list includes the main authors on dialling whose works have been preserved, and we should refer to these for descriptions of the various designs, some simple and straightforward, others elaborate and complex, that have been used over time: Ptolemy, Analemma, restored by Commandine; Vitruvius, Architecture; Sebastian Münster, Horologiographia; Orontius Fineus, De horologiis solaribus; Mutio Oddi da Urbino, Horologi solari; Dryander, De horologiorum compositione; Conrad Gesner, Pandectae; Andreas Schöner, Gnomonicae; F. Commandine, Horologiorum descriptio; Joan. Bapt. Benedictus, De gnomonum usu; Georgius Schomberg, Exegesis fundamentorum gnomonicorum; Joan. Solomon de Caus, Horologes solaires; Joan. Bapt. Trolta, Praxis horologiorum; Desargues, Manière universelle pour poser l'essieu, &c.; Ath. Kircher, Ars magna lucis et Umbrae; Hallum, Explicatio horologii in horto regio Londini; Joan. Mark, Tractatus horologiorum; Clavius, Gnomonices de horologiis. Also among more modern authors, Deschales, Ozanam, Schottus, Wolfius, Picard, Lahire, Walper; in German, Paterson, Michael, Müller; in English, Foster, Wells, Collins, Leadbetter, Jones, Leybourn, Emerson, and Ferguson. See also Hans Löschner, Über Sonnenuhren (2nd ed., Graz, 1906).
[1] In one of the courts of Queens' College, Cambridge, there is an elaborate sun-dial dating from the end of the 17th or beginning of the 18th century, and around it a series of numbers which make it available as a moon-dial when the moon's age is known.
[1] In one of the courtyards of Queens' College, Cambridge, there's a detailed sun-dial from the late 17th or early 18th century, surrounded by a series of numbers that allow it to function as a moon-dial when the moon's age is known.
[2] Strict equality is not necessary, as the observations made are on the vertical line through each division-point, without reference to the others. It is not even requisite that the divisions should go completely and exactly round the cylinder, although they were always so drawn, and both these conditions were insisted upon in the directions for the construction.
[2] Strict equality isn’t essential because the observations are based on the vertical line at each division point, without considering the others. It’s not even necessary for the divisions to completely and exactly wrap around the cylinder, even though they were always illustrated that way, and both these conditions were emphasized in the construction guidelines.
DIALECT (from Gr. διάλεκτος, conversation, manner of speaking, διαλέγερθαι, to converse), a particular or characteristic manner of speech, and hence any variety of a language. In its widest sense languages which are branches of a common or parent language may be said to be "dialects" of that language; thus Attic, Ionic, Aeolic and Doric are dialects of Greek, though there may never have at any time been a separate language of which they were variations; so the various Romance languages, Italian, French, Spanish, &c., were dialects of Latin. Again, where there have existed side by side, as in England, various branches of a language, such as the languages of the Angles, the Jutes or the Saxons, and the descendant of one particular language, from many causes, has obtained the predominance, the traces of the other languages remain in the "dialects" of the districts where once the original language prevailed. Thus it may be incorrect, from the historical point of view, to say that "dialect" varieties of a language represent degradations of the standard language. A "literary" accepted language, such as modern English, represents the original language spoken in the Midlands, with accretions [Page 156]of Norman, French, and later literary and scientific additions from classical and other sources, while the present-day "dialects" preserve, in inflections, pronunciation and particular words, traces of the original variety of the language not incorporated in the standard language of the country. See the various articles on languages (English, French, &c).
DIALECT (from Gr. dialect, conversation, manner of speaking, διαλέγερθαι, to converse), refers to a specific or distinctive way of speaking, and therefore, it can mean any variation of a language. In its broadest sense, languages that come from a common or parent language can be described as "dialects" of that language; for example, Attic, Ionic, Aeolic, and Doric are dialects of Greek, even though there may never have been a separate language from which they derived; similarly, various Romance languages like Italian, French, Spanish, etc., are dialects of Latin. Furthermore, when different branches of a language coexist, like in England, where the languages of the Angles, Jutes, or Saxons were present, and one language, due to various factors, has become dominant, remnants of the other languages can be found in the "dialects" of the areas where the original language was once spoken. Therefore, it might be historically inaccurate to claim that "dialect" variations of a language are lower forms of the standard language. A "literary" accepted language, such as modern English, represents the original language spoken in the Midlands, incorporating elements from Norman, French, and later literary and scientific contributions from classical and other sources, while today's "dialects" retain in their inflections, pronunciation, and specific words, remnants of the original language that are not present in the country's standard language. See the various articles on languages (English, French, etc.).
DIALECTIC, or Dialectics (from Gr. διάλεκτος, discourse, debate; ἡ διαλεκτική, sc. τέχνη, the art of debate), a logical term, generally used in common parlance in a contemptuous sense for verbal or purely abstract disputation devoid of practical value. According to Aristotle, Zeno of Elea "invented" dialectic, the art of disputation by question and answer, while Plato developed it metaphysically in connexion with his doctrine of "Ideas" as the art of analysing ideas in themselves and in relation to the ultimate idea of the Good (Repub. vii.). The special function of the so-called "Socratic dialectic" was to show the inadequacy of popular beliefs. Aristotle himself used "dialectic," as opposed to "science," for that department of mental activity which examines the presuppositions lying at the back of all the particular sciences. Each particular science has its own subject matter and special principles (ἴδιαι ἀρχαί) on which the superstructure of its special discoveries is based. The Aristotelian dialectic, however, deals with the universal laws (κοιναὶ ἀρχαί) of reasoning, which can be applied to the particular arguments of all the sciences. The sciences, for example, all seek to define their own species; dialectic, on the other hand, sets forth the conditions which all definitions must satisfy whatever their subject matter. Again, the sciences all seek to educe general laws; dialectic investigates the nature of such laws, and the kind and degree of necessity to which they can attain. To this general subject matter Aristotle gives the name "Topics" (τόποι, loci, communes loci). "Dialectic" in this sense is the equivalent of "logic." Aristotle also uses the term for the science of probable reasoning as opposed to demonstrative reasoning (άποδεικτική). The Stoics divided λογική (logic) into rhetoric and dialectic, and from their time till the end of the middle ages dialectic was either synonymous with, or a part of, logic.
DIALECTIC, or Debate (from Greek dialect, discourse, debate; dialectic, sc. art, the art of debate), is a logical term that is often used in everyday language in a negative way to describe meaningless verbal or purely abstract arguments with no practical value. According to Aristotle, Zeno of Elea "invented" dialectic, which is the art of debating through question and answer, while Plato expanded it metaphysically in connection with his theory of "Ideas" as the art of analyzing ideas both independently and in relation to the ultimate concept of the Good (Repub. vii.). The specific role of what is known as "Socratic dialectic" was to demonstrate the shortcomings of common beliefs. Aristotle himself used "dialectic" in contrast to "science" to refer to that branch of mental activity that examines the assumptions underlying all the specific sciences. Each specific science has its own subject matter and unique principles (private principles) which form the foundation of its distinct discoveries. However, Aristotelian dialectic addresses the universal principles (shared principles) of reasoning, which can be applied to the particular arguments of all the sciences. For instance, all sciences strive to define their own categories; dialectic instead outlines the conditions that all definitions must meet, regardless of their subject matter. Similarly, while all sciences aim to extract general laws, dialectic explores the nature of these laws and the type and degree of necessity they can achieve. Aristotle refers to this broader subject matter as "Topics" (places, loci, communes loci). In this context, "Dialectic" is synonymous with "logic." Aristotle also employs the term to describe the science of probable reasoning as opposed to demonstrative reasoning (evidential). The Stoics categorized logic (logic) into rhetoric and dialectic, and from their time until the end of the Middle Ages, dialectic was regarded as either equivalent to, or a component of, logic.
In modern philosophy the word has received certain special meanings. In Kantian terminology Dialektik is the name of that portion of the Kritik d. reinen Vernunft in which Kant discusses the impossibility of applying to "things-in-themselves" the principles which are found to govern phenomena. In the system of Hegel the word resumes its original Socratic sense, as the name of that intellectual process whereby the inadequacy of popular conceptions is exposed. Throughout its history, therefore, "dialectic" has been connected with that which is remote from, or alien to, unsystematic thought, with the a priori, or transcendental, rather than with the facts of common experience and material things.
In modern philosophy, the word has taken on some specific meanings. In Kant's terminology, Dialektik refers to the section of the Kritik d. reinen Vernunft where Kant talks about the impossibility of applying the principles that govern phenomena to "things-in-themselves." In Hegel's system, the word returns to its original Socratic meaning, describing the intellectual process that reveals the shortcomings of popular ideas. Throughout its history, therefore, "dialectic" has been associated with concepts that are distant from or unrelated to unsystematic thought, focusing more on the a priori or transcendental rather than on everyday experiences and material things.
DIALLAGE, an important mineral of the pyroxene group, distinguished by its thin foliated structure and bronzy lustre. The chemical composition is the same as diopside, Ca Mg (SiO3)2, but it sometimes contains the molecules (Mg, Fe") (Al, Fe"')2 SiO6 and Na Fe"' (SiO3)2, in addition, when it approaches to augite in composition. Diallage is in fact an altered form of these varieties of pyroxene; the particular kind of alteration which they have undergone being known as "schillerization." This, as described by Prof. J. W. Judd, consists in the development of a fine lamellar structure or parting due to secondary twinning and the separation of secondary products along these and other planes of chemical weakness ("solution planes") in the crystal. The secondary products consist of mixtures of various hydrated oxides—opal, göthite, limonite, &c—and appear as microscopic inclusions filling or partly filling cavities, which have definite outlines with respect to the enclosing crystal and are known as negative crystals. It is to the reflection and interference of light from these minute inclusions that the peculiar bronzy sheen or "schiller" of the mineral is due. The most pronounced lamination is that parallel to the orthopinacoid; another, less distinct, is parallel to the basal plane, and a third parallel to the plane of symmetry; these planes of secondary parting are in addition to the ordinary prismatic cleavage of all pyroxenes. Frequently the material is interlaminated with a rhombic pyroxene (bronzite) or with an amphibole (smaragdite or uralite), the latter being an alteration product of the diallage.
DIALLAGE, an important mineral from the pyroxene group, is characterized by its thin, layered structure and bronzy shine. Its chemical composition is the same as diopside, Ca Mg (SiO3)2, but it sometimes includes the molecules (Mg, Fe") (Al, Fe"')2 SiO6 and Na Fe"' (SiO3)2, especially when it is similar to augite in composition. Diallage is essentially an altered form of these pyroxene varieties; the specific change it has undergone is known as "schillerization." As explained by Prof. J. W. Judd, this involves the development of a fine layered structure or parting caused by secondary twinning and the separation of secondary products along these and other weak chemical planes ("solution planes") within the crystal. The secondary products are mixtures of various hydrated oxides—such as opal, göthite, limonite, etc.—and appear as tiny inclusions that fill or partially fill cavities with defined outlines, known as negative crystals. The distinct bronzy sheen or "schiller" of the mineral results from the reflection and interference of light from these tiny inclusions. The most noticeable layering aligns with the orthopinacoid, while another, less prominent layer aligns with the basal plane, and a third aligns with the plane of symmetry; these secondary parting planes are in addition to the typical prismatic cleavage of all pyroxenes. Often, the material is interlayered with a rhombic pyroxene (bronzite) or an amphibole (smaragdite or uralite), the latter being an altered product of the diallage.
Diallage is usually greyish-green or dark green, sometimes brown, in colour, and has a pearly to metallic lustre or schiller on the laminated surfaces. The hardness is 4, and the specific gravity 3.2 to 3.35. It does not occur in distinct crystals with definite outlines, but only as lamellar masses in deep-seated igneous rocks, principally gabbro, of which it is an essential constituent. It occurs also in some peridotites and serpentines, and rarely in volcanic rocks (basalt) and crystalline schists. Masses of considerable size are found in the coarse-grained gabbros of the Island of Skye, Le Prese near Bornio in Valtellina, Lombardy, Prato near Florence, and many other localities.
Diallage is typically grayish-green or dark green, and sometimes brown. It has a pearly to metallic shine or schiller on the layered surfaces. The hardness is 4, and the specific gravity ranges from 3.2 to 3.35. It doesn’t form distinct crystals with clear outlines, but appears as layered masses in deep-seated igneous rocks, mainly gabbro, where it is a key component. It can also be found in some peridotites and serpentines, and rarely in volcanic rocks like basalt and crystalline schists. Large masses are found in the coarse-grained gabbros on the Isle of Skye, Le Prese near Bornio in Valtellina, Lombardy, Prato near Florence, and several other locations.
The name diallage, from diallage, "difference," in allusion to the dissimilar cleavages and planes of fracture, as originally applied by R. J. Haüy in 1801, included other minerals (the orthorhombic pyroxenes hypersthene, bronzite and bastite, and the smaragdite variety of hornblende) which exhibit the same peculiarities of schiller structure; it is now limited to the monoclinic pyroxenes with this structure. Like the minerals of similar appearance just mentioned, it is sometimes cut and polished for ornamental purposes.
The name diallage, derived from the word "difference," refers to the different cleavage patterns and fracture planes, a term first used by R. J. Haüy in 1801. Originally, it included other minerals like the orthorhombic pyroxenes hypersthene, bronzite, and bastite, as well as the smaragdite variety of hornblende, all of which show similar schiller structure features. Now, it specifically refers to the monoclinic pyroxenes that have this structure. Like the similar-looking minerals mentioned earlier, it is sometimes cut and polished for decorative purposes.
DIALOGUE, properly the conversation between two or more persons, reported in writing, a form of literature invented by the Greeks for purposes of rhetorical entertainment and instruction, and scarcely modified since the days of its invention. A dialogue is in reality a little drama without a theatre, and with scarcely any change of scene. It should be illuminated with those qualities which La Fontaine applauded in the dialogue of Plato, namely vivacity, fidelity of tone, and accuracy in the opposition of opinions. It has always been a favourite with those writers who have something to censure or to impart, but who love to stand outside the pulpit, and to encourage others to pursue a train of thought which the author does not seem to do more than indicate. The dialogue is so spontaneous a mode of expressing and noting down the undulations of human thought that it almost escapes analysis. All that is recorded, in any literature, of what pretend to be the actual words spoken by living or imaginary people is of the nature of dialogue. One branch of letters, the drama, is entirely founded upon it. But in its technical sense the word is used to describe what the Greek philosophers invented, and what the noblest of them lifted to the extreme refinement of an art.
DIALOGUE, which is basically a conversation between two or more people, is recorded in writing and is a form of literature that the Greeks created for entertainment and education, remaining largely unchanged since its inception. A dialogue is essentially a small drama without a stage and with hardly any change of setting. It should be filled with the qualities that La Fontaine praised in Plato's dialogues, such as liveliness, a faithful tone, and precise contrasting opinions. It has always been popular with writers who have something to critique or share but prefer to stay away from preaching, instead encouraging others to think along lines that the author merely suggests. Dialogue is such a natural way to express and capture the flow of human thought that it nearly escapes analysis. Everything recorded in any literature that claims to represent the actual words spoken by real or fictional characters can be considered dialogue. One branch of literature, drama, is entirely based on it. However, in its technical sense, the term refers to what the Greek philosophers created, which the greatest among them elevated to a refined art form.
The systematic use of dialogue as an independent literary form is commonly supposed to have been introduced by Plato, whose earliest experiment in it is believed to survive in the Laches. The Platonic dialogue, however, was founded on the mime, which had been cultivated half a century earlier by the Sicilian poets, Sophron and Epicharmus. The works of these writers, which Plato admired and imitated, are lost, but it is believed that they were little plays, usually with only two performers. The recently discovered mimes of Herodas (Herondas) give us some idea of their scope. Plato further simplified the form, and reduced it to pure argumentative conversation, while leaving intact the amusing element of character-drawing. He must have begun this about the year 405, and by 399 he had brought the dialogue to its highest perfection, especially in the cycle directly inspired by the death of Socrates. All his philosophical writings, except the Apology, are cast in this form. As the greatest of all masters of Greek prose style, Plato lifted his favourite instrument, the dialogue, to its highest splendour, and to this day he remains by far its most distinguished proficient. In the 2nd century a.d. Lucian of Samosata achieved a brilliant success with his ironic dialogues "Of the Gods," "Of the Dead," "Of Love" and "Of the Courtesans." In some of them he attacks superstition and philosophical error with the sharpness of his wit; in others he merely paints scenes of modern life. The title of Lucian's most famous collection was borrowed in the 17th century by two French writers of eminence, each of whom prepared Dialogues des morts. These were Fontenelle (1683) and Fénelon (1712). In English non-dramatic literature the dialogue had not been extensively [Page 157] employed until Berkeley used it, in 1713, for his Platonic treatise, Hylas and Philonous. Landor's Imaginary Conversations (1821-1828) is the most famous example of it in the 19th century, although the dialogues of Sir Arthur Helps claim attention. In Germany, Wieland adopted this form for several important satirical works published between 1780 and 1799. In Spanish literature, the Dialogues of Valdés (1528) and those on Painting (1633) by Vincenzo Carducci, are celebrated. In Italian, collections of dialogues, on the model of Plato, have been composed by Torquato Tasso (1586), by Galileo (1632), by Galiani (1770), by Leopardi (1825), and by a host of lesser writers. In our own day, the French have returned to the original application of dialogue, and the inventions of "Gyp," of Henri Lavedan and of others, in which a mundane anecdote is wittily and maliciously told in conversation, would probably present a close analogy to the lost mimes of the early Sicilian poets, if we could meet with them. This kind of dialogue has been employed in English, and with conspicuous cleverness by Mr Anstey Guthrie, but it does not seem so easily appreciated by English as by French readers.
The consistent use of dialogue as a standalone literary form is generally thought to have been introduced by Plato, whose earliest attempt is believed to be in the Laches. However, the Platonic dialogue was based on the mime, which had been developed about fifty years earlier by the Sicilian poets, Sophron and Epicharmus. The works of these writers, which Plato admired and emulated, are now lost, but they are thought to have been short plays, typically with just two actors. The recently discovered mimes of Herodas (Herondas) provide some insight into their range. Plato further refined the form, turning it into pure argumentative conversation while maintaining the entertaining aspect of character portrayal. He likely began this around the year 405, and by 399, he had perfected the dialogue, particularly in the series inspired directly by Socrates' death. All his philosophical writings, except for the Apology, are in this format. As the greatest master of Greek prose style, Plato elevated his favored medium, the dialogue, to its utmost brilliance, and he remains the most distinguished practitioner to this day. In the 2nd century A.D., Lucian of Samosata achieved notable success with his ironic dialogues "Of the Gods," "Of the Dead," "Of Love," and "Of the Courtesans." In some of these, he critiques superstition and philosophical mistakes with sharp wit, while in others, he depicts scenes from contemporary life. The title of Lucian's most famous collection was used in the 17th century by two prominent French writers, who each produced Dialogues des morts: Fontenelle (1683) and Fénelon (1712). In English literature, dialogue had not been widely used until Berkeley utilized it in 1713 for his Platonic work, Hylas and Philonous. Landor's Imaginary Conversations (1821-1828) stands as the most notable example of this form in the 19th century, although the dialogues of Sir Arthur Helps also deserve attention. In Germany, Wieland adopted this style for several important satirical works published between 1780 and 1799. In Spanish literature, the Dialogues of Valdés (1528) and Carducci's dialogues on Painting (1633) are well-known. In Italy, collections of dialogues following Plato's model have been created by Torquato Tasso (1586), Galileo (1632), Galiani (1770), Leopardi (1825), and many lesser-known writers. In today's world, the French have returned to the original purpose of dialogue, and the works of "Gyp," Henri Lavedan, and others, where everyday stories are wittily and maliciously conveyed in conversation, likely bear a close resemblance to the lost mimes of the early Sicilian poets, if we could encounter them. This type of dialogue has also been effectively used in English by Mr. Anstey Guthrie, though it doesn’t seem as readily appreciated by English readers as it is by French ones.
DIALYSIS (from the Gr. διά, through, λύειν, to loosen), in chemistry, a process invented by Thomas Graham for separating colloidal and crystalline substances. He found that solutions could be divided into two classes according to their action upon a porous diaphragm such as parchment. If a solution, say of salt, be placed in a drum provided with a parchment bottom, termed a "dialyser," and the drum and its contents placed in a larger vessel of water, the salt will pass through the membrane. If the salt solution be replaced by one of glue, gelatin or gum, it will be found that the membrane is impermeable to these solutes. To the first class Graham gave the name "crystalloids," and to the second "colloids." This method is particularly effective in the preparation of silicic acid. By adding hydrochloric acid to a dilute solution of an alkaline silicate, no precipitate will fall and the solution will contain hydrochloric acid, an alkaline chloride, and silicic acid. If the solution be transferred to a dialyser, the hydrochloric acid and alkaline chloride will pass through the parchment, while the silicic acid will be retained.
DIALYSIS (from the Greek διά, meaning through, and λύειν, meaning to loosen) is a process in chemistry created by Thomas Graham for separating colloidal and crystalline substances. He discovered that solutions could be sorted into two categories based on how they interact with a porous barrier like parchment. If you place a solution, such as salt, in a container with a parchment bottom, called a "dialyser," and then put the drum in a larger water-filled vessel, the salt will pass through the membrane. However, if you replace the salt solution with one containing glue, gelatin, or gum, you’ll find that the membrane blocks these substances. Graham named the first group "crystalloids" and the second "colloids." This technique is especially effective for preparing silicic acid. By adding hydrochloric acid to a diluted solution of alkaline silicate, no precipitate will form, and the solution will contain hydrochloric acid, an alkaline chloride, and silicic acid. When this solution is transferred to a dialyser, the hydrochloric acid and alkaline chloride will pass through the parchment, while the silicic acid will be left behind.
DIAMAGNETISM. Substances which, like iron, are attracted by the pole of an ordinary magnet are commonly spoken of as magnetic, all others being regarded as non-magnetic. It was noticed by A. C. Becquerel in 1827 that a number of so-called non-magnetic bodies, such as wood and gum lac, were influenced by a very powerful magnet, and he appears to have formed the opinion that the influence was of the same nature as that exerted upon iron, though much feebler, and that all matter was more or less magnetic. Faraday showed in 1845 (Experimental Researches, vol. iii.) that while practically all natural substances are indeed acted upon by a sufficiently strong magnetic pole, it is only a comparatively small number that are attracted like iron, the great majority being repelled. Bodies of the latter class were termed by Faraday diamagnetics. The strongest diamagnetic substance known is bismuth, its susceptibility being—0.000014, and its permeability 0.9998. The diamagnetic quality of this metal can be detected by means of a good permanent magnet, and its repulsion by a magnetic pole had been more than once recognized before the date of Faraday's experiments. The metals gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, antimony and mercury are all diamagnetic; tin, aluminium and platinum are attracted by a very strong pole. (See Magnetism.)
DIAMAGNETISM. Substances like iron that are attracted to the pole of a regular magnet are commonly referred to as magnetic, while all others are considered non-magnetic. In 1827, A. C. Becquerel observed that several so-called non-magnetic materials, such as wood and gum lac, were affected by a very strong magnet. He seemed to believe that this effect was similar to what happens with iron, albeit much weaker, and that all matter has some level of magnetism. In 1845, Faraday demonstrated (Experimental Researches, vol. iii.) that although nearly all natural substances do respond to a sufficiently strong magnetic pole, only a relatively small number are attracted like iron, with most being repelled. Faraday called the latter group diamagnetics. The strongest known diamagnetic substance is bismuth, with a susceptibility of -0.000014 and permeability of 0.9998. The diamagnetic nature of this metal can be detected using a good permanent magnet, and its repulsion from a magnetic pole had been recognized several times before Faraday's experiments. The metals gold, silver, copper, lead, zinc, antimony, and mercury are all diamagnetic; while tin, aluminum, and platinum are attracted to a very strong pole. (See Magnetism.)
DIAMANTE, FRA, Italian fresco painter, was born at Prato about 1400. He was a Carmelite friar, a member of the Florentine community of that order, and was the friend and assistant of Filippo Lippi. The Carmelite convent of Prato which he adorned with many works in fresco has been suppressed, and the buildings have been altered to a degree involving the destruction of the paintings. He was the principal assistant of Fra Filippo in the grand frescoes which may still be seen at the east end of the cathedral of Prato. In the midst of the work he was recalled to Florence by his conventual superior, and a minute of proceedings of the commune of Prato is still extant, in which it is determined to petition the metropolitan of Florence to obtain his return to Prato,—a proof that his share in the work was so important that his recall involved the suspension of it. Subsequently he assisted Fra Filippo in the execution of the frescoes still to be seen in the cathedral of Spoleto, which Fra Diamante completed in 1470 after his master's death in 1469. Fra Filippo left a son ten years old to the care of Diamante, who, having received 200 ducats from the commune of Spoleto, as the balance due for the work done in the cathedral, returned with the child to Florence, and, as Vasari says, bought land for himself with the money, giving but a small portion to the child. The accusation of wrong-doing, however, would depend upon the share of the work executed by Fra Diamante, and the terms of his agreement with Fra Filippo. Fra Diamante must have been nearly seventy when he completed the frescoes at Spoleto, but the exact year of his death is not known.
DIAMANTE, FRA, an Italian fresco painter, was born in Prato around 1400. He was a Carmelite friar and a member of the Florentine community of that order, and he was the friend and assistant of Filippo Lippi. The Carmelite convent in Prato, where he created many frescoes, has been closed down, and the buildings altered to the extent that the paintings were destroyed. He was the main assistant of Fra Filippo in the impressive frescoes that can still be seen at the east end of the cathedral in Prato. In the middle of the project, he was called back to Florence by his superiors, and there is still a record from the commune of Prato that shows they decided to ask the metropolitan of Florence to bring him back to Prato—a sign that his role in the work was so crucial that his departure halted the project. Later on, he helped Fra Filippo with the frescoes that are still visible in the cathedral of Spoleto, which Fra Diamante finished in 1470 after his master's death in 1469. Fra Filippo left behind a ten-year-old son for Diamante to care for, who, after receiving 200 ducats from the commune of Spoleto as payment for the work in the cathedral, returned to Florence with the child. According to Vasari, he used the money to buy land for himself, giving only a small amount to the child. The claims of wrongdoing would depend on the portion of the work done by Fra Diamante and the terms of his agreement with Fra Filippo. Fra Diamante must have been nearly seventy when he completed the frescoes in Spoleto, but the exact year of his death is unknown.
DIAMANTE, JUAN BAUTISTA (1640?-1684?), Spanish dramatist, was born at Castillo about 1640, entered the army, and began writing for the stage in 1657. He became a knight of Santiago in 1660; the date of his death is unknown, but no reference to him as a living author occurs after 1684. Like many other Spanish dramatists of his time, Diamante is deficient in originality, and his style is riddled with affectations; La Desgraciada Raquel, which was long considered to be his best play, is really Mira de Amescua's Judía de Toledo under another title; and the earliest of Diamante's surviving pieces, El Honrador de su padre (1658), is little more than a free translation of Corneille's Cid. Diamante is historically interesting as the introducer of French dramatic methods into Spain.
DIAMANTE, JUAN BAUTISTA (1640?-1684?), was a Spanish playwright born in Castillo around 1640. He joined the army and started writing for the stage in 1657. He was made a knight of Santiago in 1660; the exact date of his death is unknown, but no references to him as a living author appear after 1684. Like many other Spanish playwrights of his time, Diamante lacks originality, and his style is filled with pretensions. La Desgraciada Raquel, which was considered his best play for a long time, is essentially Mira de Amescua's Judía de Toledo under a different title; and the earliest of his surviving works, El Honrador de su padre (1658), is mostly a loose translation of Corneille's Cid. Diamante is historically significant for introducing French dramatic techniques into Spain.
DIAMANTINA (formerly called Tejuco), a mining town of the state of Minas Geraes, Brazil, in the N.E. part of the state, 3710 ft. above sea-level. Pop. (1890) 17,980. Diamantina is built partly on a steep hillside overlooking a small tributary of the Rio Jequitinhonha (where diamond-washing was once carried on), and partly on the level plain above. The town is roughly but substantially built, with broad streets and large squares. It is the seat of a bishopric, with an episcopal seminary, and has many churches. Its public buildings are inconspicuous; they include a theatre, military barracks, hospitals, a lunatic asylum and a secondary school. There are several small manufactures, including cotton-weaving, and diamond-cutting is carried on. The surrounding region, lying on the eastern slopes of one of the lateral ranges of the Serra do Espinhaço, is rough and barren, but rich in minerals, principally gold and diamonds. Diamantina is the commercial centre of an extensive region, and has long been noted for its wealth. The date of the discovery of diamonds, upon which its wealth and importance chiefly depend, is uncertain, but the official announcement was made in 1729, and in the following year the mines were declared crown property, with a crown reservation, known as the "forbidden district," 42 leagues in circumference and 8 to 16 leagues in diameter. Gold-mining was forbidden within its limits and diamond-washing was placed under severe restrictions. There are no trustworthy returns of the value of the output, but in 1849 the total was estimated up to that date at 300,000,000 francs (see Diamond). The present name of the town was assumed (instead of Tejuco) in 1838, when it was made a cidade.
DIAMANTINA (formerly known as Tejuco) is a mining town in the northeastern part of the state of Minas Gerais, Brazil, located at an elevation of 3,710 feet above sea level. As of 1890, its population was 17,980. Diamantina is built partly on a steep hillside that overlooks a small tributary of the Rio Jequitinhonha, where diamond washing was once performed, and partly on the level plain above. The town has a rough but sturdy construction, featuring wide streets and large squares. It serves as the seat of a bishopric, complete with an episcopal seminary, and is home to many churches. The public buildings, while not particularly impressive, include a theater, military barracks, hospitals, a mental asylum, and a secondary school. There are several small industries, including cotton weaving, and diamond cutting takes place as well. The surrounding area, situated on the eastern slopes of one of the lateral ranges of the Serra do Espinhaço, is rugged and barren, yet rich in minerals, primarily gold and diamonds. Diamantina acts as the commercial hub for an extensive region and has been known for its wealth for a long time. The exact date of the discovery of diamonds, which is the basis of its wealth and significance, is unclear, but the official announcement was made in 1729. The following year, the mines were declared crown property, establishing a crown reservation known as the "forbidden district," which spans 42 leagues in circumference and varies from 8 to 16 leagues in diameter. Gold mining was prohibited within this area, and diamond washing faced strict regulations. Although there are no reliable records of the total value produced, in 1849, it was estimated to be around 300,000,000 francs (see Diamond). The town adopted its current name in 1838 when it was designated a cidade.
DIAMANTINO, a small town of the state of Matto Grosso, Brazil, near the Diamantino river, about 6 m. above its junction with the Paraguay, in 14° 24′ 33″ S., 56° 8′ 30″ W. Pop. (1890) of the municipality 2147, mostly Indians. It stands in a broken sterile region 1837 ft. above sea-level and at the foot of the great Matto Grosso plateau. The first mining settlement dates from 1730, when gold was found in the vicinity. On the discovery of diamonds in 1746 the settlement drew a large population and for a time was very prosperous. The mines failed to meet expectations, however, and the population has steadily declined. Ipecacuanha and vanilla beans are now the principal articles of export.
DIAMANTINO, a small town in the state of Mato Grosso, Brazil, located near the Diamantino River, about 6 miles above where it meets the Paraguay River, at 14° 24′ 33″ S., 56° 8′ 30″ W. The population in 1890 was 2,147, mostly Indigenous people. It sits in a rugged, barren area, 1,837 feet above sea level, at the base of the large Mato Grosso plateau. The first mining settlement started in 1730 when gold was discovered nearby. When diamonds were found in 1746, the settlement attracted a large population and thrived for a while. However, the mines didn't live up to expectations, and the population has been steadily declining. Ipecacuanha and vanilla beans are now the main exports.
DIAMETER (from the Gr. διά, through, μέτρον, measure), in geometry, a line passing through the centre of a circle or conic section and terminated by the curve; the "principal diameters" of the ellipse and hyperbola coincide with the "axes" and are at ...
DIAMETER (from the Greek διά, meaning through, and measure, meaning measure), in geometry, is a line that goes through the center of a circle or conic section and ends at the curve; the "principal diameters" of the ellipse and hyperbola line up with the "axes" and are at ...
(Continued in volume 8, slice 4, page 158.)
(Continued in volume 8, slice 4, page 158.)
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!